JP6668751B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side of a game board in which the game ball can flow down, and an entrance port or the like in which the game ball can enter is provided in the game area. When the game ball enters the entrance, a bonus such as paying out a prize ball to the player, establishing a lottery condition, and performing a lottery to determine whether or not a privilege game is started is granted. A known configuration is known. In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a normal electric accessory, a variable device, and the like for changing a ball entrance into a state where a game ball easily enters and a state where it is difficult to enter the ball are arranged. As such a gaming machine, there has been known a game machine in which a device such as a camera is provided in a game area to capture an image of a ball entrance and the like, and the image is displayed on a liquid crystal display device.

JP 2012-284 A

  However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

Gaming machine of the present invention to achieve this object, a firing means capable of launching a game ball toward the playfield, a ball entrance means playing ball capable ball entrance flowing down the game area, predetermined and update means for repeatedly updating the determined value in the range of, based on the game ball to the ball entrance unit has ball entrance, the determination value acquisition means for acquiring the determination value obtained by the judgment value acquiring means run the determination on the basis of the decision value, and a specific discrimination result and determine by means for determining when the determination value is a specific determination value, the determination result determine another result of the identification by the determine by means Based on the fact that, the effect execution means for executing a specific effect, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, has, in the gaming area, entering-spheres Installed image information of the game ball for ball entrance to stage possible acquisition position, the image information and the image information acquiring means capable of acquiring at predetermined time intervals the image information of the game balls, obtained by the image information acquisition means Display means for displaying a game ball display mode based on the display information , display control means for displaying the game ball display mode on the display means, and the image information obtained by the image information obtaining means. anda storage unit that identifiably stores time information, wherein the display control unit, the pre-Symbol demonstration execution unit during a period in which the specific effect is running, but for displaying the game balls display mode Ah is, the game balls display mode, among the image information stored in the storage means for a predetermined period of time the ball entrance of game ball into the entering-sphere unit that triggered the said specific effect is executed Before The images corresponding to the plurality of pieces of image information acquired in the first period up to the timing of entering the ball are displayed in such a manner as to be continuously displayed over a second period longer than the first period. The display control means, during a period in which the game ball display mode is displayed, after a plurality of numbers are dynamically displayed in one direction, one of the plurality of numbers is positioned at a predetermined position. The display means displays a dynamic display mode that is stopped and displayed, and a suggestion display mode that suggests that the number 1 is a number corresponding to the specific determination value. At the timing when an image corresponding to the image information obtained at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry means is displayed, and in the dynamic display mode, the number 1 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position. Timing and Ru Der what to display to match.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , a firing means capable of firing a game ball toward the game area, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a repetition determination within a predetermined range and updating means for updating the value, based on the game ball to the ball entrance unit has ball entrance, the determination value acquisition means for acquiring the determination value, based on said judgment value obtained by said judgment value acquiring means Te perform the discrimination, and determine by means for determining that a particular judgment result when the judgment value is a specific determination value, based on the determine another result of its determine by means becomes the specific determination result Te has a demonstration execution means for executing a specific effect, in the case where the specific effect has been executed by the demonstration execution unit, and benefits game execution means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, a game area in, the game of ball entrance to the entering sphere means Installed image information of the possible acquisition position, and the image information acquiring means capable of acquiring at predetermined time intervals the image information of the game balls, game ball display mode based on the image information acquired by the image information acquisition means Is displayed, display control means for displaying the game ball display mode on the display means, and the image information obtained by the image information obtaining means stores the obtained time information in an identifiable manner. anda storage unit that is, the display control means, the pre-Symbol demonstration execution unit during a period in which the specific effect is running state, and are not for displaying the game balls display mode, the game balls display In the aspect, of the image information stored in the storage unit, a predetermined period of time before the timing of the entry of the game ball into the entry unit, which triggered the execution of the specific effect, may be applied to the entry ball. Thailand Images corresponding to the plurality of pieces of image information acquired in the first period up to the first period are displayed in such a manner as to be continuously displayed over a second period longer than the first period. The display control means may be configured such that, during a period in which the game ball display mode is displayed, after a plurality of numbers are dynamically displayed in one direction, one of the plurality of numbers is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position. And a suggestion display mode that suggests that the number 1 corresponds to the specific determination value on the display means. In the game ball display mode, The timing at which an image corresponding to the image information acquired at the timing of entering the ball entry means is displayed, and the timing at which the number 1 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the dynamic display mode. Match and display Ru shall Der.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a roller member. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit along line XXc-XXc in FIG. 20 (b). It is a front view of the up-down displacement unit in the 1st position. (A) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in the XXII section of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. (A) to (c) are partial enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 23A, and FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. FIG. 23C is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a decoration member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a decoration member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the rotation unit, (b) is a front view of the rotation unit as viewed in the XXIXb direction of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is a XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29 (a). It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit in a line. (A) is a top view of an intermediate member, (b) is sectional drawing of the intermediate member in the XXXb-XXXb line of FIG. 30 (a). (A) is a front view of a front cover, and (b) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the front cover taken along the line XXXXb-XXXXIb in FIG. 31 (a). 32A is a top view of the reflector, and FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflector taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. (A) is a top view of the rotating unit, and (b) of FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of (a). (A) and (b) are the elements on larger scale sectional drawing of the rotation unit in XXXIV part of FIG.33 (b). (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation unit. (A) And (b) is a top view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of a center frame, (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). 39A is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39A, and FIG. 39B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 39A. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a rotation unit and a center frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution device. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 43. (A) is a sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVa-XLVa in FIG. 43, (b) is a sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVb-XLVb in (a) of FIG. 45, and (c) is a diagram of FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVc-XLVc of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVd-XLVd of FIG. (A) is a sectional view of the sorting device, and (b) is a sectional view of the sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit taken along line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. 49 (b). (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of a vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution device. 52A is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and FIG. 52B is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52B. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. (A) is a front view of the sorting device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line LVb-LVb in (a) of FIG. 55, and (c) is a diagram of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVc-LVc line of b). It is sectional drawing of the center frame 600 as a modification. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the operation of the rotation unit in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the lighting aspect by the rotation unit in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of eight hold effects in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the special press effect of eight hold | maintenance effects in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the sub display area when eight hold | maintenance effects in the 1st control example are performed. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the sub display area when eight hold | maintenance effects in the 1st control example are performed. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in the 1st example of control. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol big hit random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the big hit type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random number table per normal symbol in 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the first control example. It is. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a non-normal table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a press-down notice selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the back switching table in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special rear switching table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous announcement lottery table in the first control example. FIG. 8C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation scenario table in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the effect upper limit frequency table in the 1st control example. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation execution determination process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 change start process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 change start process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a time setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a press-time control process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special alert sound setting processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the press effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a touch sensor control process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a rotation display operation setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a lighting setting update process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which showed this command judging processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command receiving process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit related command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a special back setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pre-reading effect selection processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing an ending command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a pending ball count command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice command process performed. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing an error command process to be performed. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating various image setting processes executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically operation | movement of the rotation unit in the modification of a 1st control example. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device according to a modification of the first control example. It is a flow chart which showed rotation display operation setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modification of the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lighting start process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the modification of a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lighting setting update processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the reel effect performed during the big hit game in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the reel effect performed during the big hit game in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning information storage area when the continuous short-reach effect is performed in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in case the continuous short reach production | presentation in the 2nd example of control is performed. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM of a main control device in a second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a short reel effect selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a long reel effect selection table. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in a second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the reel effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command processing 2 performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the opening effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a special back setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (A) is a flowchart showing reel effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the transition effect command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the giving effect command processing performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the second control example. It is the mimetic diagram which showed typically the production mode of the suspension notice production performed by MPU in a display control device in the 3rd example of control. It is the mimetic diagram which showed typically the production mode of the suspension notice production performed by MPU in a display control device in the 3rd example of control. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the suspension notice execution determination table in the 3rd example of control. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the work RAM of the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command receiving process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the holding | maintenance notice setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command reception process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 3rd example of control. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern command process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a suspension notice command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process 3 shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of back D shift performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the back D completion performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 3rd example of control. 13 is a flowchart illustrating various image setting processes 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the modification of the rotation unit typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the modification of the rotation unit typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the modification of the rotation unit typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the continuous short reach effect in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display mode of the continuous short reach effect in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display mode of the continuous short reach effect in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning continuous short reach effect setting processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous short-reach effect setting process for disconnection performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the reservation notice effect in the 1st modification of a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the special reservation notice effect in the 2nd modification of a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the special reservation notice effect in the 2nd modification of a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the reel effect in the 1st modification of a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the modification of the rotation unit typically. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram of an image captured by the first channel camera, (b) is a schematic diagram of an image captured by the through camera, and (c) is an image of the image captured by the first entrance camera. It is a schematic diagram, (d) is a schematic diagram of the captured image of the second entrance camera, and (e) is a schematic diagram of the captured image of the special winning opening camera. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the 5th control example. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in the 5th example of control. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit random number table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the fifth control example. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the big hit fluctuation pattern table in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern (for normal) in the 5th control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram for the variation (probability change) in the 5th control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern table. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram showing, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the regularly shot image storage area. FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a display control device in a fifth control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power on in 5th control example. (A) is an explanatory view explaining the back A in the fifth control example, and (b) is an explanatory view explaining the back B in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in the 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in the 5th control example. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a fifth control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 5 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 5 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process 5 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation process 5 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 5 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating NMI interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 5 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 5 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fifth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which showed abnormal winning processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which showed starting opening winning a prize abnormal processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a through passage abnormality process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which showed the special winning opening winning a prize abnormal processing 5 which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit related process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. 15 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a photographing process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a fifth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a fifth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing 5 to be performed. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a fifth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process 5 performed. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a shooting command process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command process 5 for a display performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 5th control example. 15 is a flowchart showing an opening command process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process 5 performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 5th control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the unauthorized command processing 5 performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 5th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process performed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing an error command process 5 to be executed. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ball link effect update processing 5 performed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st ball interlocking effect update process 5 performed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd ball interlocking effect update processing 5 performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 5th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process 5. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a fifth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a fifth control example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a display regular shooting process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a modification of the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in a modification of the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in a modification of the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in a modification of the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in a modification of the fifth control example.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, ball entrances 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 4 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 incorporates a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and is provided with a window part 5c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an upper surface open, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  The front door 5 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 5c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination units 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. At the upper left of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general insert. The ball entrance 63, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, the distribution device 700, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is formed by the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with a thin plate material, and is formed so that various structures provided on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by a player. The general entrance 63, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like. Although details will be described later, a first entrance 64 into which a ball can enter and a right second entrance 640r are provided inside the distribution device 700. The ball that has entered the opening 710a is sorted by the sorting device 700 to either the first ball inlet 64 or the right second ball inlet 640r (see FIG. 43).

  The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is provided inside the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear sides. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and vibrates. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B determine whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r. It is configured to be used properly. Specifically, when the ball has won the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the ball is in the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance. When the player wins the mouth 640r, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. In addition to indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probable jackpot (jackpot A, C) or a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot (jackpot B) by a lighting state, indicating the number of reserved balls by a lighting state, A seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when one of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r has a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot (big hit A), a 15R normal large hit (big hit B), and a 2R probability variable hit (big hit C) are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” (jackpot A) is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, and “2R probability variable jackpot” (jackpot C) is This is a probability-variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high-probability state after two rounds of jackpots. On the other hand, the “15R normal jackpot” (jackpot B) shifts to the low probability state after the maximum round number of the 15 round jackpots, and is in the time saving state during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). That's a jackpot.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the winning probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. 640 refers to a game state in which a ball is likely to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable changes and during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and a longer time than in normal times Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit. At least one of the number of times to perform the change may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one time are not determined. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the gaming area, a plurality of general entrances 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is triggered by a winning (starting winning) of one of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r. Triggered by a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in, and passing of a ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second symbol.

  A center frame 600 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 600.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large-sized 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “O”), the electric accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to the predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  Note that the second entrance 640 can be increased during the probability change or during the working hours by increasing the probability of hitting during the probability changing or the working hours, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. If the hemisphere is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on both sides of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured to allow a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls fired on the game board to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins (enters) through the opening 710a to the sorting device 700, the entered ball is assigned to either the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. Can be When a ball wins (enters) the first entrance port 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Due to this, a jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. When the ball wins the right second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, as in the case of the right second entrance 640r. When the second entrance switch is turned on, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a jackpot lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

  On the other hand, below the distribution device 700 in front view, a second ball entrance 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins at the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r also becomes one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. ing. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640, and Although the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640r is configured to be the same, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins is different from the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second right inlet 640r, for example, a ball wins at the first inlet 64. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the right second entrance 640r may be configured to be five.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily win the second entrance 640 can be created during probable change or during working hours, as compared with normal times.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640, so that the ball basically enters the opening 710a. When the ball enters and is distributed to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, a jackpot lottery is executed.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, by passing the ball through the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since it is in a state where it is easy to win, in addition to being distributed to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, the ball that entered the opening 710a is also distributed to the second entrance 640. A jackpot lottery associated with entering the ball becomes easier to execute. Therefore, the chance of the jackpot lottery increases during the normal game, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to any one of the first entry port 64, the second entry port 640, and the right second entry port 640r becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variation). After the time has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a large symbol stop symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the large jackpot. , A jackpot occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the sorting device 700 when viewed from the front. For example, it may be to the left of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 640r is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first exit 71. You. The first out port 71 is provided below the distribution device 700.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main controller 110, a display controller 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a touch sensor 290, an RTC 292, a firing sensor 293, a rotation unit 500 (including a drive motor 457 and an LED 532), The frame button 22 and the like are connected respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the time measured by the RTC 292 configured by a known real-time clock, and when a specific time zone (00 minutes to 3/3 minutes every hour) is reached, the time is measured. During the band, a back image change command including information for changing the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to a special stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. While the special stage is set, the stage is not changed even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). By changing to a special stage at a specific time, it is possible to simultaneously change to a special stage at a specific time in a hall or the like where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed side by side. A display effect with a sense of unity can be executed.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, power outage signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the displacement members 430 disposed on both left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions. In FIG. 8, displacement members disposed on both left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are shown. The state in which the members 430 have been respectively displaced to the overhang positions is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the rear case 300, a vertical displacement unit 400 is provided above and a light emitting decoration is provided below. Units 800 are provided, respectively.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. One side (front side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 301a as viewed from the front is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 formed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, a displacement member 430 and a decorative member disposed displaceably on the rear base 420. 450, and a projecting position in which the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 are retracted above the rear case 300 and a projecting portion that projects to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case (that is, the third symbol display device 81). Position (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the rotation unit 500 is provided on the decoration member 450, and the rotation unit 500 is rotated, and the LED of the irradiation unit 530 provided on the rotation unit 500 emits light. And symbols can be displayed. Details of such a structure will be described later.

  The light-emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light-emitting device 820 disposed on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 821 disposed inside the light-emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to be illuminated), an effect by light emission is performed. The details will be described later.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 9 to 47, the detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the distribution device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14, the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 having a substantially L shape in a front view, a rear base 420 overlapped on the rear side of the front base 410, and a front side of the front base 410. , A displacement member 430 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and connected to one end of the displacement member 430 in the up and down direction (up and down in FIG. 9) with the displacement of the displacement member 430. Direction), a front cover 460 disposed in front of one end of the front base 410, and a decoration member disposed in a gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. A guide rod P1 for guiding the sliding of the decorative member 450, a side wall member 470 provided at the left and right ends of the decorative member 450 to regulate the displacement of the decorative member 450, and a front surface of the front base 410. A rotation regulating member 480 which is disposed are formed mainly includes.

  In the vertical displacement unit 400, all members except for the decorative member 450 are arranged in a symmetrical pair, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair of opposed members. Further, the detailed description of the members arranged in a pair describes only the members arranged on the left side when viewed from the front (the left side in FIG. 9), and the members arranged on the right side (the right side in FIG. 9) when viewed from the front include The same reference numerals are given to the members on the left side as viewed from the front, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The front base 410 is formed of a substantially L-shaped plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has a first piece 410X forming a long side of the substantially L shape and a first piece 410X forming a short side of the substantially L shape. It is mainly provided with two pieces 410Y.

  The first piece 410X is arranged so that its extending direction is parallel to the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 9). Further, the first piece 410X has a standing portion 412 erected on the front side of an outer end portion (left end portion) in the left-right direction, an upper concave groove 413 recessed in an arcuate cross section at an upper portion, and a cross section at a lower portion. And a lower concave groove 414 formed in an arc shape.

  The upright portion 412 is a wall that abuts on a sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 to be described later and regulates the rearward displacement of the decorative member 450, and extends from an upper portion to a lower portion of the left edge of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

  The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are grooves into which a guide rod P1 described later is internally fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are formed such that axes formed in a semi-circular cross section are located on the same straight line, and the lower concave groove 414 extends from the upper end of the upper concave groove 413. Is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted in the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

  The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 projecting to the rear side, and a shaft supporting portion 416 projecting in a cylindrical shape to the rear side. It is formed mainly in preparation.

  The opening 411 is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 is inserted into the back side of the front base 410, and a transmission gear fitted to the shaft of the drive motor 441. The inner diameter is formed larger than the outer shape of 442. Thus, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410, and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 through the opening 411. As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be disposed by inserting the opening 411, so that the shaft of the drive motor 441 can be This can be performed more easily than when the drive motor 441 is arranged on the front base 410 while being inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 arranged between the opposed sides of the transmission gear 443, and the number of steps for replacing parts is reduced. be able to. Further, in this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 can be securely fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441, the reliability at the time of component replacement can be improved.

  The engaging portion 415 is a protrusion for locking one end of a torsion spring SP1 described later, and protrudes from the back side of the second piece 410Y, and its protruding tip is bent to the center in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400. It is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. Accordingly, the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 around the axis can be restricted by the protruding portion toward the rear side, and the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the rear side can be restricted by the bent portion at the tip.

  The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and has one end fitted to the back side of the front base 410.

  The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400, and is disposed on the front base 410 as described above, and is a transmission gear 442 disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420. , 443.

  As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear whose shaft hole is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441, and is provided in mesh with the transmission gear 443.

  The transmission gear 443 is a gear that is rotatably disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with its shaft hole fitted inside the projection 417 of the front base 410, and as described above, The gear 442 is arranged in mesh with the gear 442. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442.

  In addition, the transmission gear 443 includes a protrusion 443a that protrudes from a rear side surface. The protrusion 443a is a rod member formed of a metal material and formed in a columnar shape, and is disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the transmission gear 443. Therefore, when the driving force is applied to the driving motor 441 to rotate the transmission gear 443 as described above, the projection 443a is displaced in an arc shape about the axis of the transmission gear 443.

  The rear base 420 is a plate member formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410, and includes an upright portion 421 that stands upright on the outer edge.

  The erected portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the back base 420 facing each other, and the erected distance is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the combined displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443. It is set to have a large size, and is disposed in a state where the front end face is in contact with the rear side of the front base 410. As a result, a gap for disposing the transmission gears 442 and 443 and the later-described displacement member 430 can be formed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 facing each other.

  The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape whose outer edge portion protrudes rearward. Further, the displacement member 430 has a through hole 433 formed in the bent portion in a circular shape in the front-rear direction, a decoration-side sliding hole 432 formed in one side of the long side in the front-rear direction, and a short side side. It mainly includes a drive-side sliding hole 431 formed through the other side in the front-rear direction, and a displacement-side engaging portion 434 protruding from a protruding portion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side.

  The through hole 433 is a hole into which the shaft support 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support 416. Therefore, after the through-hole 433 is inserted into the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410, the front base 410 and the rear base 420 are combined, so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410. Can be arranged.

  The drive-side sliding hole 431 is a long hole into which the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width in the short direction is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection 443a. The drive-side sliding hole 431 has a longitudinal direction formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the short side of the displacement member 430, and as described above, the transmission gear 443 causes the driving force of the drive motor 441 to move. When the rotation of the transmission gear 443 is performed, the projection 443 a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the driving-side sliding hole 431 with the displacement, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 about the through hole 433. That is, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be displaced around the through hole 433.

  The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is a long hole that is provided in a decoration member 450 to be described later and through which a columnar supporting portion 452a is inserted, and whose width in the short direction is the outer diameter of the supporting portion 452a. It is formed larger than. The decoration-side sliding hole 432 has a longitudinal direction formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the long side of the displacement member 430. As described above, when the displacement member 430 is rotated about the through-hole 433, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 has an arc-shaped displacement locus about the through-hole 433.

  The displacement-side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end of the torsion spring SP1 described later, and is formed to protrude from an inner peripheral surface of an outer edge portion provided on the rear side of the displacement member 430. In addition, the displacement-side engaging portion 434 is formed on a side surface inside the bend of the displacement member 430 that is bent into a substantially L shape in a front view. Accordingly, the other end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434 inside the displacement member 430 on the back side.

  The torsion spring SP1 has its torsion portion disposed around the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) of the displacement member 430, and rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430 (vertical displacement unit). One end of the displacement member 430 that constitutes the right side of the front view 400 is applied to the engaging portion 415 of the front base 410, and the other end is a displacement member. 430 are engaged with the displacement side engagement portions 434, respectively. As a result, the displacement member 430 rotates counterclockwise around the axis of the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) with respect to the front base 410 (the displacement member 430 configuring the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 in front view rotates clockwise). )).

  As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member interposed between a pair of opposing vertical displacement units 400 configured as a pair of left and right sides, and has a front base whose size in the left-right direction is symmetrically disposed. It is set to be the same as the distance between the outer ends in the left-right direction of 410.

  The decorative member 450 is formed in a U-shape as viewed from the front with its lower side open, and includes a front base 452 constituting a central portion thereof, a sliding portion 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452, and a front base. It is formed mainly including a back base 453 that covers the back of the 452 and a rotation unit 500 that is rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 452.

  The front base 452 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section in which upper and lower end faces are bent to the back side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a protruding from the rear side, an engagement portion 452b protruding from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side, and a contact surface 452h formed smoothly on the front side at both ends in the left-right direction. And an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

  As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed in a cylindrical rod-like body. As a result, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441, and when the decoration side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 433, the displacement member 430 is inserted into the decoration side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452a is displaced with the displacement of the decoration-side sliding hole 432. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the support portion 452a.

  The engagement portion 452b is a projection to which the other end of the urging spring SP2 described later is engaged, and is formed in a hook shape from the front side of both ends of the front base 452.

  The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that is in contact with a roller 492a of the regulating unit 490 described later, and is formed on a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that is inclined downward from the front side to the rear side at the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, it is possible to easily bring a regulation unit 490 described later and the decorative member 450 into contact with each other. The detailed description of the contact between the regulating unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be described later.

  The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section extending in the up-down direction, and is provided so as to be connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452. In addition, the sliding portion 451 includes a through hole 451a that opens in the vertical direction. The through hole 451a is an opening through which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

  Accordingly, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441 and the decorative member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of the displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 provided at both ends of the front base 452. Be regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide rod P1. That is, the decoration member 450 can be slid in the vertical direction by the application of the driving force from the driving motor 441.

  The rear base 453 is a plate member that is covered on the rear side of the front base 452 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and is formed to have substantially the same outer size as the central portion of the front base 452 when viewed from the front. Thus, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably disposed in the internal space between the front base 452 and the rear base 453. A drive motor 457 that outputs a driving force for rotation and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 is attached to the back surface of the back base 453. The details of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be described later.

  The front cover 460 is a member that is disposed to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410 and covers the front of the first piece 410X, and is substantially similar to the outer shape of the first piece 410X when viewed from the front. It is formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 is provided with an upright wall 461 erected from the outer edge to the back side, and is formed in a box-like body having an open back side.

  The upright wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 protruding upward from a side surface forming the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 protruding downward from a side surface forming the lower side.

  The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper concave groove 413 of the front base 410, and has a concave groove 462a which is formed in a semicircular shape on the back side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower groove 414 of the front base 410, and has a concave groove 463a formed in a semicircular arc on the back side.

  The concave grooves 462a and 463a are grooves in which the guide rod P1 is internally fitted, and are concavely formed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Also, the grooves 462a and 463a are formed such that the axes provided in the semicircular arc are formed on the same straight line, and the distance between the upper end of the groove 462a and the lower end of the groove 463a is opposite. It is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted in the concave grooves 462a and 463a.

  Therefore, when the front cover 460 is disposed in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P can be sandwiched between the upper concave grooves 413 and 462a and the lower concave grooves 414 and 463a. As a result, the guide rod P1 can be disposed on the front base 410 so as not to fall off. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 into which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held so as not to fall off the front base 410.

  Also, the distance between the front wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the outer side in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the front-rear facing portion of the standing portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410. Is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction, and the left and right outer ends of the sliding portion 451 are arranged between the sliding members 451. Thereby, as described above, when the decoration member 450 is displaced in the up-down direction, it is possible to suppress the decoration member 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

  The side wall members 470 are members disposed at both ends on the center side in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and are formed of a substantially L-shaped plate-like body bent rearward in a side view. Further, a wall surface bent outward in the left-right direction is formed on the front end surface of the side wall member 470, and a regulating unit 490 described later is attached to the wall surface.

  Further, the side wall member 470 is provided with a pattern on the side surface on the center side in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400 so that the player can use the center frame 86 ( The pattern of the side wall member 470 is disposed so as to be visible through a central opening of the center member (see FIG. 2). Thereby, the vertical displacement unit 400 (for example, the front cover 460 or the like) disposed outside the side wall member 470 in the left-right direction can be made invisible to the player.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has an annular roller 481 provided with a shaft in the front-rear direction on the back side so as to be rotatable. In addition, the rotation restricting member 480 has an outer shape that is substantially half the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 in a front view, and is provided with a predetermined gap in front of the front base 410.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is a member that returns a rotation unit 500 described later to an initial position, and can define an initial position of the rotation unit 500 by abutting the roller 481 and the upper surface base 510.

  The urging spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 and urges the decorative member 450 upward. One end is engaged with the engaging portion 418 of the front base 410, and the other. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412b of the decorative member 450. Thus, the decorative member 450 is constantly urged upward with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position by a displacement described later, the decoration member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. Further, the biasing spring SP2 is bent along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419 at the center. Thereby, the length of the urging spring SP2 can be secured, and the urging force can be prevented from being excessively increased.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 15 to 17A are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 15A shows a state in which the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position, and FIG. FIG. 17A corresponds to the state of being disposed at the lowered position.

  15B corresponds to FIG. 15A, FIG. 16B corresponds to FIG. 16A, and FIG. 17B corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. . 15 (b), 16 (b) and 17 (b) show a state in which the rear base 420 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in a state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a “second position”), the displacement member 430 is one of them. The side (the long side where the decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed) is swung up, and the decoration member 450 is positioned at the uppermost position. The support portion 452 a of the decoration member 450 is located inside the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radially outer end from the axis of the through hole 433.

  In this state, the rotation direction of one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially the same as the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. Matches. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead center). Is formed). Accordingly, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through-hole 433, and the displacement member 430 can be prevented from being rotationally displaced by the weight of the decoration member 450 connected to the displacement member 430.

  15A and 15B, the pair of drive motors 441 are respectively driven to rotate, and when each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 causes the displacement member 430 to rotate. The right and left displacement members 430 are respectively pushed down by sliding in the drive side sliding holes 431.

  Accordingly, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated around the axis of the through hole 433 as the rotation center, and the decoration member 450 is displaced downward as shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). In this state, when the transmission gears 443 are further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b). As shown, the decorative member 450 is arranged at a lowered position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a “first position”).

  As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are formed on one side thereof (the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed). (Short side) is lowered, so that the decorative member 450 is located at the lowest position and protrudes to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). .

  In this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the lowered position), the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the through-hole 433 is formed. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 abuts on the radially outer end side. Thus, the weight of the decorative member 450 can apply a force displacing in the gravitational direction and a force in the direction from the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 to the center portion on the support portion 452a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decoration member 450 from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 of the decoration member 450 described below.

  Further, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the shorter side on which the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) substantially coincides with the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead center). Is formed). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate with the through hole 433 as an axis, and when the decoration member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 described later, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the rattling. Displacement of the member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress lptp that the decoration member 450 rattles.

  In addition, regulation units 490 are arranged in front of both ends of decorative member 450. Thereby, the displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-back direction can be regulated. The detailed description of the regulation unit 490 will be described later.

  Next, the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulating unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. 20A is a side view of the regulation unit 490, FIG. 20B is a rear view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 20C is a view taken along line XXc-XXc in FIG. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit 490.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulating unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape having an open back side, a roller member 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and a case member 491. And an outer edge member 493 disposed on an open (open side) outer edge.

  The case member 491 includes a protruding portion 491a protruding from the front side surface, a notch portion 491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both left and right side surfaces, and a bulging rear surface from the inner side surface facing the opening. Bulging portion 491c.

  The protruding portion 491a is a projection for fastening the case member 491 to the above-described side wall member 470. A fastening hole is formed in the front side, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole from the front side via the side wall member 470. By doing so, the regulating unit 490 can be disposed on the side wall member 470.

  The cutout portions 491b are formed by vertically cutting two semicircular cutouts on both lateral sides of the case member 491 in the left-right direction. The cutout portion 491b is a cutout for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 therein, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492.

  The bulging portion 491c is formed to bulge from below the center in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 20C) of the side surface (the rear surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491. The bulging portion 491c has a predetermined gap between the bulging portion 491c and the roller 492a of the roller member 492.

  The roller member 492 includes a roller 492a formed from an elastic member into an annular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a shaft 492b inserted into the roller 492a, and both sides of the roller 492a supported by the shaft 492b. And a pair of retaining rings E1 externally fitted to the shaft portion 492b outside the collar 492c.

  The shaft portion 492b is a member that is inserted into the inner periphery of the roller 492a, is formed in a columnar shape substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the roller 492a, and has an axial dimension between the lateral sides of the case member 491 in the left-right direction. Is set to be larger than the width dimension. In addition, concave portions 492b1 that are recessed in the axial direction are formed at both axial ends of the shaft portion 492b. The concave portion 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and has an outer diameter in the axial direction smaller than an inner diameter of a retaining ring E1 described later.

  The collar 492c is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, is formed in a substantially stepped shape in cross section, and includes a small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and a large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 having an outer diameter larger than the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1. Further, the inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2) is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, and the shaft portion 492b can be inserted therein.

  The small-diameter tube portion 492c1 is a portion that is fitted inside the notch portion 491b of the case member 491, and as described above, the outer diameter of the small-diameter tube portion 492c1 is larger than the inner diameter of the notch portion 491b of the case member 491. Is done.

  The large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a member for regulating displacement in the left-right direction when the roller member 492 is disposed on the case member 491, and the outer diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a notch of the case member 491. It is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. The distance between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 492c2 provided at both axial ends of the roller 492a is larger than the distance between the opposing left and right side surfaces inside the opening of the case member 491. Are also formed smaller.

  The retaining ring E1 is an E-ring (E-shaped retaining ring), and is fitted around the concave portion 492b1 with the opening portion widened in the concave portion 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b. That is, the inner diameter of the inner circumference of the retaining ring E1 is set substantially equal to the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the concave portion 492b1 on one end side of the shaft portion 492b, the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is attached to one collar 492c from the other end (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted). ) Is inserted through the shaft 492b. Next, after the roller 492a is inserted through the shaft portion 492b from the other end, the shaft portion of the one collar 492c is oriented with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 facing one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is fitted). 492b. Thereafter, one retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the concave portion 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

  As a result, the displacement of the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c supported by the shaft portion 492b between the pair of retaining rings E1 is restricted by the retaining ring E1. As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c can be prevented from coming off the shaft portion 492b.

  The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 491. The outer edge member 493 has an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the opening of the case member 491 in a rear view. On the side surface on the front side (the case member 491 side) of the outer edge member 493, an upright portion 493a that stands upright on the front side is formed around the inner edge portion.

  The upright portion 493a is provided with a recessed portion 493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recess 493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch 491b of the case member 491. Therefore, the roller member 492 can be disposed on the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b and the concave portion 493a1 of the case member 491.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c arranged at both axial ends of the roller member 492 are vertically arranged in the notch portion 491b of the case member 491 so as to pivotally support the collars 492c. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 with the upright portion 493a side facing the front side (facing the case member 491 side). Thus, the roller member 492 is rotatably disposed with respect to the case member 491, and can be prevented from dropping from the case member 491.

  Next, an operation of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 at the first position. FIG. 22A is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the XXII section of FIG. 21. FIG. 22B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along the line XXIIb-XXIIb in FIG. . In FIG. 22A, the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by broken lines.

  FIGS. 23A to 23C are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24A is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 23B, and FIG. 24C is a sectional view taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement unit 400. FIGS. 23A to 23C show the transition state of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the decorative member 450 is located below. In this case, as described above, both ends of the decorative member 450 are located on the back side of the regulating unit 490.

  In this case, when the decoration member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotation unit 500 described later is rotated, the decoration member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, there is an arrangement in which an engaging means for engaging the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 is provided to prevent rattling. The engaging means is provided on one of the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and is urged by the urging means. The engaging member is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member. An engaging member disposed on the other side of the front base 410, and using the displacement (displacement toward the first position) of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410, the engaging member resists the urging force of the urging means. When the decorative member 450 is located at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the front base 410 is regulated by the engagement of the engaging means, and the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member is pressed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but also when the engagement state of the engagement means is released (the decoration member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position), the urging force of the urging means is opposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is displaced with respect to the front base 410 increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the restricting unit 490, the relative displacement of the front base 410 is restricted. Thus, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the direction of displacement when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 are set substantially parallel, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position. In addition, since the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 can be rotated with the displacement, the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the regulating unit 490 comes into contact with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer periphery of the roller 492a By elastically deforming the surface side, the front base 452 can easily hold the roller 492a. This makes it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate, thereby suppressing rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber, urethane, and the like. In this case, due to the vibration damping effect, a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of attenuating and insulating vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be performed. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices provided on the 410 side, loosening of the fastening portion, and the like. In particular, when the rotation unit 500 is periodically displaced (for example, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versa lighter), relatively small amplitude and high frequency vibrations are generated from the decorative member 450. Since the input is made to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (the roller 492a) come into contact with each other, the product accuracy and the assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the precision in molding the part, and the manufacturing cost of the part can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the collision sound when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (the roller 492a) come into contact can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled. Further, since the direction of the rotation axis of the roller 492a is orthogonal to the direction of displacement of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated with the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a contact each other. When the members are in contact with each other and displaced, it is possible to suppress the sound of the members rubbing each other. In other words, when the projection is brought into contact with the displacement member to assist the stop of the displacement member and to prevent rattling, when the displacement member is displaced in the contact state with the projection, the members rub against each other. A sound is generated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450. Of the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a can be suppressed.

  Further, since the regulation of the decoration member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be performed by the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 which is relatively heavy is disposed on the decoration member 450. Since there is no need, it is possible to reduce the weight of the decorative member 450 and suppress the driving force required for the displacement of the decorative member 450, and to suppress the rattling of the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500. In this case, the weight of the decorative member 450 serving as a vibration source can be reduced, so that rattling can be easily suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 23 and 24, a description will be given of a contact state between the decoration member 450 and the regulating unit 490 when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position.

  As shown in FIGS. 23A and 24A, when the decorative member 450 is located above the regulating unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a contacts the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. It is arranged without touching.

  The decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 is a case as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b). When the member 491 is displaced to the substantially vertical position substantially the same as the vertical intermediate position, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492 a disposed above the regulating unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 abut. State. Thereby, it can suppress that the decorative member 450 rattles back and forth and right and left.

  That is, the roller 492a disposed on the upper side is pushed out by the decoration member 450, rotates while being displaced in the radial direction, and comes into contact with the decoration member 450 in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 24B). Therefore, the rattling of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction is suppressed. Further, since the roller 492a can rotate in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decoration member 450 moves left and right, it is possible to prevent the decoration member 450 from rattling in the left and right direction. be able to.

  On the other hand, since the roller 492a is rotatable around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, even when the roller 492a and the rotating unit 500 are in contact with each other, the decorative member 450 is displaced vertically in the first position. Can be done.

  Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the inclined surface 452g is used. Roller 492a can be guided to the front side of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 at the first position can be suppressed.

  When the decorative member 450 is displaced further downward and is positioned at the first position from the state shown in FIGS. 23B and 24B, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492a provided in the regulating unit 490 And the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact.

  Here, if the play of the decoration member 450 that is displaced up and down is suppressed by the rotating body (the roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decoration member 450, the rotating body (the roller 492a) is It is difficult to restrict the decoration member 450 from moving along the direction of displacement, and to prevent the decoration member 450 from being displaced against vertical play.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the shorter side on which the drive side slide hole 431 is formed) is the same as the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Since the direction substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the symbols, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, the regulating unit 490 can allow only the vertical displacement for displacing the decoration member 450 to the first position, and in the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 are disengaged from each other. By forming the dead point, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be regulated, the play of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  The rollers 492a disposed below the rollers 492a arranged vertically are in contact with not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491.

  That is, when the roller 492a disposed on the lower side is in contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out to the front side (the right side in FIG. 24C) (is elastically deformed). Thus, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. Accordingly, the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b can be increased, and the roller 492a can be hardly rotated. Therefore, resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction can be increased. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be regulated, the play of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  Here, as a mode of sandwiching the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft 492b of the roller 492a is moved in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 24C). In this case, the roller 492a may be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, but in this case, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a may have a diameter of 492b. A structure that enables displacement in the direction is required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body, and by utilizing the elastic deformation, the roller 492a is moved between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. The shaft 492b of the roller 492a does not need to be formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and the shaft 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 of the decorative member 450 accompanying the displacement of the rotary unit 500 is displaced. When the roller 492a is sandwiched between the decoration member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to backlash, the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a is used to apply the roller 492a to the decoration member 450 and the case member 491. The swelling portion 491c can more easily hold the roller 492a more firmly. This makes it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate, thereby suppressing the relative rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, the decorative member 450 rattles with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotation unit 500. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as the decoration member 450 is displaced from the upper position to the lower end position, the displacement resistance can be increased. Therefore, when the decoration member 450 is stopped at the first position, other components are damaged by the stopping operation. Can be suppressed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, since the rotation unit is provided at the central portion of the decoration member 450, when being displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, the kinetic energy at the time of displacement is added to the weight of the decoration member 450 for each component. Because it works, the parts are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when being displaced to the first position, the stop operation can be assisted, so that the stop operation in the direction that is more easily damaged can be assisted. As a result, breakage of components can be effectively suppressed, and the reliability of products can be improved.

  Furthermore, since two rollers 492a are vertically arranged along the direction of displacement of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 abut at two places with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the inclination of the decorative member 450 can be suppressed, and the rattling of the rotating unit 500 with respect to the upper surface base 510 can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

  The rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 described later is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the surface with which the roller 492a contacts). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is disposed in parallel with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. Thereby, while suppressing the driving force required when disposing the decoration member 450 at the first position and displacing the decoration member 450 from the first position to the second position, the front base of the decoration member 450 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 is suppressed. The rattling with respect to 410 can be effectively suppressed.

  More specifically, since the displacement mode of the rotation unit 500 is rotation, the decoration member 450 rotates due to the precession motion of the rotation unit 500 (the motion in which the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 swings like a circle). The unit 500 is vibrated in a mode (mode) in which the plane of rotation of the unit 500 is inclined. Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the roller 492a is (A surface to be contacted) can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a from a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decoration member 450 is arranged at the first position and when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the driving force required for the displacement of the decoration member 450 is suppressed by rotating the roller 492a. While the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25 to FIG. 36, the rotating unit 500 provided on the decorative member 450 will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 disposed between the front base 452 and the rear base 453 and a drive motor mounted on the rear side of the rear base 453. 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the rear side of the front base 452.

  The front base 452 has a concave portion 452c formed on the rear side at the center thereof. The recess 452c is annularly recessed in a front view, and has an insertion hole 452f formed in the shaft portion in the front-rear direction and openings 452d, 452e opened in the left-right direction on both side surfaces in the left-right direction. You.

  The rear base 453 is formed from a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in front view that is smaller than the front view of the front base 452, and has an opening 453b that opens in the center in the front-rear direction, and a circular shape on the right side in front view in the front-rear direction. It is mainly provided with an insertion hole 453a that opens, and shaft support portions 453c and 453d that project in a cylindrical shape on the front side.

  The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which a shaft portion of the drive motor 457 described later is inserted. The insertion hole 453a is opened at a position facing the shaft portion of the drive motor 457, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion of the drive motor 457. The opening is circular. The opening 453b is an opening through which a signal transmission mechanism 458 to be described later is inserted, and is formed in an inner hole shape larger than the shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458 in a front view.

  The shaft support portions 453c and 453d are shaft portions that are inserted into shaft portions of gears 455 and 456, which will be described later, and have a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456.

  The drive motor 457 is a motor in which a position detection encoder is incorporated, and can detect a rotation angle and a rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the back surface of the back base 453 as described above, the shaft of the drive motor 457 is inserted into the insertion hole 453a of the back base 453, and screws and bolts from the front side of the back base 453. And fixed.

  The gear 454 is meshed with the gear 455 and is fixed to the shaft of the drive motor 457 inserted through the insertion hole 453a of the rear base 453. The gear 454 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452, and when the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed. Can rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the gear 454 is rotated, and the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshed with the gear 454.

  The gear 455 meshes with a rear base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotating unit 500, which will be described later, and rotates around the shaft support 453c through a shaft support 453c whose shaft hole projects forward of the rear base 453. Arranged as possible. The gear 455 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452. When the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed. Can rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455, and the rear base 571 is rotated. As a result, the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

  Note that a part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452 d of the front base 452 and is meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotating unit 500 disposed in front of the front base 452.

  A gear 456 is meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500. The gear 456 is a member having a protrusion for detecting an initial position (reference position) protruding from a side surface (axial end surface) of the gear 456. It is arranged on the base 453. A part of the gear 456 is inserted into the second opening 452e and meshes with the rear base 571. Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452. When the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed. Can rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457 and the gear 454, the gear 455, and the rotation unit 500 (the rear base 571) are rotated, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the rear base 571 and the gear 456 is rotated. . As a result, the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be detected.

  In this case, the number of gear teeth carved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 carved on the outer peripheral surface of the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500 are set to be the same. Thus, the gear 456 can be rotated once per rotation of the rotation unit 500. Thus, initial position detection (reference position) can be easily performed.

  The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and a signal to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating rotary unit 500, and is configured to rotate a shaft 458a protruding from the front. The shaft portion 458a is formed in a substantially D-shaped cross section, has a passage opened therein, and an electric wiring is inserted into the passage.

  When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the rear side of the front base 452 by inserting the opening 453b of the rear base 453, the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted through the shaft 458a. At the same time, it is in a state of protruding from the front of the front base 452.

  Next, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 500. FIG. 29A is a top view of the rotating unit 500, FIG. 29B is a front view of the rotating unit 500 as viewed in the XXIXb direction of FIG. 29A, and FIG. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along line XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. The description of the rotating unit 500 is based on the state at the initial position (reference position).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotation unit 500 includes an upper surface base 510 forming an upper side surface, a lower surface base 520 forming a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 disposed below the upper surface base 510. An intermediate member 540 disposed below the irradiation unit 530; a reflector 560 disposed below the intermediate member 540; a front cover 550 disposed in front of the reflector 560; A rotation transmission unit 570 disposed on the back side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is mainly formed.

  The rotation transmitting unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper base 510 and the lower base 520, and includes a rear base 571 disposed on the rear side and a front base 572 disposed on the front side. And a bearing BR interposed between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR.

  The rear base 571 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a bulging portion 571a that swells in an annular shape when viewed from the rear side from the inner peripheral edge to the back side. A gear 571a1 is engraved on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. The gear 571a1 is meshed with the gear 455 as described above. Thus, by applying a driving force to the driving motor 457, the driving force for rotation is transmitted through the gears 454 and 455, and the rear base 571 (gear 571a1) is transmitted, and the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

  The front base 572 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer erected portion 572a erected from the outer peripheral edge and an inner erected portion 572b erected from the inner circular portion in a U-shape as viewed from the front. And.

  The outer standing portion 572a is a wall for forming a gap between the front surface of the rear base 571 and the rear surface of the front base 572, and sandwiching the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 between the opposing surfaces. The height is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension of the BR in the axial direction, and is set to be the same as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

  Further, the side surface of the outer standing portion 572a on the standing front end side is in contact with the front surface of the rear base 571, and a screw inserted from the rear side of the rear base 571 is fastened and fixed. As a result, the rear base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

  The inner standing portion 572b is a member that suppresses twisting of the wiring connecting the inside of the rotary unit 500 and the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is rotated. The signal transmission mechanism 458 is formed so as to have a substantially U-shape, and the inner shape is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

  Therefore, when arranging the rotation unit 500 on the front base 452, the inner erected portion 572b can be externally fitted to the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the flat portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 mesh with each other, and the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring connecting the rotation unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 from being twisted.

  The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is an annular metal member having different inner and outer diameters. Are formed, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

  The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. Thus, the bearing BR can be fixedly disposed on the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. In this case, the inner diameter of the back base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, the bearing BR is prevented from coming off the rotation transmitting unit 570.

  The fastening member 573 is a member for fastening the rotating unit 500 to the front base 452. The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a protruding from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

  The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed larger than the outer shape of the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. As a result, the outer periphery of the fastening member 573 is fitted inside the inner periphery of the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573 is disposed on the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that the inner upright portion 572b of the front base is inserted through the inner periphery. .

  The protruding wall portion 573a is a protruding portion for preventing the fastening member 573 from being detached from the assembled rotation transmitting unit 570, and is formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 over the entire circumference with a fixed protruding dimension. The outer diameter is set larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, by fastening the fastening member 573 to the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, the removal of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmitting unit 570 can be suppressed.

  More specifically, by moving the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front of the bearing BR, the movement of the fastening member 573 backward with respect to the bearing BR can be restricted. On the other hand, the movement of the fastening member 573 to the front side is performed by disposing the bearing BR between the front base 572 and the back base 571 so that the front side surface of the fastening member 573 and the back side of the front base 572 are located. And is regulated by being brought into contact with the side of the vehicle. As a result, detachment of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmitting unit 570 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the fastening member 573 having the bearing BR externally fitted thereto is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress transmission of the rotation motion when the rotation unit 500 is rotated to the front base 452.

  That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the ring-shaped metal body disposed outside the bearing BR is rotated, and the rotation is performed on the ring-shaped metal body disposed inside. By not transmitting, the rotation of the fastening member 573 can be suppressed. As a result, the rotation unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decoration member 450.

  The upper surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves backward (upward in FIG. 29A) when viewed from above, and has a front edge curved downward (backward in FIG. 29A). It is formed into a curved shape. The upper surface base 510 includes a decorative portion 511 that bulges in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front at the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 29B), , And a pressing portion 513 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the lower side.

  The decorative portion 511 is a portion that is fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above, and has a fastening hole that is fastened to the front base 572 on the back side, as well as a front view. The radius of the semicircular shape is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572. Thereby, it is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible when viewed from the front.

  The blow hole 512 is a through hole that penetrates in the up-down direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29 (c)), and is formed in a long hole shape that is long opened in the front-back direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29 (a)). Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 512 are formed in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the upper surface base 510.

  When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing portion 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 sandwiched between the upper surface base 510 and the upper surface base 510, and regulates movement of the irradiation unit 530. The height of the protrusion is set to the height up to the side surface on the upper surface side of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29C). Further, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed so as to protrude from an edge on the back side of the upper surface base 510.

  The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510, and is arranged symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570. Note that the decorative portion 521 and the air holes 522 formed on the lower surface base have the same shape as the decorative portion 511 and the air holes 512 formed on the upper surface base 510, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion that is fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, so that the front base The lower side of 572 can be made invisible. Therefore, by matching the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to prevent the player from visually observing the mechanism when rotating the rotating unit 500, thereby preventing the interest of the player from being spoiled.

  The irradiation unit 530 is formed mainly including a substrate member 531 and an LED 532 disposed on the lower surface side of the substrate member 531.

  The board member 531 is formed of a plate-shaped body having an outer shape in a top view slightly smaller than the upper surface base 510 in a top view. Accordingly, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in a vertical combination, the board member 531 can be made invisible in the vertical direction.

  The substrate member 531 has a through-hole 531a formed in an edge on the front side and penetrating vertically. The through-hole 531a is a member for suppressing the displacement of the substrate member 531 and will be described in detail later. The wiring of the shaft portion 458b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is connected to the board member 531. Accordingly, light can be emitted from an LED 532 described later via an IC or a capacitor incorporated in the substrate member 531.

  The LED 532 is formed as a surface-mounted LED, has a rectangular outer shape (outer shape of a cavity molded from resin ceramic) in a front view, and has an irradiation surface (epoxy or silicon encapsulated in the cavity) for irradiating light. Is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. Further, the LEDs 532 are provided on the lower surface side of the substrate member 531, and a plurality of the LEDs 532 are provided side by side in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the substrate member 531 when viewed from above. Thereby, the LED 532 can irradiate light to a reflecting plate 560 described later.

  The intermediate member 540 is formed from a plate-like body whose outer shape in a top view is substantially the same as the shape of the upper surface base 510 in a top view. Thus, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in a vertically combined manner, the intermediate member 540 can be arranged between the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520.

  The front cover 550 is formed of a transparent light-transmitting material, and is formed in an arc shape in a top view. The front cover 550 is disposed on the intermediate member 540 side.

  The reflection plate 560 has a silver decoration (plating) on its outer surface, and is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape in top view is substantially the same as the shape of the top base 510 in top view. In addition, the reflector 560 includes a concave notch 564 in which a front side surface is cut rearward.

  The concave notch 564 is arranged such that the front surface of the front cover 550 is substantially at the same position as the front surfaces of the upper base 510, the lower base 520, and the intermediate member 540 by inserting the front cover 550 into the cutout portion. Can be set up. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the concave portion 564 of the reflection plate 560 to the front surfaces of the upper base 510, the lower base 520, and the intermediate member 540. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the front cover 550 from being disposed so as to protrude from the rotation unit 500. As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be assembled as an integrated unit with less unevenness, and when the rotating unit 500 is visually recognized, it is difficult to understand the external shape of each component, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled. .

  Next, the intermediate member 540 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 taken along line XXXb-XXXb in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge portion that stands upward from the outer edge portion (in a direction in which the upper surface base 510 is disposed) when viewed from above. 541 and a second outer edge portion 542, an irradiation hole 543 formed to penetrate in the vertical direction, an irradiation regulating portion 544 protruding from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and a protruding portion protruding from the front edge. It is mainly provided with a portion 545 and a groove 546 recessed in the outer peripheral edge of the irradiation regulating portion 544.

  The first outer edge 541 is formed at the outer edge of the intermediate member 540 on the front side. The inner diameter of the curved shape of the first outer edge portion 541 on the front side (the lower side in FIG. 30A) when viewed from above is substantially equal to the outer diameter of the curved shape on the front side of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from above. Set identically. The vertical dimension of the first outer edge 541 is set to be larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the board member 531. Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 so that the irradiation unit 530 cannot be seen from the front side.

  The second outer edge 542 is formed on the outer edge on the back side of the intermediate member 540. The shape of the second outer edge 542 on the back side (upper side in FIG. 30A) when viewed from above is substantially the same as the shape on the back side when viewed from above the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. The standing dimension of the second outer edge 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge 541. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is disposed in a state of being in contact with the standing front end surface of the second outer edge portion 542. Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the back.

  The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for individually dividing light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LED 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530. . Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent LED 532 from irradiating another range. The inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their axes are coaxially arranged. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 described later via the irradiation hole 543.

  The irradiation hole 543 has a larger inner diameter from the upper surface side (the LED 532 side) toward the lower surface side. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543.

  The irradiation restricting portion 544 protrudes around the irradiation hole 543 described above. Accordingly, the gap between the LED 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 can be reduced, so that the light of the LED 532 can be easily incident on the irradiation hole 543, and can be prevented from leaking out of the irradiation hole 543. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  In addition, the projecting dimension of the irradiation regulating unit 544 is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge 542, and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the projecting distal end surface of the irradiation regulating unit 544 and the irradiation unit 530 are formed. The LED 532 is brought into contact. This can suppress the light of the adjacent LED from being incident on the irradiation hole 543, so that the outer diameter of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified. Further, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation control section 544 in contact with the LED 532 can be secured. Leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation regulating portions 544 are connected to the adjacent irradiation regulating portions 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the irradiation regulating portion 544 has a circular outer peripheral surface, and the adjacent irradiation regulating portions 544 are connected to each other. That is, since the group in which the plurality of irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected to each other is formed in an irregular shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly projecting circular arcs are continuous), a space (surface area) is secured, and the heat radiation effect is enhanced. In addition, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased by using the unevenness of the outer shape.

  The protruding portion 545 is a protrusion that restricts the irradiation unit 530 from moving forward, backward, left, and right, and is formed at a position that is inserted into the through hole 531 a of the substrate member 531 when the rotating unit 500 is assembled. Further, the protruding portion 545 is formed in a shape in which columns having different outer diameters are vertically combined, and has a large-diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small-diameter portion 545b on the distal end which is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter portion 545a. Formed from

  The large diameter portion 545a is a protrusion for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the substrate member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540. The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531a, and the protrusion dimension is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge 542.

  Thus, when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the front intermediate member 540 and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the facing distance between the rear side intermediate member 540 and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge 542. Also, since the projecting distance of the large diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is set to the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. They can be arranged in parallel to each other.

  The small-diameter portion 545b is a protrusion for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, and is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the substrate member 531. Set to the same or a slightly smaller outer diameter. Therefore, when disposing the irradiation unit 530 on the intermediate member 540, the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 is moved in the front-rear and left-right directions by externally fitting the through-hole 531a of the substrate member 531 in the small-diameter portion 545b of the intermediate member 540. Can be specified.

  The groove portion 546 is a groove that extends along the base of the irradiation control portion 544 and that is concavely formed in a U-shaped cross section. The concave portion of the groove 546 increases the area where the side surface of the intermediate member 540 contacts the outside air, so that the heat radiation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. In addition, the heat radiation effect can be enhanced while securing the rigidity of the intermediate member 540. That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base of the irradiation regulating portion 544, the area recessed in the intermediate member 540 is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 is secured. By the operation of the LED 532, it is possible to expand a space in a portion where generated heat is particularly concentrated, and to enhance a heat radiation effect.

  The groove width of the groove 546 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge of the irradiation regulating portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the depth of the groove 546 is smaller than half the thickness of the intermediate member 540. Set smaller.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover 550 along the line XXXIB-XXXXIb in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 31B, the diffusion unit 551 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the front cover 550 has a diffusion portion 551 on the inner side (upper side in FIG. 31B) on the lower side (left side in FIG. 31B). It is formed in preparation.

  The diffuser 551 is a part having a roughened surface, and can diffuse the light irradiated to the diffuser 551 by irregularly reflecting the light on the roughened surface. Note that the rough surface processing is a processing mode in which irregularities are formed on the surface.

  Next, the reflection plate 560 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32A is a top view of the reflection plate 560, and FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflection plate 560 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. In FIG. 32B, the reflection unit 563 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the reflection plate 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 erected on the upper surface side (the front side in FIG. 32A). It is mainly provided with a reflecting portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and an upright wall 562 erected along an edge on the back side.

  The partition wall 561 is erected in a U-shape with the front side (lower side in FIG. 32 (a)) open when viewed from above, and a plurality of partition walls 561 extend in the left-right direction along the front edge of the reflector 560. The pieces are formed side by side. In addition, adjacent standing walls 562 are combined with (also used as) the walls extending in the front direction to form one wall. Thereby, the space in which the partition walls 561 are juxtaposed can be reduced. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 formed can be maximized.

  The reflecting portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of a region surrounded by the front edge of the reflecting plate 560 and the partition wall 561 by laser processing or the like when viewed from above. The reflecting portion 563 has a horizontal portion 563a formed from a side surface parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560, and the thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as the distance from the horizontal portion 563a increases due to the connection with the horizontal portion 563a. And an inclined surface 563b inclined in the direction.

  The horizontal portion 563a is formed on a side surface other than the front edge, of the side surfaces parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflection plate 560. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflection portion 563) is not formed on the front edge, and the rough surface is not processed. Thus, the reflection portion 563 can be formed while holding the front edge of the reflection plate 560. As a result, there is no need to separately form a holding portion for rough surface processing on the reflection plate 560, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The inclined surface 563b is a portion mainly reflecting light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed on the upper surface side toward the front side, and is inclined 45 degrees toward the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Formed on the surface.

  The connecting position between the horizontal portion 563a and the inclined surface 563b is set to a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Accordingly, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted toward the back side can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted to the front side can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal portion 563a.

  As described above, the standing wall 562 is erected along the rear edge of the reflection plate 560, and the erected height is set to the same height as the erected height of the partition wall 561. . Thus, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is disposed above the reflection plate 560), a space can be formed between the upright wall 562 and the partition wall 561. That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflection plate 560 and the intermediate member 540. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being stored inside the reflection plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, and the rotation unit 500 stores heat, and the substrate member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 provided in the rotation unit 500 has Damage can be suppressed.

  The rotating unit 500 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is internally fitted to the inner circle portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circle portion of the fastening member 573 is externally fitted to the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. After integrating the front base 572, the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573, the rear base 571 is disposed on the back side, and the front base 572 and the rear base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

  A lower surface base 520 is disposed below the reflection plate 560 at a front portion of the rotation unit 500 (a portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), and the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened. After the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is overlaid on the upper surface side of the reflection plate 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched on the front side. The irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 with the through-hole 531a fitted outside the small-diameter portion 545b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540. In this state, by arranging the upper surface base 510 from above and fastening the upper surface base 510 to the intermediate member 540, the front portion (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) of the rotating unit 500 is assembled as a unit.

  Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is arranged behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570 are fastened to assemble the rotation unit 500 as one unit.

  Next, light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33A is a top view of the rotary unit 500, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. (A) and (b) of FIG. 34 are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 500 in the XXXIV section of (b) of FIG.

  Note that FIG. 33A illustrates a state in which the upper base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 have been removed from the rotating unit 500. In FIGS. 34A and 34B, light emitted from the LED 532 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, a reflecting portion 563 that is surrounded by a partition wall 561 and partitioned as one region is disposed below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540. . As described above, since the LEDs 532 are arranged above the irradiation holes 543, light emitted from the LEDs 532 can be applied to the reflection units 563 at different positions. That is, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state where it is partitioned by each reflecting portion 563, the division of the light of each LED 532 can be made clear. As a result, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflecting portion 563, the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In addition, since a structure for allowing the light of the LED 532 to enter the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, such a structure is used. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is formed of one member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product cost.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and the front side (see FIG. 34A). Side), is transmitted through the front cover 550, and is emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, even when the posture of the board member 531 is such that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, the light (flashing) of the LED 532 is visually recognized by the player, and the afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. be able to.

  Further, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently emitted to the player side by the inclined surface 563b of the reflection plate 560. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect.

  In the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563, there is light that is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected by the surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560 facing each other. . The light reflected on the facing surface of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560 is again reflected by the surface (the facing surface of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560) and is irradiated on the front cover 550.

  In this case, as described above, since the intermediate member 540 is formed of white having a lower light absorption than black, light reflected by the intermediate member 540 can be easily reflected again. On the other hand, as described above, the reflection plate 560 has a silver decoration on its outer surface, and can easily reflect light reflected by the reflection plate 560 again.

  Therefore, the light radiated from the LED 532 to the reflecting portion 563 can be emitted from the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state of being irregularly reflected by the rough surface and uniformly dispersed. That is, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the opening of the reflection portion 563 from being visually recognized in a state where the light is partially biased to the opening.

  As shown in FIG. 34B, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflection plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a, and the front side (FIG. 34B). Side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted through the front cover 550 to the front side.

  Since the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed at the front end of the reflection plate 560, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500. In addition, the intensity of light for displaying an afterimage due to the afterimage effect can be increased. That is, when roughening is performed on an end portion of the inner surface of the reflecting plate 560 on the front side of the rotating unit 500, light is irregularly reflected on the roughened surface, and the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the player side). ) Is reduced, the front end of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least a smooth surface that is flatter than a rough surface processed into the reflector 563 is irregularly reflected. , And the amount of light traveling toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500 can be increased.

  Further, the partition wall 561 has a front side (a concave notch 564) formed at an end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (a portion where the rough surface processing of the reflection portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Side), the portion of the horizontal portion 563a where the rough surface processing is not performed has a cross-sectional area of the inner surface toward the front end of the rotary unit 500. Increased (expanded). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotation unit 500 can have a spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the size of the LED 532 can be reduced.

  Further, the front side of the reflector 560 (rotating unit 500) is formed so as to be curved toward the rear side toward the end with the center in the left-right direction (the rotation axis) as the center, so that the front side (concave) of the reflector 560 is formed. As the end on the side where the notch 564 is formed) is radially separated from the rotation axis of the rotary unit 500, the front side (the concave notch 564) is formed in each area partitioned by the partition wall 561. The length of the end of the side) is increased. Thereby, the perceived brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotating unit 500, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes higher radially outward from the rotating shaft (the center of rotation). Therefore, when the LEDs 532 arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, the rotating shaft The light of the LED 532 that is closer to the LED looks higher (brighter) than the light of the LED 532 that is farther (radially outward) from the rotation axis.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the end on the front side of the reflection plate 560 is more distant from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 in the radial direction, the front side (concave notch) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561. Since the length of the end portion (on the side where the portion 564 is formed) is increased, the more the reflecting portion 563 (LED 532) is separated radially outward from the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500, the more the diffuse reflection by the rough surface is strengthened. (That is, by reducing the proportion of light visually recognized by the player from the LED 532), the light can be visually recognized as high-brightness light. As a result, it is possible to suppress a difference in brightness as viewed at the radially arranged position and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

  In addition, the length of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 increases as the distance from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 increases in the radial direction. The perceived lightness (brightness of light) can be made uniform.

  The light applied to the front cover 550 can diffuse the traveling direction of the light by the diffusion portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550. That is, due to the rough surface of the diffusion portion 551 of the front cover 550, the traveling direction of the light applied to the diffusion portion 551 can be bent in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can have a wider range. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the size of the LED 532 can be reduced.

  Here, if the light of the LED 532 is made to be visually recognized by the player directly (without passing through the member of the light transmitting material), the light of the LED 532 has a high directivity to the front, so that the player is dazzling. There was a fear to feel.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the surface for irregularly reflecting the light emitted from the LED 532 is formed at two places, the reflection plate 560 and the front cover 550, the directivity of the light emitted from the LED 532 can be weakened. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the irradiated light and feeling dazzling.

  Here, it is known that a plurality of light-emitting units (LEDs 532) are provided, and the light-emitting units are turned on and off in accordance with the rotational position to perform display by an afterimage effect. However, in the conventional light emitting unit, the posture of the substrate (substrate member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting unit is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting unit is directed to the front side (player side)). (A posture parallel to the rotated plane), the outer shape in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the back side of the rotating unit 500 is hindered in a state where the rotation of the rotating display device (the rotating unit 500) is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation unit 500 is configured such that the substrate member 531 on which the plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged in a row is arranged so that the surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Since it is arranged between 510 and lower surface base 520, the outer shapes of upper surface base 510 and lower surface base 520 when viewed from the front (in the direction of the rotation axis) can be suppressed. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is stopped, the visibility on the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 can be improved.

  Next, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 35A and 35B are front views of the rotating unit 500. FIG. FIGS. 36A and 36B are top views of the rotation unit 500. FIG.

  In FIGS. 35A to 36B, the flow of air generated by the rotation unit 500 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and the sign of the air flow K is given. Further, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are illustrated by broken lines.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the description is given when the rotation unit 500 is rotated left when viewed from the front. When the rotation unit 500 is rotated right when viewed from the front, only the flow of the airflow K is reversed about the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), when the rotation unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the above-described drive motor 457, the rotation causes external air to enter through the ventilation holes 512 and 522. An airflow K is generated inside the rotation unit 500.

  In this case, since the ventilation holes 512 and 522 are opened tangentially to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, the rotation unit 500 rotates through the ventilation holes 512 and 522 when the rotation unit 500 rotates. External air can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500.

  More specifically, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated leftward when viewed from the front, at the initial position, the ventilation holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the right side in the front view and the ventilation holes of the lower surface base 520 formed on the left side in the front view. 522 is displaced in a direction to take in (insert) air into the ventilation holes 512 and 522. As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled.

  Since the air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 and the air holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis, when the rotation unit 500 rotates rightward in a front view, the rotation at the initial position is performed. The air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the left side of the unit 500 in front view and the air holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 formed on the right side of the front view make it easy to take in external air into the rotation unit 500. That is, even when the rotating unit 500 rotates rightward, the same operation and effect as those described above (when the rotating unit 500 rotates leftward in front view) are obtained.

  Here, if a substrate (substrate member 531) on which the LED (LED 532) is mounted is disposed inside the rotating body (the rotating unit 500), and the rotating body is driven to rotate, the LED emits light. If the heat generated during operation of the IC or the capacitor cannot be sufficiently cooled, the solder of the LED soldered to the substrate or the IC or the capacitor for controlling the LED may melt, resulting in poor contact.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 are opened tangentially to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, so that the rotation of the rotation unit 500 takes in outside air into the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, heat generated when the LED operates can be cooled.

  The air taken into the rotation unit 500 from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflection plate 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K distributed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 35A) is directed to the outside of the rotating unit 500 from the opening on the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 (a gap between the opposite sides). It is blown and released into the atmosphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, the airflow K dispersed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (on the near side in FIG. 35A) is radially displaced from the rotating shaft by the centrifugal force of the rotating unit 500. The air is blown to the outside, blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500, and released to the atmosphere (see FIG. 35A).

  That is, since the rotating unit 500 is formed in a container-like shape with the back side opened, the outside air taken in from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 is efficiently removed from the back side by the combination of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520. Thus, the heat can be cooled when the LED 532 operates. In addition, by exhausting air from the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the sphere flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  In the present embodiment, the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a rectangular shape in a front view (that is, as viewed in the rotation axis direction) in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a long shape along the diametrical direction in the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. Since it is formed, the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is directed to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by utilizing the centrifugal force caused by the rotation of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. It can flow and can be exhausted from the back side. Therefore, with the flow of the air, outside air can be taken into the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  That is, in the vicinity of the rotation transmitting unit 570, the rotation speed is low, so that the efficiency of taking in the outside air from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 in the side wall is low (or cannot be taken in), but the circulation of air using the centrifugal force (the rotation transmitting unit 570). Outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity, and the taken-in outside air is caused to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force, and the flow of air exhausted from the rear side in the radially outward side) Can be formed. As a result, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 disposed near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the air inside the rotary unit 500 is pushed radially outward by the rotation of the rotary unit 500, the internal pressure on the center side of the rotary unit 500 decreases. External air is taken in from a gap on the back side between the rotation transmission unit 570 and the upper base 510 and the lower base 520. As a result, the cooling of the LED 532 disposed near the rotation transmitting unit 570 can be more reliably achieved.

  In this case, the front wall forming the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper in FIG. 29A)) (the lower edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward) The curved portion has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 (that is, the shape of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis is a rectangular parallelepiped). Since the angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the longitudinal end portion (outward in the radial direction during rotation) due to centrifugal force changes direction toward the rear side becomes substantially a right angle, a vortex is easily formed at such portion. . Therefore, the flow of air is hindered, and it becomes difficult to smoothly exhaust air from the rear side.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (rear side of the paper surface in FIG. 29A)) (the front edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward). Is formed outwardly from the center in the left-right direction, so that the air flowing toward the longitudinal end (radially outward during rotation) due to centrifugal force is gradually reduced. In addition to being able to flow to the back side, the angle of the portion where the air flowing to the longitudinal end (outward in the radial direction) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than substantially a right angle, Vortex formation can be suppressed, and the air flow can be smooth. Therefore, the exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, the cooling of the LED 532 disposed near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be more reliably achieved.

  Further, the distance between the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 facing each other on the rear side (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 35A) is such that the distance dimension on the rear side near the rotation transmitting unit 570 is closer to the longitudinal end. Since the distance dimension is made larger than the distance dimension on the back side, the air inside the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 flows toward the longitudinal end (radially outward during rotation) using the centrifugal force due to rotation. By exhausting air from the rear side on the radially outer side, when air is taken in from the rear side near the rotation transmitting unit 570, the air can be taken in efficiently.

  In addition, the open portion on the back side near the rotation transmitting unit 570 (the inner periphery of the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation axis. In addition, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the outside air on the rear side near the rotation transmission unit 570 (the formation of a flow in the rotation direction) due to the rotation of the lower surface base 520. As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side near the rotation transmission unit 570.

  Furthermore, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed in a shape narrowing from the back side to the front side, the rotating unit 500 can be used as the decorative portion 511 of the upper base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower base 520. Generation of a vortex in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between the rotation transmission unit 570 and the rotation transmission unit 570 can be suppressed. Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing in the central portion in the left-right direction of the rotating unit 500 can be made smooth, and when the outside air is taken in from the rear side near the rotation transmitting unit 570, the taking can be performed efficiently. .

  Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame 610 formed in an annular shape in a front view, and a center cover 620 disposed to cover an inner peripheral portion of the frame 610. And a sensor 630 attached to the frame 610.

  The frame 610 includes a stage 611 protruding toward the center cover 620 (rear side) from a lower part of an inner peripheral edge in a front view, a wall 612 protruding radially outward from an outer peripheral side, and a rear side. It is formed mainly with a fastening hole 613 that is concavely formed in a circular shape toward the front side at an edge portion thereof, and an opening 614 that opens in front of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 disposed on the back side. You.

  Further, the frame body 610 is a member that is disposed in the center of the game board 13 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and is made visible to the player via the glass 8. Patterns and pictures are drawn on the front side.

  The stage 611 is formed to bend from the inner edge on the lower side of the frame body 610 to the rear side, and has a first recessed part 611a on the front side on the upper surface thereof and a second recessed part on the rear side end. The setting portions 611b are respectively recessed.

  The stage 611 rolls the sphere on the upper surface thereof, and drops the sphere from the upper surface of the stage 611 using the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b. It is possible to form a state in which a ball easily wins in the opening 710a of the device 700. Therefore, since a plurality of flow paths of the ball flowing down the game area can be formed, it is possible to give the player interest.

  The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper portion of the stage 611 to the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the base plate 60), and has a concave depth toward the front side. Is formed deeply. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for sending a ball to an opening formed in the center rear surface of the stage 611 in the left-right direction, and has a deeper depth toward the rear surface.

  The wall portion 612 is a portion that is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is disposed on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The outer shape is formed larger than the inner shape of the opening formed through in the direction. Thereby, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the rear side surface of the wall portion 612 abuts on the front side surface of the base plate 60, and The center frame 600 can be positioned.

  The fastening holes 613 are holes that are recessed plurally on the back side of the frame body 610 and are formed at positions facing the through holes 623a of the center cover 620 described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the front side with sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 described later, and is formed at a position facing the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 to which the sensor light is emitted.

  The center cover 620 is formed of a resin material of a light-transmitting material, is formed in a substantially circular shape in a front view, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the frame body 610, and left and right edges of the cover member 621. And a mounting portion 623 that protrudes outward from the standing front end surface of the side wall portion 622 and the lower edge of the cover member 621. You.

  The cover member 621 is formed into a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves rearward as it goes outward from the upper left-right center in a front view (the front side becomes a convex curved surface). An upper peripheral edge (hereinafter, referred to as a "first portion 621a") of a central portion in the left-right direction is formed at a position forward of peripheral edges at both left and right ends and a lower end (hereinafter, referred to as a "second portion").

  Since the cover member 621 is formed from a plate-like body having a constant thickness, it can be prevented from acting as a convex lens, and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side can be ensured.

  Further, since the cover member 621 is formed from a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 and the third symbol display device 81 face each other by an amount corresponding to the central portion in the left-right direction being curved toward the front side when viewed from the front. A space can be formed between them. Thereby, the space where the decorative member 450 of the above-mentioned vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced and produced can be secured.

  The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion so that the center cover 620 can be attached to the frame body 610. Since the cover member 621 is curved to the back side as described above, the back side of the frame body 610 and the center cover Where the distance between the front of the center 620 and the front of the center cover 620 can be reduced (eliminated) by the side wall 622 where the distance between the front of the center 620 and the front of the center cover 620 can be reduced.

  That is, the vertical dimension of the side wall 622 on the front side is set to the distance between the back of the frame 610 and the front of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is provided on the frame 610. Accordingly, when the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are combined, it is possible to suppress the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 from being excessively protruded to the front side of the frame 610.

  The attachment portion 623 is a protrusion for attaching the center cover 620 to the frame body 610, and has a plurality of through holes 623a formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. As described above, the fastening hole 613 is formed in the back surface of the frame body 610 at a position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. Thus, the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

  The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting a motion of the player, and is a light emitting unit that emits light such as infrared light, and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected by the object when the light emitted from the light emitting unit is reflected by an object. And an irradiation surface 631 having:

  The sensor 630 is provided at a height of about ／ from the bottom when the frame 610 is divided into three equal parts in the vertical direction, and is provided on the right side of the frame 610. The sensor 630 is disposed with its irradiation surface 631 inclined to the center front side of the center frame 600. As a result, light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the central portion on the front side of the game board 13 to the player side via the glass 8.

  Next, the sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 39A is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 40A is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along the line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39A, and FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along the line XLb-XLb in FIG. FIG.

  In FIG. 39A and FIG. 40B, the irradiation area of the light of the sensor 630 irradiated in front of the center frame 600 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and is shown as irradiation areas R1 and R2. In FIG. 39B, the sensor 630 is illustrated by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (b), the sensor 630 and the light emitted from the sensor 630 are shown by two-dot chain lines, and are arranged in front of the center frame 600 (in front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be produced is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is disposed forward of the second portion 621b of the cover member 621. Accordingly, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine through (transmitted through) the cover member 621, and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. Can be suppressed. In the sensor 630, the decorative portion of the frame 610 is arranged on the front side. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the sensor 630 from the player side (front side).

  The light emitted from the sensor 630 irradiates the glass 8 directly from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 and irradiates the region of the irradiation region R1 emitted from the front side of the glass 8 and the front of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The reflected light is reflected and emitted to the irradiation region R2 which is emitted from the front side of the glass 8.

  Here, in a gaming machine in which a motion sensor (sensor 630) is provided in a gaming machine to detect a motion of a player on the front side of a liquid crystal device (third symbol display device 81), the motion sensor is exposed. There was a problem of spoiling interest.

  Therefore, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side of the decorative member (the frame 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side (the opening 614 of the frame body 610) to the inner side (outside) of the decorative member, it is more difficult to visually recognize the sensor. And the detection range becomes narrower. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge side of the decorative member (the opening of the frame 610), the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit can be easily turned to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. It becomes easier to see. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part of the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 irradiates the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( (The player side). Thereby, the sensor 630 is retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame body 610, so that a range in which an object can be detected can be secured while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630. In addition, since the cover member 621 is made of a light transmissive material, visibility of a symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured.

  Further, since the front side of the cover member 621 has a convex curved surface, when light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front side of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) at a position close to the sensor 630. Can be made more acute, while at a position farther from the sensor 630, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) can be made more obtuse, so that the range in which an object can be detected can be increased accordingly.

  Furthermore, the light (light reflected by the cover member 621) applied to the irradiation region R2 is reflected toward the cover member 621 when the object is irradiated and reflected. In this case, the traveling direction of the reflected light is different depending on the surface shape of the object to be reflected, but the light reflected in a plurality of directions is reflected at the front of the cover member 621, so that the traveling direction of the light reflected in different directions is increased. The direction may be the traveling direction toward the sensor 630. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected on the sensor 630 side, the operation of detecting the light reception of the sensor 630 can be reliably performed.

  The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is located on the front side of the wall 612 of the frame 610, and the second portion 621b is located on the back side of the wall 612 of the frame 610 (see FIG. b)). That is, the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same position as the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position on the front side of the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). It is arranged at a position on the back side of the vehicle.

  Accordingly, a distance between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third symbol display device 81 at the upper portion of the center frame 600 can be secured. As a result, the dimension in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the above-described vertical displacement unit 400 is vertically displaced can be secured, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. In addition, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in a limited space between the rear space where the decorative member 450 is displaced and the front space where the glass 8 is disposed.

  Further, since the first portion 621a is disposed at substantially the same position as the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position on the front side relative to the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 ( The rotation unit 500) can be more reliably prevented from interfering with the first portion 621a, and the displacement member can be correspondingly increased in size.

  Further, since the second portion 621b is disposed at a position on the back side of the back surface of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 is used as a light reflection surface. Can be easier. That is, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the object, and it is possible to secure a range in which the object can be detected.

  In addition, since the first portion 621a is located above the cover member 621, in a store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent light of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (the player side). Irradiation can be suppressed.

  That is, if the upper portion of the cover member 621 is curved to the rear side, the light of the fluorescent lamp of the store, which is irradiated from obliquely above, is easily reflected to the front side. Since the normal direction is formed as a curved surface directed at least below the horizontal direction, light incident on the front surface of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or another gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the cover member 621, such light can be suppressed from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the player feels dazzling and that the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 is deteriorated.

  Next, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotating unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 41A and 41B are cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 500 and the center frame 600. FIG. FIG. 41A shows the initial position (reference position) of the rotating unit 500 (position in which the extending direction is horizontally oriented), and FIG. 41B shows that the rotating unit 500 is centered on its rotation axis. In the figure, a mode rotated by 90 degrees is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the rear side of the center frame 600. , A predetermined gap is formed between the rotation unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600. Thus, the rotation unit 500 can rotate without colliding with the cover member 621.

  In this case, if the rotating member (rotating unit 500) is a role that rotates in front of the third symbol display device 81, the rotation of the rotating member generates a flow of wind, and a sphere flowing down due to the wind is generated. There was a problem of moving.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the rotating unit 500 is located above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind due to the rotation of the rotating unit 500.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attachment portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 recessed below the stage 611 of the frame 610 (that is, the attachment hole 613). Since the lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end of the frame 610), the falling area of the sphere and the displacement area of the rotating unit 500 can be defined. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (the second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. In addition, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the dust or dust can be blocked by the second portion 621b (the cover member 621). Soaring on the route of light emission and light reception, and a decrease in detection accuracy can be suppressed.

  Here, there is conventionally known a stage 611 of the center frame 600 in which a back wall is erected so that a ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 wraps around the front end from the rear end of the stand erected from the stage 611 or the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13. To affect the ball rolling on the stage 611. On the other hand, in order to prevent the effect of wind on the ball rolling on the stage 611, the back wall is curved to the front side to have a shape that covers the periphery of the stage ball (that is, a closed passage is formed). ), It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, and the interest of the player is impaired.

  On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the area including the stage 611 of the frame 610, the second unit 621b (the cover member 621) generates wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500. Can be blocked by As a result, since there is no need to cover the periphery of the stage 611, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, and to suppress the influence of the wind from affecting the downflow of the ball.

  Here, if the displacement region where the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow region where the ball flows down are separated by the partition plate (center cover 620), the rear surface arranged on the back side of the game board 13 will be described. Since many members that generate heat, such as the drive motor 441 that drives the third symbol display device 81 and the vertical displacement unit 400, are disposed in the case 300, heat is generated inside the displacement area (the rear side of the game board 13). ), There is a problem that the board controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame 610 and is disposed at a predetermined interval from the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can communicate with each other via a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from being trapped on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621. As a result, cold air on the front side (rather than the rear side) of the game board 13 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the board that controls the game machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 is formed at the upper part of the center frame 600, heated air is supplied to the front side of the game board 13 through the predetermined interval. Can be easily washed away. That is, the warmed air on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, so that the air is heated from the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 toward the front side. Easy to wash. As a result, it is possible to suppress the heat from being trapped on the back sides of the game board 13 and the cover member 621.

  In this case, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to generate wind, the wind flows out of a predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 and flows down in front of the game board 13. May affect a moving ball.

  On the other hand, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can flow toward the upper area (the area above the opening of the game board 13) of the game area, and the action of the wind causes the sphere to flow. Can be suppressed from being affected. That is, the ball that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a and flowed into the game area, and has a relatively high speed. Compared to a ball rolling on 611, it is less affected by wind. In other words, the wind can flow toward an area where the ball is less likely to be affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased accordingly, and the effect can be improved.

  Next, the distribution device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the distribution device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution device 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the distribution device 700. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 45A is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the line XLVa-XLVa in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45B is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the line XLVc-XLVc in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the line XLVd-XLVd in FIG. It is.

  In FIG. 43, the outer peripheral surfaces of the sorting member 760, the seesaw member 762, the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, and the outer shape of the collection hole 752 are illustrated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 45 (d), the path of the ball dispensed from the opening 744 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the distribution device 700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side (the front side in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60. It is mainly provided with a front side forming part 710 and a back side forming part 720 arranged on the back side (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60.

  The front side forming portion 710 is formed mainly including a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60, and a bending member 740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 730.

  The rear side forming part 720 is formed mainly including an interposition member 750 attached to the rear side of the base plate 60, and a distribution member 760 arranged on the rear side of the interposition member 750. .

  The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a. The through hole 731 is formed mainly on the left and right sides and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower insertion hole 732 is formed below the through hole 731 and penetrates in the front and rear direction. .

  The through hole 731 is a member into which an upper protruding portion 741 of a bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view opening slightly larger than the outer shape of the upper protruding portion 741 in a rear view. . A projecting wall 731a projecting upward from the rear surface to the front surface is formed on the lower surface of the through hole 731.

  The two projecting walls 731a are symmetrically arranged side by side with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the through hole 731 when viewed from the front, and the projecting distance is set to decrease from the rear side to the front side. Therefore, the sphere that passes (rolls) inside the through-hole 731 by the intervening member 750 and the sorting member 760 described later is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two protruding walls 731a, and is frontward from the back side. Rolled toward the side.

  The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 750 disposed on the back side, and is formed at a position facing the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D-shape in a front view in which the lower surface side is curved, and a first protruding portion 732a protruding downward from the upper surface at a central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and protruding upward from the lower surface. A second protruding portion 732b.

  The first protruding portion 732a is formed such that the protruding distance increases from the front side (the right side in FIG. 45A) to the rear side (the left side in FIG. 45A). The second protrusion 732b is formed to have a smaller protrusion distance from the front side to the rear side. In addition, the distance between the first protrusion 732a and the second protrusion 732b is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the ball can be rolled to the rear side by the inclination of the second protrusion 732b from the front side to the rear side. On the other hand, when the sphere bounces up and down when being inserted through the lower insertion hole 732, the upward displacement can be suppressed by the first protrusion 732a.

  A sensor SE that detects the passage of a sphere is provided on the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732. The sensor SE is a member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through-hole having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere formed on a side surface thereof. Can be detected. The sensor SE is disposed such that the axis of the through hole is coaxial with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. Thus, the opening direction of the through hole can be inclined slightly downward toward the back side, so that the sphere passing through the inside of the through hole of the sensor SE can be suppressed from staying inside the through hole.

  The bending member 740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is located substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) when viewed from the front. Are symmetrically arranged, and their outer shapes are formed symmetrically.

  In addition, the bending member 740 is disposed at a position where a gap large enough to allow a ball to pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the game area in a front view. This suppresses a ball flowing down the lower game area of the bending member 740 from being caught between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and remaining in the game area.

  The bending member 740 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and has an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back surface thereof, a lower protruding portion 743 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an upper protruding portion 741. And an opening 744 formed between the lower protruding portions 743 facing each other.

  The upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape whose lower side is open in rear view, and its outer shape is set slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Thus, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730, the upper protrusion 741 can be inserted and arranged inside the through hole 731. Therefore, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730, the upper projecting portion 741 can be inserted and positioned, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

  In addition, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape whose lower side is open in rear view, when the ball passes through the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 and rolls toward the bending member 740, the ball protrudes. The connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the roller rolls. Therefore, since the rolling of the ball can be kept constant, it is possible to prevent the ball from stopping inside the through hole 731. That is, when the connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the ball, the resistance increases when the ball rolls on the connecting portion, and the ball jumps at the step. By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface of the ball, the rolling of the ball can be stabilized and the ball can be prevented from being clogged.

  Further, in this case, even if the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in an annular shape in rear view, and the ball passes through the inside of the annular shape, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the ball rolls. Although the connection portion with the 740 is not formed, the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in an annular shape, so that the component shape of the bending member 740 is complicated, and the manufacturing cost is increased. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper protruding portion 741 is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, the shape of the component can be simplified, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  The lower protruding portion 743 is formed below the upper protruding portion 741, and is formed in a substantially U-shape in a rear view in which the upper side is opened. That is, when viewed from the rear, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed to face each other in the up-down direction.

  The lower protruding portion 743 is a path (hereinafter, referred to as a “second throwing path KR2”) for sending a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 toward the bending member 740 to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. And is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

  The projecting distance of the lower projecting portion 743 to the back side is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere. In addition, the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 in a state where the protruding tip surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance between the opposing bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is set to be larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball is thrown vertically (below, referred to as a ball path) between the opposing bending member 740 and the winning member 730. A "first throwing route KR1" is formed.

  The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 projecting from the upper inner surface of the upper protrusion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protrusion 743. The guide portion 742 projects in a substantially U-shape whose back side is open in a side view.

  The guide portion 742 vertically projects a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first throwing route KR1), and then throws the ball into the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. The height of the lower inner edge in the vertical direction is slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 disposed on the back surface.

  The guide portion 742 is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line in the left-right direction in the front view of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side. Thus, the two guide portions 742 are brought into contact with each other and guided (returned to the back side), so that the ball can be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction.

  The mutually protruding distal end surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged side by side are formed so as to be inclined toward the base side as they approach the surfaces facing each other (see FIG. 45B). Accordingly, it is possible to effectively suppress the sphere that is brought into contact with the two guide portions 742 and guided (returned to the rear side) from being displaced in the left-right direction.

  The upper protruding portion 741 is formed with a side wall 741a that protrudes inward from the left and right side surfaces in rear view. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) side walls 741a are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Accordingly, when the ball thrown inside the upper protruding portion 741 rolls in the left-right direction in the normal state, the throwing ball can be stabilized by contacting the tip end surface of the side wall 741a. On the other hand, when two balls flow continuously inside the upper protruding portion 741 and the ball flowing behind collides with the ball flowing ahead, the preceding ball enters between the side walls 741a, so that the left and right sides are placed. The distance in which the ball escapes in the direction can be ensured to prevent the ball from being clogged inside the upper protrusion 741. That is, the ball thrown inside the upper protruding portion 741 can be stabilized by the side wall 741a.

  The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both left and right sides in rear view. Further, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U-shape whose back side is open in a side view.

  The upper end of the opening 744 is set to be substantially the same in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the through-hole 731 of the winning member 730, and the lower end is positioned at a substantially middle position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. Is set to the height of Accordingly, when a ball is continuously fed into the bending member 740, it is possible to suppress the ball from being released into the opening 744 and clogging the inside of the bending member 740. That is, the opening 744 is formed so as to open on the side surface in the left-right direction of the connection portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

  The distribution member 760 is formed in a box-shaped body with a front side opened while being formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view. The distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to be inclined downward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. The left and right ends of the sorting member 760 are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

  The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 inclined downward from the center in the left-right direction toward the left and right sides in a front view, a seesaw member 762 arranged at the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and an upper part of the seesaw member 762. And a ball feeding port 763 formed at the center.

  The throwing port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the sorting member 760, and is formed at a position facing the opening 710a of the winning member 730. Accordingly, when the sorting member 760 is disposed on the interposed member 750 described below, a space A can be formed between the ball feeding port 763 and the interposed member 750.

  The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the sphere (that is, a gap through which the sphere can pass), and the opening A 710 a of the winning member 730 is formed through a through hole formed in the base plate 60. It is connected to the internal space (see FIG. 44). Thereby, the ball winning the opening 710a can be thrown into the space A, and the inside of the space A can be thrown.

  The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three projections 762a projecting outward at an interval of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof, and a shaft inserted inside the annular shape. A portion 762b.

  The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around the axis, is formed in a columnar shape, and is inserted inside the ring of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposed member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is rotatably disposed around the shaft portion 762b.

  The projection 762a is a projection for alternately allocating the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball is thrown from the space A described above. A ball is sent to the opposite side. That is, the ball thrown from the space A by the projection 762a at the center can be thrown in the left-right direction. The projections 762a projecting from both ends regulate the displacement of the seesaw member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is positioned by the weight applied when the ball passes (rotating the seesaw member 762). The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761. On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the protrusion 762a at the center of the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface 761, the guided ball collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed down. As a result, the projection 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the projection 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761 to restrict the displacement.

  The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter, referred to as a “third ball-sending path KR3”) in which the balls distributed to the left and right by the above-described seesaw member 762 roll and are thrown. It is formed to incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and are sent (rolled) to the descending end of the inclined surface 761.

  At the end on the descending side of the inclined surface 761, the side surface on the back side is formed so as to be inclined in the direction approaching the interposition member 750 so as to increase the thickness forward as approaching the end. As a result, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown to the end thereof is transferred to the first ball entry port 64 of the interposition member 750 disposed in front of the sorting member 760 or the right second ball entry port. The ball can be sent to 640r. More specifically, the ball that has been distributed to the left side in front view by the seesaw member 762 and has rolled on the inclined surface 761 is sent (enters) the first ball entry port 64. On the other hand, the ball that has been sorted to the right side when viewed from the front by the seesaw member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is sent (enters) to the second right entrance 640r.

  The interposition member 750 is formed in a horizontally-elongated rectangular shape in a front view, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the first ball entrance 64 penetrated to the left and right in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a right second entrance 640r penetrated in the front-rear direction on the right side, and a collection hole 752 opened below the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r. Formed.

  The first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r are respectively formed on the front sides of the left and right ends of the sorting member 760, and are formed on the back side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the spaces at the left and right ends of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. Accordingly, a path for passing the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the sorting member 760 through the first ball entry port 64 to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 and the right second ball entry port A path for passing the ball through the hole 640r to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter, both are referred to as a “fourth ball-sending path KR4”) can be formed.

  The collection hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 as described above. That is, the collection hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and the ball passing through the sensor SE is sent to the opening of the collection hole 752. The collecting hole 752 is connected to a device that circulates the ball installed in the store, and the ball collected in the collecting hole 752 is circulated by the circulating device and is launched again as a game ball from the ball firing unit 112a. .

  The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710a is sent to the sorting member 760 and sent to the third throwing route KR3 in one of the left and right directions by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball thrown to the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the ball inside the first entrance 64 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side is thrown. The ball is sent to the fourth throwing route KR4. On the other hand, when the ball thrown to the left in the third throwing route KR3 is thrown to the end of the third throwing route KR3, the right second entrance 640r of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. Is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4 inside. The ball thrown on the fourth throwing route KR4 is thrown on the first throwing route KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. The ball thrown on the first throwing route KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and thrown on the second throwing route KR2. The ball thrown in the second throwing route KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and is then thrown into the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 3750.

  Here, as described above, the through-hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on the left and right sides of the electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in a pair of left and right, so that a pair of bending The electric accessory 640a is located between the lower protruding portions 743 of the member 740.

  In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is made small (the slope is gentle), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the clogging of the ball in the lower protruding portion 743 becomes easy to occur. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is large (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball is increased, so that the clogging of the ball in the lower insertion hole 732 can be made difficult to occur. The space in the height direction (vertical direction) required for disposing the third throwing path KR3 (distributing member 760) increases, and it becomes difficult to dispose the electric accessory 640a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to make it difficult for the lower protruding portion 743 to be clogged with a ball. The angle of the downward inclination can be made small (the downward inclination is gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction required for disposing the third throwing path KR3 (distributing member 760) can be suppressed, and the disposition of the electric accessory 640a can be enabled. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the electric accessory 640a is an arrangement that is impossible with a conventional product, and is only possible by forming the opening 744 in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743 as described above. It is.

  Here, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 (the center frame 600 is arranged), and the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized by the player through the opening. In recent years, in response to a demand for an increase in the size of the third symbol display device 81, the center opening of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 of the center frame 600) has also been enlarged, so that it is located below the center opening of the game board 13. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the game area (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is reduced. Therefore, in the conventional product, the members corresponding to the third throwing path KR3 and the electric accessory 640a may be arranged in the space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area. It was difficult.

  That is, as described above, when the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is easily clogged in the lower protruding portion 743. Become. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is large (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball is increased, so that the clogging of the ball in the lower protrusion 743 can be made difficult to occur. The space in the height direction necessary for disposing the third throwing route KR3 increases, and it becomes difficult to dispose the electric accessory 640a. In addition, since the disposition position of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge portion of the game area (the inner rail 61). It is difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass, and it is necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, the ball clogging in the lower protruding portion 743 can be less likely to occur. The angle of the descending slope of the three throwing route KR3 can be reduced (the descending slope is made gentler). As a result, the position of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) in the height direction (vertical direction) can be raised (increased), so that the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the game area A gap through which a ball can pass can be secured between the lower edge of the inner rail 61 (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740).

  That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the electric accessory 640a, an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the lower protruding portion 743 (the bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area is a conventional product. This is not possible with the above configuration, and is only possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743 as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the throwing of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. FIG. 46A is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46B is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 46A corresponds to FIG. 45A, and FIG. 46B corresponds to FIG. 45B.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 in a manner that there is almost no gap (that is, two balls are connected in succession), the preceding (preceding) A part of the ball is sent to the back side while entering the opening 744 and guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730.

  Here, if a passage having a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed and the passage is bent, two spheres are formed in the passage with almost no gap (two spheres are connected). ) When the ball is thrown, the following ball sticks to the preceding ball, and the following ball presses against the side wall, so that the two cannot roll and the ball is clogged. Was.

  On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first ball-sending path KR1 and the second ball-sending path KR2, when the ball passes through the lower protruding portion 743 in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, Even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 make a tolerance, the ball can be hardly clogged at a bent portion where the ball is easily clogged. That is, the area where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect is such that the ball that has flowed down (dropped) on the first throwing route KR1 changes direction and turns in the extending direction of the second throwing route KR2. This is the position where the movement starts, and the ball following the preceding ball can easily catch up. Therefore, when the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, the two cannot roll and the ball tends to be clogged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at the position where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to escape between the opposing sides of the opening 744 (by accommodating a part of the preceding ball in the opening 744) and to press the ball against the side wall, so that the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height at the substantially middle position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, so that it falls down (flows down) the first throwing path KR1. When the moving ball reaches the bottom wall of the second throwing path KR2 (the lower protruding portion 743), the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can escape to the space between the opposing openings 744 and cannot be easily pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the lower protruding portion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape in side view, and the lower end of the opening 744 is installed at a position separated from the bottom wall of the lower protruding portion 743 by a predetermined distance, A side wall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second throwing path KR2 (lower protrusion 743). Therefore, even when the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, the ball unnecessarily flows from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, in the case where the size of the opening 744 is such that the sphere cannot pass, the opening 744 can usually be used to make it difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall. A mode is formed in which the leading sphere presses the leading sphere against the center of the opening 744, and the leading sphere may be internally fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. In this case, the following rolling of the ball is hindered by the ball fitted into the opening 744, and the ball is clogged.

  On the other hand, the opening 744 is larger than the outer shape of the sphere (formed so as to allow the sphere to pass through), so that the following sphere presses the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744. Even in this case, the leading ball can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the leading ball is fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. Can be avoided. As a result, the rolling of the following ball can be continued, and the occurrence of clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the opening 744 is formed in such a size that the ball can pass, and the opening 744 is disposed on the front side of the game board 13 (that is, the game area), so that the game area flows down the game area. The ball to be moved can flow from the opening 744 into the bending member 740. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor that detects a winning ball is provided downstream of the lower protruding portion 743, in addition to the ball that has flowed into the bending member 740 from upstream of the lower protruding portion 743, the bending member The ball that has flowed into 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, since the opening 744 (the area where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, the opening 744 flows into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. The player can visually recognize the playing ball. Therefore, also from this point, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In a region where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 make a tolerance, a lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion which is curved toward the collection hole 752 and inclined downward) is provided. Accordingly, when the ball flowing down (falling) on the first throwing path KR1 changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the second throwing path KR2, the ball is inclined downward by the guide portion 742. It can be rolled quickly by utilizing. This makes it easy for the preceding ball to roll before the succeeding ball catches up, and the preceding ball can be rolled by the following ball on the back side (along the extending direction of the second throwing route KR2). Since it can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall on the rear side during rolling, the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a position on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), ball clogging occurs at a bent portion between the first and second throwing paths KR1 and KR2. In this case, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  Further, when dust or dirt accumulates at the bent portion between the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. Thus, the bent portion can be cleaned through the opening 744. Therefore, the cleaning performance when cleaning the first ball-sending path KR1 and the second ball-sending path KR2 can be improved.

  Next, the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the light-emitting decoration unit 800 includes a base 810 having a horizontally-long rectangular shape in a front view disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a front side of the base 810. The light emitting device 820 mainly includes a light emitting device 820 to be provided, and a cover member 830 that is provided on the front surface of the light emitting device 820 and that is made of a light transmissive material.

  On the front side of the light-emitting device 820, a plurality of light-emitting bodies (LEDs 821) are dispersedly arranged over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the gaming machine.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The same portions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the regulating unit 2490 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 (a) is a side view of the regulation unit 2490, FIG. 49 (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 2490, and FIG. 49 (c) is a view taken along the line XLIXc-XLIXc of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the regulation unit 2490.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in the regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment, the roller member 492 is supported by the rotating member 2494, and the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by the rotation of the rotating member 2494. You.

  The regulating unit 2490 includes a case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, an outer edge member 2493 disposed on the outer edge of the case member 2491 on the open side, and a space between the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493 facing each other. It is mainly formed with a rotating member 2494 that is rotatably supported by being sandwiched and a roller member 492 that is supported by the rotating member 2494.

  The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the back side, and is formed to have a larger width dimension in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 49B) than the case member 491 in the first embodiment. The case member 2491 is mainly formed with a projecting portion 491a projecting from the front side surface, and a cutout portion 2491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction.

  The notch portion 2491b is formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape at a substantially central position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 49 (b)) on both sides of the case member 2491 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 49 (b) horizontal direction). You. The cutout portion 2491b is a cutout for rotatably supporting a shaft portion 2494b of a rotating member 2494 described later inside, and has an inner diameter set to be larger than an outer diameter of the rotating member 2494.

  The outer edge member 2493 is a member that is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 2491. The outer edge member 2493 has an inner shape substantially the same shape as the opening of the case member 2491. In addition, an upright portion 2493a that stands upright on the front side is formed around the inner edge on the side surface on the front side (the case member 491 side) of the outer edge member 2493.

  The upright portion 2493a is formed with a recessed portion 2493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch 2491b of the case member 2492. Therefore, the rotating member 2494 can be disposed on the case member 2491 in a rotatable state by sandwiching the rotating member 2494 described below between the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and the concave portion 2493a1.

  The rotating member 2494 is formed of a plate-like body having an oblong shape in a side view, and has a longitudinal dimension smaller than a vertical dimension of an inner portion of the case member 2491. The rotating member 2494 includes a shaft portion 2494b protruding in a cylindrical shape outward in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 at the center in the longitudinal direction, a shaft support hole 2494a formed through both sides of the shaft portion 2494b, and a shaft. And a regulating portion 2494c bulging radially outward from the protruding tip of the portion 2494b.

  The shaft portion 2494b is protruded longer than the thickness of the case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, and a restricting portion 2494c bulging in the radial direction is formed at the protruding tip portion. Accordingly, the shaft member 2494b is fitted inside the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and the concave portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 is provided from the back side, so that the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491. In addition to the axial support, the restricting portion 2494c can restrict the rotation member 2494 from being displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491.

  The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted. The shaft support hole 2494a is formed in a circular shape, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b. Thus, the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 in a state where the retaining ring E1 is removed is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494a, and then the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the shaft portion 492b, so that the roller member 492 can be rotated. Can be disposed on the rotating member 2494.

  The regulation unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

  First, the shaft 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494a of the pair of rotating members 2494, and the roller member 492 is supported by the rotating member 2494. Thus, two roller members 492 can be arranged in a vertically arranged state between the rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair.

  Next, a torsion spring (not shown) is provided on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494, and after fitting inside the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491, the outer edge member 2493 is provided from the back side to rotate. The member 2494 can be disposed so as to be rotatable about the shaft portion 2494b with respect to the case member 2491. Thus, the position of the roller member 492 disposed on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced by rotating and displacing the rotating member 2494. Also, a state in which the roller member 492 disposed above the roller members 492 disposed vertically is urged to the front side (the left side in FIG. 49 (c)) by the torsion spring disposed on the shaft portion 2494b. It can be.

  Next, referring to FIG. 50, a description will be given of a state of contact between the decoration member 450 and the regulating unit 2490 when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position. (A) to (c) of FIG. 50 are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 50 (a) corresponds to FIG. 24 (a), FIG. 50 corresponds to FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 21 (c) corresponds to FIG. 18 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 50A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the regulating unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is provided by a torsion spring (not shown) disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. Is rotated, and the roller member 492 disposed above the roller member 492 disposed below is positioned on the front side.

  As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21A, and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. When the roller 492a of the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side is displaced to the vertical position, the pressure of the roller 492a which abuts on the decoration member 450 and suppresses the decoration member 450 is lower than that of the regulating unit 2490 of the first embodiment. Can be smaller. In this case, the rotating member 2494 is in contact with a projection (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side is not displaced to the front side (the rotating member 2494 is not rotated). The upper side does not rotate to the front side).

  Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21B to the first position shown in FIG. 50C, a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450. Increase of the energy consumption of the driving motor 441 can be suppressed.

  When the decoration member 450 is displaced to the first position shown in FIG. 50 (c), the roller 492a disposed below is in contact with the decoration member 450. As a result, the lower roller member 492 is pressed to the rear side and is displaced to the rear side, and the upper roller 492a is displaced to the front side. Thus, the pressing force of the roller 492a disposed on the upper side against the decoration member 450 can be increased. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller members 492 arranged vertically. On the other hand, when the decoration member 450 is located in the middle of the displacement, the pressing force acting on the decoration member 450 can be reduced to make it easier to displace. That is, with the displacement of the decoration member 450, the pressing force applied to the decoration member 450 from the regulating unit 2490 can be changed.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a distribution device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 3700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52 (b). .

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the sorting device 3700 according to the third embodiment, the opening of the second entrance 640 is connected to the sorting device 3700.

  The distribution device 3700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side with respect to the base plate 60, and is disposed on the rear side with respect to the base plate 60. And a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

  The front side forming portion 3710 is formed mainly including a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60, and a bending member 3740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 3730.

  The rear side forming portion 3720 includes an interposition member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the interposition member 3750, and an interposition member located below the distribution member 760. And a second throwing path 3770 disposed on the back side of the 3750.

  The prize-winning member 3730 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the opening 710a described above in the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a below the opening 710a, and the left and right sides of the electric accessory 640a. A through-hole 731 formed in the front-rear direction, a second through-hole 3733 formed in the front-rear direction below the through-hole 731, and a lower part formed in the front-rear direction below the second through-hole 3733. And a side insertion hole 732.

  The second through hole 3733 is an opening through which a sphere passes, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape as viewed from the front, which is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. In addition, the second through hole 3733 is formed below the second entrance 640, and a second protruding wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface and protrudes upward from the back side to the front side. You.

  The two second protruding walls 3733a are symmetrically arranged side by side with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the second through hole 3733 when viewed from the front, and the protruding distance is set to be smaller from the back side to the front side. Therefore, when a sphere passes through the inside of the second through hole 3733 by the intervening member 3750 and the second ball feeding path to be described later, the sphere can be guided to the left-right center position of the two second projecting walls 3733a, and It can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

  The bending member 3740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731, the second through hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 described above, and is on the left and right sides of the above-described second ball entrance 640. And the pair of outer shapes are formed symmetrically.

  The bending member 3740 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back side thereof, an intermediate protruding portion 3745 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an intermediate protruding portion thereof. And a lower protrusion 743 projecting from below 3745.

  The intermediate protruding portion 3745 is a wall portion that is formed to be long in the up-down direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53B) when viewed from the rear, and is formed at both left and right positions of the second through hole 3733, The two through holes 3733 are formed at the same height as a substantially middle position in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate projecting portion 3745 is formed below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733.

  In addition, a second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the upper protruding portion 741. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the lower protruding portion 743.

  The second opening 3746 is formed in a substantially U-shape that is open on the back side in side view, and has an inner shape larger than the outer shape of the sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size that allows the ball to pass. The detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be described later.

  The second throwing path 3770 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in a front view, and has a substantially box-like shape having a constant thickness with an open front side. The second ball-sending path 3770 is a ball-sending path for sending a ball entering the inside of the second ball entrance 640 to the second through-hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is disposed on the back side of the interposition member 3750. And a ball feeding path for feeding the ball between the inside of the second ball feeding path 3770 and the interposition member 3750.

  Further, the second throwing path 3770 is disposed such that a left end portion thereof is located behind the second entrance 640 of the winning member 3730 in a front view, and a right end portion thereof is a second penetrating portion of the winning member 3730. It is disposed on the back side of the hole 3733. That is, the second throwing path 3770 is disposed on the interposition member 3750 in such a manner that the left end in the front view is located above the right end, and is inclined downward toward the right end.

  Further, the left end of the second throwing path 3770 in front view is connected to the second entrance 640, and the right end is connected to the second connection hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750. As a result, the ball that has entered the inside of the second entrance 640 is thrown into the inside of the second throwing path 3770 and then rolls inside the second throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball is sent to the second connection hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750.

  The interposition member 3750 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction, and a first winning device that is located on the left and right sides of the variable winning device 65 and formed in the front-rear direction. A ball hole 64, a right second ball inlet 640r, a collecting hole 752 positioned below the first ball inlet 64 and the right second ball inlet 640r and formed through in the front-rear direction; A second connection hole 3753 is formed between the entrance 640 r and the collection hole 752 and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction.

  The second connection hole 3753 is formed to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the inner shape thereof is set to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and is formed at a position on the back side of the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 730. . As a result, the ball rolled inside the above-described second ball feeding path 3770 passes through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 and is sent to the second through hole 3733 of the interposition member 750.

  The sorting device 3700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710a is sent to the sorting member 760, and is alternately sent to the inclined surface 761 in one of the left and right directions by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball rolling on the inclined surface 761 is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761, the ball enters the first entrance 64 of the interposition member 3750 or the right second entrance 640r of the interposition member 3750 disposed on the front side. The ball passes through the inside and is sent to the back side of the bending member 740. The ball thrown to the back side of the bending members 740 and 3740 is guided along the protruding distal end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending members 740 and 3740, and falls downward, and drops in the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730. After passing through the inside of the sensor SE after passing through the inside, the ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 3750.

  The ball entering from the second entrance 640 is thrown into the second throwing path 3770 and is thrown inside the second throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball thrown to the right end of the second throwing path 3770 passes through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750 disposed on the front side, and passes through the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, while being guided along the projecting distal end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740, it falls downward, passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730, and passes through the inside of the sensor SE. The ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the installation member 3750.

  Therefore, in the sorting device 3700, a ball entering from the second entrance 640 can be detected by the sensor SE arranged on the right side of the winning member 3730 in a front view, so that the ball enters the throwing path from the second entrance 640. There is no need to newly provide a sensor SE. That is, since the sensor SE that detects a ball entering from the opening 710a can also serve as the sensor SE that detects a ball entering the second entrance 640, the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly. .

  Next, the second opening 3746 of the bending member 3740 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 54 (a) corresponds to FIG. 53 (a), and FIG. 54 (b) corresponds to FIG. 53 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 54, a ball enters from the opening 710 a and is thrown to the back side of the bending member 3740, and a ball enters from the second entrance 640 to be thrown and is sent to the back side of the bending member 3740. If the ball sent to the side is sent to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may contact each other and the ball may be clogged.

  That is, a ball (hereinafter, referred to as a “ball on the lower side”) that is thrown from the second entrance 640 and then thrown from the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 is thrown from the opening 710a. Then, the ball is thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 3730 to the back side of the bending member 3740, and collides with a ball (hereinafter, referred to as an “upper ball”) that falls from above the bending member 3740 to below. If the front through-hole of the second through hole 3733 is caught, the ball may be stuck and clogged.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the lower ball is discharged by discharging the upper sphere from the second opening 3746 or escaping between the opposing surfaces of the second opening 3746. It is possible to eliminate the state of equilibrium between the ball and the upper ball and suppress the ball from being clogged in the ball feeding path of the bending member 3740.

  That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere to form a balanced state, the second opening 3746 is formed in the left-right side surface where the upper sphere is located, and the upper spheres Since the ball is leaned to the left or right due to the spherical shape, the upper sphere is sent into the left or right second opening 3744. This makes it possible to eliminate the balance between the lower ball and the upper ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from being clogged in the ball feeding path of the bending member 3740.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a sorting device 4700 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 (a) is a front view of the sorting device 4700 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55C is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along the line LVc-LVc in FIG. In FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), the path through which the sphere passes is schematically illustrated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (c), the sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment has a prize port located below the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the left and right direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 55 (a)). 4063 is provided.

  The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass, and is provided on the front side of the game board 13. The winning opening 4063 has a rear side connected to a third connecting hole 4754a of an interposing member 4750, which will be described later, and the ball that has entered the inside of the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communication hole 54752a.

  The collection hole 752 of the interposition member 4750 is formed to be bent downward at the tip of the second throwing path KR2, and a path through which the ball passes and is thrown downward (sixth throwing path KR6) is formed. You. That is, the sixth throwing route KR6 and the second throwing route KR2 are connected.

  A third connection hole 4752a protruding to the left and right sides is formed in the sixth throwing path KR6, and a sensor SE for detecting passage of a sphere is provided below the third connection hole 4752a.

  The third connection hole 4752a is connected to an open portion on the back side of the winning opening 4063. Thus, the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is thrown into the third connection hole 4752a, and is sent to the sixth throwing path.

  Further, a sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE provided in the sixth throwing path KR6 is provided on the passage of the third connection hole 4752a. Thus, a sphere that has entered the inside of the third connection hole 4752a can be detected.

  Thus, the ball discharged from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can be made to win the winning opening 4063. That is, not only the form in which the ball guided by the bending member 740 passes through the sensor SE, but also the form in which the ball flows out of the opening 744 into the game area, and further, the outflowing ball enters the winning opening 4063, and the sensor SE2 is moved. A passing form can be formed, and amusement can be given to the game.

  The winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all of the balls flowing out of the opening 744 into the game area, or may be partially arranged depending on the state of the ball flowing out of the opening 744 into the game area. Some balls may be arranged in a position where they can be received and some balls are not.

  In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a connection portion between the first ball-throwing passage KR1 and the second ball-throwing passage KR2, the ball that is likely to be clogged is paid out from the opening to the game area, so that the first ball-throwing path KR1 is formed. The ball can be prevented from being clogged at the connection between the ball and the second throwing route KR2.

  Furthermore, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, a mode in which a ball is paid out from the opening 744 and enters the winning opening 4063 can be visually recognized by the player. Yes, it can be interesting and easy to give to the player.

  Since the third connection hole 4752a is connected above the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing path KR6, the ball entering from the winning opening 4063 only passes through the sensor SE2 arranged in the third connection hole 4752a. Without passing through the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing route KR6. Therefore, since the ball coming from the winning opening 4063 can pass the two sensors, it is possible to give the player an interest.

  In addition, since the balls sent to the bending member 740 are sorted left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760, the balls are continuously connected to the connecting portion between the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2. Can be suppressed from being thrown. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from being clogged at the connecting portion between the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case where one sensor 630 is provided on the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the center frame 600. Three or more sensors 630 may be provided.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is provided on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be disposed on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400. In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a curved surface having a convex front surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the front center portion. Further, it may be formed as a convex curved surface on the back side. Alternatively, a curved surface may be partially formed. At least, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the cover member 630 so that an object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is made to have the player visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 provided on the back side and also serves as the light emitted from the sensor 630 is used. Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the area of the cover member 621 may be an area where the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized by a player and an area where light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected. The area may be divided into two. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modification. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40B, and only the cross-section of the center cover 620 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the center frame 600 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 includes a second region R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 56), and a center side (the third symbol display device) of the second region R2 at both ends. 81 front side) and a first region R1.

  The first region R1 is a region where the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the cover member 621 is visible to a player, and is formed of a light-transmissive material having relatively high transparency. The second region R2 is a region that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630 to the front side (the player side) of the gaming machine 10. Note that the boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 is only required to be visible from a player located on the front side of the gaming machine 10, and is substantially the same as the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view. The same position is preferred. Further, in this modified example, a description will be given of a mode in which sensors 630 are provided at both left and right ends for easy understanding.

  In this case, for example, a member having high reflectivity such as silver halide may be coated on the back side or the front side of the second region R2. Alternatively, a silver seal may be attached to the rear side or the front side of the second region R2. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be more reliably detected.

  Alternatively, the portion of the second region R2 may have a curved shape that is convex toward the back side, or the portion of the second region R2 may be a flat surface. In this case, the range in which the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and emitted to the front side can be widened, so that the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sensor 630 is disposed in front of the cover member 621 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be disposed rearward of the cover member 621. May be provided. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Further, in this case, since the cover member 620 has a curved shape that is convex toward the front side, when light emitted from the sensor 630 enters the cover member 630, the irradiation angle can be changed. That is, by transmitting the cover member 630 having a curved shape convex to the front side, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the two inclined surfaces 761 (third throwing path KR3) of the sorting member 760 are formed with the same length has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lengths of the (third throwing route KR3) may be different lengths. In this case, the time required for each of the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 720 to be detected by the sensor SE can be made different between the left and right paths, so that the player can be given an interest.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the roller 492a may be formed of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be fitted on the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the thickness of the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 is formed constant has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the thickness of the cover member 621 may be changed. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be substantially D-shaped. In this case, since the cover member 621 is a convex lens, the third symbol display device 81 and the decorative member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 by using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may use the displacement of the roller 492a. For example, even if the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is formed to be displaceable, the roller 492a is displaced, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Good.

  In this case, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. It is not necessary to form with a material having a high modulus of elasticity. For example, it can be formed with a resin having a lower modulus of elasticity than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the case where the roller 492a disposed on the upper side comes into contact with the decorative member 450 before the roller 492a disposed on the lower side has been described. The roller 492a may be in contact with the decorative member 450 after the roller 492a disposed below.

  For example, the roller 492a disposed above the regulating unit 490 at the initial position (the position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 is separated from the roller 492a) is moved in the front-rear direction with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (FIG. 50). (A) in the left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until the decorative member 450 abuts on the roller 492a is delayed as compared with the first and third embodiments. The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the irradiation control unit 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined distance may be set between the irradiation control unit 544 and the LED. A gap may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be in an open state, it is possible to suppress the air from staying (stagnating) inside the irradiation hole 543. That is, since a flow of air can be generated inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rough surface processing is formed into an uneven shape has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rough surface processing may be a surface including only protrusions (projections). Alternatively, the surface may be composed of only concave portions (dents). Further, the rough surface processing may be extended as a strip or a groove. Furthermore, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be any of a circle, a keypress, a polygon diameter, and a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In each of the above embodiments, the smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is transferred to the displacement area of the rotary unit 500. (Rotational region). That is, an atmosphere filled with smoke may be formed in the space between the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620). Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be visually recognized by the player while passing the smoke, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be emphasized. In addition, it is possible to make only the blinking of the LED 532 visible while hiding the rotating unit 500 or the member on the back side thereof (making it difficult for a player to visually recognize) with the smoke. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect produced by the LED 532 (light).

  In the conventional product, the smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side with the rotation of the rotating unit, and it is difficult to fill the above-mentioned space with the smoke. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. On the other hand, according to the rotating unit 500 in each of the above-described embodiments, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and the rear surface of the structure in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are assembled. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, it is possible to fill the above-mentioned space with smoke (leave around the rotating unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be turned on and off in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be obtained.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, a jackpot effect using the rotating unit 500 can be executed during the fluctuation display. More specifically, the rotation unit 500 is formed of a known versa lighter, and changes the light emission pattern of the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in a row in accordance with the rotation amount of the rotation unit 500, thereby performing the rotation operation. A specific character is displayed on the trajectory as an afterimage.

  In the present control example, the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 when displaying a specific character as an afterimage on the trajectory of the rotation operation is set to 100 ms / rotation (that is, 600 rpm (revolution per minute)). . Here, since the temporal resolution (minimum visible lighting time) of the human eye is about 50 to 100 ms, it is recognized that a light source that repeatedly turns on and off at 100 ms intervals is always in a lighting state. Since the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 in this control example is 100 ms / rotation, the rotation unit 500 makes one rotation every 100 ms and returns to the same position. By controlling to turn on the LED 532 again when returning to the same position, the position illuminated by the LED 532 can be given an illusion that the player always lights up. This makes it possible to give an impression as if a specific character was displayed as an afterimage on the trajectory of the rotation operation.

  Note that the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is not limited to 100 ms / rotation, and may be lower or higher. When the rotation speed is high, it is possible to visually recognize (illusion) that a specific character or design is displayed more clearly. When the rotation speed is low, it is possible to visually recognize (illusion) that a specific character or design is blinking. By providing a case where the rotation speed is high and a case where the rotation speed is low, it is possible to provide a case where a specific character or a pattern is turned on and a case where it is made to blink, and it is possible to increase display variations and to enhance the interest of the player. . Also, without changing the rotation speed, a case where a specific character or design blinks may be provided only by changing the lighting interval of the LED 532.

  Since the rotating unit 500 has a substrate member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted, when the jackpot effect using the rotating unit 500 is performed, the LED 532 and the IC / capacitor mounted on the substrate operate. It generates heat by doing. For this reason, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder connecting the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted by the influence of heat generation, resulting in poor contact. For this reason, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the operation frequency of the rotating unit 500 is suppressed, and a novel jackpot effect can be realized while preventing poor contact.

  Further, in the first control example, the number of times of entering the first entrance 64 and the number of times of entering the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r can be held up to a maximum of four times, respectively. It is composed. When the number of times of entry into the first entry port 64 and the number of entry into the second entry port 640 or the right second entry port 640r are respectively the upper limit of four times (for a total of eight times). (When the ball is suspended), a continuous notice effect (8 suspended effects) for executing the same type of effect can be executed over the variable display corresponding to the eight ball entries. . With this continuous announcement effect, it is possible to keep the player's feeling of expectation continuously over a plurality of continuous variable displays. In the following description, for convenience, the lottery of the special symbol executed based on the ball entry into the first entrance 64 is referred to as “the lottery of the special symbol 1”, and each second entrance (the second entrance) The special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entrance 640 and the ball entry into the second right entrance 640r) is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  First, the configuration of the rotation unit 500 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57A is a diagram illustrating a case where the rotation unit 500 rotates 90 degrees clockwise in front view by driving of the drive motor 457. In this example, only the outermost LED 532 (LED1) of the plurality of LEDs 532 arranged in the rotating unit 500 continues to be turned on, and the other LEDs 532 are turned off. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when the rotating unit 500 rotates 90 degrees clockwise in front view while the LED 1 continues to light, the LED 1 emits light for a player who observes from the front of the rotating unit 500. The trajectory of light (hatched portion in FIG. 57) is recognized as an afterimage, and it is recognized as if an arc of the same color as the emission color of LED 1 appeared in the air. In an actual effect, a specific character is displayed as an afterimage by switching the lighting timing and the turning-off timing of the plurality of LEDs 532 according to the rotation position (the number of rotation operation steps).

  FIG. 57B is a diagram illustrating an arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 532 of the rotation unit 500. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), in the rotating unit 500, as the LEDs 532, 40 sets of LEDs 1 to 40 are arranged in a row. Each LED is composed of three colors of red, blue, and green LEDs, and a vertically-elongated, substantially rectangular diffusion plate is provided in front of the LEDs. With this diffusion plate, the light of the LED emitted from the back side can be transmitted evenly (without unevenness) to the front side. Note that, as described above in the description of the structure of the rotating unit 500, the LEDs 532 are not directly disposed on the back side of each diffusion plate. Each of the diffusion plates has a structure in which light reflected by the inclined surface 563b of the reflection plate 560 is irradiated (see FIGS. 34A and 34B).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a description will be given of how the afterimage is seen in the actual big hit effect using the rotation unit 500. As shown in FIG. 58, in the present control example, a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, and when the rotating unit 500 operates, a predetermined light emitting pattern is set for each of the LEDs 1 to 40, so that an afterimage is displayed. . In the present control example, the light emission patterns of the LEDs 1 to 40 are set such that the afterimage forms a character of “hit”. By displaying the winning character as an afterimage, the player can easily recognize that the lottery of the special symbol has been a big hit. Although the details will be described later, the light emission patterns of the LEDs 1 to 40 constituting the rotating unit 500 are defined in an operation scenario table 222f provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. The light emission pattern defined in the operation scenario table 222f defines one rotation of the rotating unit 500. That is, the same light emitting pattern is set repeatedly each time the rotation unit 500 makes one rotation. As a result, the same character ("hit" character) can appear at the same position every round. Therefore, the character of "hit" can be easily recognized by the player.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the lower half of the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500, an afterimage of the character "hit" displayed in the upper half and the character "hit" having rotational symmetry is displayed. Is controlled. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize the big hit more reliably.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 59B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9” and sub-designs without numbers. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numerals “1” to “9” on a rear symbol composed of a predetermined sea creature (octopus, shark, crab, etc.). The sub-design is composed of a simple triangular design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is a big hit, a fluctuation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A” or “big hit C”, a variable display in which any of the main symbols to which “1 to 9” is added is performed. In the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which any of the main symbols to which even numbers "2, 4, 6, 8" are added is prepared. That is, only in the case of the probability change jackpot, there is a possibility that the fluctuation display in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are attached is prepared. For this reason, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of odd numbers being aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and the upper 3/4 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower quarter is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are alternately arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from right to left with a periodicity to change and display. Done. In particular, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines L1 to L3, respectively. In addition, a right-upward oblique line and a right-downward oblique line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines L4 and L5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated lines L1 to L5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), the player can determine whether the combination is the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit). Overlooked or not) can be suppressed. In addition, if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present control example, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. . When there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. Despite the player continuously firing the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r. It is rare that there is no ball entry, and in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 has been stopped because the player quit the game. Is not played at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, a ball newly enters one of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r. In this case, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entry is executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is provided with a ball that has entered the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r. This is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed. As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the sub-display area Ds displays a substantially square execution display area Ds1a in which a symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed, and a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls. And a hold display area Ds1b having a horizontally long and substantially rectangular shape.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and the left end (outside the effective line) of the main display area Dm, three parts each of the main symbol and the sub symbol of the third symbol are displayed.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), or when each of the second ball entrances (the first (2) When the ball enters the entrance 640 and the second entrance 640r on the right side, the number of entered balls is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained number of balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and It is also displayed in the display area Ds. More specifically, in the reserved display area Ds1b, the number of retained balls based on entering the first entrance 64 and each second entrance (the second entrance 640, the right second entrance 640r) ) Are displayed as the same number as the sum of the number of reserved balls based on the entry into the ball. That is, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b, it indicates that the total number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved symbols are displayed, the total number of reserved balls is displayed. Indicates that there are four balls. Further, when no reserved symbol is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In FIG. 59 (b), the display content when the total number of the reserved balls based on entering the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls based on entering the second entrance is six is shown. And six circular holding symbols are displayed in the holding display area Ds1b. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b is updated in synchronization with the actual number of reserved balls. The reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b are displayed left-justified in order from the reserved symbol corresponding to the temporally older reserved ball.

  In the present control example, the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the ball entering each second entrance (the second entrance 640 and the right second entrance 640r) are respectively defined. Although it was configured to be able to hold up to 4 times, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and even if it is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times) good. In addition, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entrance 64 and the retained ball for entering the second entrances (the second entrance 640 and the right second entrance 640r). The upper limit of the number is not limited to the same. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entrance 64 may be greater than or less than the upper limit of the number of retained balls for entering each second entrance. Good. In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the reserved display area Ds1b, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, a color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60 to FIG. 63, a continuous announcement effect (eight pending effects) which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example will be described. This continuous announcement effect (8 holding effects) is based on the number of holding balls (holding balls of special design 1) based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 and each second entrance (second entrance). 640, an effect that may be executed when the total value of the number of reserved balls (reserved balls of the special symbol 2) based on entering the right second entrance port 640r becomes eight. .

  FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in a case where the start of eight pending effects has been determined. If a total of eight pitches are held during the variable display of the third symbol, it is determined whether or not to execute the eight hold effects one second before the end of the variable display. Although the details will be described later, the eight reserved effects are configured such that the more the lottery result with high expectation is reserved in the reserved balls, the more easily the execution is determined. Therefore, when the eight holding effects are executed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game, expecting that there is a big hit in the holding. When the start of the eight holding effects is determined, the text “Fish school mode is being prepared” is displayed above the variable display main display area Dm that is changing when the eighth holding ball is held. This allows the player to easily understand that the eight pending effects are executed before the effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to expect that a jackpot will be achieved with any of the eight fluctuation displays that are suspended.

  FIG. 60B is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in a case where eight pending effects are being executed. As shown in FIG. 60 (b), when the eight holding effects are executed, the characters “fish school mode” are displayed above the main display area Dm. In addition, many fish (fish schools) appear on the back of the sub display area Ds. By changing the display mode (back surface) of the execution display area Ds1a and the hold display area Ds1b, the player can confirm that the fluctuation display currently being executed and the fluctuation display being held are highly expected. It can be easily recognized.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a special press effect that may be executed in the eight pending effects. This special press effect is determined whether or not to execute when a reach occurs in the eight hold effects. Note that the reach is a state in which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the variable display, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. This is a mode in which the main symbols with the same number are displayed in a stopped state, indicating that there is a chance that the main symbols with the same number are aligned on the activated line. The example shown in FIG. 61 shows a state in which two main symbols with the number “1” are stopped and displayed on the activated line L3. In this case, since the main symbol with the number “1” is stopped and displayed on the right side of the middle symbol column Z2, the symbol becomes a jackpot stop symbol, so that the player is expected to expect the jackpot. be able to.

  When a reach occurs in the eight pending effects and the execution of the special press effect is determined, as shown in FIG. 61, the image of the button displaying the character “PUSH” is displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. By displaying the image of this button, it is possible to urge the player to press the frame button 22. Further, when the player presses the frame button 22 in the state shown in FIG. 61 (the state in which the button image is displayed), the lottery performed on the condition that the variable display being executed corresponds to the big hit is performed. When a winner is won, a special notification sound (fixed notification sound) is output. By outputting the special notification sound, it is possible to make the player recognize that the present fluctuation display will be a big hit before the third symbol is stopped and displayed. In the present control example, when it is determined that the special notification sound is output, the output of the special notification sound is not limited to one time, and may be output a plurality of times according to the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. I have. With this configuration, a player who wants to listen to the special notification sound can operate the frame button 22 many times while the button image is displayed. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, in addition to the special press effect, an effect for urging the user to press the frame button 22 is provided. Hereinafter, a press effect other than the special press effect is referred to as a normal press effect to distinguish it from the special press effect. In the normal press effect, for example, when developing into the super reach, the press of the frame button 22 is prompted, and when the press of the frame button 22 is detected, an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the super reach is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, the transition of the display mode of the sub-display area Ds during the execution of the eight pending effects will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 62, the transition of the display mode when a new winning is not detected during the period from the start of the execution of the eight pending effects to the end thereof will be described.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing a display mode of the sub-display area Ds in a case where the first variable display is being executed after the start of the eight pending effects. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when a lottery of a special symbol based on the first holding ball (oldest holding ball in time) is executed and a variable display indicating the result of the drawing is executed, the holding display is performed. The suspended symbols displayed in the area Ds1b are shifted and displayed one by one in the execution display area Ds1a. As a result, the reserved symbol is not displayed at the right end of the reserved display area Ds1b. Even in this case, the fish school display on the rear surface continues to be displayed for the entire sub-display area Ds. Then, irrespective of the number of fluctuations (the number of display of the reserved symbols), the fish school display over the entire sub-display area Ds is continued during the execution of the eight reserved effects. As a result, the fish school display indicating whether or not the eight holding effects are being performed can be displayed in a wider display range regardless of the number of holding balls. Further, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with the case where the display area of the fish school display is changed according to the number of retained balls.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the sub-display area Ds is not displayed while the suspended symbol displayed in the suspended display area Ds 1 b is lost and the variable display based on the last (eighth) suspended ball is being executed. The display of the school of fish over the entire area continues. Then, when the variable display based on the last reserved ball of the eight reserved effects is finished and the lottery result is out, the back of the sub display area Ds is thereafter returned to the normal back (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). This allows the player to easily recognize that the eight pending effects have ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the transition of the display mode when a new winning is detected during the period from the start of the execution of the eight pending effects to the end thereof will be described. In the state where the eight holding effects are executed and the back of the sub display area Ds is displayed as the school of fish (see FIG. 63 (a)), the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or the second entrance on the right side. When a new winning for the ball opening 640r is detected, the display area after the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning is set to a different mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the display area on the right side of the sub-display area Ds including the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved ball has a display mode in which many bubbles are displayed on the back surface ( (Bubble display). On the other hand, the back side of the display area on the left side of the holding symbol corresponding to the new holding ball is held as the school of fish. As described above, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that was retained when the eight reserved effects were started, and the reserved ball that did not exist when the eight reserved production was started (the execution of the eight reserved effects was performed). Different from the reserved image corresponding to the reserved ball that is not used to determine whether or not to perform the game, so that the player can clearly recognize how far the eight reserved effects will continue. Can be. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the area is divided into an area for displaying a reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that was retained when the eight reserved effects were started, and an area for displaying a reserved symbol corresponding to a new reserved ball. Is referred to as “split display”.

  This divided display basically continues until the variable display corresponding to the eight reserved balls to be subjected to the eight reserved effects ends. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the variable display corresponding to the eighth hold ball in the eight hold effect is executed, the entire hold display area Ds1b is set to bubble display, and the execution display area is displayed. Only Ds1a is fish school display. In this state, when the last variable effect of the eight pending effects is completed and the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the departure is stopped and displayed, after the next change, as shown in FIG. Return to That is, not only the fish school display but also the bubble display is canceled. This allows the player to easily recognize that the eight pending effects have ended.

  As described above, in the first control example, a new start winning is detected during the execution of the eight holding effects, and when the number of the holding balls increases, the number of the holding balls to be subjected to the eight holding effects is increased. The reserved symbol and the reserved symbol corresponding to the new reserved ball are divided and displayed. Here, even if a new starting prize is detected until the end of the eight-holding effect, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to the fish school display, the player is notified at the end of the eight-holding effect. There is a risk of giving a sense of discomfort. Even though the reserved symbols are displayed, the sub display area Ds display mode returns to the normal mode, which may give an impression that the eight reserved effects have ended halfway. Because. On the other hand, in the first control example, the divided display is performed so that it is possible to clearly indicate to the player how long the eight pending effects continue when a new start winning is detected. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable at the end of the eight pending effects.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, details of main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) provided in pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 64) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first random number counter (the big jackpot symbol) used for selecting the jackpot type (the jackpot symbol) are set. Initial value setting of a hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, a change type counter CS1 used to select a change pattern, and a first hit random number counter C1 , And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 89). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for a winning with respect to the first ball entrance 64 and each second ball entrance (the second ball entrance 640, A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for a prize to the right second entrance 640r) is provided. As described above, in the present control example, up to four retaining balls are provided for each of the first entrance 64 and each second entrance. For this reason, if a ball wins in the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be selected by lottery, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when a special symbol jackpot is not being played, each counter value becomes special. When the ball is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and one of the respective second entrances wins, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the oldest counter value in time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or Various settings and control processing for changing and displaying the special symbol 2 (dynamic display) are executed.

  On the other hand, during a period in which the special symbol 1 cannot be selected by lottery, such as during a special symbol change display or during a jackpot game, a ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or each of the second ball entrances, and the winning entry is made. When the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball opening is less than the upper limit value (four in this control example), each counter value is obtained and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is obtained. It is stored in the storage area 203b. If the corresponding number of reserves is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in this example), each counter value is not obtained and only the prize balls (five prize balls in this example) are obtained. Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

  In the present control example, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is set to four for each of the first entrance 64 and each of the second entrances. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, a configuration in which no upper limit is provided may be adopted.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 89).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or each second ball entrance (second entrance). The ball 640 and the right second ball entrance 640r) are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 66 (a)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit specified in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  Here, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol big hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each game state in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 lottery. Is "7", and if it is "7", it is determined to be a big hit. Also, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is in the range of “0 to 9”. Then, if it is within the range of “0 to 9”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number which is a special symbol big hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is special. It becomes the one at the time of the jackpot of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which becomes a special symbol jackpot, and the random number “7” is stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table as described above. 202a. As described above, the total number of random number values is 400, and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 1, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/400”. On the other hand, in the special symbol high-probability state, there are ten values of the first random number counter C1 that is a special symbol jackpot, and the random number values “0 to 9” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table as described above. 202a. As described above, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/40”.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter ranging from 0 to 99. When the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, one of the big hits A to C is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)). Jackpot type is selected.

  Here, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the big hit type selection table 202b, the selected big hit type is defined in association with each range of the value of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), "big hit A" is defined in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 47". The "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the special symbol probable change state. Since the number of rounds is the largest, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probable change state that is advantageous to the player, “big hit A” is the most unfavorable jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 48 random numbers for which “big hit A” is selected. Is 48%.

  In addition, "big hit B" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "48 to 87". The "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal symbol time saving state. Since the number of rounds is the largest along with “big hit A”, it is advantageous for the player in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player, but since the probability change state is not given after the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is the most disadvantageous Becomes Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 40 random numbers for which “big hit B” is selected. Is 40%.

  In addition, "big hit C" is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "88 to 99". This "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is two rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to the special symbol probable change state. Since the number of rounds is the smallest, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, there are 12 random numbers for which "big hit C" is selected. The rate at which the "big hit C" is selected is 12%.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear departure" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance (second entrance). The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball entrance 640 and the right second entrance entrance 640r) are won.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability cases and a special symbol for low-probability cases. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely deviated”. In this table, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "reach out of front and rear" or "reach other than front and rear out". In the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as small as 0 to 79 and the probability is low. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined by the variation type counter CS1 from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 89) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 67 and 68) storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided within.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 67 and 68). In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the game state are set, and for each of them, a variation pattern table is set for each of the hit / failure determination results. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interruption process (see FIG. 78), and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 on the left or right. It is acquired when it is detected that it has been performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is defined in the random number table for normal symbol 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When the value of the random number corresponding to the hit specified in the normal symbol per hit random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the normal symbol per random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 66 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table 202c per symbol. In the random number per normal symbol table 202c, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are 21 random numbers which are the hit of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 20". . Since the total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the total number of random numbers that can be won is 16, so that the probability of winning a symbol is normally “16/240”.

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 , The normal symbol change display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits. However, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability (during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol), there are 200 random numbers that can hit the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5-204”. The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that can be obtained is 200, so that the probability of winning a symbol is normally "1 / 1.2". .

  If the ball passes the normal entrance (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 , The normal symbol change display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short, such as “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further reduced. Since it is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "1 second × 2 times" when the ordinary symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 89).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type selection table 202b, a normal symbol random number table 202c, At least a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is stored.

  The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 66A) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter C1 is stored as described above. The jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored. As described above, the determination values of the first hit type counter C2 are It is defined in association with the jackpot type. The normal symbol per random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) is a data table in which the normal symbol hit determination value is stored as described above. Each of these tables has already been described in detail together with the description of the various counters, and a description thereof will be omitted here.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is specified for each display mode. Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.

  FIG. 67A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example selects a fluctuation pattern when the gaming state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol). A normal table 202d1 used for this purpose and a non-normal table 202d2 used for selecting a variation pattern in a game state (probable change state or time saving state) other than the normal state.

  First, the details of the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the normal table 202d1 is provided with a table that is referred to when a special symbol lottery result is a big hit and a table that is referred to when a special symbol is drawn. In each table, the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each symbol stop type (stop symbol).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the result of the hit determination is the big hit and the stop types are the big hits A and B, the value of the change type counter CS1 is set in the range of “0 to 29” and the change time is changed. Is defined in association with a normal reach A per 30 seconds, and a super reach A per variation time of 60 seconds is defined in a range of “30 to 198”. Further, for the stop type of the big hit C, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of “0 to 100” and the normal reach B of the variation time of 34 seconds is associated with the value, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is A super reach B corresponding to a fluctuation time of 64 seconds is defined in a range of “101 to 198”.

  On the other hand, when the result of determination is incorrect, the correspondence between the variation pattern and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 differs according to the total value of the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls is 0 to 4, for a completely out-of-stop type, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 have an out-of-length length variation A of 10 seconds. Are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the stop type of the reach other than the out-of-order deviation, the range of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 99” is defined in association with the normal reach A in which the variation time is 30 seconds, and “100 to 198”. In the range, a super-reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the super-reach. Further, with respect to the stop type of the out-of-reach reach, a super-reach in which the change time is 60 seconds is associated with all possible values of the change type counter CS1.

  On the other hand, when the total number of the retained balls is 5 to 7, the short variation A with a variation time of 5 seconds for all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 with respect to the completely deviated stop type. It is defined in association. In addition, for the stop type of the reach other than the out-of-order deviation, the range of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 150” is defined in association with the normal reach A in which the variation time is 30 seconds, and “151 to 198”. In the range, a super-reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the super-reach. Further, with respect to the stop type of the out-of-reach reach, a super-reach in which the change time is 60 seconds is associated with all possible values of the change type counter CS1.

  As described above, when the number of reserved balls increases (five or more), a variation pattern having a shorter variation time becomes easier to select than when the number of retained balls is small. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a new starting prize will be generated during the change, so that the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit number (total of eight), and further, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the mouth 640 and the right second ball entry port 640r and becoming an invalid ball. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is small, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is easily selected, so that a new start winning can be easily generated during the long variation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the suspended ball from being lost during the game and the fluctuation display from being interrupted, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

  Next, the details of the non-normal table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 68, when the result of the hit determination is the big hit and the stop types are the big hits A and B, the value of the change type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 49”, and the normal reach A with the change time of 30 seconds is shown. The super reach A is defined in association with a range of “50 to 198” and a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Further, for the stop type of the big hit C, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of “0 to 100” and the normal reach B of the variation time of 34 seconds is associated with the value, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is A super reach B corresponding to a fluctuation time of 64 seconds is defined in a range of “101 to 198”.

  On the other hand, when the result of the determination is incorrect, the correspondence between the variation pattern and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 differs according to the total value of the number of reserved balls, as in the normal table 202d1. More specifically, when the total number of retained balls is 0 to 2, for a completely out of stop type, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 have a variation length variation B of 7 seconds. Are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the stop type of the reach other than the out-of-order reach, a normal reach B with a change time of 15 seconds is defined in association with all possible values of the change type counter CS1. In other words, a super-reach with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with all possible values of the variation type counter CS1.

  On the other hand, when the total number of the reserved balls is 3 to 7, the short variation B in which the variation time is 2 seconds and the variation that the variation type counter CS1 can take is 2 seconds with respect to the completely different stop types. It is defined in association. In addition, for reach types other than the out-of-front and off-reach types, a normal reach B with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated with all possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Further, with respect to the stop type of the out-of-reach reach, the out-reach super reach of which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds is defined in association with all possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  As described above, in the specially changed state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, a variation pattern of a shorter time is easily selected compared to the normal state. Thereby, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the advantageous probability change state or the time saving state.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , A special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a time reduction counter 203g, a probable change flag 203h, a change order storage area 203i, a change execution flag 203j, and a big hit flag 203k. , And a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and in each of these areas, a random number counter C1 for the first and a type counter for the first are stored. Each value of C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas ( Of the vacant areas of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are executed. It is shifted (moved) to an area, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) is packed into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball opening 64, and as soon as the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained in accordance with the starting winning, the original special symbol is obtained. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is estimated (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various types of data obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the winning start. Predicting the information will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to a success / failure, a stop type, a variation pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrong, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information as a winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, data (each counter C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the start winning at each of the second entrances (the second entrance 640, the right second entrance 640r). Is stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the right or left normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area). Of the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Of the winning prize data stored in the reserved area of the area No. is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning) (the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) in the displayed fluctuation. The initial value of the value N1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 increases, One is added to the maximum value 4 (see S604 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed (see S206 in FIG. 79).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into each of the second entrances (the second entrance 640, the right second entrance 640r). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display 1 (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the value N2 of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Each time the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2 increases, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S612 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed (see S211 in FIG. 79).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) are reserved balls. The sound lamp control device 113 is notified by a number command (see S207 and S212 in FIG. 79 and S605 and S613 in FIG. 83). The reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. Command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs the main control by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls in the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 retained in the device 110. As a result, the number of reserved display balls managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is retained in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even if the actual number of balls is shifted from the actual number of balls to be changed, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved display number for notifying the display control device 114 every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbol in the reserved display area Ds1b of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a ball holding number (standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Is a counter for counting the number of times up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S804 in FIG. 86). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one every time a new variable display of the normal symbol is executed (see S705 in FIG. 85).

  If the ball passes through one of the right and left normal ball entrances 67 and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 86). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 86: No).

  The time reduction counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203g is set to zero, and 100 is set at the end of the big hit B each time a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110 and the "big hit B" is reached. . That is, when the "big hit B" is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the counter 203g during the time reduction (see S1212 in FIG. 90). Thereafter, 1 is decremented each time the change display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is completed until the value of the counter 203g during time reduction becomes 0 (S223 in FIG. 79).

  When the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203g during the time saving is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the random number table for the normal symbol for the high probability time. On the other hand, when the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0 and the probability change flag 203h described later is off, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. (See S710 and S711 in FIG. 85).

  The probable change flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special design). This indicates that the special symbol is in a certain state. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203h is in the off state, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability change flag 203h is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON each time the "big hit A, C" ends. On the other hand, the probability change flag 203h is turned off each time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or the start of the jackpot is set.

  When the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 81) and the special symbol 2 change start process (FIG. 82) are executed by the MPU 201, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is executed, respectively. In the special symbol 1 change start process and the special symbol 2 change start process, the probable change flag 203h is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 1 based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. A special symbol 2 lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203h is off, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (S403 and S404 in FIG. 81, and S503 in FIG. 82). , S504).

  In this control example, while the probable change state is set as the game state, the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is also set. Therefore, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time reduction counter 203g and the probability change flag 203h are referred to determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state. Specifically, when the value of the counter 203g during time saving is equal to or greater than 1 or the probability change flag 203h is ON (if the time reduction state is in the time reduction state or the probability change state), it is determined that the time reduction state of the normal symbol is normal, The lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off (in neither the time reduction state nor the probability change state), the normal symbol per random symbol table for the low probability time is used. A lottery is performed (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 85).

  The fluctuation order storage area 203i stores information indicating the order in which the data (reserved balls) stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are stored. Storage area. The change order storage area 203i is composed of eight holding areas and one execution area, and each area has data for identifying whether it is a special symbol 1 lottery or a special symbol 2 lottery. Is stored. Specifically, for example, if 01H is stored, it means that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is suspended, and if 02H is stored, it means that the lottery of the special symbol 2 is suspended. means. If 00H is stored, it means that it is a free area.

  More specifically, the ball is entered at the timing when the ball has won (started winning) the first entrance 64 or each of the second entrances (the second entrance 640, the right second entrance 640r). The value corresponding to the entered entrance is stored in the lowest area (the area with the smaller area number) among the eight reserved areas (the first reserved area to the eighth reserved area) (S607 in FIG. 83). , S615). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in main controller 110, the data stored in change order storage area 203i is shifted (moved) to the execution area side and moved to the execution area. Based on the information, it is determined whether to execute the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 (see S304 and S306 in FIG. 80).

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved eighth area) into the reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved seventh area) having the smaller area number. Done. By referring to the change order storage area 203i at the start of the change, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed sequentially from the oldest reserved ball.

  The variation execution flag 203j indicates whether or not to perform a special symbol lottery based on the special design 1 reserved ball when the variation display ends (the next special symbol lottery condition is satisfied) in a state where the reserved ball exists. This flag indicates whether or not to perform a special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2. The variable execution flag 203j is composed of 2 bits, the upper bit corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the lower bit corresponding to the special symbol 2, respectively. If each bit is on, it means that it is the execution timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the bit, and if it is off, it means that it is not the execution timing of the variable display. The variation execution flag 203j is obtained after determining the type of the oldest reserved ball (whether it is the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 or the reserved ball of the special symbol 2) from the data of the variation order storage area 203i. Is updated to a state corresponding to the determined type (see S305 and S307 in FIG. 80).

  The big hit flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit is being made. When the big hit flag 203k is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, and when it is off, it indicates that there is no big hit. The big hit flag 203k is turned on when the start of the big hit is set (see S221 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the time of jackpot end (see S1214 in FIG. 90).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 69, the ROM 222 stores a sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, a press-down notice selection table 222b, a back switching table 222c, a special back switching table 222d, a continuous announcement lottery table 222e, and an operation scenario table 222f. And at least an effect upper limit number table 222g.

  The sub-variation pattern selection table 222a is referred to in order to select a detailed mode of the fluctuation effect (variation display) based on the rough fluctuation effect (variation display) mode notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. It is a table to be performed. In the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, a detailed variation effect mode is defined in association with a value of a sub-variation selection counter 223t described later. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the sub variation pattern selection table 222a (see S3505 in FIG. 106).

  The press-down notice selection table 222b is a table for selecting the type of the notice effect (notice type) to be executed when the player presses the frame button 22 in the normal press effect. The details of the press-down notice selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 70A is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the press-down notice selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 70 (a), the press-down notice selection table 222b defines the range of the effect counter value and the notice type in association with each stop type in the variable display in which the normal press effect is set. Have been. The effect counter is configured as a loop counter that is periodically updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated, for example, in the main processing (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. (Not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), when the stop types are the jackpots A and B, the effect counter value is set in the range of “0 to 120” and the notice type of “fish school” is defined in association with the range. On the other hand, the notice type of “bubble” is defined in association with the value of the effect counter in the range of “121 to 198”. Although not shown, the notice type of “fish school” indicates a notice effect in which a school of fish crosses the back of the third design displayed on the third design display device 81, and the notice type of “bubble” indicates the third design. Shows a notice effect that bubbles are generated on the back side of.

  When the stop type is the big hit C, the notice type of “bubble” is defined in association with all possible values of the effect counter. On the other hand, in the case of out-of-reach, the notice type of “fish school” is defined in association with the effect counter value in the range of “0 to 15”, and the notice type of “bubble” in the range of “16 to 198”. Are defined in association with each other.

  As described above, when the number of rounds is 16 jackpots A and B, the ratio of selection of the “fish school” as the notice type is higher than that in the case of the out-of-front-reach reach, so the announcement effect of the “fish school” occurs. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot. On the other hand, the notice type of “bubble” is more likely to be selected in the case of the jackpot C or the out-of-order reach. That is, when a notice effect of “bubble” occurs and a big hit occurs, the possibility of the “big hit C” increases. As described above, when the "big hit C" is reached, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probable change state, so that there is an advantageous state in which the possibility of a big hit again at short intervals (small lottery times) increases. Therefore, when a notice effect of “bubble” occurs, it is possible to make the player more strongly wish to be a big hit.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The back switching table 222c is a table that defines the order of the stages (back images) that are changed when the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the normal press effect or the special press effect does not occur.

  Details of the back switching table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the back switching table 222c. As shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the back switching table 222c, the value of the mode counter 223i, the value of which is updated each time the press of the frame button 22 is detected, and the type of the back image (back type). It is defined in association. The mode counter 223i increments the value of the mode counter 223i by one each time the stage (back type) is changed and the stage (back type) is changed by pressing the frame button 22 during the period in which the stage (back type) can be changed. Is done. Then, when the stage is changed while the value of the mode counter 223i is "3", the value is updated to "1".

  As shown in FIG. 70B, the back surface A (morning stage) is defined in association with the value “1” of the mode counter 223i, and the back surface B (evening stage) is defined in association with “2”. The back surface C (night stage) is defined in association with “3”. Therefore, every time the player operates the frame button 22, the back type can be changed from back A to back B to back C →. Therefore, the back type can be changed in accordance with the mood of the player, so that a monotonous game can be prevented (suppressed).

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. When the time measured by the RTC 292 is in a specific time zone, the special back switching table 222d is a table that defines the order of the special stage type (special back type) set during that time zone. Details of the special rear switching table 222d will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special back switching table 222d. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the special mode switching table 222d has a special mode counter 223m in which the value is updated every specific time period (every three minutes after the power is turned on). And the type of the special stage (special back type) are defined in association with each other. Note that the value of the special mode counter 223m is incremented by one in the range of "1 to 3" every time a special stage is newly set (each time a specific time zone is set). Then, when the stage is changed while the value of the special mode counter 223m is "3", the value is updated to "1" as in the case of the mode counter 223i.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), a special back surface A (town stage) is defined in association with the value “1” of the special mode counter 223m, and a special back surface B (Mori stage) for “2”. A special back surface C (sea stage) is defined in association with “3”. Therefore, the special stage can be changed from special back A to special back B to special back C every time during a specific time period (3 minutes every hour after the power is turned on). it can. Therefore, the special stage can be changed to a different special stage depending on the time zone, and the mode of the special stage can be diversified.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The continuous announcement lottery table 222e is a table which is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects). In the case where the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are each stored as the upper limit value of four balls, and it becomes 1 second before the end of the variation display being executed, this continuous notice With reference to the lottery table 222e, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects). Details of the continuous announcement lottery table 222e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the continuous announcement lottery table 222e. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the continuous preview lottery table 222e, the range of the value of the effect counter determined to execute the continuous preview effect is defined for each special symbol lottery result. The determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect (eight pending effects) is performed on the eight reserved balls in order from the temporally older reserved ball. Then, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed in the determination for any of the retained balls, even if there is an undetermined retained ball, the determination is terminated at that time and the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is not to be executed in the determination made for all eight reserved balls, the continuous announcement effect is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the fluctuation pattern hits and the super reach is reached, the pre-read ball to be judged becomes the judgment target, and the value of the effect counter becomes “0”. 180 ", a continuous announcement effect is set. Of the 199 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter, 181 are the counter values (random values) that are determined to execute the continuous announcement effect, so that the ball hits the eight holding balls and reaches the super reach. When there is a corresponding reserved ball, a continuous announcement effect (eight reserved effects) is set at a rate of about 91% (181/199).

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach, the prefetched holding ball becomes a judgment target, and if the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 99", A continuous announcement effect is set. Of the 199 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the effect counter value, the number of counter values (random values) determined to execute the continuous announcement effect is 100, so the super reach is out of the eight reserved balls. If there is a reserved ball corresponding to the above, a continuous announcement effect (8 reserved effects) is set at a rate of about 50% (100/199).

  Note that, except for the above two types of pre-reading results (winning super reach, out-of-reach super reach) are not specified in the continuous announcement lottery table 222e, and therefore, it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is executed regardless of the value of the effect counter. Never. In this way, by performing the continuous announcement effect only when the hold ball corresponding to the super reach or the out-of-reach super reach is included in the hold, the jackpot of the player when the continuous announcement effect is started Expectations can be increased.

  In the first control example, the continuous announcement effect may be set only when there is a holding ball corresponding to the hit super reach or the missing super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be determined arbitrarily. For example, in the case where a hold ball causing a reach is included, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not a continuous announcement effect can be performed on the hold ball, or a hold ball corresponding to a stop type that is completely out of hold. Also in such a case, the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be determined with a lower probability than when reach occurs. This makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of the continuous announcement effect.

  In the first control example, it is configured to determine whether to execute the continuous announcement effect for each of the eight reserved balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which all the prefetch results of the eight reserved balls are acquired, and whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is determined once. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load when determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The operation scenario table 222f is a table that defines the light emission pattern (operation scenario) of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 of the rotation unit 500. In the operation scenario table 222f, the lighting state of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is set in association with the value of the operation pointer 223ae updated according to the number of operation steps of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500. Details of the operation scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the operation scenario table 222f. As shown in FIG. 71 (c), in this operation scenario table 222f, a combination (lighting pattern) of lighting states to be set for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is defined in association with the value of the operation pointer 223ae. ing. The data indicating the lighting state of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is composed of three bits as shown in FIG. 71C, and indicates the lighting state of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED in order from the upper bit. . More specifically, if each bit is 1 (ON), it means that the LED of the corresponding color is set to a lighting state, and if each bit is 0 (OFF), the LED of the corresponding color is turned off. Means to set. For example, if the data indicating the lighting state is “001B”, it means that the red and green LEDs are turned off and the blue LED is turned on. Also, for example, if the data indicating the lighting state is “101B”, it means that the green LED is turned off and the red and blue LEDs are turned on. In this case, red and blue are combined, and the diffuser plate appears purple.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (c), for the value “00H” of the operation pointer 223ae, “000B” is all defined as the lighting state of the LEDs 1 to 40. Therefore, while the value of the operation pointer 223ae is “00H”, all of the LEDs 1 to 40 are set to the light-off state. The value of the operation pointer 223ae is updated according to the number of steps of the drive motor 457 of the rotation unit 500 (the value of the step counter 223ad).

  Also, for the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223ae, “000B” is defined in association with the lighting state of the LEDs 1 to 5, and “001B” is defined in association with the lighting state of the LEDs 6 and 7. I have. Although not shown, “001B” is also defined in association with the lighting state of the LEDs 9, 10, 12, and 13. On the other hand, “000B” is defined in association with the lighting state of the other LEDs. As a result, the drive motor 457 performs a three-step rotation operation, so that the blue LEDs of the LEDs 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, and 13 are set to the lighting state from the fourth step. As a result, the right end of the fourth stroke (LEDs 6 and 7), the fifth stroke (LEDs 9 and 10), and the sixth stroke (LEDs 12 and 13) of the character of "this" displayed in the rotation display effect is displayed as an afterimage. Can be done.

  For the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223ae, “000B” is defined in association with the lighting state of the LEDs 1, 3 to 5, and “001B” is associated with the lighting state of the LEDs 2, 6, and 7. Stipulated. Although not shown, “001B” is also defined in association with the lighting state of the LEDs 9, 10, 12, and 13. On the other hand, “000B” is defined in association with the lighting state of the other LEDs. Thereby, in addition to the right end of the fourth stroke (LEDs 6 and 7), the fifth stroke (LEDs 9 and 10), and the sixth stroke (LEDs 12 and 13) of the character of "this" displayed in the rotation display effect, The right end of the image (LED2) can be displayed as an afterimage.

  Hereafter, the lighting state (light emission pattern) for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 for displaying the afterimage constituting the character of “hit” is defined for each value of the operation pointer 223ae. In this combination of the lighting states, one rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is set. When the rotation unit 500 makes one rotation, the value of the operation pointer 223ae is reset to 00H, and the lighting state of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is set again from the top of the operation scenario table 222f. As a result, the lighting operation of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 can be made the same for each round, so that the player can more surely recognize the afterimage consisting of the character "hit" described above with reference to FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The effect upper limit number of times table 222g is a table in which the upper limit of the number of executions of the jackpot effect using the rotating unit 500 is defined. As described above, the rotating unit 500 includes the substrate member 531 on which the plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted. Therefore, when a jackpot effect using the rotating unit 500 is performed, the LED 532 and the IC / capacitor mounted on the substrate are provided. Generates heat by operating. For this reason, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder connecting the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted by the influence of heat generation, resulting in poor contact. For this reason, in the present control example, in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotation unit 500, the upper limit value of the operation number of the rotation unit 500 according to the elapsed time (time zone) is defined in the effect upper limit number table 222g. Then, when an effect mode involving the operation of the rotating unit 500 is selected in a state where the upper limit value has been reached, an alternative effect in which the rotating unit 500 does not operate is replaced. Accordingly, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that failure such as poor contact can be prevented (suppressed). Details of the effect upper limit number table 222g will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effect upper limit number of times table 222g. As shown in FIG. 72, in the effect upper limit number table 222g, each time period and the upper limit value of the number of times of operation of the rotating unit 500 in the time period are defined in association with each other. The time zone is determined by the time measured by the RTC 292 electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. The number of operations of the rotating unit 500 is counted by a rotating display number counter 223x provided in the RAM 223.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in the effect upper limit number table 222 g, “0 times” is defined as the upper limit number in association with the time zone of “00:00 to 08:59”. Therefore, even if an effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates during this time period is selected, the rotating unit 500 does not operate and an alternative effect is executed. The reason why the rotation unit 500 is not operated during the time period of “00:00 to 08:59” is because it is outside the business hours of a general hall. Outside the opening hours of the hall, an effect is performed in which the rotating unit 500 operates by, for example, a trial hit by a clerk. If the upper limit number of times is reached, the rotating unit 500 may be operated when the player plays a game. I can no longer do it. In order to avoid this situation, in the present control example, the upper limit value is set to 0 so that the rotating unit 500 does not operate in the time period of “00:00 to 08:59”, which is highly likely to be outside the opening hours of the hall. ing.

  In addition, for the time period of “09:00 to 11:59”, “2 times” is defined in association with the upper limit number of times. Therefore, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be limited to a maximum of two times in about three hours. For the time period of “12:00 to 14:59”, “4 times” is defined in association with the upper limit number of times. Therefore, when the effect of the upper limit number (two times) has been executed in the time zone of “09:00 to 11:59”, the rotation unit 500 can be operated up to two times at the maximum. On the other hand, when the rotation unit 500 does not operate in the time zone of “09:00 to 11:59” (the value of the rotation display number counter 223x is 0), the time of “12:00 to 14:59” The rotation unit 500 can be operated up to four times in the time zone. Similarly, in the subsequent time periods, the upper limit value increases twice by three every three hours. Accordingly, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed, and thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the substrate and the like inside the rotating unit 500 from being destroyed by heat. In addition, by defining a different upper limit number for each time zone, effects using the rotating unit 500 can appear uniformly in each time zone.

  For example, if only the total upper limit number of times from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to when the power is turned off is defined, the time from when the upper limit is reached to when the power is turned off is set. During this time, the effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates cannot be performed. Therefore, as the time zone in which the technique is performed is later, the possibility that the user can see the effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates is lower, so that the player who can play the game only in the late time zone feels unfair. There is a possibility that you can make it. On the other hand, in the present control example, the upper limit value of the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 is changed according to the time zone. This makes it possible to execute an effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates until the maximum number of times in each time zone is reached, regardless of the time when the game is started. Therefore, even a player who can play a game only in a late time zone can be caused to play a game in expectation of an effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that a player who can play a game only in a late time zone has an unfair feeling.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, and a time Effect execution flag 223g, input time storage area 223h, mode counter 223i, pressing period timer 223j, level storage area 223k, special mode counter 223m, touch effect effective time storage area 223o, interval counter 223p, Continuous notice flag 223q, remaining notice number counter 223r, divided display flag 223s, sub fluctuation selection counter 223t, back change inhibition flag 223u, press effect flag 223v, special notification flag 223w, and the number of rotation displays With the counter 223x A rotation counter 223Aa, a rotation display presentation flag 223Ab, a lighting setting flag 223Ac, and step counter 223Ad, and operation pointer 223Ae, a power-off flag 223Y, other memory areas 223z is at least provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first area to fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the special symbol 2 (first area to fourth area). ), And winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a start winning prize for the first entrance 64 or each of the second entrances (the second entrance 640, the right second entrance 640r). In the case where a lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed from each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired according to the starting winning. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various types of information obtained (acceptance, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern). Notified by command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command, and extracts the prize information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes four areas (first area to first area 64) corresponding to the type of the entrance (the first entrance 64 or each of the second entrances) that detected the entrance. Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, a determination as to whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect (eight pending effects) is performed. By configuring so that a continuous announcement effect (8 hold effects) can be executed before the change display corresponding to each hold ball is executed, each hold ball can be executed before the start of the change display. The player can be expected to be a big hit.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a special symbol 2 held by the main control device 110. Is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (the number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect for each special symbol type. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c is a variable display of the special symbol 2 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved in the main control device 110. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect of the special symbol 2 for each type of special symbol.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and controls the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get value. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the retained ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and outputs the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. The number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 detects the start winning and adds the number of balls to be retained in the variable display, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in a special symbol to reduce the number of reserved balls. In this case, the sound ball control device 113 transmits a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 calculates the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c corresponding to the command (see S3008 in FIG. 101). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c after the storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 reserved The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223c is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while being synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the special symbol 1 or the variation pattern command of the special symbol 2 transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3002 in FIG. 101), and the third symbol display device It is turned off when the variable display is set at 81 (see S3402 in FIG. 105). When the change start flag 223d is turned on, a display change pattern command is set based on the change pattern extracted from the received change pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3005 in FIG. 101), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. Off (see S3406 in FIG. 105). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f stores a random number value in the range of 0 to 198 acquired from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. The operation clock (operating frequency) of the random number generation IC can be updated to a different random number value for each of the eight reserved balls at least when determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, and the determination can be performed. An IC operable with an operation clock of about (1 MHz, for example) is employed. The value of the effect counter 223f is used when performing various determinations performed by the sound lamp control device 113, such as determining whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect and determining an announcement type of a normal press effect.

  The time effect execution flag 223g indicates whether or not to execute an effect (time effect) for changing to a special stage (special back type) in a specific time zone (3 minutes every hour after the power is turned on). This is a flag. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, an upper limit (for example, three months) is provided for a period in which the time effect can be performed by the pachinko machine 10, and after the upper limit has passed, even if a specific time zone is reached. Time production is not executed. As a result, the rarity of the time effect can be increased, and the player can be made to feel that he / she wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 before the upper limit period is reached. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 during the period until the upper limit period is reached can be improved. The time effect execution flag 223g is set to off when the initial value is set to off, and is set to on when it is determined that the date and time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is the upper limit period in which the time effect can be executed (FIG. 92, S2103). On the other hand, since the contents of the RAM 223 are not backed up when the power is turned off, the contents of the RAM 223 are turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

  It should be noted that the time effect may be configured to be executable without limitation without providing an upper limit period. In this case, since the time effect can be executed for a longer period, the pachinko machine 10 that can be enjoyed for a long time can be provided.

  The power-on time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As described above, in the first control example, a time effect (change to a special stage) is executed for three minutes every hour after the power is turned on. Whether or not to start executing the time effect is determined based on the difference between the time stored in the input time storage area 223h and the current time measured by the RTC 292. When the power-on time for the pachinko machine 10 is acquired from the RTC 292, the power-on time storage area 223h stores data corresponding to the time (see S2104 in FIG. 92).

  As described above, the mode counter 223i is provided when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the back type (stage) can be changed (outside the period of the normal press effect, the special press effect, the time effect, and the jackpot). , A storage area for storing data indicating the back type to be changed. The mode counter 223i is composed of counters that can take four values from 0 to 3, where "1", "2", and "3" are the back A (morning stage), the back B (evening stage), and the back, respectively. Corresponds to C (night stage). “0” is a value that can be taken only at the time of initialization, and indicates a state where the back type is not set. The value of the mode counter 223i is updated by 1 each time the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the period in which the back type can be changed (see S2402 in FIG. 95), and the back type corresponding to the updated counter value. Is set. For example, when the press of the frame button 22 is detected in a state where the value of the mode counter 223i is “2” (a state in which the back surface B is set), the value of the mode counter 223i is updated to “3” and , The back type is changed to the back C corresponding to the updated value “3”. When the value of the mode counter 223i is updated while the upper limit value “3” is set, the value is set to “1”. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the value is updated from the initial value “0” to “1”, and a process of setting the back surface A as the back surface type is performed (see S2105 in FIG. 92). .

  The pressing period timer 223j is a timer for measuring a period during which the frame button 22 can be received when a normal pressing effect or a special pressing effect is executed. When the execution start timing of the normal press effect or the special press effect has come, a timer value (effect period) corresponding to the type of the press effect to be executed is set in the press period timer 223j (S2602 in FIG. 97). ), A special notification sound setting process (see FIG. 96) executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 93), or a press effect setting process (see FIG. 97). (See S2507 in FIG. 96 and S2606 in FIG. 97). When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in a state where the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more, an effect corresponding to the pressing effect being executed is executed.

  The level storage area 223k is a storage area for storing information indicating an effect level (effect mode) of a touch effect, which is one of the interesting effects in the first control example. In the first control example, a touch sensor 290 is mounted on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is configured to be able to determine whether or not the player has touched the screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the first control example, an entertaining effect utilizing the touch sensor 290 is configured to be executable. Specifically, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect (touch effect) for urging the user to touch the screen is executed (not shown). This touch effect may be set during the execution of the variable effect for notifying the jackpot, and the mode changes each time the player touches the screen (for example, an indicator displayed on the third symbol display device 81). The effect is executed. In this touch effect, for example, the maximum value of the indicator is determined in advance for each jackpot type, and when the jackpot A is the most advantageous for the player, the indicator becomes max. In other words, if the touch effect appears during the change, the jackpot is determined at that time, and if the displayed indicator is max, it is determined that the most advantageous jackpot A will be determined. Can touch the screen.

  This touch effect is executed as an alternative effect to the effect in which the rotating unit 500 operates. This is because in the present control example, the detection range of the touch sensor 290 and the range of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 are close to each other. That is, when the touch effect and the rotation display effect are simultaneously performed, the player touches the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 may be damaged or the player may be injured. Further, since it is difficult to touch the touch sensor 290 by being blocked by the rotating unit 500, there is a possibility that a stress is given to the player. Therefore, in the present control example, the touch effect is used only as an alternative effect when the number of operations of the rotary unit 500 reaches the upper limit number so that the operation of the rotary unit 500 and the touch effect using the touch sensor 290 do not conflict. Is configured to be executable. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the touch effect and the rotation display effect from occurring at the same time, so that the player touches the rotation unit 500 and is injured, or the rotation unit 500 is damaged. It is possible to suppress stress on the player due to difficulty in touching the touch panel (touch sensor 290).

  The level storage area 223k stores information corresponding to how much the effect mode has changed in this touch effect (the amount of change in the indicator). Each time it is detected that the player has touched the screen in the touch effect, the data in the level storage area 223k is updated within the range equal to or less than the upper limit, and the display mode (the amount of the indicator) corresponding to the updated data is set. You. In addition, when a player's touch is not detected for a certain period (for example, two seconds) in the touch effect, the data in the level storage area 223k is updated in a direction to decrease the amount of the indicator, and the updated data is displayed. Is set. During the execution of the touch effect, if the touch operation is not performed, the indicator amount is reduced, so that the player can positively touch the screen.

  The special mode counter 223m stores a value corresponding to the type of the special stage set in the time production when the execution condition of the time production is satisfied (the time measured by the RTC 292 is in a specific time zone). It is a counter. The value of the special mode counter 223m is incremented by one in the range of "1 to 3" each time a new specific time zone is set, and a special back type corresponding to the value after the addition is set. Further, when a specific time zone is newly set while the value of the special mode counter 223m is “3”, the value is updated to “1” as in the case of the mode counter 223i. As described above, the values “1”, “2”, and “3” of the special mode counter 223m are the special back A (town stage), the special back B (Morikata stage), and the special back C (sea stage), respectively. Corresponding to

  The touch effect effective time storage area 223o is a storage area for storing a period in which a touch on the screen (detection of the touch sensor 290) is treated as valid in the touch effect. The effective time corresponding to the touch effect is stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223o at the start of the touch effect, and the effective time is decremented every time the touch sensor control processing is executed (S2702 in FIG. 98). reference). Only when the effective time stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223o remains, the effect for the player touching the screen is set.

  The interval counter 223p is a counter for counting a period during which the touch sensor 290 is off (a period during which the player does not touch the screen) during a touch effect. As described above, when a touch by a player is not detected for a certain period (for example, 2 seconds) in the touch effect of the present control example, the data in the level storage area 223k is updated in a direction to decrease the amount of the indicator. Then, a display mode corresponding to the updated data is set. Whether or not to perform the effect of reducing the amount of the indicator is determined by the value of the interval counter 223p.

  The continuous notice flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not a continuous notice effect (8 hold effects, see FIG. 60B) is being executed. When the continuous announcement flag 223q is on, it indicates that the continuous announcement effect is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not being executed. This continuous notice flag 223q is set to ON when execution of the continuous notice effect is set (see S3808 in FIG. 109). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the continuous announcement effect (see S3206 in FIG. 103).

  The remaining notice number counter 223r is a counter indicating the remaining number of continuous notice effects (the number of times of variable display). The continuous announcement effect continues over the variation display of the number of times of the value stored in the remaining announcement number counter 223r. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is set to 8 (see S3807 in FIG. 109), and every time the start of the variable display is set during the continuous announcement effect. The value is subtracted by one (see S3508 in FIG. 106).

  The split display flag 223s displays a split display (see FIG. 63) in the sub-display area Ds based on the fact that a new starting winning is detected and the number of reserved balls increases during the execution of the continuous announcement effect (8 reserved effects). This is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set. If the split display flag 223s is on, it indicates that the split display is set, and if it is off, it indicates that the split display is not set. As described above, the split display changes the back face with the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball to be subjected to the continuous announcement effect and the reserved symbol corresponding to the retained ball not to be subjected to the continuous announcement effect, and to which reserved symbol This is a display mode for clarifying whether or not the user should have a sense of expectation. Here, even if a new starting prize is detected until the end of the eight-holding effect, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to the fish school display, the player is notified at the end of the eight-holding effect. There is a risk of giving a sense of discomfort. Even though the reserved symbols are displayed, the sub display area Ds display mode returns to the normal mode, which may give an impression that the eight reserved effects have ended halfway. Because. On the other hand, in the first control example, the divided display is performed so that it is possible to clearly indicate to the player how long the eight pending effects continue when a new start winning is detected. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable at the end of the eight pending effects.

  The sub variation selection counter 223t is a counter used to select a detailed display mode of the variation pattern from the sub variation pattern selection table 222a. The random number value acquired from the random number generation IC is stored in the sub fluctuation selection counter 223t, similarly to the effect counter 223f. As described above, the detailed variation pattern display mode is defined in the sub variation pattern selection table 222a in association with the value range of the sub variation selection counter 223t. With the configuration in which the display mode of the variation pattern is selected using the sub variation selection counter 223t, the display mode can be selected at random.

  The back change prohibition flag 223u is a flag indicating whether or not the period during which the change of the back type is prohibited when the press of the frame button 22 is detected. Indicates that the period is On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the back type can be changed according to the operation of the frame button 22. Note that the period in which the change of the back type is prohibited is, specifically, during the execution of the normal press effect, the special press effect, the execution of the time effect, the big hit, and the like.

  The pressing effect flag 223v is a flag indicating whether a normal pressing effect or a special pressing effect is being executed. The pressing effect flag 223v is composed of, for example, 2 bits, with the upper bit corresponding to a normal pressing effect and the lower bit corresponding to a special pressing effect. If each bit is 1 (ON), it means that the press effect corresponding to the 1 (ON) bit is being executed. If it is 0 (OFF), the corresponding press effect is not being executed. Is shown. Specifically, if the pressing effect flag 223v is “10B” in binary notation, it indicates that the normal pressing effect is being executed. If “01B”, the special pressing effect is being executed. Is shown. In addition, if it is “00B”, it indicates that no pressing effect is executed. When the timing of starting the press effect is reached, the bit corresponding to the type of the press effect to be started is set to 1 (ON) in the press effect in-progress flag 223v (see S2603 in FIG. 97), and the end timing of the press effect. Is set to 0 (off) (see S2609 in FIG. 97).

  The special notification flag 223w is a flag indicating whether or not a special notification sound can be output during execution of the special press effect (see FIG. 61). When the special notification flag 223w is on, it indicates that the special notification sound can be output, and when it is off, it indicates that the special notification sound cannot be output. As described above, when it is determined that a special notification sound is to be output in a special press effect or not by a lottery, a special notification sound is output each time the frame button 22 is operated until the special press effect ends. Is set. With this configuration, a player who wants to hear the special notification sound can operate the frame button 22 many times during the execution of the special press effect. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. The special notification in-progress flag 223w is set to ON when a special notification sound execution lottery is won (see S2504 in FIG. 96), and is set to OFF at the end of the special press effect (see S2510 in FIG. 96).

  The number-of-rotations-display counter 223x is a counter for counting the number of executions of the effect (rotation display effect) in which the rotating unit 500 operates, and 1 is added to the value each time the rotation display effect is executed (FIG. 107). S3606). When the mode involving the rotation display effect is selected from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a based on the change pattern command, the value of the rotation display number counter 223x and the upper limit specified in the above-described effect upper limit number table 222g are set. By comparing the value with the value, it is determined whether the rotation display effect is set as it is as the mode of the current variation pattern or the touch effect is set as the alternative effect. In this determination, as described above, it is determined that the alternative effect is set when the value of the rotation display number counter 223x has reached the upper limit. By avoiding the execution of the rotation display effect exceeding the upper limit and executing the alternative effect, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the rotation unit 500 from frequently operating. Therefore, failure of the rotation unit 500 can be prevented (suppressed).

  The rotation number counter 223aa is a counter that counts the number of rotations of the rotation unit 500. Here, the rotation unit 500 is provided with an origin sensor (not shown). This origin sensor is already known and will be briefly described. However, when the rotation unit 500 is at the origin position (the rotation position shown in FIG. 35A), the output is turned on (H), The sensor is turned off (L) when the rotation position is shifted from the position (for example, the rotation position shown in FIG. 35B, etc., is different from the arrangement shown in FIG. 35A). Since the origin sensor is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 221 monitors the output of the origin sensor to determine whether the rotation position of the rotary unit 500 is the origin position. It can be easily determined whether or not it is. Each time the rotation display effect is started and the origin sensor is turned on by the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 (each time the rotation unit 500 makes one revolution), 1 is added to the value of the rotation number counter 223aa (S2902 in FIG. 100). reference). The execution start of the rotation display effect is set according to the value of the rotation number counter 223aa.

  The rotation display effect flag 223ab is a flag indicating whether or not the rotation display effect is being executed. When the rotation display effect flag 223ab is on, it indicates that the rotation display effect is being executed, and when it is off, it means that the rotation display effect is out of the execution period. The rotation display effect flag 223ab is set to ON when it is determined that the start timing of the rotation display effect has been reached (see S2803 in FIG. 99), and is set to OFF when it has been determined that the end timing of the rotation display effect has been reached. (See S2807 in FIG. 99).

  The lighting setting completed flag 223ac is a flag indicating whether or not the setting of the light emission pattern specified in the operation scenario table 222f has been started in the rotation display effect. When the lighting setting completed flag 223ac is on, it means that the setting of the light emitting pattern has been started, and when it is off, it indicates that the setting of the light emitting pattern has not been performed. While the lighting setting completed flag 223ac is on, the operation pointer 223ae is updated according to the driving amount (rotation amount) of the driving motor 457, and the lighting setting corresponding to the updated value is read from the operation scenario table 222f. Then, each LED 1 to 40 is set.

  The step counter 223ad is a counter that counts the number of drive steps of the drive motor 457. The drive of the drive motor 457 is controlled by a known motor driver. That is, by outputting a command for notifying the motor driver of operating conditions such as the rotation speed from the audio lamp control device 113, the motor driver controls the drive motor 457 with the operation content corresponding to the command. Specifically, the motor driver varies the operation speed (rotation speed) of the drive motor 457 by varying the output frequency of a control signal for setting the operation of the drive motor 457 in one step according to the command. be able to. In addition, every time the motor driver sets one-step operation for the drive motor 457, the motor driver outputs an execution signal for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 that the one-step operation has been set. The value of the step counter 223ad is updated according to the number of times the execution signal has been received. Based on the value of the step counter 223ad, the progress of the rotation operation can be accurately grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In the first control example, the rotation unit 500 is rotated at a rotation speed of, for example, 0.1 second per rotation. In addition, the configuration is such that the rotation unit 500 operates only 1/100 revolutions by one-step operation of the drive motor 457. Therefore, in this control example, the drive motor 457 is controlled at a speed of one step per millisecond. Accordingly, during the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500, an execution signal is output from the motor driver every millisecond.

  The operation pointer 223ae is a pointer indicating the progress of setting based on the operation scenario table 222f. Each time the value of the operation pointer 223ae is updated, a light emission pattern corresponding to the updated pointer value is read from the operation scenario table 222f and set.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to on before receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110 and executing power-off processing (see S2218 in FIG. 93). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the start-up process (see FIG. 91) of the sound lamp control device 113, if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 2008: Yes in FIG. 91), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then kept constant. This is a case where the sound lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, a case where there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been erased, and unnecessary information (or information incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information of the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S2009 in FIG. 91). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the reading of the instructions constituting the control program is not possible. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to be described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a bad data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c includes two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR-type ROM 234d. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are output from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 110) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 110) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 77) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and outputs one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process on the one-frame image display time in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM or an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or each of the second entrances. A power-on variation image that displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect when a ball entry to the ball entrance (second entrance 640, right second entrance 640r) is detected. Is an area for storing image data corresponding to. The power-on image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 110).

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81. Can be. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 can be recognized. May wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped until the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. it can.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the present control example, three types of back images (back surfaces A to C and special back surfaces) A to C are set for the back image for normal use and the back image for time production. Of these six types of rear images, the rear image corresponding to the rear surface A, which is the initial setting, is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, the other rear images are transferred to the normal video RAM 236 when the change condition for each rear type is satisfied.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 59 (b)) with numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbol are resident. You. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 each time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Accordingly, the first symbol display device 37 varies after the first ball entrance 64 or each of the second ball entrances (the second ball entrance 640, the right second ball entrance 640r) occurs. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the effect has been started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the sub symbol without a numeral is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sub symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Youth" and "Women" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Accordingly, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but displays the character in the resident video RAM 235. By reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Accordingly, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. Flag 233j, drawing target buffer flag 233k, new pending ball count flag 233m, pending symbol count counter 233n, new continuous preview command flag 233o, continuous preview information storage area 233p, error occurrence flag 233q, error discrimination flag 233r, rear image change flag 233 w and a rear image discrimination flag 233 x.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol, which is a sub-symbol with no number from “1” to “9”, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying a rotation angle when a sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as adolescent images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “morning stage”, “evening stage”, and “night stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image (special back A to C or the like) different from the back A to C is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed. .

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the backs A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In this control example, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 75) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 77) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is stored for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 76). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 76).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 76, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 77) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 76, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is used by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. It is set to ON during the processing (see FIG. 110) (see S6005 in FIG. 110). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. Is set to off (see S7805 in FIG. 121 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 112 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 112 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 112 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 112 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 113 to 117) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 118 to 120) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7701 in FIG. 121A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 121B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 122) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 77) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 77) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 77) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 112 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S7404 in FIG. 118) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 77), and at the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, obtain transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time, and obtain the transfer data. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 77, a back image used for one frame image, 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error design) ) Describes, for each sprite, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7406 of FIG. 118). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 122) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite in which no image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7913 in FIG. 122). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7914 in FIG. 122). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8002 in FIG. 123).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 112B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The new reserved ball count flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not to change the number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b of the third symbol display device 81. If the new reserved ball count flag 233m is on, it means that the display number of reserved symbols is changed based on the display reserved ball count command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and if it is off, it is not changed ( No display hold ball count command has been received). The new reserved ball count flag 233m is set to ON when the display reserved ball count command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 116A). The new reserved ball count flag 233m is referred to in various image setting processes (see S7501 in FIG. 119), and is set to off when the process of changing the display number of reserved symbols is executed (see FIG. 119). 119 S7503). Thereby, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The reserved symbol number counter 233n is a counter that counts the number of displayed retained symbols. The number of reserved symbols corresponding to the counter value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b. The value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is updated to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command each time the display reserved ball number command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (see S7003 in FIG. 116).

  The new continuous advance command flag 233o is a flag for determining whether or not to update the display setting of the continuous advance effect (8 pending effects). If the new continuous notice command flag 233o is on, it means that the display setting of the continuous notice effect is updated based on the display continuous notice command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and if it is off, it is not updated. Means that. The new continuous announcement command flag 233o is set to ON when a display continuous announcement command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7101 in FIG. 116B). Also, the new continuous notice command flag 233o is referred to in various image setting processes (see S7504 in FIG. 119), and is set to OFF when the process of changing the number of held symbols to be displayed is executed (FIG. 119, see S7506). As a result, the display mode can be updated to a display mode corresponding to the display continuous announcement command received from the audio lamp control device 113. Specifically, if the display continuous preview command is a command indicating the start of the continuous preview effect, a preview image (see FIG. 60A) corresponding to the start of the continuous preview effect is set (developed). Is done. If the display continuous preview command indicates the divided display (see FIG. 63), the divided display data of the distribution notified by the command is set (developed).

  The error occurrence flag 233q is a flag for determining whether an error has occurred. If the error occurrence flag 233q is on, it means that a warning image is set (developed), and if it is off, it means that it is not set. The error occurrence flag 233q is set to ON when an error command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7301 in FIG. 117B). The error occurrence flag 233q is referred to in various image setting processes (see S7507 in FIG. 119), and is set to OFF when a process of developing a warning image corresponding to the type of error is performed (see FIG. 119). See S7509 in FIG. 119). Thus, a warning image corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The error determination flag 233r is a flag that indicates the type of the error when the error has occurred. A corresponding warning image is displayed based on the type of error indicated by the error determination flag 233r. Each time an error command is received from the audio ramp control device 113, the error determination flag 233r is updated based on the error type indicated by the command (see S7302 in FIG. 117).

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7201 in FIG. 117A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7909 in FIG. 122), and is turned off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7910 in FIG. 122). As a result, a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON in the rear image determination flag 233x (FIG. 117 (a) ) Of S7202). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image determination flag 233x, the back type currently set can be easily specified.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this control example, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r) (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). This special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is held) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of the variable display held in the special symbol) N2) is obtained (S203). Then, of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, a variation execution determination process for determining the type of the special symbol for starting the variation display is executed (S204). Details of the change execution determination processing (S204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After finishing the process of S204, it is determined whether or not to execute the variation display of the special symbol 1 based on the status of the variation execution flag 203j set in the variation execution determination process (S204) (S205). . In the process of S205, when it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j indicates the variation execution in the special figure 1 (that is, the upper bit is ON) (S205: Yes), the variation display of the special symbol 1 is started. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S206.

  In the processing of S206, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set. (S207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S209), and this process ends. The special symbol 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S205 that the variation execution flag 203j is not in the state corresponding to the variation start timing of the special symbol 1 (that is, the upper bit is off) (S205: No), then the variation execution flag It is determined whether or not 203j is in a state indicating the change start timing of the special symbol 2 (that is, the lower bit is ON) (S210). In the process of S210, when it is determined that the variation execution flag 203j indicates the variation start timing of the special symbol 2 (the lower bit is ON) (S210: Yes), the variation display of the special symbol 2 is started. , To S211.

  In the processing of S211 to S213, the same processing as the processing of the above-mentioned reserved ball of the special symbol 1 (the processing of S206 to S208) is performed on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2. Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213). After shifting the data, a special symbol 2 change start process for starting the change display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S214), and this process ends. The details of the special symbol 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S210 that the status of the variation execution flag 203j is not the status indicating the variation start timing of the special symbol 2 (that is, the lower bit is ON) (S210: No), the process ends as it is. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), whether the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it is (S215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S215: No), the display content of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 change start process (S209) or a special symbol 2 change start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. 81 or FIG. When the special symbol 1 change start process or the special symbol 2 change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined in accordance with the value of the first random number counter C1. Is determined to be a jackpot A, a jackpot B, or a jackpot C.

  In the present control example, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B is turned on, the red LED is turned on. Turn on the green LED. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol 2 variation start process is selected. It is determined whether the result (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the result of the current lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S219). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S219, if the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89), the process branches to S1201: Yes to open the opening command. Is set. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  When the processing of S219 is completed, the probability change flag 203h is set to off and the value of the counter 203g during time saving is set to 0 (S220). The process of S220 is a process for setting the state of the big hit to the same state as the initial state. Next, the big hit flag 203k is set to ON (S221), and the process proceeds to S224.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S222), and the value of the time reduction counter 203g is determined. Is greater than or equal to 1 (S222: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S223), and the process proceeds to S224. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S224.

  In the process of S224 executed after the process of S221, S222, or S223, the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217, and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to synchronize the fluctuation stop (S224). After that, the process ends.

  Next, the variable execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (fluctuating effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is changed to the value of the various counters stored in either of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute based on the above.

  In the variation execution determination processing, first, 00B is set in the variation execution flag 203j to initialize (S301), and then the data of the variation order storage area 203i is acquired (S302). Then, the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203i is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the change order storage area 203i toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → third area The data in each area is shifted, for example, 5 areas, 7th area → 6th area, 8th area → 7th area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area of the change order storage area 203i is data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304).

  In the process of S304, when it is determined that the data of the execution area of the variation order storage area 203i is data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304: Yes), the variation execution flag 203j is set to the variation start timing of the special symbol 1. Is set to 10B (S305), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the data of the execution area of the change order storage area 203i is not data indicating the special symbol 1 (S304: No), the data of the execution area of the change order storage area 203i is changed to the special symbol 2 Is determined (S306). In the process of S306, when it is determined that the data of the execution area is the data indicating the special symbol 2 (S306: Yes), the state of the variation execution flag 203j is set to 01B indicating the variation start timing of the special symbol 2. (S307), this process ends, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data stored in the execution area of the change order storage area 203i is not the data indicating the special symbol 2 (S306: No), the present process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol change process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 change start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process (S209). This special symbol 1 change start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 79) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and is executed by various counters stored in the execution area. A process for performing a special symbol jackpot lottery (acceptance determination) based on the value and determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is.

  In the special symbol 1 change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area is acquired (S401).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a probable change state (S402). Specifically, when the probability change flag 203h is on, it is determined that the probability is changing, and when the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the probability is not changing (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state).

  In the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability is being changed (S402: Yes), based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S401 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. The lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S403). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for high probability. As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the probability change is not being performed (the probability variation flag 203h is OFF) (S402: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, and thus the pachinko machine 10 acquired in the process of S401. Based on the value of the random number per hit counter C1 and the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S404). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in a special symbol large hit random number table for low probability. “7” is set as the random number value that becomes the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches “7”, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired in the processing of S403 or S404 is a special symbol jackpot (S405), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S405: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S406). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the big hit type selection table 202b, and three types of special symbol big hits (big hits A, The jackpot type is determined from the jackpot B and the jackpot C). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 47”, it is determined that the hit is the big hit A (16 round positive change big hit), and if it is in the range of “48 to 87”, It is determined to be a jackpot B (16 rounds regular jackpot), and if it is in the range of “88 to 99”, it is determined to be a jackpot C (two rounds probability variable jackpot) (see FIG. 66 (b)).

  In the process of S406, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  When the process of S406 is completed, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S407), and the process proceeds to S410. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S407, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S405 that the special symbol is out of the way (S405: No), a display mode at the time of being out of place is set (S408). In the process of S408, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is set as a stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether the reach is a front-rear-reach, a reach other than the front-rear-reach, or a complete departure.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete out is set. If it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” , 99 ”, the reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. . Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S409). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S408, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. To determine.

  When the process of S407 or S409 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S407 or S409 is set (S410). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S406 or S408 is set (S411). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 89). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S411 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the special symbol 2 change start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 change start process (S214).

  This special symbol 2 change start process (S214) uses the counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and shifted to the execution area with respect to the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 81). The only difference is that a jackpot lottery and a change pattern are determined, and the other points are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the first entrance 64, or each second entrance (the second entrance 640, or the right entrance). 2) The presence or absence of a prize (starting prize) to the entrance 640r) is determined, and if there is a starting prize, the holding processing of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the held various random counters are performed. This is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is held) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present control example) (S603).

  If there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The special figure 1 reserved sphere number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the MPU 201 as an external output process of a main process (see FIG. 89) described later (S1101). Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 stored in the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

  After the special figure 1 pending ball count command is set by the processing of S605, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a (S606), and the data corresponding to the first special symbol is set in the least significant bit of the change order storage area 203i (S607). In the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set, if the value is 3, the third area is set, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in the change order storage area 203i in the change execution determination process (S204) described above, the first entrance 64 serving as a chance to draw a special symbol 1 as in the present control example, Even in the case where there are two types of each of the second entrances, which serve as a lottery trigger of the special symbol 2, the variation can be started in the order of winning the entrances.

  When the processing of S607 ends, the pre-reading processing (S620) is executed, and the process proceeds to S609. On the other hand, if there is no winning in the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S603: No), the processing of S604 to S607 and S620 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S609.

  In the process of S609, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (started winning) any one of the second entrances (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r) (S609). . When it is determined that the ball has won each second entrance (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r) (S609: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e The same process as when the first entrance 64 is won is performed.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S610), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present control example) ( S611: Yes), add 1 to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S612), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S613). Then, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b (S614), and the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203i (S614). The data corresponding to the special symbol 2 is set to the least significant bit (S615), a pre-reading process is executed (S620), and the present process ends. The determination of the first area in S615 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S607.

  In the processing of S609, whether there is a prize in each second entrance (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r) (S609: No), or each second entrance Even if there is a prize in the mouth (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S611: No). Then, the present process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 84, the prefetch processing (S620) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S620). This pre-reading process (S620) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 83), and is a process for determining a lottery result of each special symbol in advance and setting a winning information command based on the preliminary determination result. .

  In the pre-reading process (S604), first, a win / fail determination result is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in S606 or S614 of the above-described start winning process (S621). It should be noted that the result of the determination of success or failure determined here is determined in a case where a hit is made in the normal gaming state. Since the fluctuation time is set by being variable depending on the number of holdings, the timing at which the fluctuation starts cannot be determined between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that it is impossible to accurately determine the gaming state at the time of the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, it is only when the value of the first random number counter C1 having a common jackpot determination value of “7” in the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state is that the result of the success / failure determination can be accurately determined. Therefore, in the process of S621, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a hit during the normal gaming state.

  Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in the process of S621 is a hit (S622). If it is determined that the hit result is a hit (S622: Yes), the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in S606 or S614 of the above-described start winning process. The lottery result 1 is set (S623). Then, the process proceeds to S625.

  On the other hand, in the process of S622, if it is determined that the result of the hit determination is not a hit (that is, it is out of order) (S622: No), the lottery result 1 is out of order (S624), and the process proceeds to S625. In the process of S625, the stop type is selected based on the stop type selection counter C3 and the lottery result 1 acquired in S606 or S614 of the above-described start winning process, and is set as the lottery result 2 (S625).

  Next, the variation pattern (variation time) is pre-read based on the variation type counter CS1 and the lottery result 2 acquired in S606 or S614 of the above-described start winning process (S626). Then, a winning command is set based on the success / failure (lottery result 1), the stop type (lottery result 2), and the prefetch result of the variation pattern (S627), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, the game ball wins at the first entrance 64 or each of the second entrances (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r). When a new hold is stored, based on the information (various counter values) stored and held, the result of the determination is determined (pre-read) before the start of the change and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the normal one) based on the result of the determination of whether the ball is reserved or stored, It is possible to execute an effect that displays a notice symbol or the like and suggests the result of the determination to the player.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 85, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78), and the normal symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric control attached to the second entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a winning of an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S701). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening / closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of suspended variable display in ordinary symbols) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: S704). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the processing of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S708). Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability change flag 203h is on, it is determined that the symbol is during the normal time reduction, and the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0, and If the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state.

  In the processing of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present control example, during a special symbol big hit, it is configured such that a lottery of a normal symbol is hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (ie, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is to be made to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second entrance 640, even if it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the special symbol jackpot, Many balls enter the entrance 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state (big hit state), the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 becomes the upper limit (four).

  In the processing of S709, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the processing of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number table for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is off (see FIG. 66 (c)).

  In the process of S708, if it is determined that the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is not present (the value of the counter 203g during the time-saving is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off) (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the low Based on the second random number table for probabilities (see FIG. 66 (c)), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 21 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is off (see FIG. 66 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712). The display mode of the hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made such that a symbol of “○” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (S714). If the time is in the time reduction (S714: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a big hit (S715). As a result of the determination in S715, when it is determined that the special symbol is being hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present control example, during a special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S715, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the entrance 640 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S714 that the time of the ordinary symbol is not reduced (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. At 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the processing of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S712: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set so that the symbol “x” is displayed as a stop symbol of the ordinary symbol. When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (S719). If the symbol is in the time reduction (S719: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds. (S720), and terminates this process. On the other hand, if it is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing ends. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability (in the time reduction state), the time of the variable display is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol (in the normal state). In addition, since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. Becomes

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand by the processing of S720 or the processing of S721 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “O” as the ordinary symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device 83). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S718, the symbol “x” as the ordinary symbol is stopped (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 89) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (normal symbol) is stopped (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S718.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S725), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 89) is next executed, the electric accessory 640a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 78). This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present control example) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S803). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is turned off. The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and the process ends. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S901). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, referring to FIG. 88, a description will be given of a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present control example) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1010. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not, it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process also shifts to S1010 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1010 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (see FIG. 89). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1010, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1010). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1011 and S1012).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1011 and S1012) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1011 and S1012) is also performed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1011 and S1012), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1011), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1012). After the execution of the initialization processing of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1013.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) If it is normal (S1007: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1013. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S1013, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1014), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 78), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices) An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 78). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 79) and the start winning process (see FIG. 83) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 84) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 90) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started when the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 85). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by S407 and S409 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81) and S507 or S509 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 82). In the first symbol display device 37, the variation display according to the variation pattern is started. In this control example, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, it corresponds to the variation patterns set in S407 and S409 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 81) and S507 or S509 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 82). When the changing time period has ended, the changing display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and S406 and S408 in the special symbol 1 changing start process (see FIG. 81), and the special symbol 2 changing start process (see FIG. 81). 82) in the display mode set in S506 or S508, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 85), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. I do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 85), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. The stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 85). Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has elapsed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1108, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 87 has been executed, the processing at S1112 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack When the pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from the processing of S1101. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). The jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 89). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or specific prize winning is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (S1201). Specifically, the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 79) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that it is the start timing of the big hit. If it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the timing of starting a jackpot has been determined (S1201: Yes), an opening command is set (S1215), and this processing ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that it is not the start timing of the big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the big hit is being made (S1202). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the process of S1202, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1202: No), the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the special symbol is being hit (S1202: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1203). In the process of S1203, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1203: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1204), and the number of rounds indicating the number of newly started rounds The command is set (S1205). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The number of rounds command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1203, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1203: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1206). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls are opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10) or more, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1206, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1206: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1207), and The process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1206: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1208). Specifically, when the special game state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual, the ending production start timing is determined.

  In the process of S1208, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1208: Yes), the ending command is set (S1209), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the process of S1208 (S1208: No), then it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S1210). In the process of S1210, when it is determined that the timing is not the jackpot end timing (S1210: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1210: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is the jackpot B (S1211). S1211: Yes), after the big hit B ends, in order to shift to the normal symbol time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to 100 (S1212), and the process shifts to S1214.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1211, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot B (that is, the jackpot A or C), after the jackpot A or C ends, to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, The probable change flag 203h is set to ON (S1213), and the process proceeds to S1214.

  In the processing of S1214, the big hit flag 203k is set to off (S1214), and this processing ends. By the jackpot control process (see FIG. 90), various settings relating to the jackpot can be performed.

<Control processing of voice lamp control device in first control example>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 91, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S2219 (see FIG. 93). ) Is determined (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, when receiving a power-off command from main controller 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 93), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2219. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2219 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is OFF (S2002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S2219 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S2219 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2002 that the power-off processing flag is ON (S2002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off processing in S2219 is performed. During the execution of the process, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing in S2219 is executed (see S2218 in FIG. 93). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2219 is executed, the process starting in S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is the instantaneous start-up process. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S2219 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S2008 is performed with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S2008 is performed via the processes of steps S2004 to S2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area in the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2010.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process from S2004 to the process of S2008 is performed via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S2010, an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, interruption permission is set (S2011), and a time setting process for setting reference timekeeping information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time effect is executed (S2012). Then, the processing shifts to the main processing.

  Next, the time setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This time setting process (S2012) is a process for setting a reference time for determining whether or not a specific time period (3 minutes every one hour from power-on) has been reached. Based on the reference time set in the time setting process (S2012), it is determined whether or not to perform a time effect (set a special back type).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S2012). In the time setting process (S2012), first, time information measured by the RTC 292 is obtained (S2101), and it is determined whether or not the obtained time information is within the time limit data (S2102).

  If it is determined that the time information acquired in the process of S2101 is within the time limit data (S2102: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S2103). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the deadline is set to three months.

  When the processing in S2103 ends, the time information acquired in the processing in S2101 is set in the input time storage area 223h (S2104), and the flow shifts to the processing in S2105. On the other hand, in the process of S2102, if it is determined that the acquired time information is not within the term data (S2102: No), the processes of S2103 and S2104 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2105. That is, if it is outside the time limit data, the time information is not set in the input time storage area 223h, so that the time effect is not executed regardless of the time zone. As a result, the rarity of the time effect can be increased, and the player can be made to think that he / she wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 before the time limit expires. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 within the time limit (within three months) can be improved.

  In the process of S2105, 1 indicating the back surface A is set to the mode counter 223i (S2105), and this process ends. As described above, the reference time (timekeeping information) for determining the type of the effect period is stored in the insertion time storage area 223h of the RAM 223 by the start-up processing, and thereafter, based on the difference between the reference time and the current time, It is possible to determine whether or not it is the time production execution period.

  In addition, if the timing of turning on the power (that is, the start-up process is performed) is adjusted in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, the timing at which the time information is stored in the insertion time storage area 223h of each pachinko machine 10 is set. Can also be combined. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the insertion time storage area 223h matches, the timing at which each pachinko machine 10 determines a specific time zone can also be matched, so that the execution period of the time effect can be matched. . Thereby, the persons involved in the hall can arrange the production periods of the pachinko machines 10 simply by turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, an effect with a sense of unity can be displayed, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S2201 was executed (S2201). If not (S2201: No), the process proceeds to S2212 without performing the processes of S2202 to S2211. In the process of S2201, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processes in S2202 to S2211 are mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2212, the variable display setting process of S2213, the special back surface setting process of S2214, and the prefetch effect selection process of S2215 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2212 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay. In addition, by performing the process of S2214 in a short cycle, switching to the special back type can be performed without delay, and by performing the process of S2215 in a short cycle, a continuous announcement effect (eight pending effects) ) Can be set without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2201 (S2201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2203 to S2215 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2202). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2208 described later (S2203), and thereafter, the power-on notification process is executed (S2204). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2205 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2205, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S2206). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2207). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting an effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2207) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2208), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S2209, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S2209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S2210 ends, a rotation display operation setting process is executed (S2211). This rotation display operation setting process is a process for setting a rendering operation of the rotation unit 500. Details of the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2212, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from main controller 110 is executed (S2212). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S2213). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S2213 ends, special backside setting processing is executed (S2214). In the special backside setting process, it is a process for determining whether or not to change to the back image for time effect based on the current time measured by the RTC 292. Details of the special back surface setting process (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a prefetch effect selection process is executed (S2215). This look-ahead effect selection process is a process for determining whether to execute a continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects). Details of the prefetch effect selection process (S2215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2215 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2216). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S2216, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S2216: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S2218), and the power-off process is executed. (S2219). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S2220), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2216 (S2216: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2217), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2217: No), the process returns to S2201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2217: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S2207) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process (S2207). The frame button input monitoring / production process (S2207) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and monitors pressing of the frame button 22 as described above. Then, it is a process of setting an effect corresponding to a case where the press of the frame button 22 is detected.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2207), first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S2301). In the process of S2301, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S2301: Yes), a pressing-time control process for performing control corresponding to the pressing is executed (S2302). Details of the press-time control process (S2302) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. When the press-time control process ends, the flow shifts to the process of S2304.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S2301: No), a press effect setting process for updating the mode of the press effect (normal press effect, special press effect) Is executed (S2303). The details of the press effect setting process (S2303) will be described later with reference to FIG. Upon completion of the press effect setting processing, the flow shifts to processing in S2304.

  When the processing in S2302 or S2303 is completed, the output of the touch sensor 290 is monitored, a touch sensor control processing for performing corresponding control is executed (S2304), and this processing ends. Details of the touch sensor control processing (S2304) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the press-time control process (S2302) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the press-time control process (S2302). The press-time control process (S2302) is a process for performing a corresponding control when the press of the frame button 22 is detected, as described above.

  In the depression control process (S2302), first, it is determined whether or not the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is on (S2401). In the process of S2401, if it is determined that the back change inhibition flag 223u is off (that is, not on) (S2401: No), the back type can be changed every time the player presses the frame button 22. It means there is. Therefore, in this case, first, the value of the mode counter 223i is updated to change the back type (S2402). Specifically, as described above, the value is updated by one within the range of 1-3. For example, if the value before update is 1, the value is updated to 2, and if the value before update is 2, the value is updated to 3. If the value before the update is 3, the value is updated to 1.

  When the process of S2402 is completed, the back type corresponding to the value of the updated mode counter 223i is specified from the back switching table 222c (see FIG. 70B) (S2403), and the specified back type is displayed. A display back image change command for notifying the device 114 is set (S2404), and the process ends. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. Accordingly, the back image can be changed each time the player's operation on the frame button 22 is detected, so that the desired back type can be changed at a timing desired by the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a display mode that matches the taste of each player.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2401 that the back change inhibition flag 223u is ON (S2401: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pressing period timer 223j is greater than 0 (that is, the normal pressing effect or the special pressing). It is determined whether or not the effect is being performed) (S2405), and if it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2405: No), this processing is ended. I do.

  In the process of S2405, if it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S2405: Yes), it means that either the normal pressing effect or the special pressing effect is being executed. . Therefore, in this case, the pressing effect in-progress flag 223v is read, and the type of the pressing period (pressing effect) is specified (S2406). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the pressing period of the special press effect (pressing period at the time of continuous notice) (S2407). If it is determined that the pressing period of the special press effect is determined (S2407: Yes), the special press effect is performed. A special notification sound setting process is performed to determine whether to set a special notification sound for a middle press (S2408), and the process ends. The details of the special notification sound setting process (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2407, when it is determined that the pressing period is not the pressing period of the special pressing effect (not the pressing period at the time of the continuous announcement) (S2407: No), it means that the pressing period is the pressing period of the normal pressing effect. A process for determining the announcement notice type is performed. More specifically, a notice type corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f is selected from the pressed notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 70A) (S2409). Next, a display notice command for notifying the display control device 114 of the selected notice type is set (S2410), and the process ends.

  Next, the special notification sound setting process (S2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the special notification sound setting process (S2408). This special notification sound setting processing (S2408) is executed in the pressing control processing (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, when the frame button 22 is pressed. This is a process for determining whether to set a special notification sound.

  In the special notification sound setting process (S2408), first, it is determined whether or not the special notification flag 223w is on (S2501). If the special notification flag 223w is off (S2501: No), it corresponds to a big hit. It is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed (S2502). In the process of S2502, when it is determined that the vehicle is in a state of fluctuation corresponding to the jackpot (S2502: Yes), then, it is determined whether a special notification execution lottery is performed and a special notification sound is set (S2503). Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation, for example, at a rate of 20%, it is determined that the winning is made by the special information execution lottery. In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the player has responded to the special information execution lottery (S2503: Yes), the special notification flag 223w is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2506 for setting the special notification sound.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the special notification flag 223w is on (S2501: Yes), the special notification sound setting process before the previous time (see FIG. 96) has already won the special notification execution lottery. Since the special notification sound can be set in accordance with the pressing of the frame button 22 until the special pressing period ends, the processing from S2502 to S2504 is skipped and the special notification sound is set. To S2506. In the processing of S2506, a special notification sound command for voice for instructing the sound output device 226 to output the special notification sound is set (S2506). The special notification sound command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process of the main process (see S2202 in FIG. 93). The voice output device 226 that has received the special notification sound command outputs a special notification sound. This allows the player to be notified of the jackpot by the special notification sound before the result of the jackpot variation during execution is notified. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

  When the process of S2506 ends, next, the value of the pressing period timer 223j is decremented by 1 (S2507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing period timer 223j after the subtraction is 0 (S2508). In the process of S2508, if it is determined that the value of the depressed period timer 223j after subtraction is 0 (S2508: Yes), the process proceeds to S2509.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2502 that the variable display corresponding to the big hit is not being executed (S2502: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S2503 that the lottery of the special notification has not been won ( In S2503: No), a failure effect in which no special notification sound is output is set (S2505), and the flow shifts to the process in S2509. When this failure effect is set, for example, the button image (see FIG. 61) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 disappears, and the character "Sorry" is displayed on the screen. As a result, the player can be made aware that either the special notification sound has not been won in the lottery execution or the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display corresponding to the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the variable display in expectation of the jackpot being notified as a result of the variable display being executed.

  In the process of S2509, the end of the special press effect is set (S2509). After that, the back surface change prohibition flag 223u, the pressing effect flag 223v, and the special leaving flag 223w are set to off (S2510), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2508, if it is determined that the value of the depressed period timer 223j after the subtraction is 1 or more (not 0) (S2508: No), the processes of S2509 and S2510 are skipped, and this process ends.

  According to this special notification sound setting process (see FIG. 96), once the special lottery execution lottery is won, the output of the special notification sound can be repeatedly set as long as the pressing period remains. Thus, the player can continue to press the frame button 22 to hear the special notification sound as many times as desired, thereby giving the player greater satisfaction. In addition, the earlier the frame button 22 is pressed, the greater the chance of listening to the special notification sound. Therefore, when the special press effect is executed, the frame button 22 can be positively operated (pressed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the special press effect.

  Next, the press effect setting process (S2303) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the press effect setting process (S2303). The press effect setting process (S2303) is executed when the press of the frame button 22 is not detected in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 94), and as described above, the press effect (normal press effect, This is a process for updating the mode of (special press effect).

  In this press effect setting process (S2303), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the press effect (normal press effect, special press effect) (S2601). As for the start timing of the press effect, the effect start time is determined in advance for each variation display mode. Specifically, for example, in the normal press effect, the start timing is set to one second after the occurrence of the reach. In the present control example, in the fluctuation display of the mode in which the reach occurs, such as the hit super reach or the out-of-range super reach, the occurrence of the reach is 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the variation display in the mode in which the normal press effect is executed, the timing at which the elapsed time from the start of the change becomes 11 seconds (10 seconds + 1 second) is determined as the start timing of the normal press effect.

  In the process of S2601, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the press effect (S2601: Yes), the upper limit value corresponding to the present press effect is set to the value of the press period timer 223j (S2602). Specifically, a timer value corresponding to one second is set for a normal press effect, and a timer value for three seconds is set for a special press effect. Here, the reason why the special press effect is set to a longer effect period is to increase the chance that the player hears the special notification sound. As described above, in the first control example, when the special lottery execution lottery is won in the special press production, the special notification sound is made every time the frame button 22 is pressed until the production period of the special press production ends. Is settable. For this reason, if the production period is short, the production period expires before the player listens to the special notification sound a sufficient number of times (operates the frame button 22), causing the player to feel dissatisfied. There is a possibility that it will end up. On the other hand, in the first control example, the effect period of the special press effect is set to be longer (three times) than the effect period of the normal press effect. With such a configuration, when the execution of the special notification sound is determined, the player can press the frame button 22 a sufficient number of times during the special press effect production period. Therefore, the player can be satisfied.

  In the process of S2602, after setting the upper limit value of the pressing period timer 223j, a bit corresponding to the current pressing effect of the pressing effect flag 223v is set to ON (S2603), and the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is turned ON. Is set to (S2604), and this processing ends. As described above, in the pressing effect flag 223v, the upper bit corresponds to the normal pressing effect, and the lower bit corresponds to the special pressing effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that it is not the start timing of the press effect (S2601: No), the value of the press period timer 223j is greater than 0 (whether the press effect period remains). Is determined (S2605). In the process of S2605, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is 1 or more (the effect period of the pressing effect remains) (S2605: Yes), the value of the pressing period timer 223j is decremented by 1 (S2606). It is determined whether the value of the depressed period timer 223j after the subtraction is 0 (S2607).

  In the process of S2607, when it is determined that the value of the press period timer 223j after the subtraction is 0 (S2607: Yes), the end of the press effect is set (S2608). Thereafter, the back change inhibition flag 223u and all bits of the press effect flag 223v are set to off (S2609), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the value of the pressing period timer 223j is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2605: No), in the processing of S2607, the value of the pressing period timer 223j after the subtraction is determined. Is determined to be 1 or more (not 0) (S2607: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  By the press effect setting process (see FIG. 97), the value of the press period timer 223j is updated, and the start and end of the press effect can be set appropriately.

  Next, the touch sensor control processing (S2304) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the touch sensor control processing (S2304). This touch sensor control processing (S2304) is executed in the frame button input monitoring / producing processing (see FIG. 94), and monitors the output of the touch sensor 290 and performs a touch operation when there is a touch operation as described above. This is a process for executing the corresponding control.

  In the touch sensor control process (S2304), first, it is determined whether or not a touch effect is being executed (S2701). Here, the touch effect is an aspect of an entertaining effect performed during the variable display, and is an effect of prompting the player to touch the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined in the process of S2701 that the touch effect is not being executed (S2701: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2701 that the touch effect is being executed (S2701: Yes), the effective time of the touch effect stored in the touch effect effective time storage area 223o is subtracted (S2702). It is determined whether or not the output of the touch sensor 290 has been turned on (S2703).

  If it is determined in step S2703 that the output of the touch sensor 290 is on (S2703: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the output of the touch sensor 290 is on is set (S2704). Next, 1 is added to the value of the level storage area 223k (S2705), and a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the value after the addition is set (S2706). When the value stored in the level storage area 223k has reached the upper limit set in accordance with the touch effect being executed, updating of the value in the level storage area 223k and setting of a command are not performed. Not done. When the process of S2706 ends, the value of the interval counter 223p is reset (S2707), and the flow shifts to the process of S2712.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the output of the touch sensor 290 is off (S2703: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223p (S2708), and the value of the interval counter 223p is set to the upper limit value. It is determined whether or not there is (S2709). In the process of S2709, when it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223p is the upper limit value (S2709: Yes), the value stored in the level storage area 223k is decremented by 1 (S2710). Then, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the value after the subtraction is set (S2711), and the flow shifts to the process of S2712.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223p is not the upper limit (S2709: No), the processes of S2710 and S2711 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2712.

  In the process of S2712, it is determined whether or not the effective time of the touch effect has been updated to 0 by the process of S2702 (S2712). In the process of S2712, when it is determined that the effective time of the touch effect is 0 (S2712: Yes), the notification effect of the mode corresponding to the value of the level storage area 223k is set (S2713), and the end of the touch effect is completed. This is set (S2714), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2712, if it is determined that the effective time of the touch effect is not 0 (S2712: No), the processes of S2713 and S2714 are skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the rotation display operation setting process (S2211). The rotation display operation setting process (S2211) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and is a process for setting the effect operation of the rotation unit 500 as described above.

  In the rotation display operation setting process (S2211), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the rotation display effect (S2801). Here, the rotation display effect may be executed in a part of the fluctuation display corresponding to the jackpot, and is started, for example, five seconds before the fluctuation stop. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the timing is the start timing of the rotation display effect (5 seconds before the stop of the fluctuation display in the mode accompanied by the rotation display effect) (S2801: Yes), the rotation of the rotation display device is performed. The start is set (S2802). Here, a rotation speed of one rotation per 0.1 second is set for the driver IC that controls the drive motor 457. Then, by setting the rotation display effect flag 223ab to ON, it indicates that the rotation display effect is being executed (S2803), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is not the start timing of the rotation display effect (S2801: No), it is determined whether or not the rotation display effect flag 223ab is ON (S2804). If it is determined that the rotation display effect flag 223ab is off (that is, it is not on) (S2804: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2804, when it is determined that the rotation display effect flag 223ab is ON (S2804: Yes), it means that the rotation display effect is being executed, and next, the end timing of the rotation display effect. Is determined (S2805). In the process of S2805, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the rotation display effect (S2805: Yes), the end of the rotation display effect is set (S2806), the value of the rotation counter 223aa, the rotation display effect flag 223ab, and All the lighting setting completed flags 223ac are reset (S2807), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the rotation display effect (S2805: No), it is determined whether the lighting setting completed flag 223ac is on (S2808). In the process of S2808, if it is determined that the lighting setting completed flag 223ac is ON (S2808: Yes), the lighting for updating the lighting pattern of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 according to the progress of the rotating operation (rotating position). A setting update process is performed (S2809), and this process ends. The details of the lighting setting update processing (S2809) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S2808, when it is determined that the lighting setting completed flag 223ac is off (that is, not on) (S2808: No), the first lighting setting (light emission pattern) after the rotation operation of the rotating unit 500 is started. ) Means that the output has not been set, so it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor provided in the rotating unit 500 is ON (S2810). In this control example, setting of the light emission pattern is started after the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is sufficiently stabilized. Specifically, the configuration is such that the light emission pattern starts to be set after the rotation unit 500 makes ten turns.

  In the process of S2810, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is off (that is, not on) (S2810: No), the rotation position of the rotation unit 500 is a halfway position, and the setting of the light emission pattern is started. Since this processing cannot be performed, this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2810, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is on (S2810: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa (S2811), and the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after the addition is determined. It is determined whether it is 10 (S2812). That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation unit 500 has made 10 turns since the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 was started. In the process of S2812, if it is determined that the value of the rotation counter 223aa after the addition is not 10 (S2812: No), the rotation speed may not be stable, and the setting of the light emission pattern should not be started. Then, the processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2812, if it is determined that the value of the rotation number counter 223aa after the addition is 10 (S2812: Yes), a sufficient number of rotations (10 rounds) after the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is started. , And it can be considered that the rotation speed is stable, so the setting of the lighting pattern based on the operation scenario table 222f is started. Specifically, first, the operation pointer 223ae is reset (S2813). Then, the light emission pattern of the rotating unit 500 corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after the reset is read from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and set to each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2814). Then, the present process ends.

  By this rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99), the rotation display effect can be appropriately executed.

  Next, the lighting setting update process (S2809) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the lighting setting update processing (S2809). This lighting setting update processing (S2809) is executed in the rotation display operation setting processing (see FIG. 99), and as described above, each of the LEDs 1 to 3 according to the progress of the rotation operation (rotation position) of the rotation unit 500. This is a process for updating the 40 lighting patterns.

  In the lighting setting update processing (S2809), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor provided in the rotating unit 500 is on (S2901). In the process of S2901, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is on (S2901: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the rotation counter 223aa (S2902), and the value of the step counter 223ad and the value of the operation pointer 223ae are added. Is reset (S2903). Next, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after the reset is read from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and set to each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2904), and this processing ends. I do. By resetting the operation pointer 223ae each time the origin sensor of the rotation unit 500 is turned on and resetting the light emission pattern from the beginning of the operation scenario table 222f, each operation can be performed regardless of the number of rotations of the rotation unit 500. It is possible to suppress the timing of the emission and the extinguishing of the LED from being shifted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the origin sensor is off (that is, not on) (S2901: No), the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71C) and the value of the step counter 223ad are compared. Reading (S2905), it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223ad is a value corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2906). If it is determined that the value of the step counter 223ad is a value corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2906: Yes), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2906 that the value of the step counter 223ad is not a value corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2906: No), 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223ae (S2907). The light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae is read out from the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)) and set for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2908), and this processing ends.

  By performing the lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100), the lighting and extinguishing of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 can be appropriately controlled in accordance with the progress of the rotation operation. Can be appropriately perceived by the player.

  Next, the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2212). This command determination processing (S2212) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 93), and is processing for executing control according to the type of command received from main controller 110.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S3001). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S3001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3002), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command ( S3003), and returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later to determine a detailed display mode of the variation pattern. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3001 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S3001: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3004). When the stop type command is received (S3004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3005), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3006). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 105) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3004 that the stop type command has not been received (S3004: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3007). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S3007: Yes), the reserved ball number counter of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received reserved ball number command is displayed. Then, the value contained in the received pending ball count command is stored (S3008), and this processing ends. More specifically, when the currently received reserved ball number command is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the received reserved ball number command is used to determine the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the received reserved ball number command. A value (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is held) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when the currently received reserved ball number command is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special) is calculated from the received reserved ball number command. The number of times N2) of the variable display in the symbol 2 is extracted, and the extracted number is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113.

  If the value of any of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in the process of S3008, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. Display hold ball number command is set. Since the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this display reserved ball number command, an accurate number of reserved symbols is always displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b of the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3007 that the pending ball number command has not been received (S3007: No), it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3009). If it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S3009: Yes), a winning command receiving process is executed (S3010), and this process ends.

  Here, the details of the winning command receiving process (S3010) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process (S3010).

  In the winning command receiving process, first, winning information (win / fail, stop type, change pattern) based on the winning command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S3101). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance flag 223q is set to ON (in the execution of eight pending effects) (S3102), and the continuous advance flag 223q is set to ON (eight pending effects). Is being executed) (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the divided display flag 223s is on (S3103).

  In the process of S3103, when it is determined that the divided display flag 223s is off (that is, not on) (S3103: No), the value of the effect counter 223f and the continuous announcement lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)) It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects) for the new winning information based on the information (S3104). When the execution of the continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects) is determined in this determination, the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information and the reserved symbols to be subjected to the 8 reserved effects are displayed separately (see FIG. 63). However, the continuous announcement effect is extended to the pending symbol for the new winning information.

  When the processing in S3104 ends, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous notice for new winning information (S3105). If it is determined that the continuous notice is not executed for the new winning information (S3105: No), the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) are displayed. The value obtained by subtracting 1 from the total value of (value) is overwritten on the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3106).

  Next, the split display flag 223s is set to ON (S3107). Then, the divided display of the sub display area Ds is set according to the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3108), and the process ends. On the other hand, in S3105, when it is determined that the continuous announcement is to be performed for the new winning information (S3105: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are compared. The total value is overwritten on the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3109), and this processing ends. That is, in addition to the reserved symbols displayed at the start of the continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects), the continuous announcement effect is set to be extended for the suspended symbol corresponding to the new winning information. With this configuration, the continuous announcement effect can be continued over a longer fluctuation display, so that the player can have a longer-term expectation of the jackpot. Also, for a new prize, the execution (extension) of the continuous announcement effect is determined under the same conditions as the start of the continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects), so that the winning information ( For example, it is possible to prevent the continuous announcement effect from being extended for a completely departure stop type). Therefore, it is possible to give the player who has recognized that the continuous preview effect (8 pending effects) has been set (extended) to new winning information during the continuous preview effect, to have a higher sense of expectation. .

  In contrast, in the process of S3102, when it is determined that the continuous announcement flag 223q is off (that is, the continuous announcement effect is not being executed) (S3102: No), in the process of S3103, the divided display flag 223s is on. (That is, the split display has already been set) (S3103: Yes), the process ends.

  By executing the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 102), when a new starting winning is detected during the execution of the eight pending effects, the divided display can be set. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player how long the eight pending effects continue when a new start winning is detected.

  In the first control example, once the split display (see FIG. 63) is set, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) a continuous announcement effect (8 reserved effects) for new winning information. The configuration was such that no judgment was made. That is, only when the whole of the sub-display area Ds is behind the school of fish, it is configured to determine whether or not to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect for new winning information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . After split display on the back of the fish school and the back of the foam, it may be determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information. That is, in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 102), the process of S3103 is deleted, and if the continuous notice flag 223q is ON in the process of S3102 (S3102: Yes), the process of S3104 is always executed. Good. If it is determined in step S3104 that the continuous announcement effect is to be set (extended) for the new winning information, the entire sub-display area Ds is displayed on the back of the fish school even when the split display is set. It is good also as composition which returns to a mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the continuous announcement effect has been extended for new winning information. Further, when a new start winning is detected in a state where the divided display is set, and it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is set (extended) for the acquired new winning information, the divided display is maintained. Alternatively, the display area on the right side of the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information may be set on the back of the school of fish. With this configuration, the player can more clearly recognize the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball having a high degree of expectation.

  Further, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects) for new winning information during the continuous announcement effect, and to determine whether to newly start the continuous announcement effect. Is determined under the same condition (probability), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the continuous announcement lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)) is referred to when a new continuous announcement effect is started, and when a new start winning is detected during the execution of the continuous announcement effect. The table and the table may be separately provided to make the probabilities different. In this case, the determination of whether or not to set the continuous announcement effect for new winning information during the execution of the continuous announcement effect may set the winning probability higher. With this configuration, once the continuous announcement effect is started, it is easy to set the continuous announcement effect for new winning information, so the continuous announcement effect continues over a larger number of variable displays. It will be easier. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting the jackpot for a longer period of time.

  Returning to FIG. 101, the description will be continued. In the process of S3009, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S3009: No), it is next determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3011). If a stop command has been received (S3011: Yes), a stop command receiving process for performing control corresponding to the stop command is executed (S3012), and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the stop command receiving process (S3012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the stop command receiving process (S3012). In the stop command receiving process, first, the fluctuation stop of the fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3201). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223q is on (S3202). If it is determined in S3202 that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (S3202: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3202 that the continuous announcement flag 223q is ON (S3202: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining announcement number counter 223r is 0 (S3203). If it is determined in S3203 that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is equal to or greater than 1 (not 0) (S3203: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in S3203, when it is determined that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is 0 (S3203: Yes), it is determined whether the stop display of the big hit symbol is set on the third symbol display device 81 (S3204). . If it is determined in S3204 that the stop display is not set to the big hit symbol (S3204: No), a display continuous announcement command indicating the end of the continuous announcement is set (S3205), and the process shifts to S3206.

  On the other hand, in S3204, when it is determined that the stop display of the big hit symbol is set (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3206. In the processing of S3206, the continuous advance flag 223q and the divided display flag 223s are set to off (S3206), and this processing ends.

  By executing the stop command receiving process, when the continuous announcement effect (eight pending effects) ends due to being missed, the announcement effect can be appropriately ended.

  Returning to FIG. 101, the description will be continued. In the process of S3011, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S3011: No), then, it is determined whether or not a command related to the jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (S3013). If it is determined that a command related to the jackpot has been received (S3013: Yes), a jackpot-related command process is executed (S3014), and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the jackpot-related command processing (S3014) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related command processing (S3014). In the jackpot-related command processing, first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3301). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), a display opening command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the opening effect is set (S3302), and the process ends. I do. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3301 that no opening command has been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3303). When the round number command is received (S3303: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S3304), and a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S3304). S3305), this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3303: No), it is next determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3306). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S3306: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S3307), and the process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3306 that the ending command has not been received (S3306: No), this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 101, the description will be continued. In the process of S3013, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S3013: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and a process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S3015), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  By this processing, a command for performing various settings for the display control device 114 can be set based on the command output from the main control device 110.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2213). The variable display setting process (S2213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S3401). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3401: No), it is in a state where the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S3405. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S3401: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S3402), and then, in the process of S3003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 101), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S3403).

  Then, based on the extracted fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern selection process for selecting a detailed mode of the fluctuation display is executed (S3404). Details of the variation pattern selection processing (S3404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. After executing the variation pattern selection processing, the flow shifts to processing in S3405.

  In the process of S3405, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S3405). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3405: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The process ends, and returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3406), and then, in the process of S3006 of the command determination process (see FIG. 101), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S3407).

  Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S3408), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, the variation pattern selection processing (S3404) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection processing (S3404). The variation pattern selection process (S3404) is a process for selecting a detailed variation display mode based on the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from main controller 110.

  In the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106), first, the value of the sub variation selection counter 223t is obtained (S3501). Next, the sub variation pattern selection table 222a is read (S3502), and the extracted variation pattern and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the sub variation selection counter 223t are selected from the read sub variation pattern selection table 222a (S3503).

  When the process of S3503 is completed, next, a rotation display execution determination process for determining whether to execute the rotation display effect from the upper limit value of the rotation display effect is performed (S3504). Details of the rotation display execution determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Upon completion of the rotation display execution determination process, the flow shifts to the process of S3505.

  In the process of S3505, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the variation pattern type selected in the process of S3503, and a command for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is generated. The transmission ring buffer is set (S3505). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3506). In the process of S3506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is larger than 0 (S3507). When the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is determined to be 1 or more (greater than 0) (S3507: Yes), the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is decremented by 1 (S3508), and the process shifts to S3509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining notice number counter 223r is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S3507: No), the process of S3508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3509.

  In the process of S3509, it is determined whether or not the split display flag 223s is on (S3509). If it is determined that the split display flag 223s is ON (S3509: Yes), a display continuous preview command for notifying split display according to the value of the updated remaining preview counter 223r is set (S3510). The process ends. This makes it possible to appropriately update the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in which the divided display (see FIG. 63) is set, in accordance with the number of reserved symbols. On the other hand, in the process of S3509, when it is determined that the divided display flag 223s is off (S3509: No), the process ends.

  Next, the rotation display execution determination processing (S3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the rotation display execution determination processing (S3504). This rotation display execution determination processing (S3504) is processing for determining whether or not to execute the rotation display effect from the upper limit value of the rotation display effect as described above.

  When the rotation display execution determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106) is a mode accompanied by a rotation display effect (S3601). In S3601, if the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 is not the mode accompanied by the rotation display effect (S3601: No), it is not necessary to determine the upper limit number of times, and the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in S3601, if the variation pattern selected in the process of S3503 is a mode accompanied by the rotation display effect (S3601: Yes), the current time is read from the RTC 292 (S3602), and the upper limit number corresponding to the read current time is set. It is read from the effect upper limit number table 222g (see FIG. 72) (S3603), and it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation display number counter 223x matches the read upper limit number (S3604). In S3604, if it is determined that the value of the rotation display number counter 223x does not match the upper limit number (S3604: No), it means that the number of executions of the rotation display effect has not reached the upper limit number, and thus the current variation pattern The execution of the rotation display effect is set as it is (S3605). Next, 1 is added to the value of the rotation display number counter 223x (S3606), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3604 that the value of the rotation display number counter 223x matches the upper limit number (S3604: Yes), it means that the execution number of the rotation display effect has already reached the upper limit number, Execution of the hit touch effect is set as an alternative effect of the rotation display effect (S3607), and the process ends.

  By the rotation display execution determination process (see FIG. 107), the number of times of execution of the rotation display effect in which the rotation unit 500 operates can be limited to a predetermined upper limit or less for each time period. Here, since the rotation unit 500 has a substrate member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted, the effect using the rotation unit 500 causes the LED 532 and the IC / capacitor mounted on the substrate to operate. It generates heat by doing. For this reason, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder connecting the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted by the influence of heat generation, resulting in poor contact. For this reason, in the first control example, the upper limit value of the number of times of operation of the rotary unit 500 according to the elapsed time (time zone) is defined for each time zone in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotary unit 500. Then, when an effect mode involving the operation of the rotating unit 500 is selected in a state where the upper limit value has been reached, an alternative effect in which the rotating unit 500 does not operate is replaced. Accordingly, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that failure such as poor contact can be prevented (suppressed).

  Next, the special back setting process (S2214) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the special back surface setting process (S2214). This special back setting process (S2214) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines whether to set the time effect based on the time information measured by the RTC 292. This is a process for determining whether or not it is.

  In the special back setting process (S2214), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S3701). If the time effect execution flag 223g is off (S3701: No), the time effect is set. Since there is no possibility that the time effect is being executed, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3701 that the time effect execution flag 223g is ON (S3701: Yes), time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S3702), and the acquired time data is switched to the special back (time). It is determined whether or not the data corresponds to the timing of execution of the effect) (S3703).

  In the process of S3703, if it is determined that the acquired time data is data corresponding to the switching timing to the special back (S3703: Yes), the value of the special mode counter 223m is updated (S3704), and The special back type corresponding to the value of the special mode counter 223m is specified from the special back switching table 222d (see FIG. 71A) (S3705). Then, a display back image change command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change to the specified special back type is set (S3706), and the back change prohibition flag 223u is set on (S3707). The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3703, if it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S3702 is not the switching timing to the special back (S3703: No), whether the acquired time data is the data indicating the end timing of the special back. It is determined whether or not it is (S3708). In the process of S3708, when it is determined that the timing is not the special back end timing (S3708: No), the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3708, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the special back (S3708: Yes), the back type corresponding to the value of the mode counter 223i is specified from the back switching table 222c (see FIG. 70 (b)). Then, a display back change command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change to the specified back type is set (S3709). Next, the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is set to off (S3710), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the prefetch effect selection processing (S2215) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect selection process (S2215). This look-ahead effect selection process (S2215) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and based on the result of the look-ahead of each reserved ball, a continuous announcement effect (8 items) This is a process for determining whether or not execution of a hold effect is possible.

  In the prefetch effect selection process (S2215), it is first determined whether or not the continuous notice flag 223q is on (S3801). In the process of S3801, if it is determined that the continuous advance flag 223q is on (S3801: Yes), the continuous advance effect (8 pending effects) is already being executed, and thus the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the continuous notice flag 223q is off (that is, not on) (S3801: No), the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special It is determined whether or not the total value of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is 8 (S3802).

  In the process of S3802, when it is determined that the total value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is 8, (S3802: Yes) ), It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display of the third symbol is being executed and one second before the fluctuation stop (S3803). In the processing of S3803, when it is determined that it is one second before the stop of the fluctuation (S3803: Yes), each suspension is performed based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the continuous announcement lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)). It is determined whether or not continuous notice can be performed on the ball (S3804).

  In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the continuous announcement is to be executed in the determination of any of the reserved balls (S3805: Yes), the continuous announcement effect is started for the eight currently reserved balls. A display continuous advance notice command for notifying the display control device 114 is set (S3806). Then, 8 is set to the remaining notice number counter 223r (S3807), and the continuous notice flag 223q is set to ON (S3808). After that, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3802, the total value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is not 8 (that is, 7 or less). (S3802: No), in the processing of S3803, when it is determined that it is not one second before the stop of the fluctuation (S3803: No), and in the processing of S3805, a continuous notice is given in the execution determination for all the reserved balls. Is not executed (S3805: No), this process is terminated without setting the start of the continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects).

<Control Process of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 performs various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 110). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power-up initialization processing (see S6002 in FIG. 110) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 110) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 111, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102 and S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present control example, the case has been described where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 121A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is performed (see S7702 in FIG. 121A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)), the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 112 (b)) and the simple display setting process are performed so that the image at power-on is drawn. (See S6309 in FIG. 112 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, the first entrance 64 or each of the second entrances (the second entrance 640 or the right second entrance 640r) )), There is a ball (start winning prize), and when the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is issued from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the power supply is turned on. A fluctuating image can be displayed immediately during the fluctuating effect period, and a simple fluctuating effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 112 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 77) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 to 117.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 77 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out reach, complete) The stop type table corresponding to (out) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the flow shifts to the process of S6304.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 113, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), and returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 114A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the variation effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. (Not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present control example, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is actually set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114A), in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6504, the display data table buffer 233d is updated by the processing of S6501. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S6502 is performed. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of the above, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is Character ROM2 in advance From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 114B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back out, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 112 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is determined. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S6603), and the process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present control example, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure is set, and in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the departure of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6703). S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command processing is completed, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6704, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701 is updated. The contents of the drawing specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the data is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S6702. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated and the player will feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Also, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (16 rounds or 2 rounds) are completed. After receiving the display ending command, the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 until the ending effect starts after the round effect ends. In such a case, a lot of waiting time is generated, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation is stopped, and may give a feeling of strangeness.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and until the change display of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 ends. , And the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to end. Thus, when the opening effect is completed on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (16 rounds). Or two rounds), the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, which may cause the player to feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped or to give a sense of incongruity. Absent. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present control example, if the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81. With this, when the variable effect which becomes a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned about whether or not the operation is stopped. There is no unpleasant feeling. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command has a display ending command (S6410). If there is an ending command (S6410: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is stored in the ending effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. (S6001) and read out from the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6803). S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the ending command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the ending command processing, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol big hit ends, so that the player recognizes that the big hit has ended. Can be done.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is a display pending ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is a display reserved ball number command (S6412: Yes), the reserved ball number command processing is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 116 (a), the details of the reserved ball count command process (S6413) will be described. FIG. 116 (a) is a flowchart showing the pending ball count command processing. The reserved ball count command process executes a process corresponding to the display reserved ball count command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball count command processing, first, the new reserved ball count flag 233m is set to ON (S7001). Then, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received reserved ball number command for display (S7002), the reserved symbol number counter 233n is updated based on the extracted reserved ball number (S7003), and the reserved ball number command processing ends. Then, the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6412, when it is determined that there is no display pending ball number command (S6412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display continuous advance command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a continuous announcement command for display (S6414: Yes), a continuous announcement command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the continuous announcement command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (b) is a flowchart showing the continuous notice command processing. This continuous notice command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display continuous notice command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the continuous advance notice command processing, first, a new continuous advance notice command flag 233o is set to ON (S7101). Then, the distribution between the back of the school of fish and the back of the foam is extracted from the continuous announcement command for display (S7102). Next, the continuous notice information storage area 233p is updated based on the extracted distribution (S7103), the continuous notice command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no continuous announcement command for display (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is an image change command (S6416: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7201). Thus, it is possible to determine the change of the rear image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7703 in FIG. 121). Then, among the rear image determination flags 233x provided for each of the rear image types (the rear surfaces A to C and the special rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the time effect), the rear image classification flag 233x corresponds to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command. The back image discrimination flag 233x is turned on, and the back image discrimination flags 233x corresponding to the other back image types are set off (S7202), the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command judgment processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7703 in FIG. 121), when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7201 is turned on, the back image determination flag 233x set by the process of S7202 is determined. Identify the rear image type after the change. When the specified rear image type is the rear image B or the rear image C, the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data is A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. When the rear image type is the rear image type A after the change, all the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that the image is not transferred.

  Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C and the special back surfaces A to C corresponding to the time effects, depending on the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, From the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the processing of S7202, the type of the rear image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the rear image is displayed. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the range is stored, and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there is no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as the back image change command. In the process of S7202, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If it is (S6418: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag 233q indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7301). Then, among the error determination flags 233r provided for each error type, the error determination flag 233r corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags 233r are set off (S7302). , End the error command processing, and return to the command determination processing.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7301, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7302 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7302, the error determination flags 233r corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. . As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6418, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6418: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6418 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 114 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 114 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are performed. Then, a process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 118, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7401). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7401: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processes of S7402 and S7403 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7404. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S7402). Various image setting processes for setting an image corresponding to the command are executed (S7403).

  Here, the details of the various image setting processing (S7403) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the various image setting processing (S7403).

  In the various image setting processing (S7403), first, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball count flag 233m is turned on (S7501). If the new reserved ball count flag 233m is turned on (S7501: Yes), the reserved symbol is set. The number of pending symbol data according to the value of the number counter 233n is expanded (S7502). Then, the new reserved ball count flag 233m is set to off (S7503), and the flow shifts to the process of S7504. On the other hand, if the new reserved ball count flag 233m is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), the processing of S7502 and S7503 is skipped, and the flow shifts to the processing of S7504.

  In the processing of S7504, it is determined whether or not the new continuous advance command flag 233o is ON (S7504). If the new continuous advance command flag 233o is ON (S7504: Yes), the data of the continuous advance information storage area 233p is determined. Is expanded (S7505). Then, the new consecutive announcement command flag 233o is set to off (S7506), and the flow shifts to the process of S7507. On the other hand, if the new consecutive announcement command flag 233o is not on, that is, if it is off (S7504: No), the processing of S7505 and S7506 is skipped, and the flow shifts to the processing of S7507.

  In the process of S7507, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag 233q is on (S7507). If the error occurrence flag 233q is on (S7507: Yes), the warning image data is developed based on the error determination flag 233r. (S7508). Then, the error setting flag 233q is set to off (S7509), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag 233q is not on, that is, if it is off (S7507: No), the processes of S7508 and S7509 are skipped, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. If the various image setting process (S7403) is completed, or if the new command flag is determined to be off in the process of S7401 (S7401: No), then a pointer update process is performed (S7404).

  Here, the details of the pointer update processing (S7404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing (S7404). This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7601). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7601, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7602). As a result, if it is End information (S7602: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7603). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7603: Yes), the display data table buffer is determined. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7605), and the present processing is terminated and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7603 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7606). ), End this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the immediately preceding address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing content is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7602: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 118, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7405). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7405 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7406), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7407). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7407: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7407: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7408).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is OFF (S7408: No), the effect of the finalized display has not been performed yet, and the effect of the finalized display is to be performed. The processing of S7414 is executed. In the process of S7409, the confirmed display data table is read from the confirmed display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b, set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7409), and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thus, the content is cleared (S7410). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7411).

  Upon completion of the process in S7411, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7412). Then, after setting the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state (S7413), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7414), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7414 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7414 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmed display flag is on in the process of S7408 (S7408: Yes), the processes of S7415 to S7420 are executed to set the display mode of the demonstration effect. In the process of S7415, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7415). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7415: No), the display data table for demonstration is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7416), and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the contents are cleared (S7417). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7418).

  Upon completion of the process in S7418, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7419), a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7420), and the process is terminated and the V Return to the loading process.

  As a result, even if a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the final display of the third symbol, a display variation pattern command or a display opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is received. If not, the drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S6305), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 121A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7701: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process Is executed (S7702), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7701, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7703), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7702), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (b). FIG. 121B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7702).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7801). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7801: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7802). In the process of S7802, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7802 (S7802: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7802: Yes), the process moves to S7803. Also, as a result of the process of S7801, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7801: No), the process shifts to the process of S7803.

  In the processing of S7803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7803). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7804), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here) The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the resident video RAM 235 during the unused period. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7803, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is turned off (S7805), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 112 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 112 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 112 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 113 to 117) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 118 to 120) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Displays the normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 122) (see S7701: No in FIG. 121A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7703), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7703).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7404) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7902). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7902: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. , The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7903) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7904), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7905.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7902: No), the process skips S7903 and S7904 and proceeds to S7905. In the process of S7905, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7905), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7906).

  In the process of S7906, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7906 (S7906: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has been completed (S7906: Yes), the flow shifts to the processing of S7907. Also, as a result of the process of S7905, if the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7905: No), the process shifts to the process of S7907.

  In the process of S7907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7907). If the transfer start flag is on (S7907: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7903 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S7913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7907: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S7909). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7909: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7909: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7910), the back image change flag 233w is provided for each back image type. Of the rear image determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7911). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7912), and the flow shifts to the process of S7913.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S7911, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process ends as it is.

  In the process of S7913, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7913). The determination in the process of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233j. It is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S7913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7913: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7913, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7913: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7914). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The head address of a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7914, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S7915), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the jackpot effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 77 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting processing (S6305) and the color information, filter designation information (S6301) (S8001). In other words, in the process of S8001, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the rear side from the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  After the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S8002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. In addition, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S8002, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S8003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 112B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, in the first control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 both reach the upper limit value (four), the number of reserved balls for eight is set. It is configured to be able to execute a continuous announcement effect in which a special announcement effect is set over the fluctuation display. The execution of the eight pending effects is determined more easily as the lottery results with higher expectations are retained in the reserved balls. Therefore, when the eight holding effects are executed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game, expecting that there is a big hit in the holding.

  In the first control example, a new start winning is detected during the execution of the eight holding effects, and when the number of the holding balls increases, the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball targeted for the eight holding effects is provided. And a reserved symbol corresponding to a new reserved ball are displayed (divided and displayed) in a manner that the player can easily distinguish them. Here, if the entire sub-display area Ds is fixed to the display mode dedicated to the eight-holding effect even if a new start winning is detected until the eight-holding effect ends, the eight-holding effect When only the reserve ball corresponding to the new starting prize detected during the remaining state remains, even though the reserve design remains, the operation as if eight reserve effects ended suddenly. It may be. In other words, there is a possibility that an impression as if the eight pending effects ended in the middle may be given, so that the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, in the first control example, by performing the split display, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player how long the eight pending effects continue when a new start winning is detected. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable at the end of the eight pending effects.

  Further, in the first control example, a rotation display effect of displaying a specific character by the rotation unit 500 including a versatile writer is configured to be executable. In this rotation display effect, by switching the light emission pattern of the plurality of LEDs 532 provided on the rotation unit 500 according to the progress of the rotation operation, a specific character (for example, “hit”) is traced by the light emitted by each LED. Character) is configured to be perceptible to a player as an afterimage. Thereby, a novel effect different from the display effect by a general display device can be provided.

  Here, since the rotation unit 500 has a substrate member 531 on which a plurality of LEDs 532 are mounted, the effect using the rotation unit 500 causes the LED 532 and the IC / capacitor mounted on the substrate to operate. It generates heat by doing. For this reason, if the rotating unit 500 is operated frequently, the solder connecting the LED 532, the IC, the capacitor, and the like to the substrate may be melted by the influence of heat generation, resulting in poor contact. For this reason, in the first control example, the upper limit value of the number of times of operation of the rotary unit 500 according to the elapsed time (time zone) is defined for each time zone in order to suppress the operation frequency of the rotary unit 500. Then, when an effect mode involving the operation of the rotating unit 500 is selected in a state where the upper limit value has been reached, an alternative effect in which the rotating unit 500 does not operate is replaced. Accordingly, the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that failure such as poor contact can be prevented (suppressed). In this control example, the detection range of the touch sensor 290 and the range of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 are close to each other. Therefore, the touch effect can be executed only as an alternative effect when the number of operations of the rotary unit 500 has reached the upper limit so that the operation of the rotary unit 500 and the touch effect using the touch sensor 290 do not conflict. Make up. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the touch effect and the rotation display effect are simultaneously generated and the player is confused.

  In the first control example, the upper limit of the number of operations of the rotating unit 500 is increased twice every three hours, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the time zone, the rotation display effect may be configured to be executable until the number of times reaches the upper limit (for example, 10 times) per day. With this configuration, the more likely that the player plays the game from an earlier time slot, the higher the possibility that the rotation display effect will be performed can be increased. it can.

  In the first control example, in order to prevent the touch effect and the rotation display effect from being executed at the same time, the execution of the rotation display effect is canceled (when the number of executions of the rotation display effect reaches the upper limit, ), A touch effect is executed as an alternative effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to first determine whether or not to set a touch effect, and to be able to select the rotation display effect only when the touch effect is not set. It is not necessary to adopt a configuration for performing two-stage determination. In the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, the variable display mode in which only the rotation display effect is set and the variable display mode in which only the touch effect is set are separately defined in association with different values of the sub-variation selection counter 223t. Alternatively, the configuration may be made. Further, the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a defines a variation display mode in which both the production is performed in one variation display by shifting the execution period of the touch production and the execution period of the rotation display production. Is also good. Even when these modifications are made, it is possible to prevent the touch effect and the rotation display effect from being executed simultaneously. Therefore, when the player tries to touch the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 according to the touch effect, the player touches the rotating unit 500 that is rotating, and the rotating unit 500 is damaged or the player is injured. Can be prevented (suppressed). In addition, the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 makes it difficult for the player to touch the display screen, thereby preventing the player from being stressed by being unable to satisfactorily participate in the touch effect.

  In the first control example, once the split display (see FIG. 63) is set, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous notice effect (8 hold effects) for new winning information. The configuration was not performed. That is, only when the whole of the sub-display area Ds is behind the school of fish, it is configured to determine whether or not to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect for new winning information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . After split display on the back of the fish school and the back of the foam, it may be determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect for the new winning information. That is, in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 102), the process of S3103 is deleted, and if the continuous notice flag 223q is ON in the process of S3102 (S3102: Yes), the process of S3104 is always executed. Good. If it is determined in step S3104 that the continuous announcement effect is to be set (extended) for the new winning information, the entire sub-display area Ds is displayed on the back of the fish school even when the split display is set. It is good also as composition which returns to a mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the continuous announcement effect has been extended for new winning information. Further, when a new start winning is detected in a state where the divided display is set, and it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is set (extended) for the acquired new winning information, the divided display is maintained. Alternatively, the display area on the right side of the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information may be set on the back of the school of fish. With this configuration, the player can more clearly recognize the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball having a high degree of expectation.

  Further, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not to set (extend) the continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects) for new winning information during the continuous announcement effect, and to determine whether to newly start the continuous announcement effect. Is determined under the same condition (probability), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the continuous announcement lottery table 222e (see FIG. 71 (b)) is referred to when a new continuous announcement effect is started, and when a new start winning is detected during the execution of the continuous announcement effect. The table and the table may be separately provided to make the probabilities different. In this case, the determination of whether or not to set the continuous announcement effect for new winning information during the execution of the continuous announcement effect may set the winning probability higher. With this configuration, once the continuous announcement effect is started, it is easy to set the continuous announcement effect for new winning information, so the continuous announcement effect continues over a larger number of variable displays. It will be easier. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting the jackpot for a longer period of time.

  In the first control example, the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in which the reserved symbols are displayed is changed to the mode in which the image of the fish school is displayed on the back as the continuous preview effect (8 reserved effects). , But is not limited to this. As long as the same type of effect is set continuously over eight (plural) variable displays, for example, the display mode (color, shape, etc.) of a reserved symbol to be subjected to a continuous announcement effect is changed. May be. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the held symbols to be subjected to the continuous announcement effect. In addition, instead of or in addition to changing the back side of the sub display area Ds and the display mode of the reserved symbols, the display mode of the variable display of the third symbol in which the continuous announcement effect is set is changed to a special mode. It is good also as a structure which performs. Specifically, a specific character that does not appear (or is difficult to appear) in the variable display performed in a state where the continuous announcement effect is not set may be displayed, or the mode of the third symbol may be changed to the continuous announcement. The display mode may be changed to a display mode dedicated to the effect, or the rear image may be changed to a rear type dedicated to the continuous announcement effect. Further, the combination of stop symbols at the time of departure may be configured to be a special combination of stop symbols (a so-called chance eye).

  In the first control example, the configuration is such that a determination is made as to whether or not to newly execute a continuous announcement effect (8 pending effects) irrespective of the number of the retained ball having a high degree of expectation. But it is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that as the lottery result with a high degree of expectation is held on a new holding ball in time, eight holding effects are more easily executed. With this configuration, when the continuous announcement effect is started, the degree of expectation that the latter half of the reserved ball will be a big hit can be increased, so that the player is expected to wait until the end of the continuous announcement effect. The feeling can be maintained.

  In the first control example, only two settings of lighting or extinguishing are provided as the settings of the red, blue, and green LEDs in each of the LEDs 1 to 40. That is, in the setting of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 in the operation scenario table 222f, if the bit corresponding to each color is 1 (ON), the LED of that color is turned on, and if the bit is 0 (OFF), the LED of that color is turned on. Although simple control for turning off the light has been performed, it is not limited to this. For example, the setting of each color LED may be made finer. Specifically, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of light emission states are provided between the time when the light is turned off and the time when the light is completely turned on. That is, by configuring the LED current value of each color LED to be changeable in a plurality of levels (for example, 16 levels), the brightness of each color may be adjusted to enable gradation expression. Then, as the operation scenario table 222f, the data corresponding to the lighting state of each color is configured to be represented by the number of bits corresponding to the number of stages (for example, 16 bits for 16 stages), and the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99) In the case where a new light emission pattern is set in the parentheses, the LED current value of each color may be updated from the read bit data. With this configuration, red, green, blue, yellow (red + green), purple (red + blue), light blue (green + blue), and white (red + green) can be expressed by a combination of red, green, and blue. In addition to green (green) and blue (all unlit), various colors can be realized. Specifically, by lighting red, green, and blue with current values corresponding to half the luminance of full lighting, gray can be expressed as a color. By turning on red (lighting at the maximum current value), turning green on at a current value corresponding to half the brightness of full lighting, and turning off blue, orange can be expressed as a color. it can.

<Modification of First Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, as each of the LEDs 1 to 40, LEDs of three colors of red, green, and blue are configured as a set, and lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs of each color can be independently controlled. , So that a plurality of colors can be expressed.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the first control example, monochromatic LEDs are employed as each of the LEDs 1 to 40. Specifically, each of LEDs 1 to 20 was replaced with a single red LED, and each of LEDs 21 to 40 was replaced with a single blue LED. Thus, the weight of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, and the cost ratio can be reduced.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example is that the LEDs 1 to 20 are each replaced with a single red LED, and the LEDs 21 to 40 are replaced. Each is replaced with a single blue LED, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 Has changed. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the structure of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 124A, in the present modification, among the 40 LEDs 532 provided in the rotating unit 500, the LEDs 1 to 20 are configured by red LEDs and the LEDs 21 to 40 are configured by blue LEDs. . In the present control example, as the rotation display effect, only the LEDs 1 to 20 configured by the red LEDs are turned on, so that the red character effect of displaying the red characters as an afterimage and only the LEDs 21 to 40 configured by the blue LEDs are performed. There is provided a blue character effect in which a blue character is displayed as an afterimage by lighting. In addition, the red character effect is easily selected in the variation pattern of the probability change big hit (big hit A, C), and the blue character effect is easily selected in the normal big hit (big hit B) change pattern. With this configuration, when the rotating operation of the rotating unit 500 is started, a game can be played by paying attention to the lighting color.

  In addition, in the present modification, a purple character effect that may be selected only in the variation pattern of the jackpot A (16 round probability variation jackpot) that is most advantageous for the player is configured to be executable. This purple character effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 (b) is a diagram showing a state of an afterimage during execution of the purple character effect. When the purple character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 124B, the red LED and the blue LED arranged at the target position of each red LED perform the same lighting operation at the same rotation position. As a result, an afterimage drawn by the red light emitted by the red LED and an afterimage drawn by the blue light emitted by the blue LED are alternately viewed at a minute time interval. In this case, it is difficult for the human eye to distinguish and recognize the red and blue characters, and as a result, the red and blue characters are superimposed due to the integration effect of the human eyes. Is perceived as if the afterimage is displayed in purple letters.

  As described above, in the present modification, three-color characters can be expressed using only two-color LEDs. Thus, the number of parts of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, and the effect can be maximized while reducing the weight and the cost ratio.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in a modified example of the first control example will be described. FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 125, the RAM 223 in this modification is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 73) in that a scenario storage area 223af is provided. Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the first control example.

  The scenario storage area 223af is a storage area for storing an operation scenario corresponding to each of the red character effect, the blue character effect, and the purple character effect. Note that, in the modification of the first control example, only the operation scenario for red character effect is defined in the operation scenario table 222f. That is, only the light emission patterns for the LEDs 1 to 20 are specified, and the light emission patterns for the LEDs 21 to 40 are not specified. For this reason, when the operation scenario read from the operation scenario table 222f is applied as it is, it is impossible to execute the red character effect. Therefore, in the present modification, the operation scenario read from the operation scenario table 222f is converted into a format corresponding to each effect and stored in the scenario storage area 223af, and based on the operation scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223af. The light emission pattern is set by using With such a configuration, the data amount of the single operation scenario table 222f can be reduced.

  When performing the blue character effect, the data of the correspondence between the LED of the operation scenario read from the operation scenario table 222f and the light emission pattern is stored in the scenario storage area 223af. That is, the light emission pattern of LED1 is converted to the light emission pattern of LED40, the light emission pattern of LED2 is converted to LED2, and thereafter, the light emission patterns up to LED21 are inverted and stored in scenario storage area 223af. As a result, a blue character effect can be realized with simple control. Further, when performing the purple character effect, every time the rotating unit 500 makes one rotation, the correspondence between the LED and the light emission pattern of the operation scenario is inverted to update the scenario storage area 223af. Thereby, purple character production can be realized with simple control.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of First Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in a modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the rotation display operation setting process (S2211) in this modification. In the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 126) in the modified example of the first control example (see FIG. 126), in each of the processes of S2801 to S2808 and S2810, the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 99) in the first control example is respectively performed. The same processes as those of S2801 to S2808 and S2810 are executed.

  In the rotation display operation setting process (see FIG. 126) in the modified example of the first control example, in the process of S2808, when it is determined that the lighting setting completed flag 223ac is on (S2808: Yes), the first control is performed. In place of the lighting setting updating process (see FIG. 100) in the example, lighting setting updating process 2 is executed (S2821), and this process ends. Details of the lighting setting update processing 2 (S2821) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the process of S2810, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is on (S2810: Yes), a lighting start process for setting the start of the light emission pattern is executed (S2822), and this process ends. . Details of the lighting start processing (S2822) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the lighting setting update processing 2 (S2821) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the lighting setting update process 2 (S2821). In the lighting setting update process 2 (S2821), similarly to the lighting setting update process (see FIG. 100), the lighting pattern of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is updated according to the progress (rotational position) of the rotation operation of the rotation unit 500. It is processing for.

  Of the lighting setting update processing 2 (see FIG. 127) in the modified example of the first control example, in each processing of S2901 to S2903, S2906, and S2907, the lighting setting update processing in the first control example (see FIG. 100), respectively. The same processes as those of S2901 to S2903, S2906, and S2907 are executed.

  Further, in the lighting setting update processing 2 (see FIG. 127) in the modification of the first control example, when the processing of S2902 ends, it is next determined whether or not the current rotation display effect is a purple character effect ( In S2911), if it is a purple character effect (S2911: Yes), a scenario in which the correspondence between the LED and the light emission pattern of the operation scenario currently stored in the scenario storage area 223af is inverted, and the scenario storage area 223af is generated. Is overwritten (S2912), and the flow shifts to the process of S2903. The process of S2911 is executed every time the rotating unit 500 makes one turn and returns to the origin position. Therefore, when the purple character effect is set, each time the rotating unit 500 makes one turn, the light emitting pattern for the red LED is emitted. And the emission pattern for the blue LED can be set alternately. Therefore, as a result, the afterimage drawn by the red light and the afterimage drawn by the blue light are alternately perceived at minute time intervals. As a result, red and blue can be synthesized and perceived as purple by the integration effect. Therefore, afterimages of different colors can be expressed using only the red LED and the blue LED.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2911, if it is determined that the current rotation display effect is not a purple character effect (a red character effect or a blue character effect) (S2911: No), the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 223af. Since the (light emission pattern) can be used as it is, the process of S2912 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2903.

  In the process of S2903, similarly to the first control example, the step counter 223ad and the value of the operation pointer 223ae are reset to the initial values (S2903). Next, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value (00H) of the operation pointer 223ae after the reset is read from the scenario storage area 223af, set to each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S2913), and the present process ends.

  Further, in the lighting setting update processing 2 (see FIG. 127) in this modification, when it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the output of the origin sensor is off (S2901: No), the data is stored in the scenario storage area 223af. The operation scenario (light emission pattern) and the value of the step counter 2233ad are read (S2914), and the flow shifts to the process of S2906.

  In the lighting setting update process 2 (see FIG. 127) in this modification, when the process of S2907 ends, the light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae updated by the process of S2907 is read from the scenario storage area 223af. Each of the LEDs 1 to 40 is set (S2915), and the process ends.

  Next, a lighting start process (S2822) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the lighting start process (S2822). This lighting start processing (S2822) is executed in the rotation operation setting processing (see FIG. 126), and determines whether or not the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is stable. This is a process for setting 40 light emission patterns.

  In the lighting start process (S2822), first, 1 is added to the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa (S3901). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa after the addition is 10 (S3902). That is, similarly to the first control example, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 has reached a rotation speed that can be considered to be sufficiently stable. In the processing of S3902, when it is determined that the value of the rotation number counter 223aa is not 10 (9 or less) (S3902: No), the rotation number after starting the rotation operation is small, and the rotation speed is stable. Since there is no possibility that there is no light emission pattern, this processing is terminated without setting the light emission pattern.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3902 that the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa is 10 (S3902: Yes), the operation scenario specified in the operation scenario table 222f is read (S3903), and the read operation scenario is read. , The conversion according to the effect type (red character effect, blue character effect, purple character effect) is performed, and the processing of S3904 to S3906 stored in the scenario storage area 223af is executed.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current rotation display effect is a blue character effect (S3904), and if it is a blue character effect (S3904: Yes), the LED and light emission of the operation scenario read out in the processing of S3903. After inverting the correspondence with the pattern, the operation scenario after the inversion is stored in the scenario storage area 223af (S3905), and the process shifts to S3907. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3904 that the current rotation display effect is not a blue character effect (a red character effect or a purple character effect) (S3904: No), the operation scenario read in the process of S3903 is processed. Without (conversion), it is stored in the scenario storage area 223af as it is (S3906), and the process shifts to S3907.

  In the processing of S3907 executed after the processing of S3905 or S3906, the value of the operation pointer 223ae is reset to the initial value (00H) (S3907), and the light emission pattern corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223ae after the reset is stored in the scenario storage area. The data is read out from the 223af and set for each of the LEDs 1 to 40 (S3908), and the present process ends.

  By this lighting start process (see FIG. 128), the operation scenario can be processed (converted) according to the effect type, and the light emission operation of each of the LEDs 1 to 40 can be started in the operation scenario after the processing (conversion).

  As described above, in the modified example of the first control example, monochromatic LEDs are employed as the LEDs 1 to 40, respectively. Specifically, each of LEDs 1 to 20 was replaced with a single red LED, and each of LEDs 21 to 40 was replaced with a single blue LED. Thus, the weight of the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, and the cost ratio can be reduced.

  In a modification of the first control example, the type of the LED to be turned on (red LED or blue LED) is switched for each turn, and control is performed so that the turned on position and the turned off position are the same. The effect is configured to be executable. Thereby, the red afterimage generated by the emission of the red LED and the blue afterimage generated by the emission of the blue LED are combined, and the player can be perceived as a purple afterimage. Therefore, even with a small number of LED types, more colors can be expressed, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  In this modification, the rotation speed of the rotation unit 500 is constant (one cycle in 0.1 second) regardless of the type of the rotation display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the purple character effect is set, the rotation unit 500 may be rotated at a rotation speed higher (for example, twice) than the rotation speed of the other effects. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time interval from when one color LED emits light to when the other color LED emits light at the same position during purple character production, so that the afterimage can be reduced. Can be perceived more clearly purple. Therefore, the effect can be further enhanced.

  In this modification, two types of red and blue LEDs are employed, but the type of LED is not limited to this, and any type of LED may be employed. For example, green and white LEDs may be employed, or yellow and orange LEDs may be employed. With this configuration, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Further, the LED is not limited to one color, and an LED in which two or more LED chips of different colors are arranged in one package may be employed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of colors that can be expressed, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect. Specifically, for example, as in the first control example, LEDs configured by a combination of a red LED, a blue LED, and a green LED are employed as the LEDs 1 to 20. On the other hand, as the LEDs 21 to 40, LEDs configured of a combination of cyan, magenta, and yellow are employed. With this configuration, the color gamut that can be expressed can be expanded.

  In the present modified example, only two settings of lighting or extinguishing are provided as the setting of each of the LEDs 1 to 20 constituted by the red LEDs and the setting of each of the LEDs 21 to 40 constituted by the blue LEDs. That is, if the bit corresponding to each of the LEDs 1 to 40 in the operation scenario table 222f is 1 (ON), the LED corresponding to that bit is turned on, and if 0 (OFF), the LED corresponding to that bit is turned off. Although the simple control to make it perform was performed, it is not limited to this. For example, the setting of each LED may be made finer. Specifically, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of light emission states are provided between the time when the light is turned off and the time when the light is completely turned on. That is, by configuring the LED current value of each LED to be changeable in a plurality of stages (for example, 16 stages), the brightness of each LED may be adjusted to enable gradation expression. Then, as the operation scenario table 222f, the data corresponding to the lighting state of each LED is represented by the number of bits corresponding to the number of stages (for example, 16 bits for 16 stages), and the rotation display operation setting process (FIG. 126) In the case where a light emission pattern is newly set in (see Reference), the LED current value of each LED may be updated from the read bit data. With such a configuration, various colors can be realized in addition to the three colors of red, blue, and purple. More specifically, the red LED that has reached the predetermined lighting position is fully lit, and the blue LED that has reached the same lighting position in the next round is lit with half the brightness of the full lighting, so that the color is pink. Can be expressed. In this case, similarly to the first control example, the LEDs 1 to 20 are configured by a combination of red, green, and blue LEDs, and the LEDs 21 to 40 are configured by a combination of LEDs of different colors (for example, cyan, magenta, and yellow). You may comprise. With this configuration, it is possible to realize afterimages of more various colors. In addition, since the afterimage of a color that can be expressed by a combination of red, green, and blue and the afterimage of a color that can be expressed by a combination of cyan, magenta, and yellow can be quickly switched in a very short time, these afterimages can be switched. The superimposition can realize an afterimage of a color gamut wider than the color gamut that can be expressed only with red, blue, and green. Therefore, the effect can be further enhanced.

  In this modification, only one operation scenario table 222f that defines the light emission pattern for the red LED (for the LEDs 1 to 20) is provided. The light emitting pattern in the blue light emitting pattern can be set by inverting and setting the correspondence between the LED and the light emitting pattern in the light emitting pattern for red characters. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two types of light emission patterns for red character production and light emission for blue character production are provided, and in the case of purple character production, a light emission pattern for red character production and a light emission pattern for blue character production May be alternately switched for each rotation. With such a configuration, it is possible to express a mode in which there is no rotational symmetry in the vertical direction as a display mode of the afterimage, so that it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the rotational display effect.

  In this modification, only three types are provided: a red character effect composed of only red afterimages, a blue character effect composed of only blue afterimages, and a purple character effect composed of only purple afterimages. However, an effect in which afterimages of each color coexist may be executed. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a light emitting pattern having a light emitting position where only one of the blue LED and the red LED emits light and a light emitting position where both emit light are provided. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the variation of the display mode of the afterimage in the rotation display effect.

  In the first control example and its modification, the light emission pattern for one rotation operation of the rotation unit 500 is defined as the operation scenario table 222f (see FIG. 71 (c)), and the same data is directly processed or processed. Although the configuration is repeatedly set (by inverting the correspondence between the LED and the light emission pattern), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of different scenarios may be defined as a light emission pattern for one round, and an operation scenario to be applied may be switched for each rotation number of the rotation unit 500 (the value of the rotation number counter 223aa). Then, the configuration of the afterimage may be changed according to the rotation speed (the value of the rotation speed counter 223aa). Specifically, for example, by repeating the three characters of “hit” approaching or separating from each other according to the number of rotations, the afterimage may look as if each character is shaking. Further, the character may be gradually changed to a different character (for example, a character such as “congratulations”) according to the rotation speed. With this configuration, the effect of the rotation display effect can be diversified, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, the number of times of entry into the first entry port 64 and the number of entry into the second entry port 640 or the right second entry port 640r are respectively the upper limit values of 4 times. (If a total of eight ball entries have been suspended), a continuous announcement effect (8 pending events) will be executed to perform the same type of effect over the variable display corresponding to the eight ball entries. A possible gaming machine has been described.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the presentation effect to which the ticket (privilege) is given is displayed as the presentation display executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the number of tickets given in the presentation effect is displayed. , The reel effect is displayed during the jackpot game. In the reel effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode where all three symbols are aligned (any of "○○○", "△△△", "□□□"). Is given (that is, the winning in the jackpot). Since this reel effect is configured to be executed (displayed) during the big hit game after the normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is given after the big hit game, the big hit game is started. In this case, the player who has recognized that the normal gaming state is given can be notified of the transition to the certain-variable gaming state, so the impression that the given bonus has been improved (so-called promoted). Can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the second control example, when the winning information is held based on the winning of the game ball, the fluctuation type is removed before the holding, and the winning information of the short fluctuation is continuously held. On the basis of these, short-range deviations are changed (overwritten) to short-reach fluctuation types, and a continuous short-reach effect is performed. In the case where the winning information that becomes a big hit based on the winning of the game ball is held, the short reach is set to be executed three times in succession as a continuous short reach effect, and the winning information that is out of the set is held. Is set so that short reach is executed twice consecutively as a continuous short reach effect. This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the short reach will be executed three consecutive times in the continuous short reach effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second control example, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed, the rear image is not changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Thereby, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem in which the continuous short reach effect executed over a plurality of variations gives the player an impression as if the rear image was temporarily interrupted due to the change of the back image. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. Further, when the continuous short-reach effect is executed, the rear image is changed based on the passage of time (that is, the rear image is changed in synchronization with a plurality of gaming machines, so-called island-linked effect). Is performed), the rear image can be changed. Thereby, the change of the back image based on the lapse of time (so-called island-linked effect) is executed without delay, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, the continuous short-reach effect is terminated in the middle, and a privilege (ticket used in the reel effect described above) is provided according to the progress degree of the terminated continuous short-reach effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the continuous short reach production ends in the middle.

  The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is one. The difference is that the copy is changed and the processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. Other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, among the effects performed in the second control example, a reel effect displayed during the execution of the big hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a reel effect performed during the big hit game. Specifically, FIG. 129 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a time point when the first reel effect executed during the big hit game is started, and FIG. 129 (b) is a diagram illustrating a winning reel effect as a reel effect. It is a figure showing an example at the time of execution and a specific mode (display in which three symbols are aligned) was displayed.

  FIG. 130 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the reel effect performed during the big hit game. Specifically, FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a time when all reel effects are off reel effects and the last off reel effect ends, and FIG. 130 (b) is a probable changing game state. It is a figure showing an example of a promotion ending effect that is executed when all reel effects executed in the jackpot game shifted to are out of reel effects (or when the reel effect is not displayed). .

  The reel effect is an effect that is executed (displayed) during the execution of the jackpot game in accordance with the number of tickets given based on the execution (display) of the applied effect. Specifically, the number of reel effects that can be executed is varied according to the number of tickets. For example, if one ticket is given, the reel effect can be executed once, and four tickets are given. If so, the reel effect can be executed four times. By displaying a specific mode (display in which three symbols are aligned) in the reel effect, it is notified that the game is shifted to the certain-variable game state after the end of the executed big hit game. This gives the player an impression that the expected effect of displaying the specific mode in the reel effect in the jackpot game executed thereafter is increased by displaying the granted effect in which the ticket is given. Can improve the interest of the game. Also, by displaying a specific mode in the reel effect, it is notified that the game is shifted to the certainty-changing game state despite the fact that the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot has been executed. The impression that the player has improved (so-called promoted) can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this control example, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is increased (the number of tickets increases) by displaying the added effect in the variable effect until the big hit game is started. When the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 1 or more, a reel effect can be executed in the big hit game. When the reel effect is executed with the value of the ticket counter 223bb being 8, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), when the big hit game of the fourth round is executed, the third symbol display device is executed. The display of the reel effect is started in the lower right part of the screen 81. The reel effect displayed at the lower right of the screen is that three types of reels (circular, triangular, square) that are rotated are displayed side by side, and three reels are displayed side by side. The text "If you arrange three within eight times, you will be promoted!" Is displayed. Also, in the upper right portion of the screen, the characters “ticket × 8” indicating the number of tickets (ie, the value of the ticket counter 223bb) given by the giving effect executed until the big hit game is started are displayed. Is done.

  The trigger for starting the reel effect is not limited to the start of the fourth round, and may be another trigger. For example, the timing at which the reel effect is started may be changed according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb, or the timing at which the reel effect is started may be changed according to the time of the reel effect to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the effect time of the reel effect from exceeding the execution time of the big hit game, and to suitably display the reel effect.

  The reel effect of the present control example is an effect in which one ticket is consumed (reduced) for each of the reels executed once. FIG. 129 (b) shows a case where the jackpot game has progressed from the state of FIG. 129 (a) where the number of tickets is eight, the reel has been changed six times, and the winning reel effect has been executed. FIG.

  When the reel change is performed six times from the state where the number of tickets is eight (see FIG. 129 (a)), the number of tickets becomes two, and as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the third symbol display device 81 Is displayed in the upper right part of the screen. Then, in the winning reel effect, the symbols displayed on the three rows of reels displayed at the lower right of the screen are all stopped and displayed as the same symbol (in this case, a circle figure). On the upper part of the reel, a character "promotional get" indicating that the probable change game state is given after the execution of the jackpot game is displayed. Here, when the reel effect is executed, a normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is given after the execution of the big hit game is displayed as the opening effect of the big hit game. Thereby, the winning reel effect is displayed for the player who has recognized that the normal gaming state is given after the execution of the jackpot game, so that a probable changing game state advantageous to the player after the execution of the jackpot game is given. Since the player is notified that the bonus is given, the player can be given an impression that the privilege to be given has improved (so-called promoted), and the interest of the player can be improved.

  After the winning reel effect is executed, it is already informed that the probable change game state is given after the execution of the big hit game. Therefore, the reel effect is terminated and the big hit game is executed.

  On the other hand, a case where a winning reel effect is not executed (displayed) in eight reel effects will be described. FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the hit effect is not executed (displayed) in the eight reel effects, and the eighth off-reel effect is executed (displayed).

  When the reel change is executed eight times from the state where the number of tickets is eight (see FIG. 129 (a)), the number of tickets becomes zero and the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 130 (a). Is displayed in the upper right part of the screen. Then, the last off-reach effect is executed (displayed), and when the symbols on the three reels are stopped and displayed with symbols that are not the same symbol, the character "Sorry!" Is displayed at the top of the reel ( FIG. 130 (a)). Then, the execution (display) of the reel effect ends, and when the jackpot game of the 16th round ends thereafter, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed (displayed).

  In this control example, as the ending effect of the jackpot game, an image simulating a closed door is displayed at the center of the screen, and an effect of opening the door is displayed. In the promotion ending effect, when the door is opened, the character “promotion” is displayed in the opened door as shown in FIG. Will be notified. On the other hand, in the normal ending effect, an image imitating a door is displayed in the same manner, and the word “sorry” is displayed in the opened door. Thus, even when the normal ending effect is displayed, the door can be opened and the player can be expected to display the character of “promotion”, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present control example, the timing at which each reel is stopped and displayed in the reel effect is predetermined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each reel may be stopped and displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22, or based on a game ball passing through a specific area (for example, the first entrance 64). , May be stopped and displayed. Thereby, each reel is stopped and displayed based on the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. Similarly, the trigger for starting the reel effect may be started based on the pressing of the frame button 22, or the passage of a game ball to a specific area (for example, the first entrance 64), or the like. Alternatively, the game may be started based on a ball having a predetermined number of balls or more in the specific winning opening 65a (so-called over winning).

  In the present control example, the probability variation opening effect for notifying that the probability variation game state is given at the start of the bonus game is provided. However, the probability variation opening effect may not be provided. This makes it impossible to determine whether or not the probability change game state is given at the time when the big hit game is started, so that the effect during the big hit game can be noticed.

  In the present control example, the reel effect is configured to be executed once for one ticket provided in the provided effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. A reel effect may be executed when a predetermined number or more is accumulated, a reel effect may be executed once for a plurality of tickets, or a reel effect may be executed for one ticket. A plurality of reel effects may be executed. Furthermore, a reel effect in which the number of valid lines is changed (for example, three lines) according to the number of consumed tickets may be executed (displayed). The number of tickets to be consumed may be determined by lottery or may be naturally selectable by a player. In other words, the number of tickets to which a ticket has been awarded by the awarding effect may be stored, and the mode of the reel effect to be executed may be varied according to the stored number of tickets.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131 and FIG. 132, the continuous short reach effect executed in the second control example will be described. The continuous short-reach effect is an effect that informs that the next change will be a big hit if the short reach is executed three times in succession. In the continuous short-reach effect in the present control example, the prize information held in the prize information storage area 223a is four or more (that is, four or more balls are reserved), and the fluctuation information is out of the short fluctuation prize information. This is an effect that is executed when it is continuously suspended. Details of the conditions for setting the execution of the continuous short reach effect will be described later with reference to the winning command receiving process 2 (FIG. 139).

  Here, a flow in which a continuous short reach effect is set when the winning information, which is a big hit, is suspended, and when a back change (special back setting) based on the passage of time is performed during the execution of the continuous short reach effect Will be described. In this control example, one of the short variation and the long variation is selected by lottery as the variation type regardless of the number of winning information held (the number of suspensions).

  First, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), as the prize information stored (held) in the prize information storage area 223a, a short fluctuation out of hold 1, a long fluctuation out of hold 2, a short fluctuation out of hold 3, and a hold In the state where the short fluctuation is stored in the storage 4 and the short fluctuation is stored in the storage 5, when the winning information which is a big hit is stored as the storage 6, as shown in FIG. The winning information up to three before is changed (overwritten) so as to be a continuous short reach effect. As described above in the first control example, the area of the prize information storage area 223a is an area of hold 1 to hold 8, and the hold timing is older (that is, executed) from the area of hold 1 in order. Winning information is stored.

  Specifically, the winning information of Hold 1 and Hold 2 is not changed, and Hold 3 is changed to Short Reach (first time), Hold 4 is changed to Short Reach (second time), and Hold 5 is changed to Short Reach (third time) (overwrite). ) Is done. After these three consecutive short reach operations are executed by the reservations 3 to 5, a change to be a big hit is started.

  After that, when four changes based on the hold 1 to the hold 4 are executed, as shown in FIG. 131 (c), the short reach (the third time) is stored in the hold 1, and the jackpot winning information is stored in the hold 2. Becomes On the screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this state, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the character of "morning mode" indicating the current background (mode) is displayed on the left of the area Dm1 at the top of the screen, In the center part of the area Dm1, a character of "number of consecutive reach two times" indicating the number of short reach executed continuously is displayed, and the "ticket" indicating the number of tickets awarded in the award effect is displayed on the right part of the area Dm1. × 2 ”is displayed. The second short reach effect being executed is displayed in the area Dm2 at the center of the screen, and two circle figures are displayed in the area Ds1b indicating the current number of reserved balls in the area Ds at the bottom of the screen. Indicates that the number of reserved balls is 2.

  In this state, when the execution timing of the island-linked effect comes, the change of the back image is executed, and the special back image (the background of the city mode) is set. When the back image is changed to the special back image during the execution of the continuous short reach effect, the transition effect shown in FIG. 132 (b) is executed. In this transition effect, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), an effect in which a ticket (here, two tickets) given in the giving effect is given according to the number of consecutive short reach (here, two times). The display, which is displayed in the central area Dm2 and indicates the number of tickets on the right side of the area Dm1 at the top of the screen, is updated in accordance with the number of granted tickets. In addition, the variable display that was displayed in the area Dm2 before the transition effect was displayed is displayed in a simple manner of only numbers in the lower right area Dm3 of the area Dm2, and is displayed in the center of the area Dm1. The display indicating the number of consecutive reach times is not displayed. While the transition effect is displayed, the variable display is displayed in the area Dm3 in a simple manner of only numbers, so that even if the display period of the transition effect straddles the timing at which the next variable display is started, it is preferable. Can be changed.

  When the rear image is changed to the special rear image (background in the town mode), the short reach (the third time) of the hold 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223a is released as shown in FIG. 131 (d). It is changed (overwritten) to the fluctuation, and the continuous short reach production ends. Thereby, the continuous short reach effect set before the rear image is changed to the special rear image can be ended at the timing when the rear image is changed. As a result, the back image and the effect of the variable display can be integrally executed, so that the effect of the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 133A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 133A, the ROM 222 in the present control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an additional effect selection table 222ba and a reel effect selection table 222bb are added, and the other points are the same. is there. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 133 (b), details of the effect presentation selection table 222ba will be described. FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the giving effect selection table 222ba. As shown in FIG. 133 (b), the assigned effect selection table 222ba is a table in which the type of the assigned effect selected according to the value of the effect counter 223f is defined.

  Specifically, for the value “0 to 179” of the effect counter 223f, “None” indicating that the applied effect is not selected is specified as the applied effect type. Since the effect counter 223f is a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, the probability that the assigned effect type “none” is selected is 180/198.

  For the value “180 to 194” of the effect counter 223f, “given effect A” indicating an effect in which one ticket is awarded is specified as the applied effect type. The probability of selecting the giving effect A is 15/198.

  For the value “195 to 198” of the effect counter 223f, “given effect B” indicating an effect in which two tickets are awarded is defined as an applied effect type. The probability of selecting the giving effect B is 4/198.

  The presentation effect to which a ticket is given is displayed by the presentation effect selected based on the presentation effect selection table 222ba. Depending on the number of tickets given in the giving effect, whether or not a reel effect is executed in the big hit game and the number of reel effects to be executed are changed. Thereby, it is possible to expect the player to execute (display) the giving effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Note that details of the reel effect will be described in a reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137).

  Next, the contents of the reel effect selection table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 133 (c). The reel effect selection table 222bb is a table for selecting an effect mode to be executed during the jackpot game in accordance with the number of times that the above-described giving effect is executed and the ticket is given. As shown in FIG. 133 (c), the reel effect selection table 222bb includes a short reel effect selection table 222bb1 in which a reel effect with a short effect time is easily selected and a long reel effect selection table in which a reel effect with a long effect time is easily selected. 222bb2.

  Here, the details of the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 and the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 134 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the short reel effect selection table 222bb1. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 defines the type of reel effect corresponding to the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223f.

  Specifically, when the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot, a short reel effect in which the effect time is 5 seconds is defined for the value “0-14” of the effect counter 223f, and the value “15-” of the effect counter 223f. For example, a long reel effect per 10 seconds for the effect time is defined for "19", and a short reel effect for the effect time of 5 seconds is specified for the value "20 to 169" of the effect counter 223f. For the value “170 to 198”, a short reel production in which the production time is out of 10 seconds is defined.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, a short reel effect in which the effect time is out of 5 seconds with respect to the value “0 to 149” of the effect counter 223f is defined, and the value “150 to 198” of the effect counter 223f. , A long reel production with a production time of 10 seconds is prescribed.

  Next, the details of the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the long reel effect selection table 222bb2. As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the reel effect type is defined in the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 corresponding to the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223f.

  Specifically, when the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot, a short reel effect is defined for the value “0 to 2” of the effect counter 223f, and a hit is determined for the value “3 to 19” of the effect counter 223f. A long reel effect is defined, an off-short reel effect is defined for the value “20 to 149” of the effect counter 223f, and an off-long reel effect is defined for the value “150 to 198” of the effect counter 223f. .

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, a short reel effect is defined for the value “0 to 99” of the effect counter 223f, and a long reel is determined for the value “100 to 198” of the effect counter 223f. Direction is prescribed.

  As described above, in the second control example, the short reel production with a short production time and the long reel production with a long production time can be selected as the reel production performed according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb during the big hit game. It has become. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of varieties of reel effects, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, a short reel effect selection table 222bb1 in which a short reel effect with a short effect time is easy to be selected and a long reel effect selection table 222bb2 in which a long reel effect with a long effect time is easy to select are provided, according to the progress state of the big hit game. , Which table is used is made variable. Thereby, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the effect time of the reel effect from exceeding the execution time of the big hit game, and to suitably display the reel effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, details of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 135, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that the promoted flag 223ba, ticket counter 223bb, reel effect setting timing 223bc, reel effect timing counter 223bd, continuous short reach counter 223be, continuous The difference is that a short reach setting flag 223bf is added, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The promoted flag 223ba is a flag for determining whether or not an effect indicating that the game is to shift to the sure-change game state after the end of the big-hit game is executed (displayed) in the big-hit game. It indicates that an effect indicating transition to the gaming state has been executed (displayed) (or has been executed (displayed)), and when turned off, it has not been executed (displayed). The promoted flag 223ba is set to ON when a winning reel effect is selected in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) (see S4110 in FIG. 137). In addition, in the opening effect setting process (see FIG. 141), when the certain variation opening effect is selected, it is set to ON (see S4106 in FIG. 141).

  Then, in the jackpot command-related process 2 (see FIG. 140), the process is referred to when the ending command for the jackpot game based on the probability change jackpot is received (see S3334 in FIG. 140), and the promoted flag 223ba is on (ie, If it is already informed that the game state will shift to the probable change game state), the probable ending effect indicating the ending of the probable big hit is selected as the ending effect of the jackpot game (see S3335 in FIG. 140). On the other hand, when the promoted flag 223ba is off (that is, when it is not informed that the game state will shift to the probable change game state), the promotion indicating that the probable change game state is subsequently given as the ending effect of the jackpot game The ending is selected (see S3336 in FIG. 140). In this way, in the jackpot game, although the transition to the normal gaming state is reported, the transition to the certainty-changing gaming state is reported, so the privilege to be granted is improved (so-called promoted). ) Can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The ticket counter 223bb is a counter for counting the number of tickets given by the executed (displayed) giving effect. This ticket counter 223bb is incremented in accordance with the selected presentation effect when the presentation effect is selected in the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) (see S3535 in FIG. 143). In addition, when a special back surface set based on the passage of time is set during execution of the continuous short reach effect, the special back is set according to the number of times the continuous short reach effect is executed (that is, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be). (See S3733 in FIG. 144). Then, the reel effect is referred to in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137), and the reel effect according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb is executed (displayed) during the execution of the big hit game, and the reel effect is executed (displayed). Is subtracted by one (see S4016 in FIG. 137). Further, when the winning reel effect is executed (displayed), since the reel effect is not executed (displayed) in the same big hit game thereafter, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is initialized to 0 ( 137 of FIG. 137).

  The reel effect setting timing 223bc is an area in which a value indicating the setting timing of the reel effect is stored. Specifically, the timing at which the reel effect is set is stored as the elapsed time (millisecond) from the start of the big hit game. When the value of the reel effect timing counter 223bd to be described later coincides with the reel effect setting timing 223bc, it is determined that it is the timing to set the reel effect (see S4003 in FIG. 137).

  The reel effect timing counter 223bd is a counter for counting the elapsed time (millisecond) since the start of the big hit game, and is a counter for determining the execution timing of the reel effect executed during the big hit game. The reel effect timing counter 223bd is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a big hit game is being performed in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 2 (see FIG. 136). (See S4002 in FIG. 137). Then, in the reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137), it is referred to determine whether or not it is the timing for setting the reel effect (see S4003), and when the winning reel effect is executed, or when the ticket counter 223bb is executed. When the value becomes 0 (that is, when the reel effect ends), it is cleared to 0 (see S4012 in FIG. 137).

  The continuous short reach counter 223be is a counter for counting the number of times that the short reach effect is continuously executed. The continuous short reach counter 223be adds 1 when a short reach variation pattern is selected in the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) (see S3537 in FIG. 143), and selects a variation pattern other than the short reach. In this case, it is initialized to 0 (see S3539 in FIG. 143). The value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is referred to when the special back setting performed based on the passage of time is performed (see S3731 in FIG. 144), and the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is greater than 0 (see FIG. 144). That is, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed), a transition effect according to the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is displayed.

  The continuous short-reach setting flag 223bf is a flag for determining whether or not the continuous short-reach effect has been set. When it is on, it indicates that the continuous short-reach effect has been set. Indicates that the reach effect has not been set. The continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (see S3137 in FIG. 139) when execution of the continuous short reach effect is set in the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139). Then, in the jackpot-related command processing 2 (see FIG. 140), when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received, the setting is turned off (see S3332 in FIG. 140). The continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is referred to in the winning command reception processing 2 (see FIG. 139), and is configured to set the execution of the continuous short reach effect when the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off. ing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the continuous short reach production from being set repeatedly.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 144, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that main processing 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead of main processing (see FIG. 93). The main process 2 (see FIG. 136) is different from the main process (see FIG. 93) of the first control example in that a reel effect setting process (see FIG. 137) is added, and is replaced with a command determination process (see FIG. 101). 138, a variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 142) instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 105), and a special back surface setting process (see FIG. 142). 108 is different from that of the first embodiment in that the special back surface setting process 2 (see FIG. 144) is executed instead of the special back surface setting process (see FIG. 144), and the other parts are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 2, the processes of S2201 to S2211 are executed as in the main process (see FIG. 93) in the first control example described above.

  After finishing the process of S2211, a reel effect setting process is executed (S2231), and the flow shifts to a process of S2212. When the processing shifts to S2212, the command determination processing 2 is executed (S2212), the variable display setting processing 2 is executed (S2213), the special back setting processing 2 is executed (S2214), and the processing shifts to S2216. After S2216, the processes of S2216 to S2219 are executed as in the first control example described above.

  Here, the details of the reel effect setting process (S2231) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 137. This reel effect setting process (S2231) is a process for executing (displaying) a reel effect according to the value of the ticket counter during the big hit game.

  In the reel effect setting process (S2231), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit game is being executed (S4001). In the process of S4001, if it is determined that the jackpot game has not been executed (S4001: No), it is not the timing to execute the reel effect, and the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4001 that the jackpot game is being executed (S4001: Yes), the value of the reel effect timing counter 223bd is counted in order to count the time elapsed since the start of the jackpot game. Is incremented by 1 (S4002), and based on the updated value of the reel effect timing counter 223bd and the value of the reel effect setting timing 223bc, it is determined whether or not it is the reel effect setting timing (S4003). .

  In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the timing is not the setting timing of the reel effect (S4003: No), the process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4003 that it is the timing to set the reel effect (S4003: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S4004), and whether the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 5 or not. Is determined (S4005).

  In the process of S4005, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 5 (S4005: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the number of rounds of the currently executed jackpot game is 8 or more. (S4006). In the processing of S4006, when it is determined that the number of rounds of the jackpot game is eight or more (S4006: Yes), the value of the ticket counter 223bb (that is, the remaining execution number of the reel effect) remains large. In this case, the remaining time of the jackpot game is reduced. In this case, a reel effect is selected based on the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223f using the short reel effect selection table 222bb1 in which a reel effect with a short effect time is easily selected (S4007), and the process of S4009 is performed. Move to. This makes it possible to execute all the remaining reel effects in the remaining time of the jackpot game. If all the remaining reel effects could not be executed, the value of the ticket counter 223bb may not be initialized and may be taken over until the next big hit game is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4005, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 5 or less (S4005: No), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is small (that is, the number of remaining reel effect executions) is small. Since there is a reel effect, a reel effect is selected using the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 in which a reel effect with a long effect time is easily selected (S4008), and the process shifts to S4009. Thereby, in the big hit game, since the reel effect does not end early, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Also, in the processing of S4006, when it is determined that the number of currently-running jackpot rounds is smaller than eight (S4006: No), it is a case where the remaining time of the jackpot game is long, and thus the reel having a long rendering time is long. The reel effect is selected using the long reel effect selection table 222bb2 in which the effect is easily selected (S4008), and the process proceeds to S4009. Thereby, in the big hit game, since the reel effect does not end early, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the process of S4009, it is determined whether or not the reel effect selected in the process of S4007 or S4008 is a winning reel effect (S4009). In the process of S4009, when it is determined that the winning reel effect has been selected (S4009: Yes), the promoted flag 223ba is set to ON (S4010), and the value of the ticket counter 223bb is cleared to 0 (S4011). Then, the reel effect setting timing 223bc and the reel effect timing counter 223bd are cleared (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4009 that the winning reel effect has not been selected (that is, the off-reel effect has been selected) (S4009: No), then the value of the ticket counter 223bb becomes smaller than 0. It is determined whether it is larger (S4013).

  In the processing of S4013, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 0 (S4013: Yes), the reel effect is executed based on the value of the ticket counter 223bb. The timing at which the reel effect is completed is updated as the value of the reel effect setting timing (S4014), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is decremented by 1 (S4015), and the process proceeds to S4016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4013 that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 0 (S4013: No), it means that the reel effect is not to be executed in the currently executed jackpot game. The process of S4012 is executed to clear the information, and the process proceeds to S4016.

  In the process of S4016, a display reel effect command indicating the reel effect selected in the process of S4007 or S4008 is set (S4016), and the process ends. The display reel effect command set in the process of S4016 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S2202) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display reel effect command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a reel effect corresponding to the received command.

  As described above, by the reel effect setting process (S2231), a reel effect corresponding to the number of tickets given in the giving effect is executed during the big hit game. In the reel effect, it is variable depending on the progress status of the jackpot game (that is, the remaining time of the jackpot game) which of a long reel effect with a long effect period and a short reel effect with a short effect period is easy to select. Is done. Thereby, a reel effect can be suitably executed according to the game time of the big hit game.

  When a jackpot game with a short game time is executed (for example, a jackpot of two rounds), a special reel effect (see FIG. 177) that consumes a large amount of tickets provided by the provided effect is executed. Is also good. Thereby, even when a big hit game with a short game time is executed, a reel effect can be suitably executed.

  This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the reel effect performed during the big hit game.

  FIG. 177 (a) shows a display screen at the time when the jackpot game with a short game time (two rounds) is executed and the reel effect is started in the jackpot game when the number of tickets provided by the provided effect is eight. FIG.

  When the two-round jackpot game is executed, the reel effect is started at the timing when the first round is started. In this reel effect, the probability that three symbols are aligned (winning probability) is set to be different depending on the number of consumed tickets. Specifically, when the number of consumed tickets is three, the winning probability is 80%, when the number of consumed tickets is two, the winning probability is 60%, and the number of consumed tickets is one. In the case of, the winning probability is 40%. The relationship between the number of consumed tickets and the winning probability is displayed in the central portion on the right side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the winning probability varies depending on the number of consumed tickets. When the number of consumed tickets is large, the winning probability is set to be high, so that three symbols are aligned. Can be expected from the player.

  Then, characters “consumed tickets 2” indicating the number of consumed tickets are displayed above the reels displayed as the reel effect, and the first reel variation display is executed. In the first reel change display, all the tickets (8 tickets) may be consumed, and the winning probability may be increased according to the number of all consumed tickets.

  When the first reel fluctuation display ends, the display screen shifts to the display screen shown in FIG. 177 (b). Specifically, the number of tickets is reduced (consumed) from eight to six, the round of the jackpot game shifts to the second round, and the second reel fluctuation display is started. In the second reel fluctuation display, a reel on which three tickets are consumed is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the character "Reel has increased" is displayed above the reel. A reel on which another three tickets are consumed is displayed further above. With the plurality of (two) reels, a reel effect in which a total of six tickets are consumed is executed.

  Since the winning probability when three tickets are consumed is 80%, the probability that one of the reels is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (a mode in which three symbols are aligned) is 96%, which is a higher probability. The reel effect is stopped and displayed in a specific mode. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved, and the ticket provided by the provision effect can be consumed even in the jackpot game in which the production time is short, so that the reel performance can be performed, so that the reel performance can be suitably performed.

  In this way, by changing the presentation mode of the reel effect according to the type of the jackpot game, even in the jackpot game in which the game time is short, the reel effect can be executed using all the granted tickets, A reel effect can be suitably executed.

  In the reel effect in which two reels are simultaneously displayed in a variably manner, one bonus (showing that the number of rounds per jackpot is 16 rounds is increased) based on the specific display mode being stopped and displayed on one reel. Display), and another privilege (display indicating that the gaming state shifts to the certain-variable gaming state) may be provided based on the stop of the specific display mode on the other reel.

  In addition, the reel effect is executed during the big hit game in accordance with the number of tickets provided in the provided effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a reel effect may be executed (displayed) during execution of the variable display in order to indicate the current game state. Specifically, when a specific mode is displayed in the reel effect, it is notified that the current game state is a probable change game state (so-called latency probable change game state). Thereby, even when the jackpot game is not executed, an effect based on the ticket provided by the provided effect can be executed, and the number of tickets can be suitably controlled. Further, the reel effect may not indicate the current gaming state but may indicate whether or not there is winning information that will be a big hit in the winning information storage area 223a.

  In the case where the reel effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, it is configured such that the effect mode of the reel effect (the number of consumed tickets, the effect time, and the like) is changed according to the fluctuation time of the variable display. Is also good. This makes it possible to suitably execute (display) the reel effect in accordance with the fluctuation time. Further, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the reel effect is changed in accordance with the timing at which the rear surface change is executed.

  Next, the details of the command determination process 2 (S2212) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This command determination process 2 (S2212) is different from the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 101) in that a prize command reception process 2 (see FIG. 139) is executed instead of the prize command reception process. The difference is that the jackpot related command processing 2 is executed instead of the related command processing, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the command determination process 2 (S2212), the processes from S3001 to S3009 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 101). Then, in the processing of S3009, when it is determined that the winning command has been received (S3009: Yes), the winning command receiving processing 2 is executed (S3010), and this processing ends. Details of the winning command receiving process 2 (S3010) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3009 that the winning command has not been received (S3009: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S3011, and the processing of S3011 to S3013 is executed as in the first control example.

  If it is determined in the process of S3013 that a jackpot-related command has been received (S3013: Yes), the jackpot-related command process 2 (S3014) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the jackpot-related command processing 2 (S3014) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the winning command receiving process 2 (S3010) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 139. The winning command receiving process 2 is a process executed when it is determined in the command determining process 2 (see FIG. 138) that a winning command has been received.

  In the winning command receiving process 2 (S3010), first, the information of the received winning information command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3101), and the process proceeds to S3131.

  In the process of S3131, it is determined whether or not the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off (S3131). In the process of S3131, if it is determined that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is ON (S3131: No), it means that the continuous short reach effect has already been set, and thus this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3131 that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is off (S3131: Yes), it is determined whether or not there are four or more winning information held in the winning information storage area 223a. It is determined (S3132). In the process of S3132, when it is determined that the winning information held is 3 or less (S3132: No), the continuous short reach effect cannot be set, and thus the process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3132 that there are four or more pieces of the winning information held (S3132: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current winning information is the winning information of the jackpot (S3133). . In the processing of S3133, when it is determined that the current winning information is a big hit (S3133: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is 19 or less (S3134).

  In the process of S3134, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is larger than 19 (that is, a value of 20 to 198) (S3134: No), the present process is performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. To end.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3134, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is equal to or less than 19 (S3134: Yes), next, the winning information up to three before the current winning information is deviated, and the short fluctuation occurs. It is determined whether or not it is the variation type (S3135).

  In the process of S3135, if it is determined that all the winning information up to three before the current winning information do not deviate from the short winning fluctuation (S3135: No), this process is directly performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3135, when it is determined that all of the winning information up to three before the current winning information are out of the fluctuation type of the short fluctuation (S3135: Yes), in order to set the continuous short reach effect Then, the winning information up to three before the current winning information is overwritten with the short reach variation type (S3136), and the process shifts to S3137.

  In the process of S3133, when it is determined that the current winning information is out (S3133: No), it is then determined whether the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less (S3138). In the process of S3138, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter is greater than 1 (that is, a value of 2 to 198) (S3138: No), this process is performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. To end.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3139, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is equal to or less than 1 (S3138: Yes), next, the winning information up to two immediately preceding the current winning information deviates from the short fluctuation. It is determined whether or not it is the variation type (S3139).

  In the process of S3139, if it is determined that all the winning information up to two before the current winning information are not out of the fluctuation type of the short fluctuation (S3139: No), the continuous short reach effect is not set, and The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3139, when it is determined that the winning information up to two before the current winning information is the fluctuation type of the short fluctuation (S3139: Yes), the processing is performed up to two immediately before the current winning information. Is overwritten with the short reach variation type (S3140), and the flow shifts to the process of S3137.

  In the process of S3137, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf indicating that the continuous short reach effect has been set is set to ON (S3137), and this process ends.

  As described above, when the winning information is a big hit, if the value of the effect counter 223f updated in the range of 0 to 198 is 19 or less, the continuous short reach effect is set. That is, when the winning information is a big hit, the continuous short reach effect is set with a probability of 19/198 (about 10%). On the other hand, when the winning information is out, if the value of the effect counter 223f is 1 or less, the continuous short reach effect is set. That is, when the winning information is out of order, the continuous short reach effect is set with a probability of 2/198 (about 1%). As a result, when the continuous short reach production is set, the winning information is likely to be a big hit, and therefore, by executing the continuous short reach production, the player can be expected to come to the big hit. , Can enhance the interest of the player.

  Note that, in the present control example, the continuous short reach effect is configured to be set when two or more short-range fluctuations are set as the fluctuation type regardless of the game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, it may be configured such that the continuous short reach effect is set only in the time saving game state. In addition, the probability that the continuous short reach effect is set may be changed according to the game state.

  Next, details of the jackpot-related command processing 2 (S3014) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The jackpot-related command processing 2 (S3014) is determined to have received a jackpot-related command in the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 138), similarly to the jackpot-related command processing (see FIG. 104) of the first control example. This is the process that is executed in the case.

  In the jackpot-related command processing 2 (S3014), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received as a jackpot-related command (S3301). If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), the opening effect setting processing is executed (S3331), the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is turned off (S3332), and this processing is performed. To end.

  Here, the details of the opening effect setting process (S3331) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 141. The opening effect setting process (S3331) is a process executed to set an opening effect when it is determined in the jackpot-related command process 2 (see FIG. 140) that an opening command has been received.

  In the opening effect setting process (S3331), first, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a probable big hit (S4101). In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S4101: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 (S4102). In the process of S4102, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 0 (that is, the reel effect can be executed) (S4102: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S4103). Then, the value of the effect counter 223f is determined (S4104), and the opening effect is selected.

  Specifically, when it is determined in the process of S4104 that the value of the effect counter 223f is equal to or less than 99 (that is, a value of 0 to 99) (S4104: Yes), the probable opening effect is selected. (S4105), the promoted flag 223ba is set to ON (S4106), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is set to 0 (S4107), and the process shifts to S4112.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4104, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is 100 or more (that is, a value of 100 to 198) (S4104: No), the reel effect is executed during the big hit game. Then, the flow shifts to the process in S4109.

  Also, in the process of S4101, if it is determined that the type of the jackpot to be started is the normal jackpot (S4101: No), then, it is determined whether the value of the ticket counter 223bb is greater than 0 ( In step S4108, a process for executing a reel effect is executed according to the determination result.

  In the process of S4108, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is larger than 0 (S4108: Yes), the normal opening effect is selected to execute the reel effect (S4109), and the reel effect setting timing is set. 223bc is set (S4110), and the flow shifts to the process of S4112.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4108, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 0 (S4108: No), the reel effect cannot be executed, so the normal opening effect is selected (S4111). The process proceeds to S4112.

  In the process of S4112, a display opening effect command indicating the opening effect selected in any of the processes of S4105, S4109, and S4111 is set (S4112), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the jackpot game based on the probability change jackpot is executed, as the opening effect, the same opening effect as the case where the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot game is executed (that is, after the jackpot game) There is a possibility that an effect indicating transition to the normal game state) may be selected. In this case, when a specific mode (display in which three symbols are aligned) is displayed in the reel effect executed during the big hit game, it is notified that the game state shifts to the surely changing game state. Thereby, even when the opening effect based on the normal jackpot game is displayed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in expectation of displaying a specific mode (display in which three symbols are aligned) in the subsequent reel effect, It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Referring back to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received (S3303).

  In the process of S3303, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3303: Yes), the processes of S3304 and S3305 are executed similarly to the jackpot-related command process in the first control example (see FIG. 104). Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3303: No), it is next determined whether an ending command has been received (S3306). In the process of S3306, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S3306: No), the process ends. In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 138), the ending command is not received (that is, various jackpot-related commands are not received) even though it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received. If it is determined that an error has occurred, it is considered that an error has occurred, and an error process indicating the occurrence of the error (for example, outputting a sound indicating the occurrence of the error, setting a display error command, etc.) is performed. It may be. Thereby, the occurrence of the abnormality can be promptly notified.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3306 that the ending command has been received (S3306: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed was based on the probability-change jackpot (S3333). In the process of S3333, if it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is based on the normal jackpot (S3333: No), the normal ending indicating that the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is ended is selected ( S3337), and shifts to the processing of S3338.

  In the process of S3333, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is based on the probable jackpot (S3333: Yes), it is determined whether or not the promoted flag 223ba is on (S3334).

  In the process of S3334, if it is determined that the promoted flag 223ba is on (S3334: Yes), it is already informed that the game will shift to the probable change game state after the jackpot game, and therefore, it is based on the probable change jackpot. The probable ending indicating that the big hit game is over is selected (S3335), and the flow shifts to the process of S3338.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3334, when it is determined that the promoted flag 223ba is off (S3334: No), it is not informed that the game will shift to the certain-variable game state after the big hit game, and the normal game after the big hit game Since the effect of shifting to the state (similar to the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot) has been executed, the gaming state to be shifted to after the jackpot game has changed (promoted) from the normal gaming state to the probable changing gaming state. Is selected (S3336), and the process moves to S3338. By the process of S3336, it is possible to give the player an impression that the granted privilege has been improved (so-called promoted), and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the processing of S3338, the display ending command indicating the ending effect selected in the processing of S3335 to S3337 is set, and this processing ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process 2 (S2213) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This variation display setting process 2 (S2213) is a variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) in place of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 106) in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) of the first control example. Is executed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variation display setting process 2 (S2213), first, the processes from S3401 to S3403 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and thereafter, the variation pattern selection process 2 is set (S3404), and the process proceeds to S3405. After S3405, as in the first control example, the processing from S3405 to S3411 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection process 2 (S3404) executed in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 142) will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection process 2 (S3404) is a process for selecting a variation pattern display mode according to the variation pattern command notified from the main control device 110 and setting a variation pattern command for display. In addition, in the variation display performed according to the set variation pattern, it is a process for selecting whether or not to perform the giving effect, and setting a display giving effect command for displaying the selected giving effect. .

  In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S3404), first, in order to set a variation pattern, S3501 to S3506 (excluding the process of S3504) are executed in the same manner as the variation pattern selection process in the first control example, and the giving effect is set. Then, the process shifts to the process of S3531. In the process of S3531, it is determined whether the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8 or less (S3531). In the process of S3531, when it is determined that the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 9 or more (S3531: No), the process shifts to the process of S3536 without setting the giving effect. This prevents a problem that the value of the ticket counter 223bb becomes excessively large and the reel effect executed (displayed) based on the value of the ticket counter 223bb cannot be completely executed (displayed) during the big hit game. (Suppression)

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3531 that the ticket counter is equal to or less than 8 (S3531: Yes), the provision effect selection table 222ba is used to select the provision effect based on the value of the provision counter 223f (S3532). Then, in the processing of S3532, it is determined whether or not the provision effect is selected (S3533). If it is determined that the provision effect is selected (S3533: Yes), the display provision indicating the selected provision effect is performed. An effect command is set (S3534), the value of the ticket counter 223bb is added according to the selected imparted effect (S3535), and the flow shifts to the process of S3536. In the process of S3535, specifically, when the giving effect A is selected, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is added by 1, and when the giving effect B is selected, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is added by 2. . Therefore, in the present control example, when the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8 or less, it is possible to select the imparting effect. In this case, by selecting the imparting effect B, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is set to 10 which is the maximum value. Become.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio at which the application effect is selected may be changed according to the value of the ticket counter 223bb. For example, when the value of the ticket counter 223bb is 8, only the presentation effect A may be provided so that the value of the ticket counter 223bb may be 9 at the maximum.

  In addition, the ratio at which the presentation effect is selected may be changed according to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. For example, if the winning information storing area 223a stores the winning information that will be a jackpot, it may be configured to increase the ratio at which the awarding effect is selected.

  When it is determined in the processing of S3533 that the giving effect has not been selected (S3533: No), the processing of S3534 and S3535 is skipped, and the flow shifts to the processing of S3536.

  In the processing of S3536, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of S3505 is short reach (S3536). In the process of S3536, when it is determined that the variation pattern is short reach (S3536: Yes), the continuous short reach counter 223be is incremented by 1 (S3537), and the back surface change prohibition flag 223u is turned on (S3537). S3538), and terminates this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3536 that the fluctuation pattern is not short reach (S3536: No), the continuous short reach counter 223be is initialized to 0 (S3539), and this processing ends.

  By setting the back change inhibition flag 223u to ON in the processing of S3538, the change of the back image based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is prevented from being executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 94). Here, if the rear image is changed during the execution of the continuous short reach effect, the continuous short reach effect is terminated in the middle. On the other hand, in the present control example, during the execution of the continuous short reach effect, the rear image is not changed even if the frame button 22 is pressed. Thereby, even if the player is excited or erroneously presses the frame button 22, the back image is not changed, so that the continuous short reach effect is prevented from being terminated in the middle (suppression). it can. It should be noted that an image such as a character image may be displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 during the continuous short-reach effect, so that the continuous short-reach effect is continued.

  Next, the details of the special back surface setting process 2 (S2214) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 144. In the special back setting process 2, when the back image is changed to the special back image during the execution of the continuous short reach effect, the transition effect is displayed in the special back setting process (FIG. 108) in the first control example. And the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the special backside setting process 2 (S2214), first, the processes of S3701 to S3703 are executed as in the first control example. In the processing of S3703, if it is determined in the processing of S3702 that it is the special rear face switching timing based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 (S3703: Yes), then, is the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf greater than 0? It is determined whether or not it is (S3731).

  In the process of S3731, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is greater than 0 (S3731: Yes), a transition effect according to the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be indicating the number of times of the continuous short reach is performed. A transition effect command for display is set (S3732). The transition effect command for display set by the process of S3732 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S2002) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display transition effect command, the display control device 114 displays a transition effect in which a ticket is given according to the number of consecutive short reach. As a result, even if the continuous short-reach effect is ended by switching the background screen during the execution of the continuous short-reach, the effect in which the ticket is given is displayed, so that the player may be dissatisfied. Can be suppressed (prevented).

  When the processing of S3732 is completed, the value of the ticket counter 223bb is updated according to the transition effect set in the processing of S3732 (S3733), the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is initialized to 0, and the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf Is set to off (S3734), and the flow shifts to the process of S3735.

  In the processing of S3735, the fluctuation type stored in the prize information storage area 223a is short-reach, and the fluctuation type corresponding to the shifted special back surface is reselected and overwritten (S3735), and the processing of S3704 is performed. Move to. By the process of S3735, the variation can be executed (displayed) in the variation type according to the set special back surface.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3731, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223bf is 0 (S3731: No), the process skips S3732 to S3735 and shifts to the process of S3704.

  When the processing shifts to S3704, the processing from S3704 to S3707 is executed as in the first control example, and this processing ends.

<Control processing executed by display control device in second control example>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a reel effect command process, a transition effect command process, and an imparting effect command process are added in the command determination process (see FIG. 145). Are identical. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the command determination process, the processes of S6401 to S6411 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example described above.

  Then, in the process of S6410, when it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (S6410: No), it is next determined whether or not the display reel effect command has been received (S6431).

  In the process of S6431, when it is determined that the display reel effect command has been received (S6431: Yes), the reel effect command process is executed (S6432), and the process returns to S6401. Details of the reel effect command processing (S6432) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6431 that the display reel effect command has not been received (S6431: No), then it is determined whether or not the display transition effect command has been received (S6433).

  If it is determined in the process of S6433 that the display transition effect command has been received (S6433: Yes), the transition effect command process is executed (S6434), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the transition effect command processing (S6434) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (b).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6433 that the display transition effect command has not been received (S6433: No), then it is determined whether or not the display application effect command has been received (S6435). In the process of S6435, when it is determined that the giving effect command for display has been received (S6435: Yes), the giving effect command process is executed to display the giving effect during execution (display) of the variable display. (S6436), and returns to the process of S6401. Details of the giving effect command processing (S6436) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S6435 that the display transition effect command has not been received (S6435: No), the processing of S6416 to S6420 is executed as in the first control example, and the processing of S2601 is performed. Return to

  Next, details of the reel effect command processing (S6432) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a flowchart showing reel effect command processing. The reel effect command process executes a process corresponding to the display reel effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the reel effect command processing, first, a reel effect display data table corresponding to the reel effect indicated by the display reel effect command is determined, and the determined reel effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8501). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the reel effect display data table is determined, and the determined transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502).

  Then, based on the reel effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S8505), the reel effect command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 146 (b), the details of the transition effect command processing (S6433) will be described. FIG. 146 (b) is a flowchart showing the transition effect command processing (S6433). This transition effect command processing (S6443) executes processing corresponding to the display transition effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the transition effect command processing, first, a transition effect display data table corresponding to the transition effect indicated by the display transition effect command is determined, and the determined transition effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8602).

  Then, based on the transition effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S8605), the transition effect command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, details of the giving effect command processing (S6436) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the giving effect command processing (S6436). The giving effect command process (S6436) executes a process corresponding to the display giving effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the giving effect command processing, first, the giving effect display data table corresponding to the giving effect indicated by the display giving effect command is determined, and the determined giving effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702).

  Then, based on the provided effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S8705), the giving effect command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  As described above, in the second control example, the presentation effect to which the ticket (privilege) is given is displayed as the presentation display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the ticket given in the presentation effect is given. The reel effect is displayed during the jackpot game in accordance with the number of pieces. In the reel effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode where all three symbols are aligned (any of "○○○", "△△△", "□□□"). Is given (that is, the winning in the jackpot). Since this reel effect is configured to be executed (displayed) during the big hit game after the normal opening effect indicating that the normal game state is given after the big hit game, the big hit game is started. In this case, the player who has recognized that the normal gaming state is given can be notified of the transition to the certain-variable gaming state, so the impression that the given bonus has been improved (so-called promoted). Can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present control example, a configuration in which the game state that shifts after the jackpot game is suggested according to the effect mode of the reel effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to indicate the number of rounds of the jackpot game. Specifically, if a reel display is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (a mode in which three symbols are aligned), the jackpot game is executed up to 16 rounds. Otherwise, the jackpot game is ended in 8 rounds. May be configured. In addition, a specific mode may easily be stopped and displayed in the reel effect in accordance with the number of tickets or the type of the ticket.

  In addition, although the occasion where the ticket is given is a case where the giving effect is displayed during the execution of the variable display, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ticket may be given based on a game ball having entered the specific winning opening 65a, or a game ball having a predetermined number of balls or more entering the specific winning opening 65a (so-called over winning). ) May be given a ticket. This can increase the number of variations of the opportunity for the ticket to be given, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the second control example, the configuration is such that the giving effect of giving the ticket is executed based on the result of the lottery on whether or not to give the ticket. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ticket may be given when a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, fish school reach) is executed as a fluctuation display for displaying a special symbol lottery result. Further, a ticket may be given when all of a plurality of predetermined fluctuation patterns are executed. In this case, the player can select an effect (or a combination of a plurality of effects) to which a ticket is given, and a variation pattern (for example, normal reach) that is executed less frequently than a variation pattern that is executed more frequently (for example, normal reach). For example, the person who selects “Super Reach” may increase the number of tickets to be granted.

  With such a configuration, in addition to the pleasure of knowing the lottery result, a ticket is acquired (a privilege not based on the special symbol lottery is obtained) with respect to the variable display for displaying the special symbol lottery result. ) Since fun can be provided, the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, a configuration is made such that a condition (for example, a variation pattern) to which a ticket is given can be selected (set) by a player, and the number of tickets to be given is made different based on the difficulty of achieving the selected (set) condition. By doing so, the player can play the game while predicting the fluctuation display to be executed in the future, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, when ending the game with the acquired ticket, a specific effect right erasing means for erasing the acquired ticket may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the acquired ticket from being used by the next player. Further, the information regarding the acquired ticket may be displayed in a form (for example, password information or two-dimensional code information) that the player can acquire. Thus, by inputting information about the ticket acquired when the next game is executed, the ticket acquired in the previous game may be used continuously. This makes it possible to increase the willingness to participate in the next game.

  In the second control example, the rate at which the effect in which the ticket is given is executed is always constant regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, but the effect in which the ticket is given is executed based on the gaming state. May be configured to be variable, for example, a gaming state in which it is easy to win a jackpot (a time-saving gaming state in which it is easier to perform a lottery of a special symbol than in a normal gaming state, or a special symbol in a gaming state that is more special than in a normal gaming state). (A high-probability game state in which the probability of winning in the lottery is high) is set so that a ticket is more easily provided than in the normal game state. Thereby, when the period (time or the number of lotteries for special symbols) until the jackpot game is executed is short, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of tickets to be awarded. First, it is possible to execute an effect during a jackpot game (reel effect using a ticket).

  In addition, when the number of acquired tickets is small (or not present), such as immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or immediately after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot game using all the tickets acquired in the jackpot game), the jackpot is won. If this happens, there is a possibility that the effect using the ticket cannot be executed during the jackpot game (the number of times the effect can be executed is reduced). Therefore, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or immediately after the end of the jackpot game, an effect in which a ticket is given under conditions different from the lottery (change) of the special symbol may be executed. For example, when the frame button 22 is depressed (operated), or an effect in which a ticket is given is executed on condition that a game ball enters the entrance provided in the game board 13, Good. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which an effect using a ticket cannot be executed during a jackpot game, even if the jackpot is won immediately after the power is turned on or immediately after the jackpot ends.

  In the second control example, the ticket providing effect in which the ticket is provided based on the game for the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 is not operated. Alternatively, the ticketing effect may be configured to be executed. For example, the ticketing effect may be executed when an RTC (real-time clock) measures a predetermined time. Thereby, the number of tickets can be automatically increased by the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is not playing a game, and the player can easily play the game.

  In the second control example, the effect using the acquired ticket is executed during the jackpot, and based on the result of the effect, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, Although it is configured to notify whether or not the game is in a certain-change game state, the acquired ticket may be used for other purposes. For example, in a game state where it is difficult for the player to determine whether the currently set game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player (so-called latent change state), an effect using the acquired ticket is executed. An effect that suggests (notifies) the current game state to the player as a result of the effect may be executed. In this case, the effect may be performed during a hit game in which the game state is not changed (for example, a small hit game). As a result, it is possible to execute an effect using the acquired ticket even in a state where the jackpot game is not executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by performing the effect using the period in which the hit game (small hit game) in which the game state is not changed, it is easy to divert at least a part of the effect data of the effect executed during the big hit game. Therefore, the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced.

  Further, it is preferable that a period in which the effect performed by using the ticket acquired by the player is executable is determined, and a specific effect is set from a plurality of effects based on the determination result. Thereby, for example, when a selection period for allowing the player to select whether or not to perform an effect is set, and when it is selected to execute the effect during the selection period, the selection period differs according to the remaining effectable period. The effect can be executed, and the player can be prevented from getting tired early. Also, by providing a plurality of effects with different staging periods as effects to be executed using the ticket obtained by the player, for example, at various timings during the jackpot game, and at various jackpot games with different jackpot game periods An effect using the ticket obtained by the player can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the fact that the ticket has been given by the giving effect is notified, and the number of tickets given is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of granted tickets may not be displayed. Further, the imparting effect may be a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize (for example, a bubble is displayed in a part of the background). Thereby, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be noticed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, surprisingness can be given when the reel effect is displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second control example, when the winning information is held based on the winning of the game ball, the fluctuation type is removed before the holding, and the winning information of the short fluctuation is continuously held. On the basis of these, short-range deviations are changed (overwritten) to short-reach fluctuation types, and a continuous short-reach effect is performed. In the case where the winning information that becomes a big hit based on the winning of the game ball is held, the short reach is set to be executed three times in succession as a continuous short reach effect, and the winning information that is out of the set is held. Is set so that short reach is executed twice consecutively as a continuous short reach effect. This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the short reach will be executed three consecutive times in the continuous short reach effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present control example, the short short fluctuation is changed (overwritten) to the short reach fluctuation type, and the continuous short reach effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute a continuous short reach effect irrespective of the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Specifically, when the short-reach variation is executed, the effect is controlled such that the short-reach effect is executed once, and when the short-reach effect is executed, the short-reach effect is pseudo-two. The effect may be controlled so as to be executed twice (so-called pseudo-run). Thus, even when the short variation is not continuous as the special symbol variation display, the continuous short reach effect can be executed.

  In addition, although the variation type of the short-term variation is changed (overwritten) to the variation type of the short reach, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the stop type may be changed to the reach mode without changing the change type. As a result, even if a plurality of types of fluctuation times are provided, stop display can be easily performed in the reach mode (specific mode) only by changing the stop type.

  In the second control example, when the continuous short reach effect is being executed, the rear image is not changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Thereby, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem in which the continuous short reach effect executed over a plurality of variations gives the player an impression as if the rear image was temporarily interrupted due to the change of the back image. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. Further, when the continuous short-reach effect is executed, when the rear image is changed based on the passage of time (that is, the rear image is changed in synchronization with a plurality of gaming machines, a so-called island-linked effect). Is executed), the rear image can be changed. Thereby, the change of the back image based on the lapse of time (so-called island-linked effect) is executed without delay, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, the continuous short-reach effect is terminated in the middle, and a privilege (ticket used in the reel effect described above) is provided according to the progress degree of the terminated continuous short-reach effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the continuous short reach production ends in the middle.

  In addition, when the continuous short-reach effect is being performed, the rear image may be changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Even when the back image is changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the transition effect may be displayed, or when the back image is changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22, Naturally, it may be configured such that the continuous short reach effect is continuously executed.

  In the second control example, the eight reserved effects in the above-described first control example are not executed. However, it may be configured such that the eight reserved effects can be executed.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 161. In the first control example described above, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected or when a specific time period is detected, only the rear image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol is changed. And had That is, only the rear image is switched while the mode of the third symbol or the holding symbol is maintained, and the image data for displaying the third symbol and the image data for displaying the holding symbol are common.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, a stage (back surface D) in which the third symbol and the reserved symbol can be switched to different modes is provided along with the rear image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a monotonous game.

  In the third control example, a hold announcement effect is provided in which the display mode of the hold symbol is varied according to the degree of expectation of winning information (hold ball) corresponding to the hold symbol. In this hold announcement effect, since the player can recognize the degree of expectation that will be a big hit according to the mode of the hold symbol, before the variable display corresponding to the hold symbol starts, Can be expected.

  When the display is switched to the back face D in a state where the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed, the display mode of the reserved symbol is also changed in conjunction with the rear image. In the present control example, when switching to the back face D is performed in a state where the hold notice effect is set, the control is changed to the hold notice effect corresponding to the back face D. Thus, it is possible to set an effect mode corresponding to the changed back type while continuing the hold announcement effect before and after the change of the back type.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The configuration of the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 is partially changed, the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. The point is that some of the processes performed are changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. FIG. 148 (a) shows that when the back face type is set as the back face type, the hold announcement effect is set for the third hold symbol HY1 from the right among the hold symbols displayed in the hold display area Ds1b. It is a figure showing a display mode in the case.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (a), the reserved symbol HY1 in which the reserved announcement effect is set is set to a color different from other reserved symbols. This color change basically continues until the reserved symbol HY1 is moved to the execution display area and the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol HY1 ends. Although the details will be described later, in the hold announcement effect, the hold symbol is changed to any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set so that the degree of expectation is lowest for blue, and increases in order of green, red, and rainbow. With this, when the reservation notice effect occurs, the color of the target reserved symbol that changes can be noticed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, a display mode when the back face D is set will be described with reference to FIG. The rear face D may be set by the player operating the frame button 22 during a period in which the rear face type can be changed. Specifically, in the third control example, the back type is changed in the order of back A → back B → back C → back D → back A →. As described above, when the back face D is set, the display style of the third symbol and the display style of the reserved symbol change in addition to the back face type. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the main display area Dm is changed to a mode in which the third symbol is composed of only numbers. Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls is displayed in a number in the reserved ball number display area Ds1c of the small display area Ds. Further, the text "simple mode" is displayed above the main display area Dm. As described above, when the back face D is set, the third symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed in a simple and easy-to-understand display mode, so that a beginner of a game or a player who is not good at a lively performance can play a game with peace of mind. Can be.

  It should be noted that the display pattern of the hold symbol at the time of change is common between when the change is made to the back face D in a state where the hold notice effect is set and when the change is not made. On the back surface D, at the time of the fluctuation stop, an effect corresponding to the suspension announcement effect (special suspension announcement effect) is executed. Details of the special reservation notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 (a) and (b).

  FIGS. 149 (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a display mode in a case where the display is changed to the back surface D in a state where the suspension notice is set, and the variable display being executed at the time of the change is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 149 (a), at the time of the fluctuation stop, both the mode of the third symbol and the mode of the reserved symbol are displayed in the same mode as the case where the special reserved advance announcement effect is not set. In addition, the special holding notice effect is executed for 0.1 second among the 0.5 seconds when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149 (b), the number “3” is displayed on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 for 0.1 second during the stop display. The number "3" is displayed until the hold symbol HY1 for which the hold announcement effect has been set is moved to the execution display area before the back type is changed to the back surface D (variable display corresponding to the hold symbol HY1 starts). The remaining number of fluctuations). That is, every time the variable display is executed and the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the number shown in FIG. 149 (b) is displayed for 0.1 second, and the number is reduced by one for each variable display. . Thereby, the player who has visually recognized the number can easily understand the start timing of the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol HY1 for which the reserved announcement effect has been set.

  It should be noted that the color of the number displayed in the special hold announcement effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) is set to the same color as the color of the hold symbol in the hold advance effect set before being changed to the back face D. . For example, in the state where the hold notice effect for changing to the red hold symbol is set, when the player switches to the back face D by operating the frame button 22, a special hold notice effect (FIG. 149 (b)) ) Is also set to red. The same applies to other colors.

  As described above, in the third control example, as one type of the back type (stage), the back D in which the display mode of the third symbol or the reserved symbol is also changed in addition to the rear image is provided. On the back face D, the display mode of the third symbol is changed to a simple mode composed of only numbers, and the mode of the reserved symbol is also changed to a simple mode in which the number of reserved balls is indicated by a number. Since the hold symbol is different from the other back types (back A to C), the hold announcement effect set for the other back type cannot be directly applied to the back D.

  However, if the configuration is changed to the rear face D, if the suspension notice effect is discontinued, there is a possibility that the player may have difficulty in recognizing the number of the reserve ball in which the reserve notice effect is set. is there. In addition, the suspension of the reserved announcement effect may cause the player to have a suspicion that the reserved ball for which the reserved announcement effect has been set has disappeared. On the other hand, when a hold announcement effect is set, a method of keeping each hold symbol including the hold symbol HY1 set with the hold advance effect even after changing to the back surface D may be considered. However, there is a possibility that the display mode of the third symbol and the display mode of the reserved symbol do not match, causing the player to feel uncomfortable with the displayed content.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, regardless of whether or not the hold announcement effect is set for any of the hold symbols, the same display mode is provided when the display is changed to the back face D. are doing. Then, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times of change until the change display based on the held ball in which the hold announcement effect is set is displayed for 0.1 second is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the special holding announcement effect without changing the manner of the holding symbol and the manner of the third symbol, and therefore, regardless of whether the holding announcement effect is set or not, It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display content of D from giving a sense of incongruity. In addition, by configuring the special hold notice effect to be executed at the timing of the stop display of the third symbol that the player pays the most attention to, the possibility that the player misses the special hold notice effect can be reduced.

  In the present control example, the special hold announcement effect is executed only for 0.1 second while the third symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the timing and the period for displaying the special hold advance effect are arbitrarily determined. You may.

  In the present control example, as the special hold announcement effect, the remaining number of changes until the start of the change display based on the hold ball having a high degree of expectation is displayed on the entire screen for 0.1 second. Is not something that can be done. For example, when the display is changed to the back face D in a state where the reserved announcement effect is set (see FIG. 148 (a)), characters indicating the remaining number of times until the reserved symbol HY1 is supported and the degree of expectation of the reserved symbol HY1 are displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which symbols and the like are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a character "What may happen in three more times !?" is displayed on the right side of the reserved ball count display area Ds1c. Also, for example, when the timing of starting the variable display corresponding to the hold symbol for which the hold announcement effect has been set, the hold symbol having the same form as the hold symbol displayed before the change of the back type is reduced. It is good also as a structure displayed on display area Ds.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 152. First, the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the ROM 222 in the third control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a hold notice execution determination table 222dc is provided. The hold notice execution determination table 222dc is a table that is referred to when determining whether to execute the hold notice effect. In the third control example, every time a new winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the hold notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to, and whether or not to set the hold notice effect is determined. The mode (the color of the reserved symbol) is determined. Details of the suspension notice execution determination table 222dc will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the hold notice execution determination table 222dc. As shown in FIG. 151, the hold notice execution determination table 222dc associates the range of the effect counter value with the type of hold notice effect (color of the hold symbol) for each type of winning information (lottery result). Stipulated.

  Specifically, when the winning information is the winning super-reach, “rainbow” is defined as the notice type in association with the value “0” of the effect counter 223f. In addition, "red" is defined as a notice type in association with the range of the effect counter 223f of "1 to 12", and "green" is corresponded as a notice type in the range of "13 to 22". In addition, “blue” is defined as a notice type in association with the range of “23, 24”. On the other hand, since the range of “25 to 198” is not specified, if the hold advance notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to in a state where the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range, the continuous advance effect is set. Not done.

  On the other hand, when the winning information is the hit normal reach, “red” is defined as the notice type in association with the range of the effect counter 223f of “0 to 7”. Also, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined as being associated with “green” as the notice type in the range of “8 to 13”, and the value “14” of the effect counter 223f is associated with “blue” as the notice type. Stipulated. On the other hand, since the range of “15 to 198” is not specified, if the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range and the suspension notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to, the continuous notice effect is set. Not done. Since the hit normal reach has a larger random number value (counter value) for which the continuous announcement effect is not set than the hit super reach, it is possible to expect the hit super reach at the stage when the hold announcement effect is set.

  When the winning information is lost and the super reach is reached, "red" is defined as the notice type in association with the range of the effect counter 223f of "90, 91". In addition, “green” is associated with the notice type in the range of “92 to 98” for the value of the effect counter 223f, and “blue” is assigned as the notice type to the value “99” of the effect counter 223f. Stipulated. On the other hand, since the range of “0 to 89, 100 to 198” is not specified, if the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range and the suspension notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to, the continuous Notice effect is not set. Since the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set smaller than the winning super reach and the winning normal reach, it is possible to expect a big hit when the pending announcement effect is set. it can.

  When the winning information is lost and the game reaches the normal reach, “green” is defined as the notice type in association with the value “98” of the effect counter 223f. In addition, “blue” is defined as the notice type in association with the value “99” of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, since the range of “0 to 97, 100 to 198” is not specified, if the value of the effect counter 223f is within this range and the suspension notice execution determination table 222dc is referred to, the continuous Notice effect is not set. Since the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set smaller than the hit super reach, the hit normal reach, and the out-of-reach super reach, if the hold advance effect is set, it will be a big hit. Can be expected.

  As shown in FIG. 151, the notice type of “rainbow” can be selected only in “winning super reach”. As a result, it is determined that the jackpot becomes a jackpot when the reserved symbol becomes “rainbow color”, so the jackpot becomes a jackpot until the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol “rainbow” is executed for the player. The game can be performed while giving a sense of superiority to the fact that it has been detected in advance. The "red" notice type is not selected in the off-normal reach mode. As a result, when the notice type of "red" occurs, it is determined that the game will be a jackpot or develop into a super reach, and therefore, a strong expectation is given to the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol changed to "red". Can be done.

  Next, the configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the work RAM 233 of the third control example is different from the work RAM 233 of the first control example (see FIG. 74) in addition to the new suspension notice command flag 233da and the suspension notice information storage area. 233 db. Various types of display data tables corresponding to the back surface D are provided as types of display data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. The various display data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b are transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 when the power is turned on, like the other display data tables.

  The new hold notice command flag 233da is a flag for determining whether or not to set a hold notice effect. If the new hold notice command flag 233da is on, it means that a hold notice effect is set (changes the form of the hold symbol), and if it is off, it means that the hold notice effect is not performed. The new suspension notice command flag 233da is set to ON when the display suspension notice command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S9001 in FIG. 158 (a)). The new suspension notice command flag 233da is referred to in the various image setting processing 3 (see S7552 in FIG. 161), and is set to off when the image data for the suspension notice effect is developed (S7555 in FIG. 161). reference). As a result, it is possible to display the image of the hold symbol corresponding to the display hold advance notice command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The hold notice information storage area 233db is a storage area in which data indicating the contents of the set hold notice effect is stored. In the reserved notice information storage area 233db, a dedicated storage area is provided for each reserved symbol, and data corresponding to the type of the reserved notice set for each reserved symbol is stored in each storage area. Specifically, for example, when “00H” is stored as the data corresponding to the type of the notice, it is determined that the hold notice is not set in the hold symbol corresponding to the storage area in which the data is stored. means. On the other hand, when “01H” is stored, it means that the notice type of “blue” is set, and when “02H” is stored, the notice type of “green” is set. When "03H" is stored, it means that the notice type of "red" is set, and when "04H" is stored, "rainbow" is stored. Means that the notice type of “color” is set. With the data stored in the suspension notice information storage area 233db, the display form of the suspension symbol can be accurately updated.

  Further, in the third control example, a special hold notice data table for setting a special hold notice effect when the back face D is set is included in the display data table. The details of the special suspension notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. 152 (b).

  FIG. 152 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special suspension notice data table. As shown in FIG. 152 (b), in this special suspension notice data table, only the display contents for the address (the value of the pointer 233f) in the range of 02E1H to 02E5H are specified. As described above, since the value of the pointer 233f is updated every 20 milliseconds, the display contents for 0.1 second (20 milliseconds × 5) are specified in this special hold advance notice data table.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (b), in this special hold advance notice data table, a back image for special hold advance notice is defined as a back image for each address (the value of the pointer 233f). In addition, as the character 1, a special hold notice symbol 3 is defined. In addition, eight types of special reservation notice symbols, 1 to 8, are provided, each of which is constituted by an image of a numeral of 1 to 8. In the example of FIG. 152 (b), since the special reservation notice symbol 3 is defined, it is configured by the same number 3 image as shown in FIG. 149 (b).

  When a new variation pattern command for display is received in the state where the special hold announcement effect is set, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern, the variation display data table, and the current special hold announcement effect are displayed. The special pending notice data table corresponding to the mode is selected. Then, in the display data table buffer 233d, the read two types of display data tables are combined. More specifically, in the variable display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the range of the pointer 233f corresponding to 0.1 second, which is the execution period of the special hold notice effect (example of FIG. 152 (b)) In this case, the data of 02E1H to 02E5H) is overwritten on the specified contents of the special suspension notice data table. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a table in which the special hold announcement effect of each mode is set and a table in which the special hold advance effect is not set as the variable display data table (0.1 corresponding to each mode). It suffices to define only the data for the second as a special hold notice data table), so that the data amount of the character ROM 234 and the work RAM 233 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 153, a winning information command receiving process 3 executed in place of the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 102) in the first control example will be described.

  In the winning information command receiving process 3 (see FIG. 153), in each process of S3101 to S3108, the same process as the respective processes of S3101 to S3108 of the winning information command receiving process (see FIG. 102) in the first control example, respectively. Is executed. Further, in the winning information command receiving process 3 (see FIG. 153) in the third control example, after the process of S3101 is completed, whether or not to set the hold announcement effect, and the type of setting of the hold advance effect Is executed (S3121), and the process proceeds to S3102. Details of the hold notice setting process (S3121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the hold notice setting process (S3121). When the suspension notice setting process (S3121) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current back type is the back D (S4201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the mode counter 223i is “4” corresponding to the back face D. Then, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the back face D has been set (S4201: Yes), this process ends without setting the hold announcement effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S4201 that a setting other than the back face D has been set (S4201: No), then it is determined whether the value of the suspension notice counter 223ca (not shown) is greater than 0 (S4202). ). The hold notice counter 223ca is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times until the variable display is executed based on the hold ball corresponding to the hold symbol for which the hold notice effect is set, and the hold notice effect is set. Each time, the current number of pending balls is set. Therefore, in the process of S4202, it is determined whether or not the hold announcement effect is being executed.

  In the process of S4202, when it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is larger than 0 (the hold notice effect is already being executed) (S4202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is set. The processing of steps S4203 to S4207 is skipped, and the processing ends. In the present control example, the hold announcement effect is configured not to be set redundantly, but may be set redundantly.

  In the process of S4202, if it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is 0 (S4202: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S4203), and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is obtained. By comparing the suspension notice execution determination table 222dc (see FIG. 151) with the execution of the suspension notice for the new winning information and when setting the suspension notice effect, the kind of the notice is determined (S4204).

  When the process of S4204 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the determination made in the process of S4204 has resulted in a determination to execute the suspension notice (S4205), and the determination result corresponding to non-execution of the suspension notice is determined. If it is determined that there is (S4205: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4205 that the hold advance effect is to be executed (S4205: Yes), the display control unit 114 displays the advance notice type of the hold advance effect identified from the hold advance execution determination table 222dc in the process of S4204. , A display hold advance notice command for notifying the user is set (S4206). Next, the value of the reserved notice counter 223ca is updated to the total value of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (S4207), and this processing ends. .

  By executing the hold notice setting process (see FIG. 154), it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice effect and the type of notice of the hold notice effect every time a new start winning is detected.

  Next, a stop command receiving process 3 (S3051) executed in place of the stop command receiving process (see FIG. 103) in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the stop command receiving process 3 (S3051). In the stop command receiving process 3 (S3051), in each process of S3201 to S3206, the same process as each of the processes of S3201 to S3206 in the stop command receiving process of the first control example (see FIG. 103) is executed. .

  In the stop command receiving process 3 (see FIG. 155) in the third control example, it is determined whether the process of S3206 has been completed or the continuous notice flag 223q is determined to be off in the process of S3202 (S3202: No). If it is determined in the process of S3203 that the value of the remaining notice counter 223r is 1 or more (S3203: No), then it is determined whether the value of the pending notice counter 223ca is greater than 0 (S3251). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed.

  In the processing of S3251, if it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is 0 (the hold notice effect is not set) (S3251: No), there is no need to update the value of the hold notice counter 223ca. This processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3251, when it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is 1 or more (S3251: Yes), the value of the hold notice counter 223ca is updated by subtracting 1 (S3252). A display hold advance notice command for setting the display mode of the hold symbol corresponding to the later hold advance notice counter 223ca is set (S3253), and the process ends. By executing the stop command receiving process 3 (refer to FIG. 155), each time the variable display is finished in the state where the hold notice is set, the hold symbol in which the hold notice effect is set is preferably displayed in the execution display area DS1a. Can be moved.

<Control processing of display control device in third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the command determination process of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination processing (S6302) analyzes the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption processing, as in the first control example, and executes processing according to the command. This is the process to be executed.

  In the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, in each of the processes S6401 to S6404, S6406 to S6416, and S6418 to S6420, S6401 to S6401 in the command determination process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example, respectively. The same processes as those of S6404, S6406-S6416 and S6418-S6420 are executed. In the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command is received in the process of S6404 (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process in the first control example is performed. Instead of (S6405), a variation pattern command process 3 is executed (S6451), and this process ends. Details of the variation pattern command processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S6414 that the unprocessed command does not include the display continuous advance command (S6414: No), Next, it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension notice command (S6452). In the process of S6452, if it is determined that the unprocessed command includes the display suspension notice command (S6452: Yes), the suspension notice for executing the process corresponding to the received suspension notice effect command is received. Command processing is executed (S6453), and this processing ends. Details of the hold notice command processing (S6453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158 (a).

  In the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S6416 that the back image change command exists among the unprocessed commands (S6416: Yes), the first control example In place of the back image change command process (see FIG. 117 (a)), the back image change command process 3 is executed (S6454), and the process returns to S6401. Details of the back image change command processing 3 (S6454) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158 (b).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, in the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 156), a variation pattern command process executed instead of the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 114 (a)) in the first control example. 3 (S6451) will be described in detail. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing 3 (S6451).

  Of the variation pattern command processing 3 (see FIG. 157), the respective processings of S6501 to S6505 are the same as the respective processings of S6501 to S6505 of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114A) in the first control example. The processing is executed. In the variation pattern command process 3 (see FIG. 157) in the third control example, when the process of S6502 ends, it is then determined whether or not the currently set back type is the back surface D by a back image discrimination flag. It is determined based on 233x (S6551).

  In the process of S6551, if it is determined that the currently set back type is the back surface D (S6551: Yes), then the hold notice is generated based on the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db. It is determined whether or not it has been set (S6552). In the process of S6552, when it is determined that the hold announcement effect is set (S6552: Yes), the special hold announcement data table corresponding to the data stored in the hold announcement information storage area 233db is determined. That is, from the data of the suspension notice information storage area 233db, the number of remaining times until the start of the variable display based on the suspension ball in which the suspension notice effect is set and the notice type are specified, and the special suspension notice data corresponding to these are specified. The table is determined from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the specified contents of the special suspension notice data table are overwritten in the range of the value of the corresponding pointer 233f in the display data table buffer 233d (S6553), and the process shifts to S6503.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6551 that a setting other than the back face D is set (S6551: No), or if it is determined in the process of S6552 that the hold notice effect is not set (S6552: No), Since it is not necessary to set the execution of the special hold notice effect, the process of S6553 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6503.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158 (a), the details of the suspension notice command processing (S6453) will be described. This suspension notice command processing (S6453) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, and as described above, the control corresponding to the display suspension notice command received from the sound lamp control device 113. This is the processing for performing.

  In this hold notice command processing (see FIG. 158 (a)), first, the new hold notice command flag 233da is set to ON (S9001), and then the hold notice effect is set from the received display notice signal for display. The pending symbol and the type of the preliminary notice are extracted (S9002). Next, based on the extracted hold symbol and the type of the hold notice, the data of the hold notice information storage area 233db is updated (S9003), and the process ends. Based on the data in the hold notice information storage area 233db updated by the processing of S9003, image data for hold notice effects is specified in various image setting processing 3 (see FIG. 161) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158 (b), details of the back image change command processing 3 (S6454) will be described. This rear image change command process 3 (S6454) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 156) in the third control example, and corresponds to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 as described above. This is a process for performing control.

  Of the rear image change command processing 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) in the third control example, in each of the processing of S7201 and S7202, S7201 of the rear image change command processing (see FIG. 117) in the first control example, respectively. , And S7202 are executed. In the back image change command process 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) in the third control example, when the process of S7201 ends, next, whether the back type before the change (that is, the current state) is the back surface D is determined. Is determined based on the back image determination flag 233x (S7251).

  In the processing of S7251, if it is determined that the current back type is the back D (S7251: Yes), the mode of the third symbol or the reserved symbol is changed with the change from the back D to another back type. Then, the process at the end of the rear surface D is performed (S7252), and the process proceeds to S7201. On the other hand, in the process of S7251, if it is determined that the back type at the time of receiving the back image change command is not the back D (S7251: No), the process of S7252 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7202.

  In the back image change command process 3 (S6454) in the third control example, when the process of S7202 is completed, next, the back image change command received this time is a command indicating a change to the back surface D. Is determined (S7253), and when it is determined that the command indicates a change to the back D (S7253: Yes), the third symbol or the reserved symbol is changed with the change from the other back type to the back D. The process at the time of shifting to the rear surface D for changing the mode is executed (S7254), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7253 that the command is not a command indicating the change to the back face D (S7253: No), the process of S7254 is skipped, and the present process ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159, details of the back-side D end processing (S7252) executed in the above-described back side image change command processing 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) will be described. The process at the end of the rear surface D (S7252) is a process for changing the mode of the third symbol and the reserved symbol in accordance with the change from the rear surface D to another rear type as described above.

  In the process at the end of the rear surface D, first, the variable display data table after the change to the rear surface D corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is read and overwritten on the display data table buffer 233d. (S9101). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table overwritten on the display data table buffer 233d is determined and overwritten on the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9102). In each of these processes, the value of the pointer 233f is retained without being initialized. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is operated during the variable display, the variable display is restarted in the changed mode. Can be.

  Next, based on the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db, it is determined whether or not the hold notice is set (S9103). If the hold notice effect is set (S9103: Yes), the hold is set. The reserved symbol data corresponding to the mode of the reserved announcement effect indicated by the data stored in the preliminary notice information storage area 233db is developed (S9104), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9103, when it is determined that the hold announcement effect is not set (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped, and the present process ends as it is.

  In this way, by executing the process at the end of the back surface D, the display mode such as the back surface type and the third symbol can be changed in the middle of the variable display being performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the process at the time of shifting to the rear surface D (S7254) executed in the above-described rear image change command process 3 (see FIG. 158 (b)) will be described. The process of shifting to the back D (S7254) is a process for changing the mode of the third symbol or the reserved symbol in accordance with the change from another back type to the back D.

  In the process at the time of shifting to the rear surface D (see FIG. 160), first, a variable display data table for the rear surface D corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is determined, and the display data table buffer 233d is determined. Is overwritten (S9201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set variable display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9202).

  Next, based on the data stored in the hold notice information storage area 233db, it is determined whether or not the hold notice is set (S9203). If the hold notice effect is set (S9203: Yes), the hold is set. A special hold notice data table corresponding to the form of the hold notice effect indicated by the data stored in the notice information storage area 233db is determined, and is defined in the determined special hold notice data table of the display data table buffer 233d. The specified content of the special pending notice data table is overwritten to the range of the pointer value (S9204), and the process ends. Thus, when the display is changed to the back face D during the execution of the fluctuation display in the state where the suspension advance production is set, the special suspension advance production is performed from the stop display of the fluctuation display during the fluctuation (see FIG. 149 (b)). ) Can be performed. On the other hand, in the process of S9203, when it is determined that the hold announcement effect is not set (S9203: No), the process of S9204 is skipped, and the present process ends as it is.

  In this way, by executing the process at the time of shifting to the rear surface D, the display mode of the rear type, the third symbol, and the like can be changed from the middle of the variable display being executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 161, in various image setting processing 3 (S7453) executed in display setting processing (see FIG. 118) instead of various image setting processing (see FIG. 119) in the first control example. Details will be described. The various image setting process 3 (S7453) is a process for setting various images such as a reserved symbol and an image at the time of a continuous announcement effect (eight reserved effects).

  Of the various image setting processes 3 (see FIG. 161), in each of the processes of S7501 and S7503 to S7509, the respective processes of S7501 and S7503 to S7509 of the various image setting processes (see FIG. 118) in the first control example are respectively performed. Is executed.

  Also, in the various image setting processing (see FIG. 161) in the third control example, when it is determined in the processing of S7501 that the new reserved ball number flag 233m is ON (S7501: Yes), then the reserved symbol number is determined. The pending symbol data corresponding to the value of the counter 233n and the current rear type (the state of the rear image discrimination flag 233x) is developed (S7551), and the process shifts to S7503. In the process of S7551, specifically, if the back type is other than the back D, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the value of the reserved symbol counter 233n is developed in the reserved display area Ds1b. On the other hand, in the case of the back face D, numerical data corresponding to the value of the reserved symbol number counter 233n is developed in the reserved ball number display area Ds1c.

  Also, in the various image setting processing 3 (see FIG. 161) in the third control example, it is determined in the processing of S7504 that the new continuous advance command flag 233o is turned off (S7504: No), or the processing of S7506 is ended. In this case, it is determined whether the new suspension notice command flag 233da is on (S7552). In the process of S7552, when it is determined that the new suspension notice command flag 233da is ON (S7552: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the currently set back type is the back D (S7553). If it is determined that the back face D does not appear (S7553: No), the pending symbol data corresponding to the data stored in the pending notice information storage area 233db is developed (S7554), and the process proceeds to S7555. On the other hand, in the process of S7553, if it is determined that the currently set back type is the back surface D (S7553: Yes), the process of S7554 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7555.

  In the process of S7555, the new suspension notice command flag 233da is set to off (S7555), and the process shifts to S7507. If it is determined in step S7504 that the new suspension notice command flag 233da is off (S7552: No), the process skips steps S7553 to S7555 and proceeds to step S7507.

  By executing the various image setting process 3 (S7453), it is possible to set an appropriate display mode in consideration of the set rear type and the hold notice effect.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, among the back types that can be changed based on the player's operation on the frame button 22, the back symbol D in which the third symbol and the reserved symbol are switched to different modes. Is provided. More specifically, the third symbol is changed to a symbol composed only of numbers, and a back type of a simple display mode for displaying the number of reserved balls with a single reserved symbol composed of numerals is provided. . With this configuration, when the back image is changed to the back surface D, the player can feel the novelty, so that a monotonous game can be prevented (suppressed).

  Further, in the third control example, when the back notice type is changed to the back face D in a state where the hold notice effect in which the mode (color tone) of the hold symbol changes is set, the hold notice effect corresponds to the back face D. The configuration is changed to the mode. Specifically, for each stop display of the third symbol, the number of remaining fluctuations until the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold ball for which the hold notice is set is executed is displayed by a number for only 0.1 second, The color of the number suggests the degree of expectation of the suspension notice. With this configuration, it is possible to take over the hold notice effect set in the back type before the change without breaking the concept of the simple and easy-to-understand display mode of the back surface D. In addition, when the third symbol of the player's attention is stopped and displayed, the special hold announcement effect is executed, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the special hold advance effect.

  In the third control example, the special hold announcement effect is configured to be executed when the back surface D is changed. However, even when the rear advance type is changed to another back type with the hold advance effect set, It is good also as a structure which changes the mode of a reservation notice effect. By making the mode of the hold announcement effect different for each back type, the mode of the hold announcement effect can be diversified. In addition, when the back type is changed, the hold announcement effect itself may be cancelled. With this configuration, regardless of whether or not the hold notice effect has been set, when the back type is changed, the same hold pattern may be developed, so that the back type change is required. The processing load can be reduced.

  In the third control example, when the hold notice effect is set, the color is changed only once, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the color can be changed in a plurality of stages between the time when the reserved symbol is newly displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b based on the winning start and the time when the corresponding variable display ends. Specifically, for example, when a hold symbol for which a hold advance is set by the hold advance setting process (see FIG. 154) is displayed, a predetermined trigger (for example, start of a variable display corresponding to another hold symbol) At the timing or the timing of a new start prize), a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to rank up the reserved symbol mode to a higher expected mode. In this case, in the lottery of the hold announcement effect at the time of the start winning, by setting the probability of being set to blue or green corresponding to the low expectation high, the holding ball corresponding to the hold ball of high expectation In such a case, a configuration in which the mode corresponding to the low degree of expectation is easily changed to the high degree of expectation in a stepwise manner may be adopted. By configuring in this way, even when a hold announcement effect with a low degree of expectation occurs, it is possible to expect that the state changes to a mode corresponding to the high degree of expectation thereafter. Expectations can be made more frequent. Also, in a configuration in which the rank of a hold announcement effect can be increased, a configuration in which, when the hold advance announcement effect is changed to the rear surface D while the back advance effect is set, a rank-up lottery is performed in the same manner as when the rear surface type is not changed. It may be. In the case of winning a rank-up lottery in the special pending notice effect, the character color of the special pending notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) displayed while the fluctuation is stopped is simply changed to the color after rank up. Alternatively, an effect dedicated to rank-up in a state where the special hold notice effect is set may be separately provided. As a special effect for rank up in special reservation notice production, for example, at the timing of winning the rank up, a special character appears, changes the color tone of the back, displays the character "rank up", etc. Is exemplified. With this configuration, even when the back face D is set, the player can clearly understand that the player has won the rank-up lottery. Further, on the back face D, the timing of performing the rank-up lottery may be different from that of the other back face types. Specifically, for example, on the backs A to C, a rank-up lottery is executed each time the change start timing is reached in a state in which the hold notice effect is set, while if the back D is set, It is good also as a structure which performs a rank-up lottery at the time of a stop. Then, when the player wins the rank-up lottery on the back D, the special-uphold notice effect (see FIG. 149 (b)) executed during the stop display of the third symbol is configured to execute the rank-up effect together. Is also good. With such a configuration, rank increase can be expected at different timings according to the set rear type. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified Example of Hold Notification Effect in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, a description will be given of a modification of the hold announcement effect in the third control example. In the above-described hold announcement effect in the third control example, as the hold announcement effect, the color of the hold symbol is changed to indicate the degree of expectation of the hold symbol. That is, a lottery is performed for each reserved symbol separately (regardless of the pre-reading result of the other reserved balls) as to whether or not to set the reserved notice. On the other hand, in the present modified example, instead of changing the mode of the reserved symbol, a display mode for converting a combination of the prefetch results of one or a plurality of reserved balls being retained into a numerical value (point) and displaying the combination. did. Then, the configuration is such that, as the reserved ball with a high degree of expectation is retained, the point is converted to a point with a larger number. As a result, as the displayed points are larger, the sense of expectation of a big hit can be increased.

  In the present modification, the prefetch result of the reserved ball is converted to 1 point when completely deviated, converted to 2 points when deviated normal reach, and converted to 10 points when deviated super reach or various jackpots. And

  First, with reference to FIG. 174 (a), the configuration of the sub display area Ds in the present modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), in the present modified example, a horizontally long rectangular display area (point display area) for displaying points is formed at the upper right of the sub display area Ds when viewed from the front. In the example of FIG. 174 (a), a standby state (variable stop state) is shown, and there is no reserved symbol, so "0pt" is displayed as a point.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 (b) to (e), a method of increasing or decreasing points when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases will be described. FIG. 174 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in a case where five start winnings are detected during the change corresponding to the departure, and five hold symbols appear in the hold display area Ds1b during the change. is there. In addition, as a reserved ball corresponding to these five reserved symbols, there are four completely out (one, two, four, and fifth reserved symbols) and one out of super reach (third reserved symbol). An example of the configuration will be described. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), when the number of the reserved balls increases by five during the change, one point is uniformly added as a temporary point for each reserved ball. As a result, the character “5pt” is displayed in the point display area.

  Then, when the deviation change during the change is completed and each reserved symbol is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, each of the reserved balls corresponding to the four reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds1b after the shift is shifted. Read ahead and calculate accurate points. The hold symbol displayed in the hold display area Ds1b after the shift is composed of one hold symbol (10 points) corresponding to the missed super reach and three hold symbols (1 point) corresponding to the complete miss. Therefore, the correct point is 13 points. Therefore, the character “13pt” is displayed in the point display area.

  Instead of performing pre-reading at the start winning prize and immediately reflecting the accurate points, the system is configured to calculate and reflect the correct points at the end of the variable display (shift of the reserved symbol), so that it is changing In the case where the number of the reserved ball symbols increases, the breakdown of the points can be made difficult to be recognized by the player. Therefore, by increasing the plurality of reserved balls, when a large number of points are added at the end of the variable display, it is possible to give all of the increased reserved balls an expectation of the big hit.

  After the accurate point is reflected, it is the end timing of the variable display, and every time one reserved symbol is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, the point corresponding to the shifted reserved symbol is subtracted from the point display area. Is done. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 174 (d) and (e), when the suspended symbol corresponding to the complete departure (one point) is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, the point displayed in the point display area is displayed. Is subtracted (see FIG. 174 (d)), and when the reserved symbol corresponding to the departure super reach (10 points) is shifted to the execution display area Ds1a, 10 points are subtracted from the points displayed in the point display area. Is subtracted (see FIG. 174 (e)).

  As described above, in this modified example, the mode of the reserved announcement effect is configured by converting the pre-read result for each reserved symbol into points, and displaying the total value of the points for each reserved symbol in the point display area. I have. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which reserve symbol corresponds to the reserve ball having a high degree of expectation. Therefore, when a point with a large number is displayed in the point display area, It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the jackpot to the reserved balls corresponding to all the reserved symbols displayed in the display area Ds1b.

<Modification of Special Hold Announcement Effect in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 175 and FIG. 176, a modified example of the special suspension notice effect in the third control example will be described. In the above-described third control example, when the mode of the third symbol or the mode of the reserved symbol is changed to the back surface D different from other back types in the state where the pending announcement effect is set, the special pending announcement effect (FIG. 149 (b)). On the other hand, in the present modified example, when the back type is switched between the back types other than the back D, the mode of the hold notice effect is changed. An example will be described.

  Here, the case of changing from the back A to the back B will be described as an example. The back surfaces A and B are stages in which the display style of the third symbol and the reserved symbol is common and only the rear image is different. FIG. 175 (a) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the back face A is set and the hold announcement effect is set in the third hold symbol HY1 from the left in the hold display area Ds1b. The mode of the hold announcement effect performed on the back surface A is the same as that of the third control example described above. That is, an effect of changing the display color of the reserved symbol displayed corresponding to the reserved ball to any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors is executed according to the result of the pre-reading for the reserved ball.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the player presses the frame button 22 and the back image is changed to the back B in the state where the hold announcement effect is set, the hold display area Ds1b is displayed together with the change of the back image. In, the display mode of each holding symbol including the holding symbol HY1 is reset to the normal holding symbol mode. It should be noted that the appearance of the display is merely changed to the display of the normal hold symbol, and the setting of the hold announcement effect itself is stored.

  Then, thereafter, every time the start timing of the new variable display is reached, a lottery for determining whether or not to restore the display mode of the hold notice effect (hold notice restore lottery) is executed. As shown in (b), the setting of the hold announcement effect before changing the back image is restored.

  In addition, in the hold announcement resurrection lottery, as the hold symbol for which the hold announcement effect was set before changing the back image is the hold symbol corresponding to the hold ball with high expectation, it is easier to be determined as a winning. Is set. Specifically, for example, if the hold notice is a holding pattern of a holding ball corresponding to a hit super reach or a hit normal reach, after changing the back image, the change of the back notice is performed at the start of the change in the holding notice resumption lottery at a rate of 50%. If the winning design has been released and the pending design has been released and the ball is a pending design corresponding to the Super Reach, after changing the back image, it will win 30% of the pending preliminary resurrection lottery at the start of each change, and the pending preview will be released and the normal reach will be released. After the rear image is changed, the winning symbol is won at a rate of 10% at the start of the change after the rear image is changed. In other words, the more the hold notice is set for the hold ball having a high degree of expectation, the easier it is to win the hold notice resurrection lottery. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation of the jackpot when the suspension notice is restored after changing the back type. Further, a player who wants to determine the degree of expectation of the hold notice effect based on whether or not the hold notice effect is restored can actively change the back type during the setting of the hold notice effect. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<About a modification of the rotation unit 500>
Next, with reference to FIG. 162 to FIG. 164, a description will be given of a modification of the rotation unit 500 used in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples. In order to simplify the description, the structure of the versa lighter exemplified below will be described using a structure in which the number of LEDs 532 is reduced to eight (LEDs 1 to 8).

  The above-described rotating unit 500 is formed in a long shape around the rotation axis, and the display surface side (the front side of the gaming machine) of the long-shaped rotating unit 500 has uniform openings through which light can be transmitted. By irradiating light from the back side (lower side in the viewpoint of FIG. 162) to 40 diffusers provided in the longitudinal direction (equally in the longitudinal direction) using 40 sets of LEDs corresponding to the respective diffusers, The light partitioned into 40 is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine.

  With this configuration, by performing the rotation control of the rotation unit 500 and the light emission control of the LED, it is possible to execute a display effect in a wide area for the player.

  However, in the structure of the rotation unit 500 described above, since the plurality of LEDs 532 are provided along the longitudinal direction of the rotation unit 500 (see FIG. 28), the distance between the LEDs 532 from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 may differ. become. As a result, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, a stronger centrifugal force is applied to the LEDs arranged farther from the rotation axis than the LEDs arranged closer to the rotation axis. And there is a problem that damage or malfunction is likely to occur.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example of the rotation unit 500, the LEDs 532 (LED1 to LED8) forming the rotation unit 500 are arranged near the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, and arranged near the rotation axis. Light guide paths for transmitting the light emitted from each LED 532 to each of the eight diffusion plates are provided. Accordingly, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the centrifugal force applied to each LED 532 can be reduced, and damage or malfunction of the LED 532 can be suppressed (prevented). In addition, since each LED 532 is configured to be at the same distance from the rotation shaft 580e of the rotation unit 500, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the force applied to the LED during the rotation operation from being biased to some LEDs.

  This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 500 in the first modified example as viewed from above so that the upper side of the paper surface is the front side of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), a central wall 580e that divides the inside of the rotary unit into left and right is provided at the center of the rotary unit 500, and LEDs 1 to 4 are disposed on the left side of the central wall 580e. The LEDs 5 to 8 are arranged on the right side.

  Eight sections (openings 580a1 to 580a8) are provided in a horizontal line on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the front side of the gaming machine), and provided in each section (openings 580a1 to 580a8). When the light emitted from each of the LEDs 532 hits a diffusion plate (not shown), it is possible to visually recognize that each section is turned on from the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the front side of the gaming machine).

  Light guide paths are provided inside the rotation unit 500 so that light is emitted from only the corresponding LEDs to the diffusion plates provided in the openings 580a1 to 580a8. Specifically, the light emitted from the LED 1 passes through the first light guide path 580d1, and the direction in which the light is guided by the reflection member 580c1 provided at the tip of the first light guide path 580d1 is changed. The light passes through the light guide path 580b1 and reaches the diffusion plate provided in the opening 580a1. Similarly, the light emitted from the LEDs 2 to 8 passes through the first light guide paths 580d2 to 580d8, and the direction in which the light is guided by the reflection members 580c2 to 580c8 is changed. The light can pass through and reach the diffusion plates provided in the openings 580a2 to a8, respectively. Each of the first light guide paths 580d1 to 580d8 is independently configured, and each of the second light guide paths 580b1 to 580b8 is independently configured. Thereby, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 1 to 8 can reach only the corresponding opening 580a1 to 580a8, and the afterimage generated when the diffusion plate of each opening (section) 580a1 to 580a8 is turned on. The outline of can be clarified.

  As described above, in the first modified example, the LEDs 1 to 8 are collectively arranged near the rotation axis. Accordingly, the rotation start energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved. Effect can be enhanced.

  Next, in a second modified example of the rotation unit 500, light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotation unit 500 is configured to be incident on the reflection plate, and the angle of the reflection plate is variably controlled. In addition, the illuminating section (opening) is configured to be variable by changing the direction in which the irradiated light propagates. This eliminates the need to provide the LEDs 532 for each section (opening), thereby reducing power consumption.

  Specifically, a second modification of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 (b). FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 500 in the second modification as viewed from above, such that the upper side of the paper surface is the front side of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (b), inside the rotation unit 500 in the second modification, an LED 1 for turning on a diffusion plate provided in the openings 580a1 to 580a4 on the left side of the rotation unit 500, and a rotation unit The LED 2 for lighting the diffusion plate provided in the openings 580a5 to 580a8 on the right side of 500 is provided. The LED 1 is provided on the back side of the gaming machine near the rotation axis (in the back side of the rotation unit 500) in the left region divided by the center wall 585g that divides the inside of the rotation unit 500 left and right. On the other hand, the LED 2 is provided on the back side of the gaming machine near the rotation axis (the back side of the rotation unit 500) in the right region divided by the center wall portion 585g inside the rotation unit 500.

  A partition member 585c1 formed of black-colored plastic is provided in the left region inside the rotation unit 500 so that light does not directly propagate from the LED 1 provided near the rotation axis to each of the openings 580a1 to 580a4. The rotating unit 500 is erected (integrally formed) from the back side of the gaming machine (the back side of the rotating unit 500). Here, of the areas partitioned by the partition member 585c1, the area near the rotation axis and where the LED 1 is provided is referred to as a first area 585d1, which is farther from the rotation axis than the first area and has an opening 580a1. A region where 〜580a4 is provided is referred to as a second region 585e1.

  A reflection member 585a1 is provided in a region on the front side of the gaming machine near the rotation axis inside the rotating unit 500, at a position where light from the LED 1 disposed on the back side of the gaming machine is incident. After the light emitted from the LED 1 passes through the first area 585d1, the light is reflected by the reflection member 585a1, and propagates to the second area 585e1. The light propagated to the second area 585e1 is reflected by a reflecting wall portion 585f1 provided on the back side of the gaming machine in the second area 585e1, and propagates to the front side of the gaming machine. If the propagating destination is any one of the openings 580a1 to 580a4, light is applied to the diffusion plate disposed there, and the diffusion plate is turned on.

  The direction in which the light propagating through the second region 585e1 is determined by the angle reflected by the reflection member 585a1. Here, the reflection member 585a1 is provided with a drive motor 585b1 for adjusting the angle, and by driving the drive motor 585b1 to change the angle of the reflection member 585a1, the light incident from the LED 1 is reduced. The direction in which the light is reflected (the point where the light propagates) can be changed.

  The configuration in which the diffusion plate of each of the openings 580a5 to 580a8 is turned on by the LED2 is the same as the configuration in which the diffusion plate of each of the openings 580a1 to 580a4 is turned on by the LED1, and a detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  As described above, in the second modified example, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotating unit 500 is configured to be incident on the reflector, and the angle of the reflector is variably controlled, so that the illumination is performed. By varying the direction in which the emitted light propagates, the section (opening) to be illuminated is varied. This eliminates the need to provide the LEDs 532 for each section (opening), thereby reducing power consumption.

  Further, the LED and the reflection member are arranged near the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Accordingly, the rotation start energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved. Effect can be enhanced.

  Note that, by making the wavelengths (colors) of the light of the LED 1 and the LED 2 different, the color lit in the openings 580a1 to a4 and the color lit in the openings 580a5 to a8 may be made different. For example, LED1 is a red LED, and LED2 is a blue LED. This makes it possible to change the color of the afterimage displayed when the rotating operation is performed to red (red), blue (blue), or a combination of red and blue (purple), thereby enhancing the effect.

  Next, in a third modified example of the rotation unit 500, light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotation unit 500 emits light to a light emitting unit provided on the surface of the rotation unit 500 via an optical fiber (light guide path). It was configured to reach. Thus, it is possible to control the lighting of each section of the rotation unit 500 while disposing the LED 532 near the rotation axis. As a result, the rotation start energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved. Effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, a third modified example of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 500 in the third modified example as viewed from above, such that the upper side of the paper surface is the front side of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (a), a central wall portion 590f that divides the inside of the rotary unit into right and left is provided at the center of the rotary unit 500, and the LED 1 is located near the rotation axis in the left region of the central wall portion 590f. To 590a4 are disposed. On the other hand, inside sections 590a5 to 590a8 in which LEDs 5 to 8 are arranged are arranged near the rotation axis in the right region divided by the center wall portion 590f.

  The internal sections 590a1 to 590a4 and the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c4 provided on the front side of the gaming machine of the rotating unit 500 are connected by optical fibers 590b1 to 590b4, respectively. Accordingly, light emitted from the LED 2 in the internal section 590a2 propagates through the optical fiber 590b2, reaches the light emitting unit 590c2, and the light emitting unit 590c2 emits light (see FIG. 163 (a)). Similarly, the light emitting units 590c1, 590c3, and 590c4 emit light when the light emitted from the LEDs 1, 3, and 4 propagates through the optical fibers 590b1, 3, and 4.

  Similarly, in the right region, the LEDs 5 to 8 provided in the internal sections 590a5 to 590a8 are controlled so that the light emitting units 590c5 to c8 emit light. Since the details are the same as those of the left area, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the fourth modification, the light emitted from the LED 532 provided inside the rotating unit 500 reaches the light emitting unit provided on the surface of the rotating unit 500 via the optical fiber (light guide path). It was configured to be. Thus, it is possible to control the lighting of each section of the rotation unit 500 while disposing the LED 532 near the rotation axis. As a result, the rotation start energy required to start the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the response of the rotation operation can be improved. Effect can be enhanced.

  Next, in a fourth modified example of the rotation unit 500, in comparison with the third modified example described above, one LED 532 is provided in each of the left area and the right area, and light emitted from the LED 532 is transmitted to each optical fiber. A blocking member capable of blocking the light so as not to enter 590b is provided. As the blocking member, a known liquid crystal light shutter is used. The passage of light is blocked by applying a voltage (5 V), and the passage of light is permitted by canceling the application of the voltage. Thereby, even if the LEDs 532 provided in the left area and the right area are each one, the light emission control of each of the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c8 can be individually performed. As a result, the number of the LEDs 532 can be reduced without deteriorating the effect of the effect, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the trouble due to heat generation can be suppressed (prevented).

  Also, by adjusting the voltage applied to the blocking member, the amount of light that can pass can be adjusted, so that the amount of light incident on each of the optical fibers 590b1 to 590b8 can be adjusted, and the light emitting portions 590c1 to 590c8 can be adjusted. The emission brightness can be adjusted.

  Specifically, a fourth modified example of the rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 500 in the fourth modified example as viewed from above, such that the upper side of the paper surface is the front side of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (b), a central wall portion 590f that divides the inside of the rotary unit into right and left is provided at the center of the rotary unit 500, and the center wall portion 590f is located near the rotation axis in the left region. One area 590g1 is provided. On the other hand, the second region 590g2 is arranged near the rotation axis in the right region divided by the center wall portion 590f.

  LED1 is provided in the first area 590g1, and LED2 is provided in the second area. Further, optical fibers 590c1 to 590c1 for transmitting light emitted from the LED 1 to the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c4 are connected to the first region 590g1.

  In the connection portion where the first region 590g1 and each of the optical fibers 590c1 to 590c are connected, it is possible to block light emitted from the LED 1 in the first region 590g1 from being incident on each optical fiber. A blocking member 590e1 is provided. As described above, the light blocking member 590e1 uses a known liquid crystal light shutter, and the passage of light is blocked by applying a voltage (5V), and the passage of light is permitted by canceling the application of the voltage. You.

  The blocking member 590e1 is capable of individually controlling light incident on each of the optical fibers 590c1 to 590c4.

  Thereby, even if the LEDs 532 provided in the left area and the right area are each one, the light emission control of each of the light emitting units 590c1 to 590c8 can be individually performed. As a result, the number of the LEDs 532 can be reduced without deteriorating the effect of the effect, so that the power consumption can be reduced and the trouble due to heat generation can be suppressed (prevented).

  Next, in the fifth modification of the rotating unit 500, the blocking member 590e1 is removed from the fourth modification, and the LED 532 is a multicolor LED that can emit light in multiple colors. Each of the optical fibers 590b1 to 590b8 is an optical fiber through which light of a specific wavelength can propagate, and the optical fibers can transmit at different wavelengths. Each of the optical fibers 590b1 to 590b-8 has a large attenuation even if light of a wavelength other than the specific wavelength is incident, and cannot propagate. Thus, by controlling the wavelength (color type) of the light emitted from the multicolor LED 532, the light emitting portions 590c1 to 590c8 that emit light can be varied by different optical fibers 590b through which the emitted light propagates. be able to. As a result, the light emitting portion 590c that emits light can be changed only by changing the wavelength (type of color) of the light that emits light. Therefore, even if the number of LEDs 532 is reduced, light emission can be performed without impairing responsiveness. The afterimage can be displayed by the light emission of the unit 590c.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the light emitting unit provided on the surface (front surface) of the rotation unit 500 is formed of a member (for example, a polarizing plate) that can transmit only light of a specific wavelength. Alternatively, the color of the light emitted by the LED 532 inside the rotation unit 500 may be changed so that only the light emitting portion 590c at a specific location can emit light.

  In this case, by making the color emitted by the LED 532 a color obtained by combining a plurality of wavelengths, the lighting of the plurality of light emitting units 590c can be controlled.

  Thus, the lighting control of the multicolor LED 532 can control the lighting of an arbitrary light emitting unit 590c without using an optical fiber as in the above-described fifth modification. Thereby, even if the number of LEDs 532 is reduced, afterimage display by light emission of the light emitting unit 590c can be performed without impairing responsiveness.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 164 (b), a prism 595d1 for refracting light emitted from the multicolor LED 532 disposed inside the rotation unit 500 to the openings (580a1 to 580a8) may be provided. Good. The light emitted from the multicolor LED 532 is refracted by the prism 595d1 and propagates to the openings (580a1 to 580a8). Here, the amount (angle) refracted by the prism 595d1 differs depending on the wavelength (ie, color) of the irradiated light. For example, light with a short wavelength (blue) is refracted by a large amount, and light with a long wavelength (red) is refracted by a small amount. Therefore, by adjusting the wavelength (i.e., color) of the light emitted from the multicolor LED 532, the amount (angle) of diffraction (refraction) is adjusted, and light is emitted to any of the openings (580 a 1 to 580 a 8). be able to.

  In the above-described rotating unit 500, the power for causing the LEDs 532 (LEDs 1 to 8) to emit light is configured to be supplied from the outside of the rotating unit 500, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a power supply unit (battery) may be provided inside the rotation unit 500 so that power can be supplied to each LED 532 from the power supply unit. This eliminates the need to connect the rotating LEDs 532 to the outside in order to supply power to the respective LEDs 532 of the rotating unit 500, so that the signal transmission mechanism 458 in the above-described embodiment can be eliminated. In addition, the wiring can be simplified. Further, since the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be made unnecessary, the maintainability can be improved, and problems due to the damage of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be prevented.

  In this case, by configuring the power supply means (battery) to perform non-contact charging, each LED 532 can be driven to emit light even if the capacity of the power supply means (battery) is reduced. As a result, since the capacity of the power supply means (battery) can be reduced, the weight of the power supply means (battery) can be reduced, and the power for rotationally driving the rotation unit 500 can be reduced. In addition, since the energy required to shift the rotating unit 500 from the stop state to the rotating state is reduced, the response when rotating the rotating unit 500 can be improved, and the effect using the rotating unit 500 can be improved. The effect can be enhanced.

  Also, a switching element (for example, a MOSFET) for controlling whether or not power is supplied from the power supply means (battery) to each LED (whether or not to light the LED), and outputs a signal to the switching element. The MPU may be provided inside the rotation unit 500, and a control instruction may be transmitted to the MPU by wireless communication. This eliminates the need for a signal line for controlling the lighting of each LED. In this case, the driving power may be supplied from the power supply unit (battery) to the MPU and the switching element provided inside the rotation unit 500 as well.

  Furthermore, in the rotating unit 500 described above, a specific character or pattern is configured to be perceived by a player as an afterimage by rotating, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, afterimages may be displayed by repeatedly (vibrating) the rotation unit 500 up and down (or left and right).

  Further, the above-described rotating unit 500 arranges the LED 532 (or the opening (lighting portion)) symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis (rotation center), rotates the LED 532 about the rotation axis, and controls the lighting of the LED 532. Thus, an afterimage is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), an opening 580a whose lighting is controlled by light emitted from the LED 532 in only one direction from the rotation axis (center of rotation) may be provided. Accordingly, the energy required for rotating the rotating unit 500 can be reduced, so that the response of the rotating operation can be improved, and the effect of displaying the afterimage can be enhanced. Further, since the rotation unit 500 can be reduced in size, space can be saved.

  The rotating unit 500 shown in FIG. 178 (a) is obtained by dividing the rotating unit 500 in the first modified example described above into only the left half. Specifically, LEDs 1-4 are disposed near the rotation axis with the wall 580e on the right side of the paper as a rotation axis (center of rotation). Then, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 1 to 4 is reflected by the reflecting members (half mirrors) 580c1 to 580c4 and transmitted to the diffusion plate (not shown) provided in the openings 580a1 to 580a4. Thus, by controlling the lighting of each of the LEDs 1 to 4, it is possible to control the lighting of the diffusion plates of the openings 580a1 to 580a4.

  By controlling the rotation of the rotation unit 500 about the rotation axis and controlling the lighting of each of the LEDs 1 to 4, an afterimage display can be displayed. By providing the LEDs 1 to 4 in the vicinity of the rotation axis, the centrifugal force applied to each of the LEDs 1 to 4 when the rotating unit 500 is rotated can be reduced. And error movement can be suppressed (prevented). Further, since only the wall portion 580e is disposed on the back side of each of the LEDs 1 to 4, the heat radiation efficiency of each of the LEDs 1 to 4 can be improved, and the solder connecting the LEDs 1 to 4 melts under the influence of heat generation. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that there is a possibility of causing a contact failure.

  The rotation unit 500 may perform a repetitive operation (a pendulum operation) on a locus that draws an arc. This makes it possible to reduce the space required for the afterimage display, for example, by repeatedly performing the operation in a locus drawing a semicircle, so that the afterimage display can be performed even in a limited space, and the number of game variations can be increased. Can be.

  Further, a case where a repetitive operation is performed in a semicircle and a case where a revolving operation is performed may be provided. Thereby, the variation of the operation of the rotating unit 500 can be further increased, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the shape of the rotating unit 500 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is not limited to a substantially rectangular shape, and may be a substantially square shape so as not to rotate. This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 178 (b). FIG. 178 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the rotating unit 500 when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (b), when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, a total of 64 openings 580a11 to 580a88 of eight stages and eight rows are arranged in the rotating unit 500. A total of eight openings 580a11 to 580a18 are arranged in a row at the top, and openings 580a21 to 580a28, openings 580a31 to 580a38, openings 580a41 to 580a48, openings 580a51 to 580a58, The openings 580a61 to 580a68, the openings 580a71 to 580a78, and the openings 580a81 to 580a88 are arranged in order. A predetermined display can be performed by controlling the lighting of each of these openings 580a.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), the top openings 580a31, 580a41, 580a23, 580a26, 580a32, 580a37, 580a42, 580a47, 580a52 to 580a57, 580a57, 580a62, 580a67, 580a72, 580a77, 580a82, 580a87 are turned on. By controlling so as to perform the operation, the character “A” can be displayed. Thus, a predetermined display can be displayed without rotating the rotation unit 500.

  An LED unit 589 is provided on the left side of each stage where the opening 580a is provided. Inside the LED unit 589, LEDs 11 to 88 are provided corresponding to each stage. Specifically, LEDs 11 to 18 are provided corresponding to the uppermost stage where the openings 580a11 to 580a18 are provided. Each of the LEDs 11 to 18 is provided corresponding to each of the openings 580 a 11 to 580 a 18, and the lighting of the openings 580 a 11 is controlled by light emitted from the LEDs 11, for example. Similarly, the openings 580a12 to 580a18 are configured to be controlled to light up corresponding to the LEDs 12 to 18.

  As a detailed structure, lighting of each opening 580a is controlled using the structure of the first modified example of the rotation unit 500 described above (a structure in which a light guide path is provided respectively). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the structures of the second to fifth modifications may be adopted. In addition, a well-known edge light type light guide plate may be used in which light entering from the side surface is diffused over the entire surface to make the display unit visible. This eliminates the need to dispose an LED or the like as a light source on the back side of the gaming machine, so that the rotating unit 500 can be reduced in thickness. In addition, by providing an area where light entering from the side is reflected to the front side and an area where the light is not reflected, a specific character or design may be displayed only when light is incident from the side. By providing a plurality of layers in which light entering from the side surface is reflected to the front side, characters and designs in a plurality of modes may be displayed. The characters and designs of the plurality of modes are arranged, for example, so as to increase in size from the back layer, and are displayed as a moving image in which the characters and designs are enlarged by sequentially irradiating light from the back layer. be able to.

  In addition, the position where the LED unit 589 is provided is not limited to the left side, and may be on the right side, may be any of the upper and lower sides, and may be disposed on both the left and right sides. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) unevenness in luminance between the opening 580a that is far from the LED unit 589 and the opening 580a that is short. Further, in the case of arranging on both the left and right sides, the display that appears may differ depending on the light emission of the left and right LEDs. For example, the left LED unit 589 is provided with a red LED, and the right LED unit 589 is provided with a blue LED. By displaying characters and patterns (for example, the character "A") by the left LED, red characters and patterns can be displayed, and in the case of the right LED, blue characters and patterns can be displayed. it can. Further, by emitting light in combination with the left LED and the right LED, purple characters and patterns can be displayed.

  Alternatively, the LED unit 589 may be provided on the left side and the upper side, and the opening 580a may be turned on when the left LED and the upper LED are turned on. Specifically, a polarizing plate is provided so that purple can be visually recognized from the opening 580a, and the left LED emits red light and the upper LED emits blue color. The purple light reaches only the opening 580a in which both the left LED and the right LED are turned on, and the lighting of the light becomes visible. Thus, by providing one LED corresponding to each row and each row and combining the lighting of each LED, it is possible to control the lighting of an arbitrary opening 580a, so that the total number of LEDs can be reduced, and the gaming machine can be reduced. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  Further, when light is made to enter each opening 580a from a plurality of positions (for example, the left side and the upper side), the LED unit 589 is disposed at one place (for example, the left side), and the light emitted from the LED unit 589 and the The light guide path (for example, an optical fiber or the like) may be configured so that light can be incident from a plurality of positions.

  Further, a plurality of types of diffusion plates may be provided in the opening 580a. Specifically, a diffusion plate which is turned on by light irradiation from an LED provided in the LED unit 589 and a diffusion plate (or a blocking plate) which is not turned on are provided. Thus, an opening 580a that is turned on by turning on one LED and an opening 580a that is not turned on can be provided. That is, by preparing a display area in which a lighting position to be in a lighting state and a non-lighting position not to be in a lighting state are prepared in advance, and irradiating the display area with light, predetermined characters and symbols can be formed. Can be displayed.

  Further, the plurality of types of diffusion plates may be configured to be lit differently when light is irradiated. For example, different colors may be lit, or different patterns may be displayed when lit. Thereby, the number of variations of the display mode displayed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be increased, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  Note that the opening 580a to be turned on may be turned on when light of a specific wavelength is irradiated, or may be turned on when light is irradiated from a specific angle. You may. Further, the above-mentioned display area (lighting position and non-lighting position) is made of a material through which light is transmitted (an acrylic plate having a specific area subjected to reflection processing), for example, the front of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By arranging on the side, normally, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 is not impaired, and predetermined characters and symbols are displayed only when light is irradiated from a specific wavelength or a specific angle. can do. Thereby, even if the display area (rotation unit 500) is arranged on the front side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the effect by the rotation unit 500 can be executed without impairing the visibility of the third symbol display device 81. . Further, an effect integrated with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be executed. Thereby, the variation of the effect can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, by making the interval between the openings 580a very small (for example, 1 mm), the displayed characters and patterns may be clearly displayed. Further, only one opening 580a may be used to display characters and patterns by controlling lighting only in a specific area of the opening 580a. This makes it possible to eliminate the gap between the openings 580a that cannot be controlled to be turned on, so that the displayed characters and designs can be displayed more clearly.

  In each control example and each modification example described above, the drive control of the drive motor 457 of the rotating unit 500 and the lighting control of the LED 532 are performed by the audio lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control may be performed by the display control device 114 or the main control device 110, or a separate control device may be provided. Further, the drive control of the drive motor 456 may be executed by the audio lamp control device 113, and the lighting control of the LED 532 may be executed by the display control device 114. This makes it possible to distribute the control load. In addition, by performing the lighting control of the LED 532 by the display control device 114, it is possible to easily synchronize with the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

<About the fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. The fourth control example is configured to execute the continuous short reach effect used in the above-described second control example with different control. Hereinafter, the continuous short-reach effect in the fourth control example will be described. First, in the above-described second control example, when the winning information is suspended based on the winning of the game ball as the continuous short-reach effect, the fluctuation type is deviated before the suspension and the winning information of the short fluctuation is displayed. Based on the fact that the short-term fluctuations are continuously held, the short fluctuations are changed (overwritten) to the fluctuation type of the short reach, so that the continuous short-reach effect is executed. Then, when the winning information that is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball is held, the short reach is set to be executed three times in succession as a continuous short reach effect, and the winning information that is lost is held. In such a case, by configuring the short reach to be executed twice consecutively as the continuous short reach production, the player can expect the number of times of the short reach to be executed in the continuous short reach production (the number of consecutive times). , To improve the entertainment of the game.

  On the other hand, in the present fourth control example, a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a reach symbol) which is a stop and displayed in each short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect has a regularity. ing. As for the regularity of the reach symbol, a detailed description will be given later, but the reach symbol stopped and displayed at the continuous short reach is more played than the reach symbol stopped and displayed at the short reach executed one change before. It is configured so that it does not become a reach design that is disadvantageous to the user. With this configuration, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the player stops paying attention to the symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed at each short reach in addition to the number of times the short reach is continuous. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the present fourth control example, the fluctuation after the execution of the continuous short-reach effect, that is, the fluctuation corresponding to the winning command for which the execution of the continuous short-reach effect is determined (hereinafter referred to as an effect target fluctuation). On the other hand, it is configured to execute a special production related to the continuous short reach production. Although a detailed description of this special effect will be described later, the running effect indicating that the continuous short-reach effect is being executed is configured to be continuously displayed during the fluctuation of the effect target fluctuation ( FIG. 167 (b)). With this configuration, it is possible to execute the short reach continuous production as a series of continuous productions including the production target fluctuation, and thus it is possible to provide a production that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, as described above, in the case of displaying a running effect indicating that the continuous short-reach effect is being executed also for the effect change, a predetermined timing during the effect change, that is, If the reach mode is not displayed at the timing when the reach mode is displayed in the short reach (for example, one second after the start of the fluctuation), the player can easily grasp the end timing of the continuous short reach production. There was a problem that the production effect could not be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a special variation pattern (special reach) in which the reach mode is displayed at the same timing as the short reach (for example, one second after the start of the variation) as the variation pattern of the production target variation. Is settable. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the end timing of the continuous short reach effect, and to increase the effect of the effect.

  The fourth control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is different from the second control example. It is different from the part that has been partially changed. Other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the flow of the continuous short reach effect executed in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 167. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the continuous short reach effect in the fourth control example. Specifically, FIG. 165 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation when a continuous short reach effect is executed, and FIG. 165 (b) is a diagram when a continuous short reach effect is executed. It is a figure showing an example of display contents of the 3rd design display 81. FIGS. 166 and 167 are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous short reach effect is being performed. Specifically, FIG. 166 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the case where the first short reach is executed as a continuous short reach effect, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example when the short short reach is performed. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where a third short reach is executed as a continuous short reach effect, and FIG. 167 (b) is a short short reach effect of three times. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example when the 1st fluctuation | variation (production target fluctuation | variation) is performed after the end of reach.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), as a special symbol change, a short change B with a change time of 2 seconds (see FIG. 68) (hereinafter, referred to as a short change) is executed three times in succession. After that, the continuous short reach effect will be described by taking as an example a case where the hit super reach A (see FIG. 68) with a change time of 60 seconds (hereinafter referred to as a long hit change) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (b), when the first short deviation variation is executed as the special symbol variation, the third symbol display device 81 displays the current position in the upper region Dm1 (see FIG. 132 (a)). "Continuous reach mode" is displayed as a running display indicating that short reach production is being performed, and "1 continuous reach number" is displayed as the number of executions that indicates the number of reach performed during continuous short reach production (See FIG. 166 (a)). In the short reach with the fluctuation time of 2 seconds, a reach mode in which the third symbol is in the reach state one second after the start of the fluctuation is displayed.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 166 (a), in the central region Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, of the symbol columns arranged in the vertical direction, numerals are placed at the center positions of the upper symbol column and the lower symbol column. The symbol with “4” is stopped and displayed, and a so-called reach state in which the symbol row in the middle row continues to fluctuate is displayed. Further, in the upper area Dm1, the in-execution display and the execution count display are displayed as described above. The other elements are the same as those in the above-described second control example, and thus the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 165, the description will be continued. When the first short reach is completed, short reach (second time) and short reach (third time) are executed so as to correspond to the special symbol variation 2 and short variation 3 respectively. In this case, the number of executions displayed in the upper area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 is "two consecutive reachs" (see FIG. 166 (b)) for short reach (second time) and short reach (third time). ) Is updated and displayed as “3 consecutive reach times” (see FIG. 167 (a)). In this way, by displaying the running display indicating that the continuous short-reach effect is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the current effect state. In addition, by displaying the number of executions indicating the number of reach performed during the continuous short reach production on the third symbol display device 81, the number of reach performed during the continuous short reach production can be easily displayed to the player. Can be grasped.

  Then, when the special symbol change for a long time is executed after the short symbol deviation (short deviation 1 to short deviation 3) set three consecutive times (see FIG. 165 (a)), the third symbol display device The “continuous reach mode”, which is a display during execution, is continuously displayed in the upper region Dm1 of 81, and “the fourth consecutive reach” is displayed as the number of times of execution. Then, in the central region Dm2, a special reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 167 (b)). This special reach is a reach effect set so that the reach mode is displayed one second after the special symbol change is started.

  With this configuration, the reach mode can be displayed at the same timing as when the short reach is executed (that is, one second after the start of the special symbol change). It can be suppressed that the player notices the change immediately after the special symbol change is started. More specifically, when an effect corresponding to a special symbol change for a long period of time (for example, 60 seconds) is normally executed, the player is provided with a period until the reach mode is displayed. An announcement effect indicating that the hit expectation is high is executed. In addition, since the reach mode is displayed after the period for performing the above-described announcement effect has been performed, an effect that ensures a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) until the reach mode is displayed is performed. If such an effect is executed after the end of the continuous short reach (short reach 1 to 3), the continuous short reach effect is not displayed when the reach mode is not displayed one second after the start of the fluctuation. There was a problem that it was noticed that it was the final fluctuation. Therefore, even if the special symbol change after the end of the continuous short reach (short reach 1 to 3) is a long-term special symbol change, the same timing as when short reach is executed (that is, the special symbol change starts) By executing the special reach in which the reach mode is displayed (one second after being performed), it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that it is the final fluctuation of the continuous short reach effect.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the special reach is executed will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 167 (b), even in the state where the special reach is being executed, the display indicating that the execution is being performed and the display of the number of times of execution are displayed in the upper area Dm1. Then, in the central area Dm2, the symbol with the number “1” and the symbol with the symbol “9” are stopped and displayed in the reach mode in the upper symbol row and the lower symbol row. The symbol column is displayed in a variable manner. When the symbol with the number "1" and the symbol with the number "9" are hit (when the same symbols are stopped and displayed in a line), a jackpot game is given. In addition to this, it is the most advantageous symbol for a player who is given a high-probability state (a so-called probable change state) in which the special symbol lottery result is likely to be a big hit after the big hit game ends.

  Here, the reach symbol set for each reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. In the fourth control example, in a plurality of reach effects performed during the continuous short reach effect, a reach symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than the reach symbol once stopped and displayed is stopped during the same continuous short reach effect. It is configured not to be. For example, in the short reach (first time) shown in FIG. 166 (a), a symbol with a numeral “4” (a normal symbol in which a probable change state is not given based on a hit) is displayed, and is shown in FIG. 166 (b). In the short reach (second time), the symbol with the number “1” (the probability variable symbol in which the probability variation state is given based on the hit) and the symbol with the symbol “2” (normal symbol) are in the reach mode (double symbol). 167 (a), and in the short reach (third time) shown in FIG. 167 (a), the symbol (probably changing symbol) with the number “1” is displayed in the reach mode, and is shown in FIG. 167 (b). In the special reach, as described above, the symbol (probably variable symbol) with the number "1" and the symbol (probable symbol) with the number "9" are displayed in the reach mode (double reach mode).

  In this manner, in the continuous short reach production, by configuring so that the reach symbol disadvantageous to the player is not stopped and displayed during the same continuous short reach production than the reach symbol once stopped and displayed, to the player During the continuous short reach production, the game can be played while expecting both the continuous number of short reach and the reach symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, similar to the above-described second control example, at the time when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the effect is a high-reliability (approximately 85%) large-hit and high-reliability effect. The player pays more attention to which symbol (probably changing symbol or normal symbol) is hit than whether or not the jackpot is won as a result of this continuous short reach production. Therefore, the single-reach mode in which only the probable pattern is the reach mode is set as the reach pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the double-reach mode in which the normal pattern and the probable pattern are the reach mode, but is not limited thereto. If the expectation of the big hit is not high as a result of the continuous short reach effect, the double reach mode may be set as a reach pattern more advantageous to the player than the single reach mode.

  In addition, during the continuous short reach effect, it may be possible to indicate a mode of the reach symbol stopped and displayed at the next short reach to be executed (normal symbol, positively-variable symbol or single reach, double reach). In this case, for example, the suggestion notification is executed using a symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the short reach, that is, a symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row of the central area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81. Good to do. With this configuration, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the short reach (the fluctuation time is 2 seconds) is a short period (for example, 0.25 seconds) that the player cannot sufficiently identify the symbol. Since only the stop reach is displayed, the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed at the next short reach executed to the player can be informed vaguely. This allows the player to expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the short reach to be executed next.

  In addition, during the continuous short-reach production, the method of suggesting the mode of the reach symbol (normal symbol, probable-variable symbol or single-reach, double-reach) stopped and displayed at the next short reach to be executed is not limited to the one described above. For example, for example, partial information (for example, visual information such as color and size, character information for making the image of the design, etc.) of the design pattern forming the reach design to be stopped and displayed is displayed in advance or stopped and displayed. A plurality of symbols including a reach symbol (a plurality of symbols in a range that does not include all symbol numbers) may be displayed. Even in the case of such a configuration, this allows the player to expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the short reach to be executed next.

  In addition, the reach symbol that has been stopped and displayed may be displayed as a history display on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous short reach effect. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the continuous short reach production. In addition, a plurality of reach symbol orders (for example, an order based on easiness of winning and an order based on a bonus granted at the time of winning) that are advantageous to the player are set in a plural number, and any one of the order is set. Is set and the continuous short reach effect is executed, the player can enjoy the continuous short reach effect while predicting the sequence set this time by checking the history of the reach symbols already stopped and displayed. Can improve the interest of the game.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 168 and FIG. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. , And other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 168 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that an effect reach symbol selection table 222da is added, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the details of the effect reach symbol selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (b). FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 168 (b), the reach symbol selection table 222da for effect shows the reach symbol type of the short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect, in accordance with the result of the success / failure determination and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da. Is a specified table.

  This reach symbol design selection table 222da for winning is a winning continuous short reach effect setting process (see S3151 in FIG. 171) of the winning command receiving process 4 (see S3010 in FIG. 170) or a continuous short reach effect setting process for losing (see FIG. 171). In S3152 in FIG. 172), it is referred to when a reach symbol of each variation (short reach variation) is set (see S4514 in FIG. 171 or S4614 in FIG. 172).

  Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a probability change and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “0 to 99”, the reach symbol type “probability A” is selected. In the reach symbol type “probable A”, “normal symbol, single line” is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be of “1”, and “normal / probable symbol, double line” for “2”. "Is defined, and" probable variable design, single line "is defined for" 3 ". The continuous short-reach counter 223be counts the number of times of the continuous short-reach effect (the number of reach executions), and the counter value “1” indicates the first reach (short-reach (first-time) of the continuous short-reach effect. )). Thereafter, the counter value “2” indicates the second reach in the continuous short reach effect, and the counter value “3” indicates the third reach in the continuous short reach effect. In addition, since the stop symbol counter 223da is a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, the probability that the reach symbol type “probable change A” is selected is 100/199.

  When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “100 to 194”, the reach symbol type “probable change B” is selected. In the reach symbol type “probable variation B”, “normal / probable variation, double line” is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be of “1”, and “normal / probability variation, A "double line" is defined, and a "probable variable design, single line" is defined for "3". The probability that the reach symbol type “probable change B” is selected is 95/199.

  When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “195 to 198”, the reach symbol type “probable change C” is selected. In the reach symbol type “probable change C”, “Premier symbol” is defined for the values of the continuous short reach counter 223be of “1” to “3”. The "premier symbol" is a symbol (for example, a symbol imitating a whale character) dedicated to continuous short reach displayed in a display form different from a symbol displayed in a variable manner in a normal special symbol change, and is stopped and displayed. By doing so, it is a symbol that determines that the most advantageous privilege is given to the player. The probability that the reach symbol type “probable change C” is selected is 4/199.

  Next, when the result of the hit determination is a normal hit and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “0 to 99”, the reach symbol type “normal A” is selected. In the reach symbol type "normal A", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1", and "normal / probable symbol, double line" for "2". "Is defined, and" normal / probable change design, double line "is defined for" 3 ". The probability that the reach symbol type “normal A” is selected is 100/199.

  When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “100 to 198”, the reach symbol type “normal B” is selected. In the reach symbol type “normal B”, “normal symbol, single line” is defined for the values of the continuous short reach counter 223be of “1” to “3”. The probability that the reach symbol type “normal B” is selected is 99/199.

  Lastly, if the result of the determination is incorrect and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “0 to 99”, the reach symbol type “missing A” is selected. In the reach symbol type "outside A", "normal symbol, single line" is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1", and "normal / probable symbol, double line" for "2". Is specified. In the case where the result is incorrect, the short reach is not executed three times continuously during the continuous short reach effect as in the second control example described above, so that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is set. No reach symbol is specified for “3”. The probability that the reach symbol type “outside A” is selected is 100/199.

  When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “100 to 149”, the reach symbol type “missing B” is selected. In the reach symbol type “outside B”, “normal symbol, single line” is defined for the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be of “1”, and “probable variable symbol, single line” is defined for “2”. Stipulated. The probability that the reach symbol type “outside B” is selected is 50/199.

  When the value of the stop symbol counter 223da is “150 to 198”, the reach symbol type “missing C” is selected. In the reach symbol type "outside C", "normal / probably variable symbol, double line" is defined for the values of the continuous short reach counter 223be of "1" and "2". The probability that the reach symbol type “outside C” is selected is 49/199.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed, the continuous short reach effect is executed with reference to the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. It is configured so that a reach symbol is set in advance for each short reach fluctuation. Thereby, it is possible to execute a reach symbol announcement effect for announcing a reach symbol stopped and displayed at the next short reach, thereby improving the interest. In addition, for each short reach variation, when the reach symbol is set in advance, it is configured to select a reach symbol type that defines the reach symbol for each short reach variation, so that the reach symbol along the regularity Can be surely displayed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the effect reach symbol selection table 222da described with reference to FIG. 168 (b), the condition (rank) of the reach symbol stopped and displayed for each item is defined. Although the reach pattern corresponding to the symbol condition (rank) is randomly selected and stopped and displayed as the reach mode, specifically, it is stopped in the reach mode in the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. It may be specified up to the displayed “number”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, details of the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 169, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a is added, and a stop symbol counter 223da is added. And the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The winning information storage area 223a has the same configuration as that of the above-described second control example. In addition, when it is determined in the winning command receiving process 4 (see S3010 of FIG. 170) that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed, the continuous short-reaching effect Various information is set for each variation in which the reach effect is executed. When a variation pattern command is received, the various information described above is referred to and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display content to be displayed is determined.

  Specifically, a winning continuous short reach effect setting process (see S3151 in FIG. 171) executed in the winning command receiving process 4 (see S3010 in FIG. 170) or a continuous short reach effect setting process for coming off (see FIG. 171) 172), when it is determined that the continuous short-reach effect is to be executed (S4511: Yes in FIG. 171 or S4611: Yes in FIG. 172), the winning information corresponding to each short-reach variation is stored. The reach symbol is set in the winning information storage area 223a (see S4512 in FIG. 171 or S4612 in FIG. 172), and the continuous short reach is stored in each of the winning information storage areas 223a corresponding to the variation in which the continuous short reach effect is executed. The effect variation type is set (see S4513 in FIG. 171 or S4613 in FIG. 172), and the continuous short reach performance is performed. There the winning information storage area 223a of winning information corresponding to the variation to be initiated are stored start information indicating the start of a continuous short reach demonstration is set (see S4614 in S4514 or Figure 172, in FIG. 171).

  In this way, by setting the effect information relating to the continuous short reach effect in the winning information storage area 223a, it is possible to easily set the effect to be executed for a plurality of fluctuations.

  The stop symbol counter 223da is a counter used when selecting the reach symbol of each short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect with reference to the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. The stop symbol counter 223da is configured by a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, every time the main processing (see FIG. 93) is executed, the value is incremented by 2 each time. Be updated. By setting the effect counter 223f and the value to be updated to be different from each other, the effect set when the effect is set by acquiring the value of the effect counter 223f and the value of the stop symbol counter 223da. It suppresses bias.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. The present control example is different from the above-described second control example in that a winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170) is executed instead of the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139). (See FIG. 173) in place of the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 173). The winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170) is different from the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) of the second control example in that the winning continuous short-reach effect setting process (see FIG. 171) and the continuous short-reach effect for departure are performed. The difference is that a setting process (see FIG. 172) is added, and the other parts are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 170, a winning command receiving process 4 (S3010) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning command receiving process 4 (S3010). When the winning command receiving process 4 (S3010) is executed, the processes of S3101 to S3134 are executed similarly to the winning command receiving process 2 (see FIG. 139) in the above-described second control example.

  When the process of S3134 is completed, and it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is equal to or less than “19” (S3134: Yes), a winning continuous short reach effect setting process is executed (S3151). The reach effect setting process (S3151) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Then, when the processing of S3151 ends, the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3133, similarly to the winning command receiving process 2 of the second control example (see FIG. 139), it is determined that the current winning information is not a big hit (S3133: No). When it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is equal to or smaller than "1" (S3139: Yes), a consecutive short reach effect setting process for departure is executed (S3152). The consecutive short reach effect setting process for departure (S3152) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Then, when the processing of S3152 is completed, this processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 171, the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151) executed in the winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170) will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151). The winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151) is a process for setting a continuous short reach effect when the received winning command is a big hit.

  In the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (S3151), first, it is determined whether or not all of the winning information up to three before the current winning information is the variation type of the short variation (S4511).

  In the processing of S4511, if it is determined that all of the winning information up to three before the current winning information are not out of the short fluctuation (S4511: No), this processing is directly performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S4511, if it is determined that all the winning information up to three before the current winning information are out of the variation type of the short variation (S4511: Yes), the continuous short reach effect is set. Then, the processing of S4512 to S4516 described below is executed.

  First, in the process of S4512, “3” is set to the upper limit value of the continuous short reach counter 223be (S4512). Here, the value of the continuous short reach counter corresponding to each winning information storage area 223a to be subjected to the continuous short reach effect is set. Next, a variation type indicating a continuous short reach effect is set in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the winning information up to three before the current winning information (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514.

  In the process of S4514, the reach symbol of each variation is determined based on the reach symbol selection table for production 222da, set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4514), and then the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is set to "1". Is set in the winning information storage area 223a in which "" has been set (S4515). Next, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S4516), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172, a description will be given of the continuous short-reach effect setting process for disconnection (S3152) executed in the winning command receiving process 4 (see FIG. 170). FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous short reach effect setting process for departure (S3152). The consecutive short reach effect setting process for departure (S3152) is a process for setting a continuous short reach effect when the received winning command is deviated.

  In the consecutive short reach effect setting process for departure (S3152), first, it is determined whether or not all the winning information up to two before the current winning information is of the deviating short fluctuation type (S4611).

  In the process of S4611, if it is determined that all the winning information up to two before the current winning information are not out of the short fluctuation (S4611: No), the present process is directly performed without setting the continuous short reach effect. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S4611, if it is determined that all the winning information up to two before the current winning information are out of the fluctuation type of the short fluctuation (S4611: Yes), the continuous short reach effect is set. Then, the processing of S4612 to S4616 described below is executed.

  First, in the process of S4612, “2” is set as the upper limit of the continuous short reach counter 223be (S4612). Here, the value of the continuous short reach counter corresponding to each winning information storage area 223a to be subjected to the continuous short reach effect is set. Next, a variation type indicating a continuous short reach effect is set in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the winning information up to two before the current winning information (S4613), and the process proceeds to S4614.

  In the process of S4614, the reach symbol of each change is determined based on the reach symbol selection table for effect 222da, set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4614), and then the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is set to "1". Is set in the winning information storage area 223a in which "" has been set (S4615). Next, the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S4616), and this processing ends.

  Next, the variation pattern selection processing 4 (S3404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the content of the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404). In the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404), in addition to the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the second control example described above, the next variation (the effect target) in which the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be becomes the upper limit value is performed. Until change, the background command is set so that the continuous short reach effect is continuously executed.

  In the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3404), first, the same processes as S3501 to S3505 of the variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the above-described second control example are executed. After finishing the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S3551). If it is determined in the processing of S3551 that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is not set to ON (S3551: No), the processing relating to the setting of the continuous short reach effect (the processing of S3552 to S3559) is skipped. The same processing as S3506 of the variation pattern selection processing 2 (see FIG. 143) of the second control example is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3551, if it is determined that the continuous short reach setting flag 223bf is set to ON (S3551: Yes), the start indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the current fluctuation is started. It is determined whether the information is set, that is, whether it is the start timing of the continuous short reach effect (S3552). The start information indicating the start of the continuous short reach effect is obtained by the process of S4515 of the winning continuous short reach effect setting process (refer to FIG. 171) or the process of S4615 of the continuous short reach effect setting process for departure (refer to FIG. 172). It is set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a.

  In the process of S3552, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous short reach effect (S3552: Yes), that is, when the variation pattern in which the continuous short reach effect is started is selected, the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is used. Is added (S3553), and a short reach background command for display is set (S3554).

  The short reach background command for display includes a running display (see FIG. 166 (a)) indicating that the continuous short reach effect is being executed, and an execution count display indicating the number of reach executed during the continuous short reach effect. This is a command to be output to the display control device 114 in order to display (see FIG. 166 (a)) in the upper area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81. The display of the number of executions displayed in the upper area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 is performed every time a new variation is executed until the display normal background command is output (until the continuous short reach effect ends). Is set so that the number of times is incremented by one. The update processing of the execution count display may be performed by adding update information of the execution count display to the display variation pattern command set by the audio lamp control device 113 or set by the display control device 114. It may be configured to execute a process of adding 1 to the number of times of display when a variation pattern command for use is received.

  When the processing of S3554 ends, the processing of S3506 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3552 that it is not the start timing of the continuous short reach effect (S3552: No), then, it is determined whether the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is 1 or more (S3555). Here, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is not 1 or more (S3555: No), that is, in the state where the continuous short reach effect is set, the winning information for starting the continuous short reach effect yet. Is held, the process for the continuous short reach effect is skipped, the process proceeds to S3506, and the process ends after executing the process of S3506 described above.

  In the process of S3555, when it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is 1 or more (S3555: Yes), the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is incremented by 1 (S3556), and the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is increased. It is determined whether the value is one greater than the upper limit (S3557). Here, if it is determined that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is not one value larger than the upper limit value (S3557: No), the process of S3558 and S3559 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3506. After executing the processing, the processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3557 that the value of the continuous short reach counter 223be is greater than the upper limit by one (S3557: Yes), the display normal background command is set (S3558), and the continuous short reach setting is performed. The flag 223bf is set to off (S3559), the process moves to S3506, and the process ends after executing the above-described process of S3506. In this way, by setting the display short reach background command until the value becomes one more than the upper limit value of the continuous short reach counter 223be, the continuous short reach effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81. This can be displayed up to the first rotation after the end of the continuous short-reach fluctuation, that is, the fluctuation corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous short-reach production (production target fluctuation). This makes it possible to execute a series of effects with a plurality of out-of-office fluctuations updated so that the short reach fluctuations are executed as a continuous short-reach effect and the effect target fluctuations.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a reach symbol) serving as a reach that is stopped and displayed in each short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect is provided with regularity. Make up. As for the regularity of the reach symbol, a detailed description will be given later, but the reach symbol stopped and displayed at the continuous short reach is more played than the reach symbol stopped and displayed at the short reach executed one change before. It is configured so that it does not become a reach design that is disadvantageous to the user. With this configuration, when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the player stops paying attention to the symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed at each short reach in addition to the number of times the short reach is continuous. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the present fourth control example, the fluctuation after the execution of the continuous short-reach effect, that is, the fluctuation corresponding to the winning command for which the execution of the continuous short-reach effect is determined (hereinafter referred to as an effect target fluctuation). On the other hand, it is configured to execute a special production related to the continuous short reach production. Although a detailed description of this special effect will be described later, the running effect indicating that the continuous short-reach effect is being executed is configured to be continuously displayed during the fluctuation of the effect target fluctuation ( FIG. 167 (b)). With this configuration, it is possible to execute the short reach continuous production as a series of continuous productions including the production target fluctuation, and thus it is possible to provide a production that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, as described above, in the case of displaying a running effect indicating that the continuous short-reach effect is being executed also for the effect change, a predetermined timing during the effect change, that is, If the reach mode is not displayed at the timing when the reach mode is displayed in the short reach (for example, one second after the start of the fluctuation), the player can easily grasp the end timing of the continuous short reach production. There was a problem that the production effect could not be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a special variation pattern (special reach) in which the reach mode is displayed at the same timing as the short reach (for example, one second after the start of the variation) as the variation pattern of the production target variation. Is settable. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the end timing of the continuous short reach effect, and to increase the effect of the effect.

  In the fourth control example, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed, the short reach variation executed in the continuous short reach effect is determined in advance with reference to the effect reach symbol selection table 222da. It is configured to set a reach symbol. Thereby, it is possible to execute a reach symbol announcement effect for announcing a reach symbol stopped and displayed at the next short reach, thereby improving the interest. In addition, for each short reach variation, when the reach symbol is set in advance, it is configured to select a reach symbol type that defines the reach symbol for each short reach variation, so that the reach symbol along the regularity Can be surely displayed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In this manner, in the continuous short reach production, by configuring so that the reach symbol disadvantageous to the player is not stopped and displayed during the same continuous short reach production than the reach symbol once stopped and displayed, to the player During the continuous short reach production, the game can be played while expecting both the continuous number of short reach and the reach symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, similar to the above-described second control example, at the time when the continuous short reach effect is executed, the effect is a high-reliability (approximately 85%) large-hit and high-reliability effect. The player pays more attention to which symbol (probably changing symbol or normal symbol) is hit than whether or not the jackpot is won as a result of this continuous short reach production. Therefore, the single-reach mode in which only the probable pattern is the reach mode is set as the reach pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the double-reach mode in which the normal pattern and the probable pattern are the reach mode, but is not limited thereto. If the expectation of the big hit is not high as a result of the continuous short reach effect, the double reach mode may be set as a reach pattern more advantageous to the player than the single reach mode.

  In addition, during the continuous short reach effect, it may be possible to indicate a mode of the reach symbol stopped and displayed at the next short reach to be executed (normal symbol, positively-variable symbol or single reach, double reach). In this case, for example, the suggestion notification is executed using a symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the short reach, that is, a symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row of the central area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81. Good to do. With this configuration, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the short reach (the fluctuation time is 2 seconds) is a short period (for example, 0.25 seconds) that the player cannot sufficiently identify the symbol. Since only the stop reach is displayed, the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed at the next short reach executed to the player can be informed vaguely. This allows the player to expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the short reach to be executed next.

  In addition, during the continuous short-reach production, the method of suggesting the mode of the reach symbol (normal symbol, probable-variable symbol or single-reach, double-reach) stopped and displayed at the next short reach to be executed is not limited to the one described above. For example, for example, partial information (for example, visual information such as color and size, character information for making the image of the design, etc.) of the design pattern forming the reach design to be stopped and displayed is displayed in advance or stopped and displayed. A plurality of symbols including a reach symbol (a plurality of symbols in a range that does not include all symbol numbers) may be displayed. Even in the case of such a configuration, this allows the player to expect the next short reach while suggesting the content of the short reach to be executed next.

  In addition, the reach symbol that has been stopped and displayed may be displayed as a history display on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous short reach effect. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the continuous short reach production. In addition, a plurality of reach symbol orders (for example, an order based on easiness of winning and an order based on a bonus granted at the time of winning) that are advantageous to the player are set in a plural number, and any one of the order is set. Is set and the continuous short reach effect is executed, the player can enjoy the continuous short reach effect while predicting the sequence set this time by checking the history of the reach symbols already stopped and displayed. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In the fourth control example described above, the effect of suggesting the result of the continuous short reach effect to the player using the reach symbol stopped and displayed at the short reach is configured. It may be configured to suggest the result of the continuous short reach effect to the player using a symbol other than the reach symbol stopped and displayed in the short reach, for example, the type of the symbol stopped and displayed last is the continuous short reach The result of the production may be suggested. Even in this case, when it is determined that the continuous short-reach effect is to be performed, the same effect as in the present control example can be obtained by setting a symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the short-reach variation in advance. be able to.

  Further, when the layout of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined layout (for example, a layout shifted from the reach mode by one frame (a so-called chance eye)), the player is expected to win a big hit. In the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for notifying a plurality of chances (for example, a single-reach one-frame deviation chance and a double-reach one-frame deviation chance, A chance pattern in which the symbol is stopped and displayed in a Y-shape) is set, and a chance pattern may be used instead of the reach pattern in the fourth control example, or the reach pattern and the chance pattern are combined. The degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player may be set in stages, and a continuous short reach effect may be executed.

  In the fourth control example, in the continuous short reach production, when the result of the continuous short reach production is a hit, the number of short reach continuously executed is three times, and the result of the continuous short reach production is out of order. Is configured so that the number of short reach executed continuously is two times, but the number of short reach executed in the continuous short reach production may be determined by lottery. In this case, it is preferable to set so that the number of short reach executed when the result of the continuous short reach effect is a hit is larger than that when the result is out. Thus, even when the short reach number is set in the lottery, it is possible to execute an effect in which the greater the number of consecutive times, the higher the degree of expectation is.

  In the fourth control example, the condition that the continuous short-reach effect is executed is that the variation time of 2 seconds is continuously set as a variation pattern of the special symbol variation for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the condition is satisfied even when an out-of-range fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is set. In this case, an effect similar to that of the present control example can be executed by executing the same effect as the short reach several times in one fluctuation pattern.

  Specifically, when it is determined in the winning command receiving process that a continuous short reach effect is to be executed, the winning command receiving process is completed before (one before) the winning command targeted for the determination. The variable time information of the winning information stored in the information storage area 223a is extracted. Then, a pseudo short reach effect pattern in which the short reach effect is executed a plurality of times within the change time (for example, 15 seconds) set in the change time information is set. In this case, for example, as a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of 15 seconds, a fluctuation pattern in which the first pseudo out fluctuation (9 seconds) and the pseudo short reach fluctuation (2 seconds) are executed three times, and a second pseudo out fluctuation (11 seconds) ) And a fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo short reach fluctuation (2 seconds) is executed twice, and a fluctuation pattern in which the third pseudo out-of-range fluctuation (13 seconds) and the pseudo short reach fluctuation (2 seconds) are executed once. In addition, in the winning command receiving process, when it is determined that the continuous short reach effect is to be executed, a variation pattern corresponding to the set short reach number is set. With such a configuration, even in a state where a large amount of winning information (reserved balls) is not accumulated, it is possible to suitably execute the continuous short reach effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In the fourth control example, the continuous short reach effect is configured to be executed using the fluctuation time of the special symbol, but the other period (a standby period, a period during a hit game, etc.) is used ( It may be configured to perform a continuous short reach effect (in combination). For example, an effect similar to the short reach may be executed using the ending period of the jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to execute the continuous short reach effect even for the fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the big hit.

  In this case, when a plurality of pieces of winning information that have won the jackpot are set in the winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a, the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed first and after the jackpot game is over. The continuous short reach effect is executed using the special symbol fluctuation set up to the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the next big hit.

  Specifically, when the prize information set (stored) in the prize information storage area 223a is set to the prize information that has won the second jackpot, the prize information with the prize information that has won the first jackpot is set. Calculate the interval (the number of special symbol changes executed between the winning information corresponding to the two jackpots), and based on the calculation result and the number of short reach executed in the continuous short reach effect, the big hit An effect mode of a short reach effect performed during the ending period of the game is set. Then, a short reach effect of the effect mode set during the ending period of the jackpot game is executed. With this configuration, a series of continuous effects (continuous short) (using the big hit game period and the special symbol change period) using the ending period of the big hit game and the special symbol change period executed after the big hit game ends. Reach production) can be performed. Therefore, immediately after the end of the jackpot game (for example, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol change in the second rotation), even if the next jackpot is won, the continuous production (continuous short reach production) is preferably performed. Can be.

  In addition, in the case of using the above-described configuration, if the next big hit is won by the first special symbol change after the end of the big hit game, the short reach effect executed during the ending period of the previous big hit game is a special. It may be a specification (for example, a premier symbol is made to appear) and an effect that gives a special feeling to the player. As a result, in addition to the joy of winning the jackpot in succession, the joy of the special performance being performed can be given to the player.

  In the above-described example, the example using the ending period of the jackpot game and the special symbol change executed after the end of the jackpot game has been described. In addition, for example, a special symbol change that becomes a jackpot and the jackpot A continuous short reach effect may be executed using the opening period of the game. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute a continuous short-reach effect using a plurality of winning information set (stored) in the winning information storage area 223a, for example, a variation pattern of a special symbol variation winning a jackpot May be set to a continuous short reach effect.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the continuous short-reach effect is to be performed in the fluctuation display setting processing (see FIG. 105) for the special symbol fluctuation that has won the jackpot, the special symbol fluctuation time and the opening period of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter Is used to set a fluctuation pattern in which a continuous short reach effect is executed. Thus, the third symbol display device 81 performs a continuous short reach effect across the timing when the special symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed (the timing when the big hit game is started). Then, based on the result of the continuous short reach effect that ends during the opening period, the type of the jackpot game being executed this time is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a process of changing a variation pattern for a plurality of winning information set in the winning information storage area 223a (a process of setting a continuous effect based on a prefetching process). A continuous production can be performed.

  Furthermore, it is configured to execute the above-described continuous short reach effect during the interval period of the jackpot game, and to execute an effect that makes it seem that a plurality of jackpots have been won by using one jackpot game. Good. Specifically, in a gaming machine in which a jackpot game (for example, a 16-round jackpot) advantageous to a player and a jackpot (for example, an 8-round jackpot) which is disadvantageous to the player are set as types of the jackpot game, During the interval set between the eighth round and the ninth round, a continuous short reach effect is executed. Then, when the result of the continuous short reach effect is a predetermined result (the winning symbols are aligned), a big hit game in-game effect that makes it appear as if a new big hit game is executed is executed from the ninth round. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that a plurality of jackpot games have been won, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the above-described example, a gaming machine in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, 16 round jackpot) and a jackpot more disadvantageous to the player (for example, 8 round jackpot) are used as the type of the jackpot game is used. In addition to the above, in addition to the jackpot game described above, in the case of a specific determination result set as a part of a case where the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be out of place, the gaming ball in the jackpot game is In a gaming machine having a bonus game (for example, a small hit) in which a variable winning means that is opened so as to be able to enter is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.6 seconds), the production mode of the big hit game is changed to the first half production mode and the second half. The first half production mode is set in the same way as the production mode of the small hit game, and the continuous short reach production is performed using the period (interval period) after the end of the first production mode. Line and may be configured to perform a late representation embodiment when the result of a continuous short reach demonstration is a predetermined result. This makes it difficult to determine whether the small hit game is being executed for the player or whether the first half effect mode of the big hit game is being executed, and is executed after the continuous short reach effect executed after the first half effect mode. The second half effect style can be considered as the start of a new jackpot game.

  Further, the above-described various periods (that is, a period that straddles a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, a period in which a big hit (small hit) game ends, and a period that straddles the special symbol change executed after the end of the big hit (small hit) game, a big hit) (Small hits) Special symbol fluctuations won and the big hits (small hits) that are executed during the game (period during the big hits (small hits) game start period) It is preferable that a plurality of short reach effects can be executed. As a result, it is possible to standardize the production data of the production performed in various periods, to reduce the capacity of the production data, and to perform the production without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Can be.

<About the fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth control example, a point that the analysis camera 700z and the display camera 1700 are provided in the game area, a game ball shot by the camera, It is determined whether or not the entry was illegally performed based on the point that the effect was executed using the image of the player and the shooting result taken by the camera when the game ball entered at an incorrect timing or the like. This is different from the above. Note that the gaming board 13 described in each of the above-described embodiments or control examples may be provided with the analysis camera 700z and the display camera 1700.

  Specifically, in the fifth control example, the configuration is such that the ball-linked reach effect is executed using an image of a game ball taken by the first flow path camera 1700a or the second flow path camera 1700b. In this ball-linked reach effect, symbols and effects are varied according to the image of the game ball taken. As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the symbol is changed (specifically, broken) by the movement of the game ball displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to urge the player to fire the game ball in order to display the game ball on the display device 81, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the fifth control example, as a round effect during a predetermined round during the jackpot, the image of the player or the periphery of the button taken at the time of the cut-in effect or the button press effect executed before the jackpot is executed. It is configured to execute a fusion effect of displaying an image in combination with a round effect. Thereby, since the image of the player himself is displayed as a jackpot round effect, unexpectedness can be given to the player, and the effect variations can be increased without increasing the capacity of the effect image.

  Further, in the fifth control example, as the opening effect of the jackpot, a highlight effect of displaying, as a highlight, a video (image) at the time of winning the game ball which has triggered the jackpot is executed. . This makes it possible to recognize the state of the timing (that is, the past) at which the gaming ball that has won the jackpot has won, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  In addition, in the opening effect, a reel effect that simulates the timing at which the lottery result is a big hit is displayed together with the highlight effect. Thereby, the state of the lottery executed inside the gaming machine can be pseudo-visualized and displayed according to the past state of the game balls flowing down, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, various devices (second entrance 640, through gate 67, special winning opening (special winning opening) 65a) provided on the game board 13, and game balls flowing down on the game board 13 Is periodically photographed using the photographing means (analysis camera 700z), and the presence or absence of an abnormality or the cause of the abnormality is determined using the photographed image. It is possible to execute the abnormality determination process with higher reliability than the abnormality determination process.

  In the present control example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives an abnormal winning command set when the main control device 110 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred, it is determined that the abnormal winning has occurred at a location where the abnormal winning has occurred. It is configured to read image data of a period earlier than that, analyze the contents of the image data, and identify the cause of the abnormal winning. Therefore, the period during which the process using the image data is executed can be minimized, and the processing load of the process using the image data can be reduced. Further, since only the image data of the portion necessary for the abnormal processing is processed, the processing load of the image data can be reduced. Further, by reducing the processing load of the image data in each abnormal processing, it is possible to add detailed processing to each abnormal processing.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 13 in the fifth control example is different from the game board 13 in each control example in that an analysis camera 700z and a display camera 1700 are provided. The difference is that the first entrance 64 is arranged in place of the opening 710a allocated to the entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Among the analysis cameras 700z, the second entrance camera 700za is a camera for taking an image of the second entrance 640 from above, and is located at the upper right position of the second entrance 640 and has a third symbol display. It is arranged at a position below the device 81. The image captured by the second entrance camera 700za is, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), a second entrance 640 and an electric accessory 640a provided in association with the second entrance 640. Image.

  As will be described in detail later, an image of the second entrance 640 is periodically (every 0.1 second) taken by the second entrance camera 700za, and images of the past 15 times (for 1.5 seconds) are stored. Is done. Then, when an illegal ball entry into the second entrance 640 is detected (specifically, a game ball enters the second entrance 640 despite the fact that the motorized accessory 640 is in the closed state). In the case of a ball), based on an image taken 0.5 to 1.5 seconds before the timing at which the illegal entry was detected, the electric accessory 640 is not opened illegally or a foreign object is detected. It is determined whether or not it has been inserted.

  The special winning opening camera 700zb is a camera for photographing the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 from above, and above the variable winning device 65 and at the lower end of the second ball opening 640a. Placed in As shown in FIG. 180 (e), the image photographed by the special winning opening camera 700zb includes the open / close state of the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the special winning opening (specific winning opening). ) An image of a game ball entering the ball 65a (or flowing down without entering the ball).

  Although details will be described later, the image of the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is periodically (every 0.1 seconds) shot by the special winning opening camera 700zb, and the images of the past 15 times (for 1.5 seconds) are taken. Will be saved. When an illegal ball is detected in the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a (specifically, even if the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is closed, the special winning opening 65a is closed). (When a game ball enters the (special winning opening) 65a), based on an image taken 0.5 to 1.5 seconds before the timing at which the illegal entering was detected, a special winning opening ( It is determined whether the specific winning opening 65a has been opened illegally or whether a foreign object has been inserted.

  The through camera 700zc is a camera for photographing the through gates 67 provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13, and is provided on the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80 at the upper right of the left through gate 67 and the upper left of the right through gate 67. Placed at the edge. The image photographed by the through camera 700zc is an image of the through gate 67, a nail on the through gate 67, and a game ball passing through the through gate 67, as shown in FIG. 180 (b).

  As will be described later in detail, images of the through gate 67 are taken periodically (every 0.1 seconds) by the through camera 700zc, and images for the past 15 times (for 1.5 seconds) are stored. Then, when an illegal ball is detected to enter the through gate 67 (specifically, when the number of balls entering the through gate 67 is excessively large), the timing of detecting the illegal ball is increased by 0.5. Based on the image photographed 1.5 to 1.5 seconds before, it is determined whether the nail at the upper part of the through gate 67 has been illegally opened or a foreign object has been inserted.

  In addition, as a result of discriminating the images captured by the respective analysis cameras described above, if it is determined that the image is fraudulent, the image of the player is obtained by the player camera 1700c of the display camera 1700 described later. (Photographing), and the fact that fraud has been committed is notified. As a result, fraud can be suppressed.

  Among the display cameras 1700, the first flow path camera 1700a is a flow path (first flow path) that flows down immediately after being fired into the game area (after being fired to the upper part of the game board 13 by the rails 76 and 77). , Which is arranged on the outer periphery upper part of the outer rail 77 in a lower left direction. The image captured by the first flow path camera 1700a is, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), a game ball which is fired by the ball firing unit 112a and discharged to the upper portion of the game board 13 by the rails 76 and 77. This is an image of the process in which the game ball approaches the first channel camera 1700a.

  Although the details will be described later, the image of the first flow path taken by the first flow path camera 1700a is displayed in the ball-linked effect, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path is transmitted to the first flow path camera 1700a. At the approaching timing, an effect in which the symbol displayed in the ball-linked effect is broken (or cracked) is displayed. Thereby, an integrated effect can be displayed by the image of the game ball flowing down the flow path and the image of the third symbol displayed as the variable display, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The second flow path camera 1700b is a flow path through which a portion of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 among the game balls fired into the game area pass (second flow path, see flow path a in FIG. 179). Is arranged below the left and right through gates 67. The image captured by the second channel camera 1700b is an image of a game ball flowing down the second channel.

  As will be described later in detail, the image of the second flow path taken by the second flow path camera 1700b is displayed when a game ball is flowing down the second flow path in the ball-linked effect. Then, at the timing when the game ball flowing down the second flow path comes closest to the second flow path camera 1700b, an effect is displayed in which the symbol displayed in the ball-linked effect is broken (or cracked). Therefore, the display of the ball-linked effect is changed according to the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area. This allows the player to pay attention to the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  The player camera 1700c is a camera for photographing a player who is playing a game, and is arranged above the variable display device unit 80 toward the near side. The image photographed by the player camera 1700c is an image photographed of the player from the front (from the game board 13 side). The player camera 1700c is controlled so as to photograph the player at the timing when the cut-in effect or the button effect is executed, when the winning information that is held is stored in the held winning information, The image of the player photographed at the timing is displayed together with the cut-in effect or the button effect displayed at the timing photographed as the effect in the specific round (4, 8, and 12 rounds in the present control example) during the jackpot game. . This allows the player to display past information, such as the expression of the player himself, when a performance with a high jackpot expectation is displayed. Can improve the interest of the player.

  The first entrance camera 1700e is a camera for photographing the first entrance 64 from above, and is located at the upper right position of the first entrance 640 and below the third symbol display device 81. Be placed. The image captured by the first entrance camera 1700e is an image of the first entrance 64 and a game ball entering the first entrance 64, as shown in FIG. 180 (a).

  As will be described in detail later, the image of the first entrance 64 is taken periodically (every 0.1 second) by the first entrance camera 1700e, and the images of the past 15 times (for 1.5 seconds) are stored. Is done. Then, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 and a jackpot game based on the entry starts, an image 0.5 to 1.5 seconds before the entry timing is used. The highlight effect is executed (displayed) as an opening effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize what kind of process (flow down) has caused the winning of the game ball that has won the jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  The second entrance camera 1700f is the same as the second entrance camera 700za of the analysis camera 700z described above, but the image captured by the second entrance camera 700b indicates that the electric accessory 640a is abnormal. The difference is that the image captured by the second entrance camera 1700f is used as a part of the ball-linked effect, while being used for discrimination. When the abnormality of the electric accessory 640a is determined, the execution of the photographing is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when it is used as the image displayed in the ball-linked effect, the photographing is performed by the display control device 114. Is different in that the execution is controlled. Hereinafter, the second entrance camera controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 is referred to as a second entrance camera 700za for convenience, and the second entrance camera controlled by the display control device 114 is referred to as a second entrance camera 700za. Called the second entrance camera 1700f.

  As will be described in detail later, an image of the second entrance 640 is taken periodically (every 0.1 second) by the second entrance camera 1700f, and images for the past 15 times (for 1.5 seconds) are stored. Is done. Then, when a game ball enters the second entrance 640 and a jackpot game based on the entry is started, an image 0.5 to 1.5 seconds before the entry timing is used. The highlight effect is executed (displayed) as an opening effect.

  FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an image captured by each of the analysis camera 700z or the display camera 1700 described above.

  FIG. 180 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an image captured by the first flow path camera 1700a, and FIG. 180 (b) schematically illustrates an image captured by the through camera 700zc. FIG. 180 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing an image captured by the first entrance camera 1700e, and FIG. 180 (d) is a second entrance camera 700za ( FIG. 180 (e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image photographed by the special winning opening camera 700zb. FIG. 180 (e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image photographed by the large winning opening camera 700zb. The detailed contents are as described above with reference to FIG.

  Next, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184.

  FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a ball-linked effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the ball-linked reach. The ball-linked production starts at a timing 30 seconds after the ball-linked reach, which is one aspect of the super-reach with a variation time of 60 seconds, starts, and ends at a timing when the variation display end time 60 seconds has elapsed. It is a production that is done.

  In this ball-linked effect, as described above, an effect of breaking a symbol is displayed using an image captured by the first channel camera 1700a or an image captured by the second channel camera 1700b. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 181, the left symbol row and the right symbol row are stopped and displayed at the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 with the same numeral symbol (the symbol indicating 7). The reach mode is displayed, and 6 symbols are displayed in the center symbol row. Then, the characters "Break a ball and break 6 !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The first flow path camera 1700a is a camera for photographing the shot game ball, and by shooting the game ball, the image of the game ball shot by the first flow path camera 1700a is displayed on the back side of the symbol. Will be displayed.

  Since the launched game balls flow down to approach the first flow path camera 1700a, the game balls displayed on the back side of the symbol are gradually enlarged. Then, at the timing when the game ball approaches the first downstream camera 1700a, the displayed game ball collides with the symbol, and an effect is displayed in which the symbol is broken (or cracks are entered or cracks are increased). Thus, by firing the game ball, the player is expected to break the symbol 6 displayed in the central symbol row and display the symbol 7 which is a big hit symbol. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Although the details will be described later, whether or not the game ball has come closest to the first flow path camera 1700a is determined based on the size of the game ball displayed in the captured image. The determination is not limited to the determination based on the size of the game ball displayed on the captured image, but may be determined based on focus (focal length), may be determined by providing a proximity sensor, or the game ball may be determined. Naturally, it may be calculated from the firing timing.

  The effect that the symbol is broken is set to an effect according to the elapsed time of the variable display. Specifically, if the elapsed time is short, the impact strength of the game ball is weak (the pattern is slightly broken), and if the elapsed time is short, the impact strength of the game ball is strong (the pattern is largely broken). Become a director. Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem that the symbol is broken and a big hit is reported, although the remaining time of the effect is long.

  Thereafter, when the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path has flowed down the second flow path (see flow path a in FIG. 179), the game is switched to a ball-linked effect based on an image captured by the second flow path camera 1700b. When the game sphere flowing down the second flow path is closest to the second flow path camera 1700b, similarly to the case where the game sphere is closest to the first flow path camera 1700a, 6 is displayed in the central symbol row. The effect that the symbol is broken is displayed. As described above, the second flow path is a flow path through which only a part of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 passes. Therefore, it can be noticed whether or not the game ball flows down the second flow path, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182, an opening effect displayed at the start of the big hit game will be described. FIG. 182 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an opening effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the opening effect in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 182, the video (highlight video) immediately before the winning of the hit gaming ball is detected is displayed on the right side of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. . Then, on the right side of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reel effect for simulating the timing when the lottery result is a big hit is displayed.

  This will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 182 (a) and 182 (b). FIG. 182 (a) is a third design in which an image of the first entrance 64 photographed at a timing 1.0 seconds before the timing of detecting a jackpot is displayed as an opening effect. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of a display device 81.

  Here, the game ball that has entered the first ball entry port 64 flows down a flow path (not shown) and is discharged out of the game area. The entry of a game ball into the first ball entry port 64 is detected by a sensor (not shown) arranged in the flow path discharged to the outside of the game area. Since the time difference until the game ball that has entered the first entrance 64 is detected by the sensor is 0.5 second, the timing 1.0 before the timing at which the big win is detected is the first timing. This is the timing of 0.5 seconds before the game ball enters the entrance 64. Further, the image highlighted as the opening effect is an image obtained by extending (slow motion) the image of the image (1 second) 0.5 to 1.5 seconds ago to 5 seconds. This makes it possible to more accurately recognize the moment at which a game ball enters the first entrance 64 (or the second entrance 640), thereby providing an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the opening effect, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), a "highlight" indicating that an image (highlight image) immediately before the entry of a hit gaming ball is detected is displayed at the upper left of the screen. A character is displayed, and a past image captured by the first entrance camera 1700e is displayed below the character. Then, on the right side of the screen, a reel effect indicating a jackpot random number obtained when a prize is won in the form of a reel is displayed, and at the top of the reel, a "big hit random number value 7" indicating a random number value of a jackpot is displayed. Is displayed.

  The reel displayed on the right side of the screen is a drum-shaped reel with numbers 0 to 20 attached to the surface, and is rotated and displayed from below to above. The number of reels that can be visually recognized on the display screen is nine, and in FIG. 182 (a), the numbers “0 to 8” are visually recognizable. A thick frame is arranged at a position surrounding the numeral (1) displayed at the second position from the top among the numbers of the reels that can be visually recognized. It is simulated that the numerical value stopped and displayed in the bold frame is a jackpot random number value acquired by the game ball entering the first entrance 64. In the present control example, the configuration is such that a pseudo jackpot random value is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot random value for which a lottery is actually performed may be displayed.

  Then, with the lapse of the opening effect, the reel is rotated and displayed from the lower side to the upper side, and the image of the highlight video displayed on the left side of the screen is displayed after 0.1 second every 0.5 second. It is transformed into an image. The reel operation is stopped and displayed with a random value (7 in this control example) indicating that the reel has a big hit when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect. As described above, the highlight image in which the hit gaming ball enters is displayed with the image for one second stretched to five seconds (slow motion), so the opening effect of the highlight image Is set to be executed (displayed) from the start time of the game, it is possible to match the timing at which the game ball enters the highlight video with the timing at which the reel is stopped and displayed in the reel effect.

  That is, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the opening effect, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), an image of a state where a game ball has completely entered the first entrance 64 is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the screen is displayed. On the right side, a reel in which the number 7 is stopped is displayed at the second position from the top (the position where the thick frame is arranged). Further, on the left side where 7 is stopped, the character "winning" is displayed, and it is easily notified that the winning has been achieved at the timing when the random number value of the jackpot becomes 7.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183, a description will be given of a fusion effect performed in a specific round (4, 8, and 12 rounds) of the jackpot game of the present control example. FIG. 183 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the fusion effect.

  In the fusion effect, in a specific round (4, 8, and 12 rounds) of the jackpot game, the player or frame acquired (photographed) at the timing of the cut-in effect or the button effect performed before the start of the jackpot game. An image around the button 22 is displayed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 183, when the fourth round of the jackpot game is executed, an image acquired (photographed) is displayed at the timing of the button press effect executed before the jackpot game. Specifically, the character “4R” indicating that the fourth round of the jackpot game is being executed is displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the button press effect is executed below the character. At the timing, an image of the player taken by the player camera 1700c is displayed.

  Then, the button press effect displayed at the shooting timing is displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the image around the frame button 22 captured by the button camera 1700d is displayed at the lower left of the screen. Since the image around the frame button 22 photographed by the button camera 1700d is an image photographed from the gaming machine side, the image is displayed upside down so as to be changed to an image as if photographed from the player side. Is done.

  In the present control example, an image of a player acquired (photographed) when the cut-in effect is executed may be used as the fusion effect. When this cut-in effect is executed, the image around the frame button 22 is not acquired (photographed), and the image around the frame button 22 is not displayed in the fusion effect.

  In the present control example, the timing of shooting in each of the cut-in effect and the button press effect is set to 1, but the timing is not limited to this. For example, an image of 3 seconds before and after pressing the frame button 22 in the button press effect may be stored, and may be displayed continuously in the fusion effect. For example, after the image of FIG. 183 (a) is displayed in the fourth round of the jackpot game, the image of FIG. 183 (b) may be displayed. Thereby, the variation of the fusion effect can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved. It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the display of an image, and a video may be shot and the video may be displayed as a moving image.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184, a description will be given of an abnormality notification screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a fraud has occurred on the gaming machine 10. FIG. 184 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the abnormality notification screen. Here, the present control example is based on an image taken by the analysis camera 700z (the second entrance camera 700za, the special winning entrance camera 700zb, the through camera 700zc) provided on the game board 13, and determines whether or not there is any abnormality. The content of the abnormality is determined, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, the player camera 1700c shoots the player. If an abnormality is determined, an abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 184 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 184, on the abnormality notification screen, the content of the abnormality determined based on the image of the player captured by the player camera 1700c, the image captured by the analysis camera 700z, and a message for warning the abnormality are displayed. "A goto that illegally releases an attacker is a crime" is displayed. In the lower right area of the third symbol display device 81, a changing third symbol is displayed. With such a configuration, when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine 10, a stronger warning can be given to the unauthorized player than in a case where only the occurrence of the abnormality is reported.

  Note that the abnormality notification screen shown in FIG. 184 is merely an example, and other than that, for example, a time at which an abnormality is determined is displayed, or an image indicating an abnormality captured by the analysis camera 700z is displayed. May be.

  Although detailed description is omitted, when an abnormality is determined, in addition to the control for displaying an abnormality notification screen on the third symbol display device 81, an abnormality signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred, and a content of the abnormality are displayed. An abnormality information external output process of outputting the information signal indicating the abnormality, the image indicating the abnormality, and the image of the player playing the game when the abnormality is determined to the outside is executed. Thereby, the clerk can immediately notice that the illegal game has been executed. It should be noted that the surveillance camera in the amusement arcade may be controlled so that the surveillance camera tracks the illegal player in accordance with various types of information output by the abnormal information external output process. As a result, one's own face is displayed on the abnormality notification screen, and it is possible to reliably monitor a fraudulent player who has left the gaming machine 10 in a hurry.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 198). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203za corresponding to a winning in the first entrance 64 including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), In this area, values of a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203zb including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas stores a game ball. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the normal starting port (through gate) 67.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 198) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process 5 (see FIG. 207).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 is obtained at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203za. Then, the value of the random number which becomes the special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202za stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When the value matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202za, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol. In addition, the first random number table is used when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of being a big hit in the special symbol (the special symbol is higher than the low probability). ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table 202za for a special symbol with a high probability and the first random number table 202za for a special symbol with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202za will be described. The first hit random number table 202za is a table in which a random value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0 to 9” in the special symbol lottery, and “ If it is any one of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if “0”, it is a big hit. Is determined.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is obtained at the timing when the game ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203za.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203za is not a random number that is a special symbol big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203za is a random number that is a special symbol big hit, the corresponding symbol corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203za.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “0” is stored in the first random number table for the low probability. Is stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 out of the total number of random numbers, and therefore the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/40”.

  In addition, the random number value of the big hit stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random value of the big hit stored in the first random number table for high probability are duplicated values. It is also possible to set a random value for each of the jackpots so as not to cause the hit. If there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state), by changing the random number value of the jackpot, the special symbol jackpot is obtained. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any one of “0 to 49”, the big hit type is “big hit A”. When the random number is any one of “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”. In the present control example, two types of jackpots are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. The first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 may be configured such that different big hit types are selected even if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the same (the so-called second hit type). (1 special design and 2nd special design are provided). With this configuration, for example, in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol, by setting a big hit type that is executed with a larger number of rounds, the hit in the second special symbol is more given to the player. Can be expected. Therefore, the winning in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that he wants to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer time.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "complete departure" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203za.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability cases and a special symbol for low-probability cases. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely deviated”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as small as 0 to 79 and the probability is low. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, and the like. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a later-described main process 5 (see FIG. 207) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process 5. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 189) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Have been.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, “variation (for a long time)”, “variation (for a short time)”, various types of “normal reach”, and various “variance of super reach” are defined as variation patterns for deviation. , A variety of “normal reach” and various “super reach” are defined as the variation pattern of the jackpot A. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). Although not shown, a variation pattern selection table 222za is also set in the audio ramp control device 113, and more detailed variation corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222za.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. Are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203zb of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202zc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202zc. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if the value matches the random number value which is set as a hit. The second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability (normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting the symbol is higher than the low probability. ), And the number of winning random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol. The second random number table 202zc for the high probability of the normal symbol and the second random number table 202zc for the low probability of the normal symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the second random number table 202zc which describes the second random number table 202zc is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a win in each game state is set in a normal symbol lottery. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is “5 to 204” in the normal symbol lottery, and “ 5 to 204 ", it is determined to be a hit. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is “5 to 28”. It is determined that it is a hit.

  In this second random number counter C4, there are 24 random numbers that are hits of the normal symbol when the probability of the normal symbol is low, and the range is "5-28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, the total number of the random numbers is 240, and the total number of the random numbers that are the big hits is 24. Therefore, the probability of the normal symbol being hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the ordinary starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol “○” is displayed and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ordinary symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to “0.2 seconds × 1”. The number of times of opening is released, but the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-204". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, the total number of the random number values to be hit is 200 out of the total of 240 random numbers, so that the probability of the hit to the normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the ordinary starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 3 seconds. If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) As a result, a symbol “○” is displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened “1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and furthermore, it is attached to the second entrance 640. Since the release period of the electrically powered accessory 640a becomes very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the game ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 198). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing 5 (see FIG. 207).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 uses the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 187 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202za, a first random type selection table 202zb, a second random number table 202zc, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. I have.

  Here, the contents of the first random number table 202za will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202za. The first hit random number table 202za (see FIG. 188 (a)) is a table in which the value of the random number which is the big hit of the special symbol is defined as described above. If the random number value specified in the first random number table 202za matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit random number table 202za includes a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at the time of low probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at a low probability of a special symbol, and a special symbol at a high probability of the special symbol. And a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at the time of a high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a large jackpot, and the number of the jackpot determination values (random numbers) is different. In this way, by changing the number of determination values (random numbers) to be a big hit, the probability of a big hit is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202zb will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (b). FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202zb. The first hit type selection table 202zb (see FIG. 188 (b)) is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected. Specifically, the value “0-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit A, and “50-99” is set as the determination value of the big hit B.

  As described above, "big hit A" is a big hit that is shifted to a certain change game state after a big hit game, and "big hit B" is not shifted to a certain change game state after a big hit game, but shifts to a time saving game state. It is a jackpot.

  Next, the contents of the second random number table 202zc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202zc. The second hit random number table 202zc (see FIG. 188 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 188 (c), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28 when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol). In the case of, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) while being lit. , The electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 189 (a)) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and defines the display mode for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  A plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202zd1 (see FIG. 189 (b)), the out-of-use (normal) variation pattern table 202zd2 (see FIG. 189 (c)), At least an outlier (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202zd3 (see FIG. 189 (d)) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern table and the like in the time-saving gaming state are also set.

  With reference to FIG. 189 (b), the jackpot variation pattern table 202zd1 will be described. FIG. 189 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202zd1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202zd1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds) are “0 to 50”, and the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds) are “51 to 179” and various special reach (90 seconds). With respect to the fluctuation pattern of (1), “180 to 198” are set as the judgment values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a fluctuation pattern in which the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, determines the fluctuation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the big hit. From the variable pattern table 202zd1.

  FIG. 189 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202zd2. The variation (normal) variation pattern table 202zd2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", out of reach is set.

  Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is completely out of range, a short out (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long out (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds) and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for the out-of-reach, “0-149” is set for the out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), and “150-197” is set for the out-of-range super reach (60 seconds). “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type and obtains it from the out-of-office (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the variation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

  FIG. 189 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern selection table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be released when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 that is set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal game state is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from being prolonged at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot is prolonged from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 187, the description will be continued. FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 187 (b), the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203za, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203zb, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203zc, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203zd, a time saving counter 203ze, It has at least a flag 203zf, a clock counter 203zh, a through passage counter 203zi, and other memory areas 203zz.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203za has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64. Each value of the first random number counter C1, first type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 acquired based on winning is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the game ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Of the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203za are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) is packed into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203za, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203zb has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203za. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing when the game ball passes the normal starting port 67, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding first area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203za, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203zb is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203za. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203zc is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc is set to zero, and every time a game ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc increases to a maximum value of 4. One is added (see S1404 in FIG. 201). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S10205 in FIG. 199).

  The value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc (the number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S10206 in FIG. 199 and S1405 in FIG. 201). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223zb of the audio lamp control device 113, is changed to the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203zd sets the maximum number of waiting balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passing of the game ball at the ordinary starting port 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zd has an initial value set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of retained balls in the fluctuation display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S10704 in FIG. 204). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203zd is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S10605 in FIG. 203).

  When the game ball passes through the normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203zd (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is retained) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is increased. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203zb (see S10706 in FIG. 204). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the ordinary starting port 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203zd is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S10704 in FIG. 204). : No).

  The time reduction counter 203ze is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols change in the time reduction game state. This time-saving counter 203ze is set to 100 when the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game. That is, in the present control example, if the probability change game state is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 100 times.

  The probability change flag 203zf is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203zf is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is the probability change game state, and when OFF, it indicates that the game state is the low probability game state (including the time saving game state). In this control example, at the end of the big hit game, if the big hit type of the current special symbol is “big hit A”, the probability change flag 203zf is set to ON (see S11112 in FIG. 208). On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, the power supply is set to off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The clock counter 203zh is a counter for measuring the elapsed time, and is incremented by one in a through gate passage process 5 (see FIG. 203) described later. Since the through gate passage processing 5 (FIG. 203) is executed every time in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 198) executed every 2 ms by the main controller 110 described later, the time counter 203zh is set to 1 every 2 ms. Is added. When the value of the time counter 203zh becomes 5000 or more (that is, when 10 seconds have elapsed after the measurement), it is determined whether or not the value of a through passage counter 203zi described later is a normal value. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 within a predetermined period (10 seconds) is abnormal. When the value of the time counter becomes 5000 or more, the counter value is initialized to 0.

  The through passage counter 203zi is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate. The presence / absence of a through-passage abnormality can be determined based on the value of the through-pass counter 203zi and the value of the clock counter 203zh described above. The through passage counter 203zi is incremented and updated one by one when passing through the through gate (see S10702 in FIG. 204). In addition, when the value of the time counter 203zh is 5000 or more, it is reset to “0”, which is the initial value (see S10712 in FIG. 204). The through passage counter 203zi is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  In the other memory area 203zz, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 185, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device 83, and the front and rear sides of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are opened and closed. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 205) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main controller 110, a display controller 114, an analysis camera 700z (a second entrance camera 700za, a special winning entrance camera 700zb, a through camera 700zc), an audio output device 226, and a lamp display device 227. , The other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Various cameras (the second entrance camera 700za, the winning entrance camera 700zb, and the through camera 700zc) connected to the audio lamp control device 113 as the analysis camera 700z are configured by an aggregate of sensors that read light. The information of the object to be photographed is imaged on a light receiving surface through a lens, and the information of the object to be photographed is acquired (photographed) as image data by converting it into an electric signal (a so-called image sensor, image sensor). Since the analysis camera 700z is embedded in various accessories (the center frame 86 and the accessories constituting the second entrance 640) provided on the game board 13 (see FIG. 179), the game balls directly collide with each other. This prevents damage and breakdown due to collision of the game balls. The installation position of the analysis camera 700z may be any position at which the imaging object can be imaged without the game ball directly colliding. For example, the analysis camera 700z is attached to the outer frame 2 and the imaging object is passed through the plate glass 8. May be configured to be photographed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to replace the analysis camera 700z when only the game board 13 is replaced to provide new playability, and the cost can be reduced. In addition, the analysis camera 700z is provided at a position where the light of the light emitting means (the illuminated units 29 to 33 and the lamp provided on the variable display unit 80) provided in the gaming machine 10 does not become backlight. The object to be photographed can be clearly photographed using the light of the means. Thereby, the light of the light emitting means used to stimulate the effect of the game can be diverted as the light for the analysis camera 700z to clearly shoot the shooting target, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, by providing a light emitting unit for capturing a clear image with the analysis camera 700z, it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity in the effect of the game.

  The analysis camera 700z is periodically (at 0.1 second intervals) photographed by a photographing process 5 (see FIG. 218) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later. Are stored in a later-examined periodic image storage area 223zi, and are used in the abnormal winning process 5 (see FIG. 212) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The second entrance camera 700za is provided at a position where an area near the second entrance 640 provided on the game board 13 can be photographed (see FIG. 179), and is electrically driven at the open position or the closed position. It is a camera for photographing a game ball entering the second entrance 640 with the accessory 640a, the second entrance 640, and the electric accessory 640a located at the open position.

  The special winning opening camera 700zb is provided at a position where an area around the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a provided on the game board 13 can be photographed (see FIG. 179), and is changed to an open state or a closed state. A variable winning device 65, a special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a, and a camera for photographing a game ball entering the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a when the variable winning device 65 is in an open state. .

  The through camera 700zc is provided at a position where an area near the through (through gate) 67 provided on the game board 13 can be photographed (see FIG. 179). The through camera 700zc includes a through (through gate) 67 and a through (through gate). This is a camera for photographing a plurality of nails provided above the 67 and a game ball flowing down between the plurality of nails and passing through the through (through gate) 67.

  Although details will be described later, the present control example is configured to execute a process of determining the presence or absence of an abnormality and the content of the abnormality using an image captured by the analysis camera 700z. In this way, by determining the presence or absence of the abnormality and the content of the abnormality based on the actually photographed image, the abnormality-related determination can be performed more accurately.

  As shown in FIG. 190A, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222za, a reference image storage area 222zb, and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game. .

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 190A, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222za, a reference image storage area 222zb, and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game. .

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222za, the fluctuation pattern of each fluctuation pattern type (out, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set in a counter value for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  The reference image storage area 222zb is an area in which reference image data used in abnormal winning processing 5 described later (see FIG. 212) is stored. This reference image data is subjected to binarization processing on an image in which the same region as the region photographed by each of the analysis cameras 700z (the second entrance camera 700za, the special winning entrance camera 700zb, and the through camera 700zc) is used as a photographing range. The image data is image data created using an image indicating a normal state in each area (image at the time of shipment of the gaming machine).

  Here, the binarization processing means determining the brightness (brightness) of a captured image, converting a pixel value of an area having a brightness lower than the threshold to 1 (black) with a predetermined brightness as a threshold, and This is a process of creating binary image data (reference image data) in which the pixel value of a region having a higher brightness is converted to 0 (white). By creating the reference image data in this manner, the storage capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where the captured image is directly stored in the storage area, and the processing load when analyzing and recognizing the content of the image can be reduced. it can.

  The threshold value used for the binarization process may be set in advance for each analysis camera 700z, or may be a threshold value according to the base image using a P-tile method, a mode method, a discriminant analysis method, or the like. You may make it set.

  In addition, in addition to the above-described reference image data, the reference image data area 222zb includes a game ball and various shooting objects (a second winning opening 640, a through (through gate) 67, a large winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a). , Nails) (binary image data created based on a single image (before and after driving when the photographing object is driven)) is also stored, and is used when performing more detailed image analysis. Used. In the present control example, the reference image data is stored in advance (product shipping stage) in the reference image storage area 222zb. However, other configurations may be used. For example, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. An image may be taken using the analysis camera 700z, reference image data may be created based on the taken image, and the reference image data may be stored.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 190 (b), in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223za, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223zb, a change start flag 223zd, a stop type selection flag 223ze, a rendering counter 223zf, and a round At least a number counter 233zg, a shooting timing storage counter 223h, a regularly shot image storage area 223zi, a shooting flag 223zj, an abnormal image storage area 223zk, and other memory areas 223zz are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223za has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and each of these areas stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223za, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like before the start of the change.

  The special symbol retaining ball number counter 223zb is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203zc of the main control device 110. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main control device 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203zc stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223zb. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203zc of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223zb (see S11408 in FIG. 211). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223zb according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203zc.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223zb is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the number-of-retained-balls command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the number of retained balls indicated by the command in the special-designated-reserved-ball number counter 223zb, and also stores the stored special-designated-ball-number counter 223zb. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223zb of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area DS11 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223zb is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The variation start flag 223zd is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S11402 in FIG. 211), and is turned off when variation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S12002 in FIG. 217). When the fluctuation start flag 223zd is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process 5 (S11302) of the main process 5 (see FIG. 210) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223ze is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S11405 in FIG. 211), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S12011 in FIG. 217). When the stop type selection flag 223ze is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223zf is a counter that is repeatedly updated in a range of 0 to 198 used for a notice effect and various lotteries. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process 5 (see FIG. 210) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The round number counter 233zg is a counter for determining the number of times the round in the jackpot game has been executed. The round number counter 233zg is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S11905 in FIG. 216), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S11909 in FIG. 216). ). The value of the round number counter 233zg is used when setting a display round number command (S11906 in FIG. 216). When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a different effect can be selected (displayed) for each round.

  The shooting timing storage area 223zh is an area in which the timing for instructing the display control device 114 to shoot an image using the display camera 1700 is stored, and the variable display setting processing 5 (S11312 in FIG. 217). When it is determined that the shooting flag 223zj is set to ON (S12004: Yes in FIG. 217), the shooting timing set based on the fluctuation pattern is stored (see S12006 and S12008 in FIG. 217). As the shooting timing, for example, a timing at which an effect in which a player can participate in a game (an effect of operating the frame button 22) is set. In this way, by configuring the shooting timing of the display camera 1700 controlled by the display control device 114 to be settable by the audio lamp control device 113 for setting the variation pattern, a predetermined effect (for example, a frame) in the variation pattern is set. The effect of operating the button 22) can be easily matched with the shooting timing of the display camera 1700. In addition, since the shooting timing of the display camera 1700 is set to the timing at which the effect in which the player can participate in the game is performed, when performing the effect using the image captured by the display camera 1700, various expressions are applied. The player image can be used, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The regular photographed image storage area 223zi is an area in which image data obtained by binarizing an image photographed by the analysis camera 700z at regular intervals (0.1 second intervals) is stored. Each of the storage areas is provided with an area for storing image data (see FIG. 190 (c)), and each storage area is configured to be capable of storing a maximum of 1.5 seconds (15 images) of image data. I have. In the regular photographing image storage area 223zi, when the regular photographing timing is determined in the photographing process 5 (see S11311 in FIG. 218) (S12105 in FIG. 218: Yes), the photographed image is binarized. The processed image data is stored so as to be updated as needed (S12109 in FIG. 218). The image data stored in the regular photographed image storage area 223zi is used in the abnormal winning processing 5 (see S11414 in FIG. 212). As described above, the image data for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds) is configured to be able to be stored in the periodic image storage area 223zi, and is updated so that the latest image is stored at any time. Even if an image is taken in a short time, the storage capacity can be suppressed. Further, since the data stored in the periodic image storage area 223zi is not the image captured by the analysis camera 700z but the image data after binarization processing is stored, the storage capacity can be further reduced. Note that the period of the image data stored in the regular photographed image storage area 223zi is set to 1.5 seconds in the present control example, but the period required when executing the abnormal winning processing 5 (see S11414 in FIG. 212). As long as the data of the minute is stored, it may be shorter than 1.5 seconds or longer. Further, in the present control example, all the image data based on the image captured by each analysis camera 700z is configured to be stored for 1.5 seconds. It may be different. In this case, for example, in the case of a device in which the photographing target is driven, a long storage period is set in order to store image data based on images obtained by photographing states before and after driving. In the case of a device that is not driven, the storage period of the image data may be set short. This makes it possible to store image data only for a period suitable for each photographing target.

  The shooting flag 223zj receives the winning information command from the main controller 110 (S11409 in FIG. 211: Yes), and when the received winning command includes information indicating a big hit (S11411 in FIG. 211: Yes). , Is set to ON, and when the opening command is received in the jackpot-related process 5 (S11416 in FIG. 216) (S11901 in FIG. 216: Yes), it is set to OFF (S11903 in FIG. 216). When the shooting flag 223zj is set to ON, in the variable display setting process 5 (S11312 in FIG. 217), the shooting timing of the image using the display camera 1700 (the player shooting timing or the button surrounding shooting timing) is set. You.

  The abnormal image storage area 223zk includes a start opening winning abnormal process 5 (S11502 in FIG. 213), a through passage abnormal process 5 (S11504 in FIG. 214), and a large winning opening which are executed in the abnormal winning process 5 (see S11414 in FIG. 212). This is an area for storing image data (image data acquired from the periodic photographed image storage area 223zi) acquired in each abnormality processing when an abnormality is determined in the winning abnormality processing 5 (S11506 in FIG. 215). In this manner, only the image data for a predetermined period required for executing the abnormal processing is configured to be able to be stored (stored), and is stored in the regular photographed image storage area 223zi that is updated to the latest image data as needed. By storing the stored) image data in the abnormal image storage area 223zk, which is a different storage area when the image data is determined to be abnormal, the image data when determined to be abnormal can be stored for a long time (for example, one day). Minutes) can be memorized. As a result, for example, it is possible to leave evidence that the player has performed an illegal game, and it is possible to execute an appropriate response to the abnormality. Further, since the image data stored for a long time can be only the image data related to the abnormality, the storage capacity can be reduced.

  The other memory area 223zz has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main controller 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 1872) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process 5 is executed. , The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the reading of the instructions constituting the control program is not possible. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to be described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a bad data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c includes two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR-type ROM 234d. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are output from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initial setting process 5 (S12202 in FIG. 219) stored in the program storage area 233a and executed after the end of the boot process 5 (see S12201 in FIG. 219) by the boot program. Set the start address of the program corresponding to (1).

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 196) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236 b and a second frame buffer 236 c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process on the one-frame image display time in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. The MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 221 (b)) every time the V interrupt signal is detected, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. . In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing 5 in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each display processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM or an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or each of the second entrances. A power-on variation image that displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect when a ball entry to the ball entrance (second entrance 640, right second entrance 640r) is detected. Is an area for storing image data corresponding to. The power-on image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S12203 and S12204 in FIG. 219).

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81. Can be. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 can be recognized. May wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped until the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. it can.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the present control example, three types of back images (back surfaces A to C and special back surfaces) A to C are set for the back image for normal use and the back image for time production. Of these six types of rear images, the rear image corresponding to the rear surface A, which is the initial setting, is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, the other rear images are transferred to the normal video RAM 236 when the change condition for each rear type is satisfied.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (not shown) to which the numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 each time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Accordingly, the first symbol display device 37 varies after the first ball entrance 64 or each of the second ball entrances (the second ball entrance 640, the right second ball entrance 640r) occurs. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the effect has been started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the sub symbol without a numeral is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sub symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Youth" and "Women" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Accordingly, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but displays the character in the resident video RAM 235. By reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Accordingly, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. Flag 233i, drawing target buffer flag 233j, player image storage area 233zk, button peripheral image storage area 223m, unauthorized player image storage area 233zn, ball linked reach flag 233zp, periodic first image storage area 233zq, periodic second image It has at least a storage area 233zr and a second flow path imaging flag 233zs.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol, which is a sub-symbol with no number from “1” to “9”, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying a rotation angle when a sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as adolescent images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “morning stage”, “evening stage”, and “night stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image (special back A to C or the like) different from the back A to C is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed. .

  When it is specified that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed by the back type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the backs A to C as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In this control example, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 194) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 196) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is stored for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why the effect can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 195). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 195 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 195, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 196) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 195, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is used by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. It is set to ON in process 5 (see FIG. 219) (see S12205 in FIG. 219). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process 5 of the transfer setting process 5, an image other than the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is set to off (see S14405 in FIG. 237 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S12501 in FIG. 221 (b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process 5 (see S12509 in FIG. 221 (b)) and the simple display setting process so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 5 (see S12510 in FIG. 221 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing 5 (see FIGS. 222 to 230) and display setting processing 5 (see FIGS. 231 to 234) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting processing 5 executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt processing 5 (see S14301 in FIG. 237 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. In some cases, since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting processing 5 for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see FIG. 237 (b)) ) Is executed, and if the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process 5 (see FIG. 238) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 196), which will be described later, instructing the user to draw an image with respect to is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 196) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 196) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing 5 (FIG. 221) of the V interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237. In (b) S12503), the pointer update processing 5 (see S13705 in FIG. 231) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 196), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 196, a back image used for one frame image, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process 5 (FIG. Each time the display setting process 5 of (b) is executed), the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S13708 of FIG. 231). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process 5 (see S12202 in FIG. 219) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process 5 when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The update of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process 5 (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 231. Done. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S14513 in FIG. 238). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S14514 in FIG. 238). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S14602 in FIG. 239).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing processing 5 of the processing 5 (see S12506 in FIG. 221 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The player image storage area 233zk is an area for storing an image of a player photographed by the player camera 1700c, and areas (areas) in which one photographed image can be stored are the first area to the third area. There are a total of three areas. In the player image storage area 233zk, the captured image of the player is first stored in the first area, and when the image of the player is subsequently captured (acquired), the image is stored in the first area. The image is shifted to the second area, and the newly photographed (acquired) image is stored in the first area. Thus, a new image is stored in the first area, and an old image is stored in the third area. When an image is stored in the third area and a new image is captured (acquired), the image stored in the third area is deleted.

  The button peripheral image storage area 233zm is an area for storing an image of the player photographed by the button camera 1700d, and an area (area) in which one photographed image can be stored is a total of three of the first area to the third area. An area is provided. The order in which images are stored in each area of the button peripheral image storage area 233zm is the same as that of the player image storage area 233zk. The button peripheral image storage area 233zm and the player image storage area 233zk are configured so that the image data is shifted at the same timing. Accordingly, the image of the periphery of the frame button 22 at the timing of photographing the player is stored in the area of the same number. Thereby, the photographed image of the player photographed at the same timing and the photographed image of the frame button 22 can be easily determined. When the cut-in effect is executed (displayed), the operation of the frame button 22 is not performed, so that the frame button 22 is not photographed. Even in this case, the empty image data is stored, and the empty image data is shifted.

  The illegal player image storage area 233zn stores the player who is playing the game at that time when a display illegal command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (that is, when it is determined that a winning error or the like has occurred). This is an area for photographing and storing (that is, a player who may be playing an illegal game). The unauthorized player image storage area 233zn stores an image of the unauthorized player photographed in the unauthorized command processing 5 (FIG. 229) described later. Although not shown, the image of the unauthorized player stored in the unauthorized player image storage area 233zn is stored (backed up) in the flash memory 234a, which is a nonvolatile memory. Thereby, even if the power of the gaming machine is turned off by noticing that the unauthorized player has been photographed, it is possible to prevent the image of the unauthorized player from disappearing.

  The ball-linked reach flag 233zp is a flag for determining whether or not the ball-linked reach for executing the ball-linked effect as a reach effect is being executed (displayed). ) Indicates that the ball-linked reach is not executed (displayed). The ball-linked reach flag 233zp is set to ON when display data based on the ball-linked reach is set in the display data table 233d in the variation pattern command processing 5 (see FIG. 223) described later (S12708 in FIG. 223). , Is set to off at the stop timing of the variable display (not shown).

  The regular first image storage area 233zq is an area for storing an image of the vicinity of the first entrance 64, and the areas (areas) in which one captured image can be stored are the first to fifteenth areas. A total of 15 areas are provided. The regular first image storage area 233zq stores an image near the first entrance 64 photographed every 0.1 second in the regular photographing process 5 for display (see FIG. 240) described later (see FIG. 240). S14704). The shot image is stored in the first area (first area). When the next image is shot, the image stored in each area is shifted and a new shot image is stored in the first area (first area). Area). Specifically, the image of the first area is shifted to the second area, the image of the second area is shifted to the third area, and thereafter, sequentially shifted to the next storage area. When the image in the fifteenth area is shifted, the image data is deleted. As described above, data is sequentially stored in a total of 15 areas from the first area to the fifteenth area every 0.1 second, so that a total of 1.5 seconds of image data is stored. By using the data stored in the regular first image storage area 233zq, when a big hit is made based on the winning in the first entrance 64, the winning can be displayed as a highlight image. .

  The regular second image storage area 233zr is an area for storing an image of the vicinity of the second entrance 640, and performs the same process as the regular first image storage area 233r on the second entrance 640. The point of execution is different, and the other points are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The second flow path imaging flag 233zs is a flag for determining whether it is time to execute (display) a ball-linked effect based on the imaging result of the second flow path. It indicates that it is the timing to execute the ball-linked effect based on the photographing result, and if OFF, it indicates that it is not the timing to execute the ball-linked effect based on the photographing result of the second flow path. The second flow path photographing flag 233zs is set to ON when it is determined that a game ball is flowing down the second flow path in ball-linked effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 234) described later (FIG. 234). S14008). Then, it is referred to in the ball-linked effect update process 5 (see FIG. 234) (see S14003), and is set to off in the second ball-linked effect update process 5 (see FIG. 236) (see S14207 in FIG. 236).

  Next, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 schematically shows the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”.

  Among the back surfaces A to C, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “city stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 197, the back image on the back C is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. More specifically, the back C is an image of a mountain towering on an island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image extending over the mountain changes with time.

  When the player changes the stage to the “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 197 (a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 197 (a), an orange sky indicating dawn is displayed. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue with the elapse of time, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 197 (b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 197 (b), a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 197 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 197 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the back image shown in FIG. 197 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 197 (a) to (c) are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. On the back surface A corresponding to the street stage which is the initial stage, the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Normally, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage, which is frequently displayed, is displayed in the rear image area. By resident in the 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in the figure, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To store. The back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 197 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 197 (a) and (b) except for FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process and is resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set in the range from position a to position a 'or the range in FIGS. 197 (a) to (b). The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image between FIGS. 197 (a) and (b) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 is changed. By using the image data resident in the 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Shown to be possible, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 197 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 197 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 197 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. To (b) are set. As a result, while the images of FIGS. 197a) to 197 (b) are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 197 (b) to 197 and FIGS. 197 (a) and (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images in FIGS. 197 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 197 (c) to (a) can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes. it can.

  The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 191) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up processing 5 started upon power-on, a main processing 5 executed after the start-up processing 5, and a start-up periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There is a timer interrupt process 5 to be performed and an NMI interrupt process 5 activated by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process 5 and the NMI interrupt process 5 will be described first. Then, the start-up process 5 and the main process 5 will be described.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 198) is a periodic processing executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 198), first, various pay switches are read (S10101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S10102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S10103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this control example, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process 5 for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S10104), and thereafter Then, a start winning process 5 associated with the winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64 is executed (S10105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S10106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S10107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passing process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the execution of the through gate passage processing, the emission control processing is executed (S10108), and other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S10109), and the timer interruption processing is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199, the special symbol variation process 5 (S10104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 5 (S10104). This special symbol change process 5 (S10104) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 198), and displays the change of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S10201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S10201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S10201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S10202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S10203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203zc is greater than 0 (S10204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203zc is 0 (S10204). No), the process proceeds to S10208 without executing the processes of S10205 to S10207.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203zc is not 0 (S10204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203zc is subtracted by 1 (S10205) and changed by the calculation. A special figure reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc is set (S10206). The special figure reservation sphere number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 to perform an external output process 5 (S11001) of a main process 5 (see FIG. 207) described later. ) Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the special figure reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc from the special figure reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223zb.

  After the special figure reserved ball number command is set by the processing of S10206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203za is shifted (S10207). In the process of S10207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203za to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data has been shifted, the process proceeds to S10208.

  In the process of S10208, a special symbol variation start process 5 for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10208), and thereafter, the process ends. The details of the special symbol change start process 5 (S10208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S10202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S10209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S10209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S10209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process 5 (S10208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process 5 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203za. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

  In the present control example, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S10210 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 5 is displayed. It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S10211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10211: Yes), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type (S10212). Then, the start of the special symbol big hit is set (S10213), and the process proceeds to S10216. When the start of the special symbol big hit is set by the processing of S10213, when the big hit control processing 5 (S11004) of the main processing 5 (see FIG. 207) is executed, the process branches to S11101: Yes, and the opening command is opened. Is set (S11102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  As described above, in the present control example, when a new special symbol hits, a time reduction period of a normal symbol (a continuation period of the “normal symbol time reduction state”) is set according to the type of the special special jackpot. . Therefore, if a special symbol jackpot becomes new during the duration of the "normal symbol time reduction state", the normal symbol time reduction period after the end of the new special symbol jackpot is set according to the new jackpot type. Therefore, the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol remaining until the new jackpot becomes invalid. However, immediately after that, when the special symbol jackpot A is reached, the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol until that time becomes invalid, and the "ordinary symbol normal state" is changed to the special symbol lottery 20 times after the end of the "big jackpot A" It will be continued until it ends. Therefore, although the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol was "until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times", the impression that the impression has been shortened to "until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times" is given to the player. Give it. As a result, the player may feel dissatisfied, or the player may have a sense of loss of the provided game value, which may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. Further, as described above, in the present control example, a time saving period is displayed in the ending effect, and the player may be notified of the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. By this notification, when the time-saving period of the conventional ordinary symbol and the time-saving period of the new ordinary symbol are respectively notified, the player can easily compare the time-short period. Therefore, the player is more likely to feel that the time-saving period of the normal symbol has been shortened than when the notification of the time-saving period of the normal symbol is not performed, which may reduce the player's willingness to participate in the game. Is high.

  In addition, if the special symbol jackpot and the transition to the special symbol high probability state, it is easy to become a special symbol jackpot, immediately after the special symbol jackpot, the next special symbol jackpot Likely to be. Therefore, during the transition to the special symbol high-probability state, it is easy to give the player the impression that the time saving period has been shortened.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, when the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the big hit effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the jackpot effect ends (an ending effect described later is performed), a finalized display indicating that there is a start winning prize of “special symbol jackpot” among the held starting prizes is displayed. Or, a time saving period display for notifying the time saving period of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” being executed is performed. In the present control example, when performing the ending effect, based on the jackpot type of the special symbol of this time or the jackpot type of "special symbol jackpot" in the reserved starting prize, the "confirmed effect display" is displayed. It is appropriately selected whether to perform the “time reduction display” or to perform the “time reduction display” so as not to give the player the impression that the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol is shortened as much as possible (see FIG. 209). That is, the control is performed so that the player willingly participate in the game.

  In the process of S10211, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S10211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203ze is 1 or more (S10214), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203ze is 1 or more. If there is (S10214: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203ze is decremented by 1 (S10215), and the process proceeds to S10216. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203ze is 0 (S10214: No), the process of S10215 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10216.

  In the processing of S10216, a stop command is set (S10216), and thereafter, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the special symbol change start process 5 (S10208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process 5 (S10208). The special symbol change start process 5 (S10208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process 5 (see FIG. 199) of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 198), and includes the special symbol holding ball storage area 203za. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, the lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (acceptance / non-permission determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in 81.

  In the special symbol change start process 5 (S10208), first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203za. Each value is obtained (S10301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203zf of the RAM 203 is on (S10302). The probable change flag 203zf is a counter indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state, and if the probable change flag 203zf is on, indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special design probable state. If the flag 203zf is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol.

  If the probability change flag 203zf is ON (S10302: Yes), that is, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the processing of S10301 and the value for the high probability time Based on the first winning random number table 202za (see FIG. 188 (a)), a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S10303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values stored in the first random number table 202za for high probability (see FIG. 188 (a)). . As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. If the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process moves to S1305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S10302, if the probability change flag 203zf is 0 (S10302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S10301 is Then, based on the first random number table 202za for low probability (see FIG. 188 (a)), a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S10304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202za for low probability (see FIG. 188 (a)). . As the random number value which is a special symbol big hit, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match, the special symbol value is set. It is determined to be a jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process moves to S10305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S10303 or S10304 is a special symbol jackpot (S10305), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S10305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S10301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S10306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S10301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202zb, and the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots) are compared. A, jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the hit is big hit A (16R sure change big hit). B (16R time saving big hit) (see FIG. 188 (b)).

  In the process of S10306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S10307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S10307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the value of the fluctuation pattern table 202zd1 for jackpot (see FIG. 189 (b)) are stored. Based on the random number value, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

  Specifically, “0-50” is set for the variation pattern of the normal reach (30 seconds), and “51-179” is set for the variation pattern of the super reach (60 seconds). ), “180 to 198” are set as the determination values of the variation type counter CS1 (see FIG. 189 (b)).

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “outside (for a long time)”, “outside (for a short time)”, “outside normal reach” various types, “outside super reach” various types, and “outside special reach” various types are defined. As the variation patterns of the jackpot A and the jackpot B, various types of “common normal reach”, various types of “super common reach”, and various types of “common special reach” are defined.

  In the process of S10305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of the way (S10305: No), a display mode at the time of being out of place is set (S10308). In the processing of S10308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviated symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203za is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out of reach.

  Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S10301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete out is set. If it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” , 99 ”, the reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S10309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S10307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is , The variation time of the symbol variation such as the normal reach and the super reach is determined based on the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202zd2 (see FIG. 189 (c)), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol variation state, Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202zd3 (see FIG. 189 (d)), the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined.

  The outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202zd2 (see FIG. 189 (c)) is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern to be selected (variation time) is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", out of reach is set.

  When the variation pattern type is completely off, a short variation (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long variation (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds) and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for the out-of-reach, “0-149” is set for the out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), and “150-197” is set for the out-of-range super reach (60 seconds). “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, in the out-of-position (probable change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 189 (d)), when the game state is the probable change game state, the stop type selection counter C3 is determined by a stop type selection table (not shown). If the value is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete departure is determined, and if the value is in the range of “90 to 99”, departure reach is determined.

  When the variation pattern type is completely off, a short variation (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long variation (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0-190" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds), and "191-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  For the out-of-reach, “0-190” is set for the out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), and “191-197” is set for the out-of-range super reach (60 seconds). For each type (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  After the processing of S10307 or S10309 is completed, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S10307 or S10309 is set (S10310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S10306 or S10308 is set (S10311). These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 in the process of S11001 of the main process 5 (FIG. 207). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S10312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 5.

  Next, the start winning process 5 (S10105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the start winning processing 5 (S10105). The start winning process 5 (S10105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 198), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Then, when there is a winning start, this is a process for holding the values indicated by the various random number counters and executing a pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the held various random counters.

  When the start winning process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S10401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S10401: Yes), the process proceeds to S10402.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10401, if it is determined that the ball has not won the first entrance 64 (S10401: No), then whether the ball has won the second entrance 640 (start winning). It is determined whether or not it is (S10408). If it is determined that the ball has not won the second entrance 640 (S10408: No), the present process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S10408: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is in the closed state (S10408: Yes). S10409). When it is determined that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is in the closed state (S10409: Yes), the game is played to the second entrance 640 even though the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state. Since the ball has entered, an abnormal winning command indicating an abnormal start winning is set (S10410), and the process shifts to S10402.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10409, when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is in the open state (S10409: No), a game ball normally enters the second entrance 640. Therefore, the process of S10410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10402.

  In the processing of S10402, the value of the special symbol reserved sphere count counter 203zc (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S10402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present control example) (S10403).

  If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc is not less than 4 (S10403: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203zc is less than 4 (S10403: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203zc is incremented by 1 (S10404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc changed by the calculation is set (S10405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in an external output process 5 (S11001) of a later-described main process 5 (see FIG. 207) executed by the MPU 201. Inside, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203zc from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223zb of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S10405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S10103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the free symbol reserved ball storage areas 203za (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S10406). In the process of S10406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Then, the pre-read processing 5 is executed (S10407), and thereafter, the present processing ends. Details of the prefetch processing 5 (S10407) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 202, the prefetch processing 5 (S10407) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the prefetch processing 5 (S10407). This prefetching process 5 (S10407) is executed in the start winning process 5 (see S10106 in FIG. 201) in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 198). This is a process for executing a look-ahead of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the indicated value and the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the pre-reading process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 (S10501). If it is determined that there is no new prize (S10501: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10501, when it is determined that there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 (S10501: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the lottery timing is being changed (S10502). If it is determined that the lottery timing is being changed (S10502: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S10406 of the start winning processing 5 (see FIG. 201) and the value for the high probability time The first random number table 202za (see FIG. 188 (a)) is compared with each of the ten random numbers (winning values) stored in the random number table 202za, and the lottery result is obtained (S10503). As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10502, if it is determined that the lottery timing is not being changed (S10502: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S10406 of the start winning process 5 (see FIG. 201). And a random number value (hit value) stored in the first random number table 202za for low probability time (see FIG. 188 (a)). Is acquired (S10504). As described above, a single random number value of “0” is set as the random number value of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these ones. Then, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot.

  Then, a winning information command is set based on the lottery result obtained in the processing of S10503 and S10504 (S10505), and thereafter, the present processing is ended.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process 5 (S11001) of a later-described main process 5 (see FIG. 207) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrongness, a stop type, and a fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information in the winning information storage area 223za as winning information. It is determined whether or not it is time to capture an image of the player used for the fusion effect and an image around the frame button 22.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S10106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S10106). This normal symbol change process 5 (S10106) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 198), and the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device 83 or the second ball entrance 640 is performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time and the like of the accompanying electric accessory 640a.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a hit with an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S10601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening / closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S10601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S10601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S10602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S10602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203zd (the number of times of suspension of the variable display on the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S10603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203zd is greater than 0 (S10604), and if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203zd is 0 (S10604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203zd is not 0 (S10604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203zd is decremented by 1 (S10605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203zb is shifted (S10606). In the process of S10606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203zb to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203zb is acquired (S10607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current time is currently working (S10608). If the current time is currently reduced (S10608: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is a special symbol jackpot (S10609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S10609: Yes), the flow shifts to S10611. In the present control example, during a special symbol big hit, it is configured such that a lottery of a normal symbol is hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (ie, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is to be made to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second entrance 640, even if it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the special symbol jackpot, the second winning opening 65a is also provided. Many balls enter the entrance 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 becomes the maximum (four times).

  In the process of S10609, if the special symbol is not during the special symbol jackpot (S10609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number table 202zc for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S10610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the second random number table 202zc for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 188 (c)).

  In the process of S10608, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S10608: No), the process proceeds to S10611. In the process of S10611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S10607 is set to the low value. Based on the probability random number table per symbol, a lottery result is obtained as to whether or not the symbol has been hit (S10611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 185 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S10610 or S10611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S10612), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S10612: Yes) Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S10613). In the process of S10613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “○” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S10614). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S10614: Yes), the special symbol is hit at this moment. It is determined whether or not it is (S10615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S10615: Yes), the flow shifts to the processing of S10617. In the present control example, during a special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S10615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S10615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 640 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two times (S10616), and the process proceeds to S10619. In the process of S10614, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S10614: No), the process proceeds to S10617. In the processing of S10617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S10617), and the process proceeds to S10619.

  In the process of S10612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S10612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S10618). In the process of S10618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). Upon completion of the setting of the display mode at the time of departure, the flow shifts to the process of S10619.

  In the processing of S10619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S10619). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S10619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The change time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S10620), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0 (S10619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S10621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S10602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S10602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S10622). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing of S10620 or the processing of S10621 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the processing of S10622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S10622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S10622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S10623). In the process of S10623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S10613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S10618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S10623, when the second symbol display update process 5 (see S11007) of the main process 5 (see FIG. 207) is executed next, the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S10613 or the process of S10618.

  Next, when the variation display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the result of the ordinary symbol lottery performed by the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S10624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S10624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S10625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S10625, when the electric accessory opening / closing process 5 (see S11005) of the main process 5 (see FIG. 207) is next executed, the electric accessory is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S10616 or S10617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S10624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S10624: No), the process of S10625 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing 5 (S10107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing 5 (S10107). This through gate passage processing 5 (S10107) is executed in the timer interruption processing 5 (see FIG. 198), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per two.

  In the through gate passage process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S10701). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S10701: Yes), the through-pass counter 203zi is incremented by 1 (S10702), and the value of the ordinary symbol-reserved ball number counter 203zd (variable display of ordinary symbols is retained). The number of times M) is acquired (S10703). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203zd is less than the upper limit (4 in the present control example) (S10704).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S10701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203zd is not less than 4 (S10704). : No), the flow directly proceeds to the processing of S10707.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S10701: Yes), and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203zd is less than 4 (S10704: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203zd is activated. The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S10705). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S10103 of the timer interrupt processing 5 described above is stored in the free symbol reserved ball storage area 203zb of the RAM 203 in the free reserved area (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). The data is stored in the first area (S10706), and the process proceeds to S10707. In the process of S10705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S10707, the time counter 203zh is incremented by 1 (S10707), and it is determined whether the time counter 203zh after the addition is 5000 or more (that is, whether 10 seconds have elapsed) (S10708).

  In the process of S10708, when it is determined that the time counter 203zh is equal to or more than 5000 (S10708: Yes), the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 during a predetermined period (here, 10 seconds) is abnormal. The process shifts to S10709 to determine whether or not this is the case.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10708, when it is determined that the time counter 203zh is smaller than 5000, the present process is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S10709, the time counter 203zh is initialized to 0 (S10709), and it is determined whether or not the value of the through passage counter 203zi is 50 abnormal (S10710). In the processing of S10710, if it is determined that the value of the through passage counter 203zi is equal to or greater than 50 (S10710: Yes), the number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 in the predetermined period (10 seconds) is large, There is a possibility that an illegal act of illegally passing a game ball through the through gate 67 is being performed. In this case, an abnormal winning command indicating a through passage abnormality is set (S10711), and the flow shifts to the process of S10712.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the through passage counter 203zi is smaller than 50 in the process of S10710 (S10710: No), the process of S10711 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10712.

  In the process of S10712, the value of the through passage counter 203zi is initialized to 0, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality based on the number of game balls passing through the through gate 67 in a predetermined period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that an abnormality is determined when the interval of detecting the passage of the through gate 67 is short.

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the NMI interruption process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process 5 is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing 5, information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing 5, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and stores the information in the RAM 203 (S10801). To end.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing 5 is also executed in the same way by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing 5. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing 5 is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206, a description will be given of the start-up process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 5. The start-up process 5 is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S10901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing 5 (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S10902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S10903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (not shown) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S10904). If it is turned on (S10904: Yes), the process proceeds to S10912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S10904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S10905), and if not, it is not stored (S10905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S10912 in this case.

  If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S10905: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S10906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S10907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also shifts to S10912 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S11014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S10912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S10912). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing 5 of RAM 203 (S10913, S10914).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up process, the RAM initialization process 5 (S10913, S10914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process 5 of the RAM 203 (S10913, S10914) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). I do. In the RAM initialization process 5 (S10913, S10914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S10913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S10914). After the execution of the initialization process 5 of the RAM 203, the process shifts to the process of S10910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S10904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S10905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value and the like) is normal (S10905: Yes), S10907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S10908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S10909), and the process proceeds to S10910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S10910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S10911), and the flow shifts to main processing 5 described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, each of the processes S11001 to S11007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S11010 and S11011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing 5, first, during execution of the timer interruption processing 5 (see FIG. 198), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to the (peripheral control device) is executed (S11001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S10101 in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 198) is determined. Send the corresponding prize ball command. Further, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process 5 (see FIG. 199) and the start winning process 5 (see FIG. 201) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process 5 (see FIG. 201) and the pre-reading process 5 (see FIG. 202) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command, the winning command, and the abnormal winning command set in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 208) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S11002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S11003). The big hit control process 5 for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S11004). In the jackpot control process 5, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present control example, the jackpot control process 5 (S11004) is executed in the main process 5, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S11005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S10625 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 203). Note that the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S10616 or the processing of S10617 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S11006). In the first symbol display updating process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S10307 or the process of S10309 of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 200), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. The process starts on the display device 37. In this control example, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S10307 or the process of S10309 of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 200) ends, the first symbol display is updated. The variable display executed in the device 37 is terminated, and the stopped symbol (the first symbol) is changed to the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S10306 or the process of S10308 of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 200). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S11007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S10620 or the process of S10621 of the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 203), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S10623 of the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 203), the process is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The changed symbol display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S10613 or the process of S10618 of the normal symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 203). Stop display (lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11008). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S11008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S11009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S11009: Yes), the process proceeds to S11001, and the processes from S11001 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing 5 this time (S11009: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing 5 is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S11010, S11011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S11010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S11002 (S11011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S11001 to S11007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process 5 is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S11008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11008: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process 5 in FIG. 205 has been executed, the process at S11012 and thereafter when the power is turned off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S11012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S11013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S11014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S11015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S11008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to a change in the state of the game performed in S11001 to S11007 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S11010 and S11011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S11001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S11001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not used in the initialization process 5 (S10901). Is set to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S11001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S11004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 5 (S11004). The jackpot control process 5 (S11004) is executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 207). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or specific winning is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process 5, it is first determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S11101). Specifically, the process of S10211 of the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 199) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S11101, if a special symbol big hit is started (S11101: Yes), an opening command is set (S11102), and the process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output as a voice in the external output processing 5 (S11001) of the main processing 5 (see FIG. 207) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S11101, when the special symbol big hit is not started (S11101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is being performed (S11103). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the process of S11103, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S11103: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S11103, if the special symbol is in a big hit (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S11104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S11104: Yes), the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is opened (S11105), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S11106). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing 5 (S11001) of the main processing 5 (see FIG. 207) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S11104, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S11104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is satisfied (S11107). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls have been released after opening the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S11107, if the closing condition of the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is satisfied (S11107: Yes), the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is closed (S11108), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is not satisfied (S11107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S11109). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the processing of S11109, if it is the ending effect start timing (S11109: Yes), the ending command is set (S11110). The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing 5 (S11001) of the main processing 5 (see FIG. 207) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223za of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S11110 is completed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the current special symbol is the jackpot A (S11111). In the process of S11111, when the jackpot type of the special symbol of this time is the jackpot A (S11111: Yes), the probability change flag 203zf is set to ON (S11112), and the process shifts to S11114. On the other hand, in the process of S11111, when the jackpot type of the special symbol at this time is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot B) (S11111: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203ze is set to 100 (S11113), and S11114. Move to the processing of.

  In the process of S11109, if it is not the ending start timing (S11109: No), the process proceeds to S11114.

  In the processing of S11114, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a (S11114). If it is determined in the processing of S11114 that a game ball has entered the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a, a winning command is set (S11115), and the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is closed. Is determined (S11116). In the processing of S11116, when it is determined that the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is closed (S11116: Yes), the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is closed. Since the game ball has won, an abnormal winning command indicating an abnormal winning in the special winning opening is set (S11117), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined that the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is in the open state (S11116: No), it means that the game ball has normally entered the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a. The process is skipped, and this process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 209, the start-up process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. The start-up process 5 is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process 5 accompanying power-on is executed (S11201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of (see S11201) (S11201). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 210, when receiving the power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 210, S11314), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S11317. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S11317 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S11202: No), the current startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S11317 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S11203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S11206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S11203: Yes), the process proceeds to S11204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S11203: No), the process moves to S11208.

  If the start-up process 5 is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S11203: Yes), and the flow shifts to S11204. On the other hand, this startup process 5 is started after an instantaneous power failure and after the execution of the power-off process in S11317 is completed, or is performed only by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the reset is started, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S11203: No), and the process shifts to S11208.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S11202: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S11317, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S11204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S11204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S11204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S11205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S11206). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S11205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S11207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S11208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S11208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S11317 (see FIG. 210, S11316). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S11317 is executed. Therefore, the process of S11208 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S11317 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S11208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S11209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S11210). Update the status setting area based on the command. Next, interrupt permission is set (S11211), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S11208 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of step S11208 is performed via the processes from step S11204 to S11206. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S11208: No), the process skips S11209, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S11210, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S11210).

  It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process in S11209 is that when the process from S11204 to the process in S11208 is performed via the process in S11206, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S11204. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the main processing 5. When the main processing 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing 5 was started or since the previous processing of S11301 was executed (S11301). If milliseconds or more have not elapsed (S11301: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S11312 without performing the processing of S11302 to S11311. In the process of S11301, whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed is determined in S11302 to S11311, which is a process related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing 5 in S11312 and the variable display setting processing 5 in S11313 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S11312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S11312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing 5 is received. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable display effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S11301 (S11301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S11303 to S11313 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S11302). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S11308 described later (S11303), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S11304). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S11305 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S11305, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S11306). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S11307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring and effect processing is completed, next, a lamp editing processing is executed (S11308), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S11309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S11309, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S11310). After that, the processing shifts to S11311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S11308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S11309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S11311, a photographing process is performed on the analysis camera 700z provided so as to photograph the game ball or the game board 13 (S11311). In this photographing processing, photographing of a game ball or the game board 13 by the analysis camera 700z (the second entrance camera 700za, the special winning opening camera 700zb, the through camera 700zc) provided on the game board 13 is executed. An image (photographed image) photographed based on this photographing processing is subjected to predetermined processing (binarization processing, edge extraction processing) and stored in a predetermined photographing image storage area 223 zi of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. It is stored (stored) for the period (1.5 seconds in this control example) and is used in the abnormal winning process 5 (see S11414 in FIG. 212) executed when an abnormal winning command is received from the main controller 110.

  In the present photographing process, a display photographing command for causing the display control device 114 to execute the photographing process of the display camera 1700 in association with various effects (variation patterns) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is provided. Is set. The display shooting command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process 5 (S11302) of the main process 5 (see FIG. 210) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives this display photographing command, executes a photographing process on the display camera 1700, and displays an effect using the image photographed by the display camera 1700 on the third symbol display device 81. To run. The details of the main photographing process 5 (S11311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, a command determination process 5 (S11312) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S11313. Details of the command determination processing 5 (S11312) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S11313, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process 5, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S11313 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S11314). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S11314 (S11314: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S11316), and the power-off processing is executed (S11317). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S11318), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S11314 (S11314: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S11315), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S11315: No), the process returns to S11301, and the main process 5 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S11315: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing 5 is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process 5 (S11312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 5 (S11312). The command determination process 5 (S11312) is executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 210) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, receives the command received from the main control device 110. judge. Hereinafter, the command determination processing 5 (S11312) will be described in detail.

  In the command determination process 5 (S11312), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the main controller 110 It is determined whether a command has been received (S11401). Here, the variation pattern command is a command for notifying a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol.

  In the processing of S11401, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S11401: Yes), the variation start flag 223zd is set to ON (S11402), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S11403). ), End this processing. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223zz of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as a variation pattern type of a special symbol, and is used in a variation display setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) described later. This is used when notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the special symbol variable display effect and the display mode of the special symbol variable display effect (when setting a special symbol display variable pattern command).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11401 that no fluctuation pattern command has been received (S11401: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received (S11404). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S11404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223ze is set to ON (S11405), and the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, off, reach out of the received stop type command). Etc.) (S11406), and this process ends. The stop type extracted in the process of S11406 is stored in the other memory area 223zz of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  On the other hand, in the process of S11404, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S11404: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S11407). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S11407: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command (that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol) (The number of reserved balls in the display) is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223zb provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value (S11408), and this processing is executed. finish.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 (start winning), and therefore, every time there is a starting winning, the processing of S11408 is performed. Thereby, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223zb of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223zb of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, a start winning is achieved. , The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223zb of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. it can.

  If it is determined in the processing of S11407 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S11407: No), it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S11409). In the processing of S11409, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S11409: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (whether or not a special symbol lottery is won, hitting type, and variation pattern) corresponds to the winning information. It is set in the storage area 223za (S11410).

  After the processing of S11410 is completed, it is determined whether the information of the winning information command received from the main controller 110 this time includes the information that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (S11411), and the information indicating the jackpot is determined. If it is determined that is (S11411: Yes), the shooting flag 223zj is set to ON, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11411 that the information is not information indicating a jackpot (S11411: No), the present processing ends.

  Here, when the shooting flag 223zj is set to ON, in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) described later, until the variable display corresponding to the winning information command including the information indicating the big hit is set. , Dedicated processing is executed. The control process executed only when the shooting flag 223zj is set to ON will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether an abnormal winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S11413). In the processing of S11413, when it is determined that the abnormal winning command has been received (S11413: Yes), the abnormal winning processing 5 is executed (S11414), and thereafter, this processing ends. The details of the abnormal winning processing 5 (S11414) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that an abnormal winning command has not been received (S11413: No), it is next determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S11415). In the process of S11415, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has been received (S11415: Yes), the jackpot-related process 5 is executed (S11416), and thereafter, the present process ends. In the processing of S11415, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S11415: No), processing corresponding to another command is executed (S11417), and this processing ends. In the process of S11417, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, the abnormal winning process 5 (S11414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning processing 5 (S11414). The abnormal winning process 5 (S11414) is executed in the command determining process 5 (S11312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed by the abnormal winning command received from the main control device 110. (The abnormal winning for the starting winning opening (second winning opening) 640, the abnormal winning for the through (through gate) 67 (abnormal passing), the abnormal winning for the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65, and the like) are determined. An abnormal process corresponding to the type of each abnormal winning command is executed. Hereinafter, the details of the abnormal winning process 5 (S11414) will be described.

  In the abnormal winning processing 5 (FIG. 212, S11414), first, it is determined whether or not the received abnormal winning command is abnormal with respect to the starting winning (second ball entrance 640) (S11501). If it is determined that the start winning prize is abnormal (S11501: Yes), the start opening prize abnormal processing 5 is executed (S11502), and then this processing is ended. Details of the start-up winning award abnormality process 5 (S11502) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11501 that there is no abnormality with respect to the start winning (S11501: No), then it is determined whether the received abnormal winning command indicates a passing abnormality to the through (through gate) 67. It is determined (S11503), and when it is determined that there is a passing abnormality of the through (through gate) 67 (S11503: Yes), a through passing abnormal process is executed (S11504), and thereafter, the present process ends. The details of the through-passage abnormality processing 5 (S11504) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S11503 that the received command is not a command indicating a passing abnormality to the through (through game) 67, then the received abnormal winning command is a command indicating an abnormality for the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65. Is determined (S11505). In the processing of S11505, when it is determined that the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a is abnormal (S11505: Yes), the special winning opening abnormal processing 5 is executed (S11506), and thereafter, the present processing is ended. The details of the special winning opening abnormal processing 5 (S11506) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11506 that the received abnormal winning command is not a command indicating an abnormality of the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a (S11505: No), the present processing ends. In the present control example, in the abnormal winning process 5 executed when the abnormal winning command is received from the main control device 110, the received abnormal winning command does not indicate the abnormality of the starting winning (S11501: No), When it is determined that there is no abnormality in the through passage (S11503: No) and that there is no abnormality in the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a (S11505: No), the present process is terminated as it is. Instead, for example, it may be configured to execute all the abnormal processes, or may be configured to notify outside that there is no applicable abnormality despite receiving the abnormal winning command.

  In the present control example, the main control device 110 determines an abnormal winning command for the starting winning port (second ball opening) 640, the through (through gate) 67, and the special winning port (specific winning port) 65. However, when the main control device 110 sets an abnormal winning command for other portions, the determination may be performed in the abnormal winning process 5 so as to correspond to the command.

  As described above, in the present control example, in the information of the abnormal winning command set by the main control device 110, the place where the abnormality has occurred (start winning opening (second ball opening) 640, through (through gate) ) 67 and the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65 etc.), the abnormal winning process 5 of the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the location where the abnormality has occurred. . Therefore, the abnormal winning process 5 is executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side for each location where an abnormality has occurred, and the cause of the abnormality can be analyzed in more detail.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, based on the main controller 110 determining that there is an abnormality, a cause analysis is performed using a captured image corresponding to the portion determined to be abnormal. The photographed image used for this cause analysis is configured to be photographed periodically regardless of whether or not an abnormality has occurred, and a period before the sound lamp control device 113 receives the abnormal winning command (this control). The example is configured to be able to execute the cause analysis using the photographed image of 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds before). This allows the main control device 110 to perform appropriate cause analysis on the portion determined to be abnormal, and to easily perform appropriate measures after the occurrence of the abnormality.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 213 to FIG. 215, the abnormal processing corresponding to each abnormal place executed in the abnormal winning processing 5 (FIG. 212, S11414) will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 213, the start-up winning award abnormality processing 5 (S11502) will be described. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start-up winning award abnormality process 5 (S11502). This start port winning abnormal process 5 (S11502) is a process executed when it is determined that the abnormal winning command received from the main control device 110 is abnormal for the starting winning (second ball entrance 640). The starting port (the second ball entry port) in a predetermined period that is a period before receiving the abnormal winning command (in this control example, a period of 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds before receiving the abnormal winning command). This is a process of executing the cause analysis of the abnormality that has occurred this time, using a captured image of the vicinity of 640.

  When the start-up winning award abnormality processing 5 (S11502) is executed, first, the vicinity of the second entrance 640, which is photographed 0.5 to 1.5 seconds before the present time, from the regular photographed image storage area 223zi is photographed. The image data (data after the binary processing) corresponding to the captured image is obtained (S11601). The regular photographed image storage area 223zi stores image data corresponding to photographed images photographed at 0.1 second intervals for 1.5 seconds (that is, 15 images). The image data corresponding to seconds to 1.5 seconds before is acquired.

  Then, reference image data in the vicinity of the second entrance 640 is obtained from the reference image storage area 222zb of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the reference image data is subtracted from each image data obtained in S11601, and the difference data is obtained. Is calculated (S11602). Specifically, in the reference image storage area 222zb, data (reference image data) obtained by binarizing an image near the second entrance 640 in a state where a game is not executed is stored. The reference image data is subtracted from one image data acquired from the image storage area 223zi. One piece of image data obtained from the regular shot image storage area 223zi is based on an image in which a game ball is not shot (that is, an image shot at a timing when no game ball is present near the second entrance 640). If the image data is created by subtraction, the difference data after the subtraction becomes 0 (the same image). On the other hand, one image data acquired from the regular photographed image storage area 223zi is an image in which a game ball is photographed (that is, an image photographed at a timing when a game ball is present near the second entrance 640). If the difference data after subtraction is 0, the image data does not match (because the binarized values do not match) in the area where the game ball is photographed. Instead, image data (subtracted image data) indicating only a non-matching portion (that is, a portion corresponding to a game ball) is created.

  Next, in the process of S11603, it is determined whether any of the subtracted images created by subtracting the reference image data from each of the image data acquired in the process of S11601 has an image indicating a game ball (S11603). ). Here, the image data of each subtraction image is compared with the game ball reference image data stored in the reference image storage area 222zb, and it is determined whether or not each subtraction image has an image indicating a game ball. In the reference image storage area 222zb, game ball reference image data obtained by subjecting an image indicating a game ball to binarization processing is stored, and the game ball reference image data is compared with the subtraction image data to match. Is determined. In this process, while performing the reference data enlargement / reduction process of determining whether or not the data of the game ball reference image matches the subtraction image while performing the enlargement / reduction, the game ball and the second entrance opening shown in the regular shot image are executed. Even if the size of the game ball projected on the regular photographed image changes due to a change in the distance from the camera 700za, it can be reliably determined that the game ball is projected.

  Note that, by using a configuration other than the present control example, it may be determined that the game ball is displayed in the regular shooting image.For example, a point may be attached to the edge portion of the subtraction image, and the point between the points may be determined. By observing the coordinate change, it is determined that the subtraction image is a circle, and a process of determining that a game ball is being projected is executed. A process of determining that the game ball is a circle and determining that a game ball is projected may be executed. Even when such a configuration is used, it can be determined that the game ball is displayed in the subtraction image, as in the present control example.

  If it is determined in the processing of S11603 that there is an image of a game ball (S11603: Yes), it is then determined whether the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a is normal (S11604). In the present control example, it is determined whether or not there is an image of a game ball. In addition to this, it is determined that a predetermined number of game balls have flowed down (passed) based on the captured image. Is also good. This makes it possible to more reliably determine the abnormal state.

  In the process of S11604, if it is determined that the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a is not normal (abnormal) (S11604: No), a display unauthorized command indicating open / close is set (S11605), and the current process is performed. Is stored in the abnormal image storage area 223zk, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S11604, when it is determined that the open / close state of the electric accessory is normal (S11604: Yes), the process ends as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 213, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S11603 that none of the subtraction images indicates a game ball, then it is determined whether any of the subtraction images has a foreign object image other than a ball (S11606). . In the process of S11606, the data of the foreign object reference image stored in the reference image storage area 222zb is subtracted from each subtracted image, and the difference data is calculated to determine whether the foreign object other than the game ball is included in the regular photographed image. Is determined.

  In the process of S11606, if it is determined that there is a foreign object image (S11606: Yes), an unauthorized command for display indicating the foreign object is set (S11607), and the process shifts to the above-described process of S11609. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11606 that there is no foreign object image (S11606: No), it is determined that the current abnormal prize is based on fraud that is not captured in the image (for example, radio wave fraud), and a display indicating radio wave fraud is displayed. An unauthorized command is set (S11608), and the flow shifts to S11609.

  As described above, in the start-up winning award abnormality process 5 shown in FIG. 213, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives an abnormal winning command set when the main control device 110 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred. In the location where the abnormal winning has occurred, the image data is read out during the period before it is determined to be the abnormal winning, and the content of the image data is analyzed to identify the cause of the abnormal winning. I have. Thus, when an abnormal winning has occurred, the cause can be easily specified (estimated), and appropriate measures can be taken after the abnormal winning occurs.

  Further, the data of the reference image previously stored (stored) in the reference image storage area 223b is subtracted from the periodic image read out from the periodic image storage area 223zi, and the value indicated by the difference data is within the allowable range (this control). In the example, the first determination process is performed to determine that the value is normal if it is 0, and to determine that the value is out of the allowable range (other than 0 in this control example), and then determine the result of the first determination process. , The control load in the abnormal winning process can be reduced.

  Further, since not the actual image data but the processed data after the binarization processing is stored as the data stored (stored) in the reference image storage area 223b, the storage capacity of the reference image storage area 223b can be reduced. Can be.

  Further, in the reference image storage area 223b, data of the reference image indicating the game ball and data of the reference image indicating an aspect when the electric accessory 640a is operating normally are stored. By subtracting the data of the reference image, it can be easily determined that there is an image indicating a game ball in the regular shot image. In addition, it can be easily determined whether or not electric accessory 640a is in a normal state.

  In this control example, in the process of S11604, when it is determined that the state of the electric accessory 640a is normal (S11604: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is, but other processes are added. For example, it may be notified to the outside that there is an abnormality in the process of setting an abnormal winning command of the main control device 110 or that there is an abnormality in the content of the main winning award error process 5. Alternatively, it may be determined that the cause of the abnormal winning has not been specified, and the start winning abnormal process 5 is executed again.

  Further, in the present control example, the period of the periodic photographed image used for the abnormal processing is set to 1 second 0.5 to 1.5 seconds before the time when the abnormal processing is executed. An image may be used. For example, a photographed image from 1.5 seconds ago to the present time may be used. Thereby, it is possible to reliably execute the abnormality process for the situation near the second entrance 640 when it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and it is possible to further improve the accuracy of the cause analysis of the abnormal winning.

  In this control example, a configuration is used in which the data of the reference image is subtracted from each of the regularly shot images shot at 0.1 second intervals, and an abnormality is determined using the difference data (the image after the subtraction). However, another configuration may be used to determine the abnormality based on the regularly shot image. For example, the regular photographed images (10 images) for a predetermined period (1 second) are continuously compared and determined, an area where the image data changes is specified, and whether or not the image data changes normally is determined. May be executed. By using such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not each regularly shot image is normal without using the reference image storage area 223b. In addition, since it is possible to execute the abnormality determination having the concept of the period, for example, it is possible to determine a state in which the electric accessory 640a is open for more than a predetermined period (for example, one second). Naturally, it may be configured to include both such a configuration and the configuration of the present control example.

  In the present control example, the binarization process is performed on the entire region of the regular photographed image when the abnormal process is performed. For example, a predetermined designated region (second incoming Only the area near the mouth) may be the target area for the binarization processing. Specifically, a means for designating only a specific coordinate range in the image data may be provided, or an image outside the target area may be provided. May be subjected to a masking process. This makes it possible to narrow the range in which the binarization process is executed, and thus has the effect of reducing the processing load of the abnormal process.

  When the analysis camera 700z is attached to the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to attach the game ball to a place where the game ball does not collide with the analysis camera 700z (for example, a place covered with a decoration). In order to improve the shape, the shape and arrangement of the ornaments are made different depending on the type of the gaming machine 10. In addition, the location to be photographed by the analysis camera 700z (for example, the vicinity of the second entrance) is made different depending on the type of the gaming machine 10 in order to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, the distance between the analysis camera 700z and a location to be photographed (for example, near the second entrance) differs depending on the type of the gaming machine 10 for each model. Furthermore, as in this control example, the analysis camera 700z can be used to photograph a plurality of locations (the second entrance 640, the through-hole 67, and the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a). The distance between 700z and the location to be imaged will be different. In such a situation, when an image is photographed using the same analysis camera 700z, a game ball or a photographed object (for example, the second entrance 640, the through 67, the special winning opening (specific winning) Since the size of the mouth) 65a) differs or the board area to be photographed differs, the reference data (reference image data) used for the abnormality processing is different for each type of the gaming machine 10 or for the photographing target. It has to be provided for each imaging object, and there is a problem that the storage capacity of the reference data increases.

  In order to solve this problem, even if the distance between the analysis camera 700z and the location to be photographed is different, a game ball or a photographing object (for example, the second entrance 640, the through 67, In order to photograph the large winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a or the like with the same size, it is necessary to make the specification of the analysis camera 700z different for each type of the gaming machine 10 or for each photographing target to be photographed. However, there is a problem that the analysis camera 700z cannot be shared, which leads to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, when the above-described game ball discrimination processing is executed, the presence of the game ball can be reliably detected even when the size of the shot game ball is different. In addition, by configuring the area used for the abnormality processing in the image captured by the analysis camera 700z so that the area used for the abnormality processing can be specified, an image other than the area used for the abnormality processing is captured depending on the installation position of the analysis 700. However, the processing load can be reduced.

  In this control example, a configuration in which a binarization process is performed on an image captured by the analysis camera 700z, a subtraction image is created by subtracting reference image data, and a cause analysis of an abnormality is performed using the subtraction image. By doing so, the amount of data used for the abnormality processing is reduced, but the cause analysis may be performed by other methods. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which an actually photographed image is used as it is for the cause analysis of the abnormality. In this case, in the process of S11604 described above, when determining whether or not the shape of the electric accessory 640a is normal, an open image indicating the open state of the electric accessory 640a and a closed image indicating the closed state are used as the reference images. May be prepared in advance, and it may be determined that the shape of the motorized accessory 640a is not normal by comparing the image with each regular photographed image. In addition, when it is determined that the shape is abnormal in one of the regular shot images, the process of determining the shape in all subsequent regular shot images may be performed. This is because when the electric accessory 640a actually changes in shape due to breakage or the like, the shape does not automatically return to a normal shape, so that the shape change is reliably grasped.

  Further, by determining a change in the shape of the motorized accessory 640a using a plurality of regular photographed images, for example, one photographed image photographed as a regular photographed image is moved from the closed position to the open position when the motorized accessory 640a is closed. The game ball flows down between the moving timing and the camera (second entrance camera) 700a for photographing the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a, and a part of the electric accessory 640a is played. Even if the discrimination result is temporarily calculated based on an image in which the shape of the electric accessory 340a such as the timing at which the electric accessory 340a is not properly discriminated, by performing the continuous discrimination, the temporary discrimination is performed. It is possible to suppress erroneous determination based on the result.

  The image data after the binarization processing of the photographed image is performed when the electrically driven device (for example, the electric accessory 640a or the variable winning device 65) is located at the open position or the closed position. In order to make the difference clearly, an open part (a part photographed by the analysis camera 700 when it is located in the open position) and a closed part (a photographed by the analysis camera when it is located in the closed position) of the electrically driven device It is good to make the color different. With this configuration, image data created by the binarization processing can be made different. In this case, the image data created by the binarization process can be made different more clearly by setting the color tones having greatly different lightness (for example, white and black).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the through passage abnormality processing 5 (S11504) will be described. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of through-passage abnormality processing 5 (S11504). This through passage abnormal processing 5 (S11504) is a processing executed when it is determined that the abnormal winning command received from the main control device 110 is abnormal for the through (through gate) 67, and receives the abnormal winning command. In this case, a photographed image of the vicinity of the through (through gate) 67 in a predetermined period (a period of 0.5 to 1.5 seconds before receiving the abnormal winning command in the present control example) which is a period before the start is used. This is the process of executing the cause analysis of the abnormality that has occurred this time. In this process, the same process as the start-up winning award abnormality process 5 (S11502) described above with reference to FIG. 213 is executed. Hereinafter, points different from the start-up winning award abnormality processing 5 (S11502) will be described in detail.

  When the through-passage abnormal process 5 (S11504) is executed, first, an image of the vicinity of the through-gate (through-gate) 67 taken 0.5 to 1.5 seconds before the current time from the regularly taken image storage area 223zi is taken. The image data corresponding to the image (the image data subjected to the binarization process) is obtained (S11701).

  Then, the reference image data near the through (through gate) 67 is obtained from the reference image storage area 222zb of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the reference image data is subtracted from each image data obtained in S11701, and the difference data is obtained. Is calculated (S11702). Note that the detailed contents are the same as S11602 of the above-described start-up winning award abnormality processing 5 (S11502 in FIG. 213), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, in the process of S11703, it is determined whether any of the subtraction images obtained by subtracting the reference image data from each of the image data acquired in the process of S11701 has an image indicating a game ball (S11703). Note that the detailed contents are the same as S11603 of the above-described start-up winning award abnormality processing 5 (S11502 in FIG. 213), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S11703, when it is determined that there is an image of a game ball (S11703: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the nail interval at the upper part of the through is normal (S11704). Here, the reference image data stored in the reference image storage area 222zb is created from image data obtained by binarizing an image having a normal nail interval (for example, 12 mm) at the upper part of the through. Therefore, when the reference image data is subtracted from each image data acquired from the regular photographed image storage area 223zi, and a subtracted image is created in a region near the nail at the upper part of the through (if the difference data does not become 0), The interval between the nails at the upper part of the through-hole differs between the reference image data and the captured image data, and it is determined that the interval between the nails at the upper part of the through-hole is not normal (abnormal).

  In the process of S11704, if it is determined that the nail interval at the upper part of the through is not normal (abnormal) (S11704: No), a display illegal command indicating an abnormal nail interval is set, and each of the commands acquired in the current process is set. The image data is stored in the abnormal image storage area 223zk (S11709), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S11704, when it is determined that the nail interval at the upper part of the through is normal (S11704: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S11703, when it is determined that there is no image indicating the game ball in any of the subtraction images, next, it is determined whether any of the subtraction images has a foreign object image other than the ball ( S11706). In the process of S11706, the data of the foreign object reference image stored in the reference image storage area 222zb is subtracted from each subtracted image, and the difference data is calculated. Is determined.

  If it is determined in the processing of S11706 that there is a foreign matter image (S11706: Yes), a display fraud command indicating foreign matter fraud is set (S11707), and the flow shifts to the above-described processing of S11709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11706 that there is no foreign object image (S11706: No), a display indicating radio wave fraud is made by assuming that the current abnormal prize is based on fraud (for example, radio wave fraud) not captured in the image. An unauthorized command is set (S11708), and the flow shifts to S11709.

  As described above, in the through passage abnormality process 5 (S11504) shown in FIG. 214, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the abnormal winning command set when the main control device 110 determines that the winning is abnormal. In such a case, the configuration is such that the cause of the abnormal prize is specified by reading out the image data at the place where the abnormal prize has occurred and before the period in which the abnormal prize is determined, and analyzing the content of the image data. are doing. Thus, when an abnormal winning has occurred, the cause can be easily specified (estimated), and appropriate measures can be taken after the abnormal winning occurs.

  Further, the reference image data previously stored (stored) in the reference image storage area 223b is subtracted from the image data read from the regular image storage area 223zi, and the value indicated by the difference data is within the allowable range (in this control example, 0) is determined to be normal, a first determination process of determining that the value is out of the allowable range (other than 0 in this control example) is not normal, and then based on the determination result of the first determination process. In this case, the control load in the abnormal winning process can be reduced.

  It should be noted that a technique other than the above-described technique may be used as a technique for extracting a nail image from a regular photographed image. For example, a configuration may be used in which the presence or absence of edge data corresponding to edge data corresponding to a nail image is determined. Good. Alternatively, the color data corresponding to the nail color may be stored, and the color data of the photographed image may be analyzed to determine the nail image.

  Also, when determining the image of the nail, if the entire nail is to be determined, a part of the nail may not be photographed by a game ball flowing down on the game board 13. In the present control example, the nail image can be determined using 1.1 seconds (11 images) of the images captured at 0.1 second intervals. As described above, the interval at which the game balls are fired (for example, 100 shots per 60 seconds) during a period longer than the time required for the game balls to pass through the location to be photographed (for example, 0.5 seconds). By using a plurality of photographed images photographed at shorter intervals, it is possible to reliably execute the abnormality process using the photographed image of the entire nail. As in the present control example, when the image of the nail is determined, the game ball is positioned between the through camera 700zc and the nail at the upper part of the through without using the entire nail as the determination target. However, the configuration may be such that the image of the nail is determined using only the image of a part of the nail (for example, the tip of the nail) to be photographed. Thereby, the image of the nail can be reliably determined regardless of the presence or absence of the game ball.

  Further, when the nail image cannot be determined using the regular photographed image, it is possible that the nail is broken or pulled out, so that the abnormality may be notified.

  In the present control example, the nail image is determined using the nail reference image data stored in the reference image storage area 222zb. For example, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, shooting by each camera is performed. It may be configured to execute the process and use the photographed image photographed at that time as a reference image. Thus, the reference image can be updated every day (every time the power is turned on) for a slight displacement of the nail caused by the collision of the game ball with the nail, and the accuracy of the abnormal processing can be improved.

  Also, when performing nail image discrimination using the color data of the photographed image, in addition to the color data indicating a normal nail, color data when the surface coating of the nail has been removed, or when the nail has been oxidized. It is preferable to store the color data so that the state of the nail can be determined. Thus, for example, when performing a fraudulent game with a piano wire or the like, the nail wire is in contact with the nail and the surface coating of the nail is removed, or the nail is oxidized (rusted) due to aging. Can be determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the special winning opening winning prize processing 5 (S11506) will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the content of the special winning opening winning process 5 (S11506). In the special winning opening winning process 5 (S11506), the process executed in the above-described abnormal starting process 5 (S11502) is changed to a special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65. The reference image data obtained from the image storage area 222zb is replaced with the reference image data near the second entrance 640, and is used as the reference image data near the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a. The difference is that the regular shot image is replaced with the reference image data near the second entrance 640 and the reference image data near the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a, and the other points are the same. Omitted.

  Next, the jackpot-related process 5 (S11416) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related process 5 (S11416). The jackpot-related process 5 (S11416) is one of the main processes 5 (see FIG. 210) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113.

  When the jackpot-related process 5 (S11416) is executed, first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S11901). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S11901: Yes), a display opening command is set (S11902). ), The photographing flag 223zj is set to off (S11903), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S11901: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S11903).

  In the process of S11903, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S11903: Yes), the round number counter 233zg is incremented by 1 (S11904), and based on the value of the round number counter 233zg after the 1 has been added by the process of S11904. The display round number command.

  If it is determined in step S11903 that the number-of-rounds command has not been received, it is next determined whether an ending command has been received (S11906). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S11906: Yes), then a round ending command for display is set (S11907), the round number counter is set to 0 (S11908), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11906 that the ending command has not been received (S11906: No), the process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process 5 (S11312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 5 (S11312). This variable display setting processing 5 (FIG. 217, S11312) is one of the main processing 5 (see FIG. 210) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process 5 (FIG. 217, S11312) includes a special symbol based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is performed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process 5 (FIG. 217, S11312), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223zd provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223zd is off (S12001: No), the process proceeds to S12010 because the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag 223zd is on (S12001: Yes), the change start flag 223zd is set to off (S12002).

  Next, in the processing of S12003, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the special symbol extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S11403 of the command determination processing 5 (FIG. 211, S11312) is acquired from the other memory area 223zz of the RAM 223. Then, a special design display variation pattern command is generated (S12003).

  The variable pattern command for display of the special symbol set in the processing of S12003 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output processing 5 (S11302) of the main processing 5 (see FIG. 210). Is transmitted to the control unit 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the special symbol, and displays the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern of the special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Is started, the display control of the variable display effect is started.

  Next, with the setting of the display variation pattern command for the special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation display of the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball of the special symbol). The data corresponding to the special symbol in the winning information storage area 223za is shifted in accordance with the setting.

  Next, it is determined whether the shooting flag 223zj is set to ON (S12004). If the shooting flag 223zj is set to ON (S12004: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the present variation pattern command includes a cut-in effect (S12005), and the cut-in effect is included. If it is determined that the game has been performed (S120005: Yes), the player shooting timing is set (S12006), and the display variation pattern command is set (S12009). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12005 that the present variation pattern command does not include a cut-in effect (S12005: No), then it is determined whether a button effect is included (S12007). Here, when it is determined that the button effect is included (S12007: Yes), the button peripheral shooting timing is set, and the display variation pattern command is set (S12009).

  In the process of S12004, when the shooting flag 223zj is not set to ON (S12004: No), or when it is determined in the process of S12007 that the button effect is not included (S12007: No), various types of shooting are performed. The process proceeds to S12008 without setting the timing.

  Here, the shooting flag 223zj is set to ON when the received winning information command includes information indicating that the lottery result is a big hit in the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 211, S11312). Then, when the special jackpot game is started as a result of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information command, it is set to off.

  Therefore, for example, when the shooting flag 223zj is set to ON based on the winning information command set in the third hold storage, in the variable display setting process 5 (S11312), the shooting timing is continuously set three times. Can be set. As this shooting timing, for example, a timing is set at which an effect for operating the frame button 22 in which the player is to participate as a variable effect is set, and when the timing is reached, the display control device 114 , A command to instruct shooting by the display camera 1700 is set. The display control device 114 is configured to be able to store up to three images captured by the display camera 1700, and the images captured at the timing that matches the capturing timing are stored in a predetermined round (4, 4) during the jackpot game. It is used for the production performed on the 8th and 12th rounds).

  As described above, as a result of the pre-reading process, the player or the vicinity of the frame button 22 is determined over a plurality of variable displays executed between the time when it is determined that the jackpot has been won and the time when the jackpot game is started. The player or the vicinity of the frame button 22 is photographed in accordance with the timing (the timing at which the effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 is performed), and the photographed image is displayed during the specific production (for example, during a big hit production). By doing so, various effects can be provided, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

  Returning to FIG. 217, the description will be continued. After the process of S12009, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223ze is on (S12010). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223ze is not on (that is, it is off) (S12010: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process 5 ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223ze is on (S12010: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223ze is turned off (S12011), and then in the process of S11406 of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 211). The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S12012). The stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S12013), and the process shifts to S12014. In the processing of S12014, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S12014). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the photographing process 5 (S11311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the content of the photographing process 5 (S11311). This photographing process 5 (S11311) is one of the main processes 5 (see FIG. 210) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and executes photographing using the analysis camera 700z or displays images. This is a process of setting a command for instructing the control device 114 to shoot using the display camera 1700.

  When the photographing process 5 (S11311) is executed, first, the photographing timing stored in the photographing timing storage area 223zh is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the current time is the player photographing timing (S12101). This player shooting timing is set by the above-described variable display setting process 5 (S11312 in FIG. 217) (see S12006 in FIG. 217). Here, in the present control example, the timing at which the button effect is executed is set as the player shooting timing in the fluctuation pattern set by the fluctuation display setting process 5 (S11312 in FIG. 217). As described above, by setting the player photographing timing in accordance with the timing at which the effect in which the player can participate in the game is executed, various expressions of the player can be photographed.

  In the process of S12101, if it is determined that the current time is the player shooting timing (S12101: Yes), a display shooting command for the player is set (S12102), and the flow shifts to S12103. When the display control device 114 receives the display photographing command set in the process of S12102, control for photographing the player by the display camera 1700 (player camera 1700a) is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12101 that it is not the player shooting timing (S12101: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the button periphery shooting timing (S12103). The button periphery photographing timing is set by the above-described variable display setting process 5 (S11312 in FIG. 217) (see 2008 in FIG. 217). Here, in the present control example, the timing at which the button effect is executed is set as the button peripheral imaging timing in the variation pattern set by the variation display setting process 5 (S11312 in FIG. 217). As described above, by setting the player photographing timing in accordance with the timing at which the effect in which the player can participate in the game is executed, various expressions of the player can be photographed. In addition, in the present control example, the case where the player is photographed and the case where the periphery of the button is photographed are provided in accordance with the timing at which the button production is executed. Can be.

  In the present control example, the shooting timing of the display camera 1700 controlled by the display control device 114 is set by the sound lamp control device 113 that controls the variation pattern (effect) performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is ensured in accordance with the specific timing (for example, the timing at which a button effect that allows the player to participate in the effect) of the variation pattern (effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is performed. , The display camera 1700 can be operated.

  In the process of S12103, if it is determined that it is not the button peripheral shooting timing (S12103: No), it is next determined whether it is the regular shooting timing (S12105). Here, the regular shooting will be described in detail. In the regular shooting, an image is taken periodically (in the present control example, at intervals of 0.1 second) using the analysis camera 700z. The images taken by the regular photography are stored in the regular photography image storage area 223zi. The regular photographed image storage area 223zi has a storage area for each of the analysis cameras 700z (the second entrance camera 700za, the special winning entrance camera 700zb, and the through camera 700zc), and each storage area has a maximum of 15 storage areas. It is configured to be able to store images (equivalent to 1.5 seconds) in chronological order. Here, the storage area of the periodic image storage area 223i is configured by a ring buffer, and is configured to overwrite the oldest area in which image data is stored when new image data is stored. .

  As described above, the regularly shot image storage area 223zi of the present control example stores the latest image for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds) of the images periodically shot using the analysis camera 700z. , The storage capacity can be reduced even if images are taken at short intervals. In this control example, the image captured by the analysis camera 700z can be stored for 1.5 seconds. This is the period required for the game ball to pass through the shooting area, or the electrically driven accessory (electric accessory 640a, specific winning device 65a) is shifted from the first position (for example, the closed position) to the second position. (For example, a period that is sufficiently longer than a period required to move to the open position).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to use an appropriate image when executing a periodic photographed image. Note that the period in which the regular photographed image storage area 223zi can be stored is not limited to 1.5 minutes, and if an image for a period necessary for executing an abnormal process is stored, 1 is stored. It may be longer or shorter than .5 seconds. In addition, the period during which the regular photographed image storage area 223zi can store images may be different for each type of photographed image.

  Returning to FIG. 218, the description will be continued. In the process of S12105, when it is determined that the current time is the regular shooting timing (S12105: Yes), images of the second entrance 640, the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a, and the through 67 are taken (S12106). Then, binarization processing is performed on the photographed image, and edges are extracted from the binarized data (S12107). Then, the image data stored in the periodical image storage area 223zi is shifted (S12108), and the data created in the processing of S12107 is stored as new data in the periodical image storage area 223j (S12109). After that, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12105 that the current time is not the regular shooting timing, the processing of S12106 to S12109 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, various devices (the second entrance 640, the through gate 67, the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a) provided on the game board 13 and the game board 13 The state of the game ball flowing down is periodically photographed using photographing means (analysis camera 700z), and the presence or absence of an abnormality or the cause of the abnormality is determined using the photographed image. As a result, it is possible to execute the abnormality determination processing with higher reliability than the abnormality determination processing using the sensor.

  In the present control example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives an abnormal winning command set when the main control device 110 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred, it is determined that the abnormal winning has occurred at a location where the abnormal winning has occurred. It is configured to read image data of a period earlier than that, analyze the contents of the image data, and identify the cause of the abnormal winning. Therefore, the period during which the process using the image data is executed can be minimized, and the processing load of the process using the image data can be reduced. Further, since only the image data of the portion necessary for the abnormal processing is processed, the processing load of the image data can be reduced. Further, by reducing the processing load of the image data in each abnormal processing, it is possible to add detailed processing to each abnormal processing.

  In this control example, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the abnormal winning command, the abnormal processing using the image data is executed, but the image data is used at other timings. Abnormal processing may be performed. In this case, for example, the start of the jackpot game that provides a large amount of prize balls to the player may be set as the execution condition of the abnormal processing. As described above, even when the abnormal winning command has not been received, the abnormal state is executed by using the image data when the gaming state shifts to a state that is advantageous to the player. More appropriate determination can be made. Further, regardless of the transition of the game state, the abnormality processing using the image data may be executed periodically (for example, every 10 minutes).

  In the present control example, image data obtained by performing binarization processing on an image photographed by the photographing means (analysis camera 700z) is stored, and abnormal processing is executed using the image data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the storage unit as compared with a case where the image captured by the imaging unit (analysis camera 700z) is stored as it is and the abnormal processing is executed using the stored image (the captured image) as it is. it can. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the process of determining whether the image data is normal.

  Further, the abnormality processing using the image data is configured to be executed in a plurality of stages, namely, The reference image data previously stored (stored) in the reference image storage area 223b is subtracted from the image data read from the periodic image storage area 223zi, and the value indicated by the difference data is within an allowable range (0 in this control example). ) Is determined to be normal, and a first determination process of determining that the value is out of the allowable range (other than 0 in this control example) is not normal, and then details based on the determination result of the first determination process. Since the stepwise processing for performing the determination processing 5 (the presence or absence of a game ball image, the presence or absence of a foreign substance image) is performed, the control load in the abnormal winning processing can be reduced.

  In this control example, a configuration is used in which the binarized data serving as the reference is subtracted from the binarized image data, and the abnormality determination is performed using the subtracted image created by the difference. May be used. For example, the determination as to whether the image is normal or not may be performed using the captured image as it is. In this case, in the reference image storage area 223b, a reference image indicating a game ball, an electric accessory 640a, a reference image indicating an aspect when the variable winning device 65 is operating normally, and an upper portion of the through gate 67 are provided. It is preferable to store a reference image indicating a case where the interval between the nails is normal, and determine whether or not it is normal by comparing the standard image with a regular image.

  Further, in the present control example, the period of the image data used for the abnormal processing is set to a predetermined period (1 second from 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds before) at which the abnormal processing is executed. It is possible to execute the abnormality determination using the image data from the state before the occurrence of. Therefore, the cause of the abnormality can be specified in more detail.

  It should be noted that a period other than the present control example may be used as a period of the image data used for the abnormality processing. For example, a photographed image from 1.5 seconds ago to the present time may be used. Thereby, it is possible to reliably execute the abnormality process for the situation near the second entrance 640 when it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and it is possible to further improve the accuracy of the cause analysis of the abnormal winning.

  In this control example, a configuration is used in which the reference image data is subtracted from the image data corresponding to each of the regularly shot images shot at 0.1 second intervals, and an abnormality is determined using the difference data (subtracted image). However, another configuration may be used to execute the abnormality determination using the regularly shot image. For example, the regular photographed images (10 images) for a predetermined period (1 second) are continuously compared and determined, an area where the image data changes is specified, and whether or not the image data changes normally is determined. May be executed. By using such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not each regularly shot image is normal without using the reference image storage area 223b. In addition, since it is possible to execute the abnormality determination having the concept of the period, for example, it is possible to determine a state in which the electric accessory 640a is open for more than a predetermined period (for example, one second). Naturally, it may be configured to include both such a configuration and the configuration of the present control example. Further, as a photographing unit, a unit for photographing a moving image (for example, a video camera) may be used.

  In the present control example, the binarization process is performed on the entire region of the regular photographed image when the abnormal process is performed. For example, a predetermined designated region (second incoming Only the area near the mouth) may be the target area for the binarization processing. Specifically, a means for designating only a specific coordinate range in the image data may be provided, or an image outside the target area may be provided. May be subjected to a masking process. This makes it possible to narrow the range in which the binarization process is executed, and thus has the effect of reducing the processing load of the abnormal process.

  When the analysis camera 700z is attached to the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to attach the game ball to a place where the game ball does not collide with the analysis camera 700z (for example, a place covered with a decoration). In order to improve the shape, the shape and arrangement of the ornaments are made different depending on the type of the gaming machine 10. In addition, the location to be photographed by the analysis camera 700z (for example, the vicinity of the second entrance) is made different depending on the type of the gaming machine 10 in order to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, the distance between the analysis camera 700z and a location to be photographed (for example, near the second entrance) differs depending on the type of the gaming machine 10 for each model. Furthermore, as in this control example, the analysis camera 700z can be used to photograph a plurality of locations (the second entrance 640, the through-hole 67, and the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a). The distance between 700z and the location to be imaged will be different. In such a situation, when an image is photographed using the same analysis camera 700z, a game ball or a photographed object (for example, the second entrance 640, the through 67, the special winning opening (specific winning) Since the size of the mouth) 65a) differs or the board area to be photographed differs, the reference data (reference image data) used for the abnormality processing is different for each type of the gaming machine 10 or for the photographing target. It has to be provided for each imaging object, and there is a problem that the storage capacity of the reference data increases.

  In order to solve this problem, even if the distance between the analysis camera 700z and the location to be photographed is different, a game ball or a photographing object (for example, the second entrance 640, the through 67, In order to photograph the large winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a or the like with the same size, it is necessary to make the specification of the analysis camera 700z different for each type of the gaming machine 10 or for each photographing target to be photographed. However, there is a problem that the analysis camera 700z cannot be shared, which leads to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, when the above-described game ball discrimination processing is executed, the presence of the game ball can be reliably detected even when the size of the shot game ball is different. In addition, by configuring the area used for the abnormality processing in the image captured by the analysis camera 700z so that the area used for the abnormality processing can be specified, an image other than the area used for the abnormality processing is captured depending on the installation position of the analysis 700. However, the processing load can be reduced.

  In this control example, a configuration in which a binarization process is performed on an image captured by the analysis camera 700z, a subtraction image is created by subtracting reference image data, and a cause analysis of an abnormality is performed using the subtraction image. By doing so, the amount of data used for the abnormality processing is reduced, but the cause analysis may be performed by other methods. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which an actually photographed image is used as it is for the cause analysis of the abnormality. In this case, for example, in the process of S11604 described above, when determining whether or not the shape of the electric accessory 640a is normal, the open image indicating the open state of the electric accessory 640a and the closing indicating the closed state are used as the reference images. An image may be prepared in advance, and it may be determined that the shape of the motorized accessory 640a is not normal by comparing the image with each regular image. In addition, when it is determined that the shape is abnormal in one of the regular shot images, the process of determining the shape in all subsequent regular shot images may be performed. This is because when the electric accessory 640a actually changes in shape due to breakage or the like, the shape does not automatically return to a normal shape, so that the shape change is reliably grasped.

  Further, by determining a change in the shape of the motorized accessory 640a using a plurality of regular photographed images, for example, one photographed image photographed as a regular photographed image is moved from the closed position to the open position when the motorized accessory 640a is closed. The game ball flows down between the moving timing and the camera (second entrance camera) 700a for photographing the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a, and a part of the electric accessory 640a is played. Even if the discrimination result is temporarily calculated based on an image in which the shape of the electric accessory 340a such as the timing at which the electric accessory 340a is not properly discriminated, by performing the continuous discrimination, the temporary discrimination is performed. It is possible to suppress erroneous determination based on the result.

  In the present control example, predetermined portions (the vicinity of the second entrance 640, the through gate 67, and the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a) of the game board 13 are periodically (at intervals of 0.1 second) by the analysis camera 700z. Although the configuration is such that the image capturing process is executed, other configurations may be used. For example, the configuration is such that the analysis camera 700z captures an image only when the game ball is located at a predetermined position. You may. In this case, for example, the analysis camera 700z is configured by a single focus lens, and the game ball passes a predetermined position (for example, the open position of the electric accessory 640a, the through upper position, or the like) of the shooting area of the analysis camera 700z. In such a case, the focus may be set, and when the focus is set, the analysis camera 700z may capture an image. With this configuration, the size of the game ball to be photographed can be unified, and the presence or absence of the game ball can be easily determined in the abnormal processing.

  In the present control example, a predetermined threshold value is used when binarizing a photographed image photographed by the photographing means (analysis camera 700z), but the brightness of the photographed image is provided on the game board 13. It is expected that the value will vary depending on the light emitting state of the light emitting means (a decorative lamp or the like). In this case, if the binarization processing is performed using the same threshold value, there is a problem that the processed image data (subtracted image) is different. In order to solve such a problem, for example, the brightness of a predetermined area of an image may be set to be a threshold, and the threshold may be changed according to the change in the brightness of the image. . Further, based on the lighting (flashing) pattern of the light emitting means controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, a process of correcting the brightness of the captured image is performed, and a binarization process is performed on the corrected image. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, even if a plurality of images are taken in a situation where the effects (light emission modes of the light emitting means) executed in the gaming machine 10 are different, the binarization processing can be properly executed.

  In this control example, an abnormal image storage area 223zk that can store image data for a longer period than the regular photographed image storage area 223zi is provided, and image data when an abnormality occurs can be stored for a long time (for example, for one day). However, when the image data stored in the abnormal image storage area 223zk exceeds a predetermined amount (for example, the number corresponding to ten abnormalities), the fact is notified to the outside, It may be prohibited to continue. Thus, it is possible to suppress a long-term execution of a fraudulent game.

<Control processing of display control device in fifth control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing 5 that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing 5 that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process 5 that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the minute image is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main processing, and executes the command interruption processing 5 and the V interruption processing 5 in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing 5 can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process 5 at the time of power-on.

  The activation of the main processing 5 is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main process 5.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process 5 is executed as described above, first, the boot process 5 executed by the boot program is executed (S12201), and the display control is performed so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The device 114 is started.

  Here, the boot process 5 (S12201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a flowchart illustrating the boot process 5 (S12201) executed in the main process 5 in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S12201). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S12202). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S12201.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S12202, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S12202, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data of the control programs which have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S12203). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S12204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process 5 (see S12201 in FIG. 220). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing 5 to be performed (see S12202 in FIG. 220) (S12205), the execution of the boot program ends, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process 5 (S12201) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. Are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  In the boot process 5 shown in FIG. 220, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S12201 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S12201 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S12202. It may be part of a program. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S12203 to S12205 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Also, the boot program transferred by the process of S12201 transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently the start program of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is transferred. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S12201. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S12202, the processing of S12203 to S12205 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present control example, the case has been described where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S12203 to S12205 without performing the processes of S12201 and S12202. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S12202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S12203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S12203, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S12204). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S12204, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S12205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process 5 (see FIG. 237 (a)) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Resident image transfer setting processing 5 for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to the image controller 237 (see S14302 in FIG. 237 (a)).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 221 (b)), the image at power-on (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. Command determination processing 5 (see S12509 in FIG. 221 (b)) and simple display setting processing 5 (see S12510 in FIG. 221 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. When the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change images shown in FIGS. 193 (b) and (c) are immediately displayed during the change effect period, A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After S12205, interrupt permission is set (S12206), and thereafter, the main process 5 executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S12206, the command interruption processing 5 and the V interruption processing 5 are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing 5. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interruption process 5.

  In the command interruption process 5, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S12401), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing 5 are read out by a command determination processing 5 or a simple command determination processing 5 of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt processing 5, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing 5 are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. By creating a drawing list (see FIG. 192) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing 5 is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing 5 in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. Will be. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing 5 will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 221 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S12501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S12501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process 5 (S12502) is executed, and then a display setting process 5 (S12503) is executed.

  In the command determination process 5 (S12502), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demonstration command is executed. If the display variation table command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the display data table corresponding to the set display data table is set. The transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In the command determination process 5, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing 5 is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing 5 is executed. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. That's why. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process 5 (S12503), one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process 5 (S12502) and the like. The content of the image is specifically specified. In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process 5 is executed, next, a task process is executed (S12504). In this task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing 5 (S12503) or the simple display setting processing 5 (S12510), The type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing 5 is executed (S12505). In the transfer setting process 5, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 causes the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set transfer instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 237 and 238.

  Next, the drawing process 5 is executed (S12506). In the drawing process 5, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer set by the transfer setting process 5 (S12505) determined in the task process 5 (S12504). The drawing list shown in FIG. 192 is generated from the instruction, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process 5 according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S12507). As a counter updated by the process of S12507, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing 5 is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process 5, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, miss reach, complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command. And the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  When the processing of S12507 is completed, the regular shooting processing for display 5 is executed (S12508), and the V interrupt processing 5 ends. By the processing in S12508, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are regularly photographed, and the photographing results are stored in the first regular image storage area 233zq and the second regular image storage area 233zr. With the image data stored in the regular first image storage area 233zq and the regular second image storage area 233zr, an effect of displaying on the third symbol display device 81, as a highlight, a ball entry scene of a game ball that has triggered a jackpot. Can be performed. Details of the regular shooting process for display 5 (S12508) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12501 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S12501: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 193 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination processing 5 (S12509) is executed, and then the simple display setting processing 5 (S12510) is executed. The process moves to the process of S12504.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 222 to 230, details of the above-described command determination processing 5 (S12502), which is one of the V interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 5.

  In this command determination process 5, as shown in FIG. 222, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S12601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S12601: No). Then, the command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing 5. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S12601: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting processing 5 (S12503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S12602), and The command type of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S12603).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S12604). If there is a display variation pattern command (S12604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing 5 is executed. Then (S12605), and returns to the process of S12601.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing 5 (S12605) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing 5. The fluctuation pattern command processing 5 executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing 5, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S12701).

  Here, since the start of the change is always determined at least several seconds in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Is executed, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously displayed. May be interpreted as a use variation pattern command. In the process of S12701, in order to prepare for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this control example, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is actually set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process 5 so that the demonstration effect is displayed. It is possible to keep watching the fluctuation of the third symbol.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S12701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S12702). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S12701 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S12703). In the display setting process 5, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S12703, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Can be determined.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S12701, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S12704), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S12705), and both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S12706).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set variation pattern command is for the ball-linked reach (S12707). The flag 233zp is set to ON (S12708), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S12707, if it is determined that it is not the ball-linked reach (S12707: No), the processing of S12708 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing 5, the display setting processing 5 updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S12705, and updates the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S12701. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the buffer 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 beforehand. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting processing 5, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S12704, and the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined that the stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the display stop type command from the main control device 110, the setting of the stop display is controlled.

  Further, by setting the ball linked reach flag 233zp to ON by the processing of S12708, the above described ball linked reach effect is executed. Specifically, a game ball that is actually flowing is photographed, and the photographed image and the image of the symbol are combined and displayed as a reach effect. This makes it possible to use an image of a game ball that is actually flowing down as a reach effect, so that it is possible to increase the variations of the effect and improve the interest of the player.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S12604, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S12604: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S12606). If there is a display variation type command (S12606: Yes), stop type command processing 5 is executed (S12607), and the process returns to S12601.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing 5 (S12607) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing 5. The stop type command process 5 executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing 5, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, complete out, etc.) indicated by the display stop type command is determined ( S12801), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 221 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variable effect is finally set (S12802).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S12802 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S12803), and this processing ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S12802. In the above-described task process 5 (S12504), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S12802 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S12803, and the specified symbol is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process 5 to the stopped symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present control example, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low readout speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of the drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously displayed. It may be interpreted as a stop type command. In the process of S12801, in case of such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S12802.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present control example, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure is set, and in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the departure of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 222, the description will be continued. In the processing of S12606, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S12606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a shooting command for display among unprocessed commands (S12608). If there is a shooting command for use (S12608: Yes), a shooting command process 5 is executed (S12609), and the process returns to S12601.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 224, details of the photographing command processing 5 (S12609) will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the photographing command processing 5. The photographing command process 5 executes a process corresponding to the display photographing command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the photographing command process 5, first, it is determined whether or not data is stored in the head area (first area) of the player image storage area 233zk (S12901). In the processing of S12901, if data is stored in the first area (first area) of the player image storage area 233zk (S12901: Yes), an image of the player used for the fusion effect already playing the jackpot game is captured. And is stored in the player image storage area 233zk. In this case, the data of each area of the player image storage area 233zk is shifted (S12902). Specifically, the data of the first area is shifted to the second area, the data of the second area is shifted to the third area, and the data of the third area is deleted.

  Next, the data in the button peripheral image storage area 233zm is similarly shifted (S12903), and the flow shifts to the processing in S12904. Although details will be described later, when image data is stored in the player image storage area 233zk, there is a possibility that image data is also stored in the button peripheral image storage area 233zm. Therefore, by executing the processing of S12903, the stored button peripheral image can be shifted. On the other hand, even when no image data is stored in the button peripheral image storage area 233zm, the shift processing is executed. Therefore, the state in which the image data is stored in the player image storage area 233zk and the image data is not stored in the button peripheral image storage area 233zm at the timing when only the player is photographed is shifted as it is. This makes it possible to synchronize the shift timing between the player image storage area 233zk and the button peripheral image storage area 233zm, and it is possible to easily determine an image around the button captured at the same timing as the image of the player.

  In the processing of S12904, it is determined whether or not the shooting target of the received shooting command is only the player (S12904). In the process of S12904, when it is determined that the photographing target of the received photographing command is only the player (S12904: Yes), the player is photographed by the player camera 1700c, and the photographed result is the player. The image is stored in the head area (first area) of the player image storage area 233zk (S12905), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S12904 that the shooting target of the received shooting command is not only the player (S12904: No), then it is determined whether or not the shooting target is around the player and the button. (S12906).

  In the processing of S12906, when it is determined that the shooting target is around the player and the button (S12906: Yes), the player is shot by the player camera 1700c, and the player image as the shooting result is displayed as the player image. The image is stored in the head area (first area) of the image storage area 233zk (S12907). Then, the periphery of the button is photographed by the button camera 1700d, and the photographed result of the button periphery image is stored in the head area (first area) of the button periphery image storage area 233zm (S12908), and this processing ends.

  In the present control example, the maximum number of images used for the fusion effect during the jackpot game is six (three player images and three button peripheral images). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as seven or more. In this case, the number of areas in the player image storage area 233zk or the button peripheral image storage area 233zm may be appropriately changed according to the number of images used for the fusion effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the image of the player and the image around the frame button 22 are used as the fusion effect during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an image around the operation handle 51 may be taken and the image may be used, or an image of the player taken from a plurality of angles may be used. Thereby, the variation of the fusion effect can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 222, the description will be continued. In the processing of S12608, if it is determined that there is no shooting command for display (S12608: No), then it is determined whether there is a jackpot-related command for display among unprocessed commands (S12610), and the display is performed. If there is a jackpot-related command for business (S12610: Yes), the process of the jackpot-related command for display 5 (S13211) is executed, and the process returns to S13201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 225, details of the display big hit related command processing 5 (S13211) will be described. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot-related command processing 5 for display. The display jackpot-related command process 5 for display executes a process corresponding to the jackpot-related commands (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the display jackpot-related command processing 5 for display, first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display (S13701). If it is determined in the processing of S13701 that there is an opening command (S13701: Yes), the opening command processing 5 is executed, and the flow shifts to the processing of S13703.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing 5 (S13002) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the opening command processing 5. The opening command process 5 executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing 5, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer (S13101). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S13102).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S13101, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S13103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S13104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off, and the flow shifts to the process of S13106.

  In the process of S13106, it is determined whether or not the received opening command indicates a jackpot based on the winning of the first entrance 64 (S13106). In the process of S13106, if it is determined that the hit is a big hit based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (S13106: Yes), the first regular entrance 64 is highlighted in order to display the highlight. An image 0.5 to 1.5 seconds before the one image storage area 233zq is acquired (S13107), and the process shifts to S13109.

  On the other hand, in the process of S13106, when it is determined that it is not a jackpot based on the winning in the first entrance 64 (S13106: No), it is a case of the jackpot based on the winning in the second entrance 640. Therefore, in order to display the highlight of the second entrance 640, an image 0.5 to 1.5 seconds before the regular second image storage area 233zr is obtained (S13108), and the process proceeds to S13109. .

  In the process of S13109, the image for one second from 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds before is enlarged to five seconds, and is continuously set in the display data table buffer 233d (S13109). Thereby, in the opening effect, the state of the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in a period from 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds before the winning of the gaming ball that has won the jackpot is detected. , 1/5 slow motion video.

  Here, as described above, in the opening effect, the video (highlight image) immediately before the winning of the gaming ball that has won the jackpot is detected and the reel effect is displayed. In the reel effect, a random number of a jackpot obtained at the time of winning is displayed in the form of a reel, and the reel is stopped at a random value (7 in the present control example) indicating a big hit at the time of 5 seconds after the start of the effect. It is a directing. As described above, the highlight image in which the hit gaming ball enters is displayed with the image for one second stretched to five seconds (slow motion), so the opening effect of the highlight image Is set to be executed (displayed) from the start point of the game, it is possible to match the timing at which the game ball enters in the highlight image with the timing at which the reel is stopped and displayed in the reel effect.

  The present invention is not limited to this, and the highlight video (that is, the image of the first entrance or the image of the second entrance) is subjected to image analysis (determining whether or not the game ball has disappeared), and the game ball has entered. Naturally, the ball may be written in the display data table buffer 233d such that the timing of the ball and the timing of stopping and displaying the reels in the reel effect match.

  Returning to FIG. 225, the description will be continued. In the process of S13701, when it is determined that there is no display opening command (S13701: No), it is next determined whether there is a display round number command (S13703). In the process of S13703, if it is determined that there is a display round number command (S13703: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S13704), and the flow shifts to the process of S13705.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing 5 (S13004) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing round number command processing 5. The round number command process 5 executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing 5, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and displayed. It is set in the data table buffer 233d (S13201). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S13202).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S13201, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S13203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S13204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S13205), and the flow shifts to the process of S13206.

  In the process of S13206, when it is determined that the round is not the round in which the fusion effect is to be executed (4, 8, and 12 rounds) (S13206: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S13206, if it is determined that the round is a round in which the fusion effect is to be executed (specifically, any of 4, 8, and 12 rounds) (S13206: Yes), the fusion effect is executed. To do so, an image of an area corresponding to the round of the player image storage area 233zk and the button peripheral image storage area 233zm is set in the display data table buffer 233d as a front-side insertion image (S13207), and the process proceeds to S13108. .

  In the process of S13108, it is determined whether or not the final round in which the fusion effect is to be executed (specifically, 12 rounds). In the process of S13108, when it is determined that the final round of the fusion effect is made (S13108: Yes), all the images stored in the player image storage area 233zk and the button peripheral image storage area 233zm are deleted. (S13109), this process ends.

  By the processing of S13109, it is possible to prevent the image used for the fusion effect in the current jackpot game from being used in the fusion effect in the next and subsequent jackpot games. Thus, when the player is changed, it is possible to prevent a problem such as displaying an image of the player who was playing before the change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Naturally, when the game has not been executed for a certain period of time (for example, when the game has shifted to the demo screen), the image may be deleted. Of course, it may be configured to be used for a fusion effect in the current jackpot game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S13108, if it is determined that it is not the last round (12 rounds) of the fusion effect (S13108: No), the process of S13109 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 225, the description will be continued. In the process of S13003, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S13003: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S13005). If there is an ending command for use (S13005: Yes), ending command processing 5 is executed (S13006), and this processing ends.

  Here, the ending command processing 5 (S13006) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the ending command process 5. The ending command processing 5 executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing 5, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S13301). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S13302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S13301 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to off (S13303). In the display setting process 5, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of any ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S13303. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S13301, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S13304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S13304). S13205). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S13206), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 222, the description will be continued. In the process of S12610, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot-related command (S12610: No), then, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display invalid command (S12612).

  If it is determined in the process of S12612 that there is an unauthorized command for display (S12612: Yes), the unauthorized command process 5 is executed (S12613), and the process returns to the process of S12601.

  Here, the details of the unauthorized command processing 5 (S12613) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the unauthorized command processing 5. This unauthorized command processing 5 executes processing corresponding to the display unauthorized command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the unauthorized command processing 5 (S12613), first, a player is photographed by the player camera 1700c, the photographed image is stored in the illegal player image storage area 233zn (S13401), and the photographed player image and the command are stored. The display data table buffer 233d is set based on the corresponding fraud notification display data table (S13402). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S13402).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S13401, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S13403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S13404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S13405), and the flow shifts to the process of S13406.

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S13401, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S13403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S13404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S13405), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 222, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S12612 that there is no unauthorized command for display (S12612: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command (S12614).

  In the process of S12614, when it is determined that there is a back image change command (S12614: Yes), the back image change command process 5 is executed (S12615), and the process returns to S12601.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing 5 (S12615) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing 5. The rear image change command process 5 executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing 5, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing 5 (see FIG. 238) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S13601). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S13602), the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing 5.

  In the normal image transfer setting process 5, upon detecting that the back image change flag set in the process of S13601 is turned on, the rear image type after change is identified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S13602. I do. When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S13602 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously changed to the rear image. It may be interpreted as a change command. In the process of S13602, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S12614, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S12614: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S12616). If (S12616: Yes), the error command processing 5 is executed (S12617), and the process returns to S12601.

  Here, the details of the error command processing 5 (S12617) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing 5. The error command processing 5 executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing 5, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S13601). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S13602). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process 5, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S13601, the type of error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set in the process of S13602, and the error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the corresponding warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S13602, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S12616, when it is determined that there is no error command (S12616: No), next, a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S12618), and the process returns to S12601.

  In the processing of S12601 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S12601: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S12602 to S12618 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S12601 to S12618 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S12601 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process 5 (S12509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 221 (b)) is the same as the command determination process 5. . However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 193, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process 5 (see FIG. 223 (a)) and a stop type command process 5 (see FIG. 223 (b)) corresponding to the respective commands are executed. For other commands, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing 5 (see FIG. 223 (a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S12701, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. And the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S12702, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 231 to 233, details of the above-described display setting processing 5 (S12503), which is one of the V interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 5.

  In the display setting process 5, as shown in FIG. 231, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S13701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S13701: No). Then, it is determined in the previously executed command determination processing 5 that the new command has not been processed, the processing of S13702 to S13704 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S13705. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S13701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process 5 executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S13702), and then S13703 to S13704. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S13703, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S13703). If the error occurrence flag is on (S13703: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S13704).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S13801).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S13801, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S13802), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process 5 (S13704) or in the process of S13703, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S13703: No), the process proceeds to the process of S13705. .

  In S13705, a pointer update process is executed (S13705). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S13901). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S13901, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S13902). As a result, if it is End information (S13902: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S13903). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S13903: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S13904), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S13905), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S13903, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S13903: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S13906), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process 5. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S13902, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S13902: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process 5.

  Returning to FIG. 231, the description will be continued. After the pointer updating process, a ball-linked effect updating process 5 is executed (S13706).

  Here, the details of the ball-linked effect update process 5 (S13706) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 234 to 236. First, the details of the ball-linked effect update process 5 (S13706) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 234.

  In the ball-linked effect update process 5 (S13706), first, it is determined whether the ball-linked reach flag 233zp is on. (S14001). In the process of S14001, when it is determined that the ball-linked reach flag 233zp is off (S14001: No), the process is terminated as it is not the case of performing the ball-linked reach effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S14001, if it is determined that the ball-linked reach flag 233zp is on (S14001: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is the ball-linked display execution timing (S14002). Specifically, the timing at which the ball-linked display is executed is between 30 seconds and 60 seconds in the execution period of the super reach of 60 seconds. Therefore, it is determined that the timing at which the ball-linked display is to be executed is between 30 seconds and 60 seconds after the start of the ball-linked reach, which is the super reach for executing the ball-linked.

  In the process of S14002, if it is determined that it is not the ball-linked display execution timing (S14002: No), there is no need to execute the ball-linked display, and thus this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S14002, when it is determined that it is the ball linked display execution timing (S14002: Yes), the process proceeds to S14003 to execute the ball linked display.

  In the processing of S14003, it is determined whether or not the second flow path shooting flag 233zs is off in order to determine the flow path to be shot as the ball-linked display (S14003). In the process of S14003, if it is determined that the second flow path photographing flag 233zs is off (S14003: Yes), it is the case of photographing the first flow path as the ball-linked display, so that the first ball-linked effect An update process is performed (S14004), and the process proceeds to S14005. Details of the first ball-linked effect update process 5 (S14004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S14005, the second flow path camera 1700b photographs the second flow path (S14005), binarizes the photographed result into black and white, and performs edge extraction (image processing) (S14006). Then, it is determined whether there is an image of a sphere based on the result of the image processing in the processing of S14006 (S14007).

  In the processing of S14007, when it is determined that there is an image of a ball (S14007: Yes), this is a case where the game ball has flowed down to the second flow path, and the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path. In order to switch to the ball-linked reach effect using the image, the second flow path shooting flag 233zs is set to ON (S14008), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S14007 that there is no ball image (S14007: No), it means that the game ball has not flowed down to the second flow path, so that the ball link based on the first flow path is performed. In order to continue the reach effect, the process of S14008 is skipped, and the process ends.

  In the process of S14003, when it is determined that the second flow path shooting flag 233zs is ON (S14003; No), in order to display a ball-linked reach effect based on a game ball flowing down the second flow path, The second ball linked effect update process 5 is executed (S14009), and this process ends. The details of the second ball-linked effect update process 5 (S14009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the details of the first ball-linked effect update processing 5 (S14004) executed in the ball-linked effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 234) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The first ball-linked effect update process 5 (S14004) is a process for displaying a ball-linked reach effect based on gaming balls flowing down the first flow path.

  In the first ball-linked effect update processing 5 (S14004), first, the first flow path is photographed using the first flow path camera 1700a (S14101), and the photographed image of the first flow path is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. Is set (updated) as an insertion image on the back side (S14102). By the processing of S14102, the image of the first flow path is displayed on the back side of the design or effect as a ball-linked reach effect.

  Then, the photographing result is binarized into black and white to extract an edge (S14103), and the diameter of the sphere image is larger than a predetermined value (specifically, the sphere diameter is larger than 70% of the vertical direction of the photographing area) Is larger) is determined (S14104).

  In the processing of S14104, if it is determined that the diameter of the ball is larger than the predetermined value (S14104: Yes), the game ball flowing down the first flow path is closest to the camera, The process moves to S14105 in order to display an effect in which the symbol is broken by the closest game ball.

  In the process of S14105, the symbol data of the display data table buffer 233d is updated based on the value of the pointer 233f (that is, based on the elapsed time of the effect) (S14105), and the effect data of the display data table buffer 233d is updated. (S14106), and ends this process.

  In the processing of S14105 and S14106, by updating the design data and the effect data of the display data table buffer 233d based on the value of the pointer 233f, it is possible to set data corresponding to the elapsed time of the effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent an effect in which an effect in which a symbol is broken even though the remaining time of the effect is long is displayed, and a big hit is notified.

  In the present control example, the data of the display data table buffer 233d is set according to the elapsed time of the effect (remaining time of the effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the data of the display data table buffer 233d may be set by lottery. For example, two types of effects with different degrees of design cracking are prepared, and which effect is selected is determined by lottery. As a result, the variation of the effect can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the details of the second ball-linked effect update process 5 (S14009) executed in the ball-linked effect update process 5 (see FIG. 234) will be described with reference to FIG. The second ball-linked effect update process 5 (S14009) is a process for displaying a ball-linked reach effect based on gaming balls flowing down the first flow path.

  In the second ball-linked effect update processing 5 (S14009), similarly to the first ball-linked effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 235), the second flow path camera 1700b is used to photograph the second flow path (S14201). The captured image of the second channel is set (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d as the back side inserted image (S14202). By the processing in S14202, the image of the second flow path is displayed on the back side of the design or effect as a ball-linked reach effect.

  Then, the photographing result is binarized into black and white, and edges are extracted (S14203). If the diameter of the sphere image is larger than a predetermined value (specifically, the sphere diameter is larger than 70% of the vertical direction of the photographing area) Is larger) is determined (S14204).

  In the process of S14204, if it is determined that the diameter of the ball is larger than the predetermined value (S14204: Yes), the game ball flowing down the second flow path is closest to the camera, The process moves to S14205 in order to display an effect in which the symbol is broken by the closest game ball.

  In the processing of S14205, the symbol data of the display data table buffer 233d is updated based on the value of the pointer 233f (that is, based on the elapsed time of the effect) (S14205), and the effect data of the display data table buffer 233d is updated. (S14206).

  When the processing of S14206 is completed, the second flow path imaging flag 233zs is set to OFF to switch the ball-linked reach effect to an effect based on the imaging result of the first flow path (S14207), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 231, the description will be continued. When the process of S13706 is completed, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S13707). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S13707, together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S13708), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S13709). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S13709: No), the display setting processing 5 is terminated and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing 5. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S13709: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S13710).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S13710: Yes), the effect of the confirmed display has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S13711), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S13712). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S13713), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S13714). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S13715), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S13716), and it returns to V interrupt processing 5.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol determination flag set in the process of S13716 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing 5 (S12504), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S13716 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process 5 to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S13710, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S13710: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S13717). If the demonstration display flag is off (S13717: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The content is set in the buffer 233d (S13718), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S13719). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S13720). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S13721), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S13722), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S13717, if the demonstration display flag is on (S13717: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and that the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to V interrupt processing 5. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process 5 so that the demonstration effect is started again. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a newer display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing 5 is also performed in the simple display setting processing 5 (S12510) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 221 (b)). . However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. 193d is set in the display data table buffer 233d to set a display data table defining that the image (one of FIGS. 193 (b) and (c)) is to be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 237 and FIG. 238, details of the above-described transfer setting processing 5 (S12505), which is one of the V interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 237 (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process 5.

  In the transfer setting process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S14301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S14301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process 5 is executed (S14302), the transfer setting process 5 ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process 5. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S14301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S14301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process 5 is executed (S14303), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process 5. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process 5 (S14302), which is one of the transfer setting processes 5 (S12505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 237 (b). FIG. 237 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process 5 (S14302).

  In the resident image transfer setting process 5, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S14501), and if the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S14401: Yes), and it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S14402). In the process of S14402, after giving an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S14402 (S14402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S14402: Yes), the process proceeds to S14403. Also, as a result of the process of S14401, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S14401: No), the process proceeds to S14403.

  In the process of S14403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S14403). If there is any untransferred resident target image data (S14403: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S14404), and the resident image transfer setting process 5 is ended.

  Thus, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process 5 includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 writes the transfer data information in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S14403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S14403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S14405), and the resident image transfer setting processing 5 ends. Thereby, in the V interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 221 (b)), the simple command determination processing 5 (see S12509 in FIG. 221 (b)) and the simple display setting processing 5 (see S12510 in FIG. 221 (b)) And the command determination process 5 (see FIGS. 222 to 230) and the display setting process 5 (see FIGS. 231 to 233) are executed, so that the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol is set. The display device 81 displays a normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process 5 (see FIG. 238) (see S14301: No in FIG. 237 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process 5, the MPU 231 executes all the resident video RAM 235 except the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which have already been transferred in the main process. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting processing 5 (S14303), which is one of the transfer setting processing 5 (S12505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process 5 (S14303).

  In the normal image transfer setting process 5, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process 5 (S13705) of the previously executed display setting process 5 (S12503). The information described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is obtained (S14501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S14502). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S14502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S14503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S14504), and the flow shifts to the processing of S14505.

  Also, in the process of S14502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S14502: No), the process of S14503 and S14504 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S14505. In the process of S14505, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S14505), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S14505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S14506).

  In the process of S14506, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S14506 (S14506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S14506: Yes), the process proceeds to S14507. Also, as a result of the process of S14505, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S14505: No), the process proceeds to S14507.

  In the process of S14507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S14507). If the transfer start flag is on (S14507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S14508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S14503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S14517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S14507: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S14509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S14509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process 5 ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S14509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S14510), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S14511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S14512), and the process proceeds to S14513.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S14511, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process 5 ends.

  In the process of S14513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S14513). The determination in the process of S14513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S14513, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S14513: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process 5 ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S14513, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S14513: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S14514). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S14514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S14515), and the normal transfer setting process 5 ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing 5, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing 5, and as a result, the display stop type When it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the command is the jackpot type, image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process 5 to instruct the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. On the other hand, since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. be able to.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 239, details of the above-described drawing process 5 (S12506), which is one of the V interrupt processes 5 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the drawing process 5.

  In the drawing process 5, the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process 5 (S12504) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α The drawing list shown in FIG. 192 is generated from the blending information, the color information, the filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process 5 (S12505) (S14601). In other words, in the processing of S14601, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are determined for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing 5 (S12504). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the rear side from the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process 5 (S12505), the head address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. ), The last address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S14602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. In addition, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S14602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S14603). Then, the drawing process 5 ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process 5 (see FIG. 221 (b)) is executed, it is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, details of the above-described periodic shooting process for display 5 (S12508), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the display regular photographing process 5. In the display regular shooting process 5, the first entrance port 64 and the second entrance port 640 are regularly displayed in order to display a highlight video (image) at the time of the winning in the opening effect of the jackpot game. This is a process for image capturing.

  In the process of the regular shooting process for display 5 (S12508), first, it is determined whether or not it is the regular shooting timing (S14701). Specifically, it is determined whether or not 0.1 second has elapsed from the previous shooting timing.

  If it is determined in the processing of S14701 that it is the regular shooting timing (S14701: Yes), the first entrance port 64 and the first entrance port 64 using the first entrance camera 1700e and the second entrance camera 1700f (700a) are used. The 2 entrance 640 is photographed (S14702).

  Then, the images stored in the regular first image storage area 233zq and the regular second image storage area 233zr are shifted (S14703). The image of the first entrance 64 photographed by the processing of S14702 is stored in the first area (first area) of the periodic first image storage area 233zq after the shift processing (S14704), and the second photographed by the processing of S14702. The image of the entrance 640 is stored in the first area (first area) of the periodic second image storage area 233zr after the shift processing (S14705), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S14701 that it is not the regular shooting timing (S14701: No), the processing of S14702 to S14705 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the display regular photographing process 5 (S12508), the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are photographed every 0.1 second, and the photographed images are periodically stored in the first image. It is stored in the area 233zq and the periodic second image storage area 233zr. By using the images stored in the regular first image storage area 233zq or the regular second image storage area 233zr, it is possible to highlight the prize which has triggered a big hit in the opening effect.

  As described above, in the fifth control example, the ball-linked reach effect is executed using the image of the game ball taken by the first flow path camera 1700a or the second flow path camera 1700b. In this ball-linked reach effect, symbols and effects are varied according to the image of the game ball taken. As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the symbol is changed (specifically, broken) by the movement of the game ball displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to urge the player to fire the game ball in order to display the game ball on the display device 81, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the ball-linked reach effect, an effect based on the photographing result of the first flow path camera 1700a is executed, and when the game ball is reflected in the photographed image of the second flow path camera 1700b, the photographing of the second flow path camera 1700b is performed. It is configured to switch to the effect based on the result. This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the game ball will flow down the flow path (flow path b in FIG. 179) where the game ball is reflected on the second flow path camera 1700b, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  The effect (ball-linked effect) of combining the captured image of the game ball with an effect image such as a design or an effect is not limited to the reach time. For example, it may be naturally displayed as an effect indicating whether or not the privilege given after the big hit game is more advantageous for the player.

  Further, a predetermined path (for example, a path in which only game balls fired at 100% intensity can flow down) may be provided, and only the flown down game balls may be photographed. The predetermined path may be configured such that a game ball can be entered based on a player's operation (for example, based on pressing a button for executing a right-handed game). Thus, the game ball can be photographed based on the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. A ball entrance is provided in which game balls flowing down a predetermined path can enter (or can easily enter) a predetermined number (for example, one) based on the number of game balls entering the ball entrance. May be configured to pay out the game balls. In this way, when performing a ball-linked effect based on an image of a game ball, it is possible to prevent the game balls used for the shooting from being wasted, and to actively perform the ball-linked effect. Can improve the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, when the game ball is shown in the image captured by the second flow path camera 1700b, the effect is switched to the effect based on the image captured by the second camera 1700b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be switched by lottery, or may be configured to be switched when the jackpot is highly expected. Further, a sensor for detecting the presence of a game ball in the shooting area of the second flow path camera 1700b may be provided, or the presence of a moving object may be determined based on the shooting result. Of course good.

  In addition, when the image of the game ball becomes a predetermined size or more, the effect of breaking the symbol (or cracking) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. A sensor for detecting that the game ball has approached a predetermined distance may be provided, or the distance may be measured based on the result of camera focus adjustment.

  Furthermore, the effect based on the photographing result of the first flow path camera 1700a and the effect based on the photographing result of the second flow path camera 1700b may be configured to be different. For example, in the effect based on the photographing result of the first flow path camera 1700a, an effect of breaking a symbol may be executed, and in the effect based on the photographing result of the second flow path camera 1700b, an effect of defeating a pin may be executed. . In addition, when the symbol is not broken in the effect based on the photographing result of the first flow path camera 1700a, and when the game ball used for the photograph flows down to the photographing area of the second flow path camera 1700b, the symbol is again displayed. It may be configured to display an effect (so-called resurrection effect) of whether or not it is broken. As described above, by switching the effect in accordance with the path along which one game ball flows, the player can be made to pay attention to the path along which the game ball flows, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  In the fifth control example, as a jackpot opening effect, a highlight effect of displaying a video (image) at the time of winning a game ball that has triggered the jackpot as a highlight is executed. This makes it possible to recognize the state of the timing (that is, the past) at which the gaming ball that has won the jackpot has won, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  In addition, in the opening effect, a reel effect that simulates the timing at which the lottery result is a big hit is displayed together with the highlight effect. Thereby, the state of the lottery executed inside the gaming machine can be pseudo-visualized and displayed according to the past state of the game balls flowing down, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The highlight effect and the reel effect are displayed when the lottery result is a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed when the lottery result is out of order. This makes it possible to give the player an impression that the lottery result has been missed at a regrettable timing, thereby improving the interest of the player. Furthermore, not only the image at the time of the last prize but also the image at the time of the prize of several times in the past may be displayed.

  The reel effect may be any other effect as long as it indicates the timing when the lottery result is a big hit. For example, a design may be used in which symbols indicating a big hit and a miss are alternately lit, and one of the symbols is maintained in a lit state at the timing of entering the game ball.

  In the highlight effect, only the captured image of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a captured image of a path (from being fired to winning a prize) from which a game ball that has caused a jackpot may flow may be displayed, or the flow-down path may be schematically displayed without displaying the captured image. The indicated image may be displayed.

  As described above, the second entrance camera 1700f determines whether the prize to the second entrance is normal (for example, the electric accessory 640a provided in association with the second entrance 640). It is also used when acquiring an image for determining whether or not the opening and closing are normal). In the present control example, a photographed image used for determining an abnormality is photographed by the sound lamp control device 113, and a photographed image used for effect display such as a highlight effect is photographed by the display control device 114. Thereby, the processing load can be distributed. Note that, when the shooting timing by the second entrance camera 1700f overlaps between the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the shooting by the sound lamp control device 113 is prioritized. I have. Thereby, the abnormality determination processing with a high priority can be normally executed, and the accuracy of the abnormality determination can be improved.

  The audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to also serve as the second entrance camera 1700f (700b). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and cameras capable of independently photographing the second entrance entrance are provided. Of course, it may be provided.

  In the fifth control example, as a round effect in a predetermined round during a jackpot, a player image or an image around a button, which is taken at the time of a cut-in effect or a button press effect executed before the jackpot is executed, is taken. It is configured to execute a fusion effect that is displayed in combination with the round effect. Thereby, since the image of the player himself is displayed as a jackpot round effect, unexpectedness can be given to the player, and the effect variations can be increased without increasing the capacity of the effect image.

  In the fifth control example, when it is determined that the fusion effect is executable (a state in which an image of the player or an image around the button is stored), the fusion effect is executed. However, the player may be able to select whether or not to execute the fusion effect. In this case, both an effect image used for a normal round effect and a fusion effect image may be created, and the image to be displayed (effect) may be determined based on the timing at which the player selects the effect. Further, a predetermined normal effect (effect not performing the fusion effect) is set as the round effect during the jackpot, and if it is determined that the fusion effect is to be performed, the fusion effect image (the image or button of the player) is set. Providing the player with a fresh effect by simply performing the process of replacing the image in the specific effect (the effect during the big hit) by executing control to replace the image used in the normal effect with the image used in the normal effect can do.

  Note that, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the player and the surroundings of the frame button 22 are photographed without notifying the shooting timing at the time of the cut-in effect or the button press effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The shooting timing may be adjusted based on an operation of the player (for example, pressing the frame button 22). Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which shooting is performed at a timing unwilling for the player.

  Further, it may be possible to set so that the image of the player is not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player who feels discomfort that the image of the player himself is displayed from giving discomfort. Even when the image of the player is not displayed, the image of the player may be captured and stored in the RAM. Thereby, the image of the unauthorized player can be acquired.

  Further, the captured image of the player or the like is fused and displayed in the round effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be displayed as a part of the effect displayed in the symbol change display, or may be changed and displayed as a part of the symbol.

  Instead of using the image of the player as it is, a character image based on the captured image may be generated, and the character image may be used for the effect. For example, various parameters such as the presence or absence of glasses and the color of clothes may be determined, and a character matching the determined parameters may be generated.

  Further, a recorded sound may be output in place of a captured image of a player or the like, or an effect corresponding to the acquired pulse may be displayed. May be displayed. The captured image of the player or the like is not limited to a still image, but may be a moving image.

  In the present control example, various devices (second entrance 640, through gate 67, special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a) provided on the game board 13, and the state of the game ball flowing down on the game board 13 Is periodically photographed using photographing means (analysis camera 700z), and the presence or absence of abnormality or the cause of the abnormality is determined using the photographed image. It is possible to execute the abnormality determination processing with higher reliability than the processing.

  In the present control example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives an abnormal winning command set when the main control device 110 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred, it is determined that the abnormal winning has occurred at a location where the abnormal winning has occurred. It is configured to read image data of a period earlier than that, analyze the contents of the image data, and identify the cause of the abnormal winning. Therefore, the period during which the process using the image data is executed can be minimized, and the processing load of the process using the image data can be reduced. Further, since only the image data of the portion necessary for the abnormal processing is processed, the processing load of the image data can be reduced. Further, by reducing the processing load of the image data in each abnormal processing, it is possible to add detailed processing to each abnormal processing.

  In this control example, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the abnormal winning command, the abnormal processing using the image data is executed, but the image data is used at other timings. Abnormal processing may be performed. In this case, for example, the start of the jackpot game that provides a large amount of prize balls to the player may be set as the execution condition of the abnormal processing. As described above, even when the abnormal winning command has not been received, the abnormal state is executed by using the image data when the gaming state shifts to a state that is advantageous to the player. More appropriate determination can be made. Further, regardless of the transition of the game state, the abnormality processing using the image data may be executed periodically (for example, every 10 minutes).

  In the present control example, image data obtained by performing binarization processing on an image photographed by the photographing means (analysis camera 700z) is stored, and abnormal processing is executed using the image data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the storage unit as compared with a case where the image captured by the imaging unit (analysis camera 700z) is stored as it is and the abnormal processing is executed using the stored image (the captured image) as it is. it can. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the process of determining whether the image data is normal.

  Further, the abnormality processing using the image data is configured to be executed in a plurality of stages, namely, The reference image data previously stored (stored) in the reference image storage area 223b is subtracted from the image data read out from the regular photographed image storage area 223zi, and the value indicated by the difference data is within the allowable range (in this control example, 0%). ) Is determined to be normal, the first determination process of determining that the value is out of the allowable range (other than 0 in this control example) is not normal, and then the details are determined based on the determination result of the first determination process. Since a stepwise process of performing a distinction process (the presence or absence of a game ball image, the presence or absence of a foreign object image) is performed, the control load in the abnormal winning process can be reduced.

  In this control example, a configuration is used in which the binarized data serving as the reference is subtracted from the binarized image data, and the abnormality determination is performed using the subtracted image created by the difference. May be used. For example, the determination as to whether the image is normal or not may be performed using the captured image as it is. In this case, in the reference image storage area 223b, a reference image indicating a game ball, an electric accessory 640a, a reference image indicating an aspect when the variable winning device 65 is operating normally, and an upper portion of the through gate 67 are provided. It is preferable to store a reference image indicating a case where the interval between the nails is normal, and determine whether or not it is normal by comparing the standard image with a regular image.

  Further, in the present control example, the period of the image data used for the abnormal processing is set to a predetermined period (1 second from 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds before) at which the abnormal processing is executed. It is possible to execute the abnormality determination using the image data from the state before the occurrence of. Therefore, the cause of the abnormality can be specified in more detail.

  It should be noted that a period other than the present control example may be used as a period of the image data used for the abnormality processing. For example, a photographed image from 1.5 seconds ago to the present time may be used. Thereby, it is possible to reliably execute the abnormality process for the situation near the second entrance 640 when it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and it is possible to further improve the accuracy of the cause analysis of the abnormal winning.

  In this control example, a configuration is used in which the reference image data is subtracted from the image data corresponding to each of the regularly shot images shot at 0.1 second intervals, and an abnormality is determined using the difference data (subtracted image). However, another configuration may be used to execute the abnormality determination using the regularly shot image. For example, the regular photographed images (10 images) for a predetermined period (1 second) are continuously compared and determined, an area where the image data changes is specified, and whether or not the image data changes normally is determined. May be executed. By using such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not each regularly shot image is normal without using the reference image storage area 223b. In addition, since it is possible to execute the abnormality determination having the concept of the period, for example, it is possible to determine a state in which the electric accessory 640a is open for more than a predetermined period (for example, one second). Naturally, it may be configured to include both such a configuration and the configuration of the present control example. Further, as a photographing unit, a unit for photographing a moving image (for example, a video camera) may be used.

  In the present control example, the binarization process is performed on the entire region of the regular photographed image when the abnormal process is performed. For example, a predetermined designated region (second incoming Only the area near the mouth) may be the target area for the binarization processing. Specifically, a means for designating only a specific coordinate range in the image data may be provided, or an image outside the target area may be provided. May be subjected to a masking process. This makes it possible to narrow the range in which the binarization process is executed, and thus has the effect of reducing the processing load of the abnormal process.

  When the analysis camera 700z is attached to the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to attach the game ball to a place where the game ball does not collide with the analysis camera 700z (for example, a place covered with a decoration). In order to improve the shape, the shape and arrangement of the ornaments are made different depending on the type of the gaming machine 10. In addition, the location to be photographed by the analysis camera 700z (for example, the vicinity of the second entrance) is made different depending on the type of the gaming machine 10 in order to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, the distance between the analysis camera 700z and a location to be photographed (for example, near the second entrance) differs depending on the type of the gaming machine 10 for each model. Furthermore, as in this control example, the analysis camera 700z can be used to photograph a plurality of locations (the second entrance 640, the through-hole 67, and the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a). The distance between 700z and the location to be imaged will be different. In such a situation, when an image is photographed using the same analysis camera 700z, a game ball or a photographed object (for example, the second entrance 640, the through 67, the special winning opening (specific winning) Since the size of the mouth) 65a) differs or the board area to be photographed differs, the reference data (reference image data) used for the abnormality processing is different for each type of the gaming machine 10 or for the photographing target. It has to be provided for each imaging object, and there is a problem that the storage capacity of the reference data increases.

  In order to solve this problem, even if the distance between the analysis camera 700z and the location to be photographed is different, a game ball or a photographing object (for example, the second entrance 640, the through 67, In order to photograph the large winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a or the like with the same size, it is necessary to make the specification of the analysis camera 700z different for each type of the gaming machine 10 or for each photographing target to be photographed. However, there is a problem that the analysis camera 700z cannot be shared, which leads to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, when the above-described game ball discrimination processing is executed, the presence of the game ball can be reliably detected even when the size of the shot game ball is different. In addition, by configuring the area used for the abnormality processing in the image captured by the analysis camera 700z so that the area used for the abnormality processing can be specified, an image other than the area used for the abnormality processing is captured depending on the installation position of the analysis 700. However, the processing load can be reduced.

  In this control example, a configuration in which a binarization process is performed on an image captured by the analysis camera 700z, a subtraction image is created by subtracting reference image data, and a cause analysis of an abnormality is performed using the subtraction image. By doing so, the amount of data used for the abnormality processing is reduced, but the cause analysis may be performed by other methods. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which an actually photographed image is used as it is for the cause analysis of the abnormality. In this case, for example, in the process of S11604 described above, when determining whether or not the shape of the electric accessory 640a is normal, the open image indicating the open state of the electric accessory 640a and the closing indicating the closed state are used as the reference images. An image may be prepared in advance, and it may be determined that the shape of the motorized accessory 640a is not normal by comparing the image with each regular image. In addition, when it is determined that the shape is abnormal in one of the regular shot images, the process of determining the shape in all subsequent regular shot images may be performed. This is because when the electric accessory 640a actually changes in shape due to breakage or the like, the shape does not automatically return to a normal shape, so that the shape change is reliably grasped.

  Further, by determining a change in the shape of the motorized accessory 640a using a plurality of regular photographed images, for example, one photographed image photographed as a regular photographed image is moved from the closed position to the open position when the motorized accessory 640a is closed. The game ball flows down between the moving timing and the camera (second entrance camera) 700a for photographing the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a, and a part of the electric accessory 640a is played. Even if the discrimination result is temporarily calculated based on an image in which the shape of the electric accessory 340a such as the timing at which the electric accessory 340a is not properly discriminated, by performing the continuous discrimination, the temporary discrimination is performed. It is possible to suppress erroneous determination based on the result.

  In the present control example, predetermined portions (the vicinity of the second entrance 640, the through gate 67, and the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a) of the game board 13 are periodically (at intervals of 0.1 second) by the analysis camera 700z. Although the configuration is such that the image capturing process is executed, other configurations may be used. For example, the configuration is such that the analysis camera 700z captures an image only when the game ball is located at a predetermined position. You may. In this case, for example, the analysis camera 700z is configured by a single focus lens, and the game ball passes a predetermined position (for example, the open position of the electric accessory 640a, the through upper position, or the like) of the shooting area of the analysis camera 700z. In such a case, the focus may be set, and when the focus is set, the analysis camera 700z may capture an image. With this configuration, the size of the game ball to be photographed can be unified, and the presence or absence of the game ball can be easily determined in the abnormal processing.

<Modification of Fifth Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the above-described fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth control example described above, as the display camera 1700, the first flow path camera 1700a, the second flow path camera 1700b, the player camera 1700c, the button camera 1700d, the first entrance camera 1700e, and the second entrance Using the camera 1700f (700za), an effect that matches the flowing state of the game ball or an effect using an image captured in the past (displays an image indicating that the game ball has entered the first entrance port 64) The effect of the game is performed during the pattern change or the jackpot game by performing an effect, an image using the image of the periphery of the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is operated or an image of the player's face). It was configured to improve.

  On the other hand, in the modified example of the fifth control example, in addition to the configuration of the fifth control example described above, a display camera (point A camera 1700g) for photographing predetermined points (points A and B) on the game board 13 is provided. , B point camera 1700h) is provided so that a situation in which a game ball flows down on the game board 13 can be photographed in more detail. And it is comprised so that the content of the effect performed after that may differ with the path | route which a game ball flows down. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the pleasure of launching the game ball to the player, and to allow the player to actively play the game ball.

  In the modified example of the fifth control example and the fifth control example described above, a point camera 1700g and a point B camera 1700h are added as the display camera 1700, and various controls are performed by adding the display camera 1700. Are added, and an effect using an image captured by the added display camera 1700 is added, and the configuration of the exception is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the point A camera 1700g and the point B camera 1700h are the same cameras as the other display cameras 1700, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. Further, a new effect performed using the point A camera 1700g and the point B camera 1700h is also based on the various control processes described in the above-described fifth control example, and is therefore described in detail. Is omitted.

  Next, a configuration of the game board 13 used in a modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a front view showing the game board 13 in a modified example of the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 241, a point A camera 1700g is provided so that an upstream side of the right side of the game area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80) is to be photographed. The point B camera 1700h is provided so that a specific route b among the downstream flow routes on the right side is an object to be photographed. Thereby, when a game (a so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball is fired toward the right side of the game area of the game board 13 is performed, the game ball fired in the right-handed game is photographed by the point A camera 1700g. After passing through the area, it flows down either the route b which is a shooting area of the B point camera 1700h or the route a which is not a shooting target of the B point camera 1700h.

  In this way, the path through which the launched game ball flows down in the game area of the game board 13 passes between the time when the game ball is launched and the time when the ball enters one of the entrances (including the out entrance). By arranging the display camera 1700 so that the number of shooting areas to be shot is different, it is possible to execute an effect based on the number of times the same game ball is shot, and the There is an effect that the player can be interested and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, a description will be given of the tracking effect executed in the modification of the fifth control example. FIGS. 242 (a) and 242 (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the chase effect. The chase effect is an effect that varies the effect mode of the effect to be executed later depending on whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 flows down a predetermined path, and is determined at four predetermined positions in the game area. (In this control example, an unusual effect is executed when the game ball passes (wins) through the launching opening (start), the point A, the point B, and the first entrance 64 (starting opening, goal). It is configured to be. When this tracking effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 242 (a), the passing route designated in the current tracking effect is displayed (start, point A, point B, goal). Then, an image indicating the status of each passing route is displayed. On the upper side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the words "chance if the ball in the picture wins" indicating the contents of the current chase effect are displayed.

  Here, when the shot game ball passes through the designated area, the image of each game area is changed to “pass” as shown in FIG. 242 (b), and the game ball passes (the command is cleared). ) Is clearly displayed to the player.

  When the game ball finally passes through the designated area and enters the start port (first entrance 64) of the goal, all four images are switched to the character "pass", and thereafter, the normal An effect different from the above is performed. Note that the display screen illustrated in FIG. 242 is merely an example, and the effect contents of the chase effect may be different. For example, in the present control example, the number of passing areas specified in the tracking effect is four, but the number of passing areas may be more or less. In the tracking effect of the present control example, the content of the effect to be executed later is made different depending on whether or not the game ball passes through all the designated areas. The content of the effect may be determined based on the ratio of the number of passed areas to the total number of game areas.

  In this tracking effect, in the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, when a fluctuation pattern for executing the tracking effect is set, a shooting command for display is set, In the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 222) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the display tracking effect command is executed when it is determined that the command has been received, and the designated area set in the display tracking effect command is set. Is executed for the display camera corresponding to. Then, it is determined at any time whether or not each display camera has photographed a game ball, and if it is determined that the game ball has been photographed, a process of switching the corresponding photographed image to an image indicating “passing” is executed ( FIG. 242 (b)). The content of the control processing for determining whether or not the game ball is captured in the captured image is the same as that in the above-described fifth control example, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Also, in this modification, as a method of tracking the flow of one game ball, when a game ball passes through a start area (an area where the game ball first passes) among a plurality of areas designated as a tracking effect. In each of the designated areas, a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) delayed by a period required for the game ball to flow from the start area to another designated area is set in each designated area. It is configured to determine whether or not it has been performed. Thus, the tracking effect can be executed with a simple control.

  In addition, in the present modified example, a plurality of areas designated as a tracking effect are simultaneously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display image is updated at any time only in the designated area serving as the period for determining the flow (passing) of the game ball, and the display images corresponding to the other designated areas are images in which the game ball is not photographed (for example, the reference image). The image and the like stored in the storage area 222zb are displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game balls other than the game balls used as the tracking effect from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  Note that the game ball used for the tracking effect may be specified using a method other than the method used in the present modification. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which identification information that can be identified is attached to a game ball used for a game, and the identification information is determined to identify the game ball. This makes it possible to reliably grasp the flow of a specific game ball.

  Further, in the present modified example, the designated portion used in the chase effect is set at a plurality of portions in the game region. However, for example, a region dedicated to the chase effect may be provided in the game region. In this case, for example, it has an opening through which the game ball can enter, a plurality of paths through which the game ball can flow down the opening, and a special entrance port through which the ball can enter when any of the plurality of paths flow down. A special unit may be provided, the special entrance may be configured to pay out one prize ball when a game ball enters, and the display camera 1700 may be installed in each of a plurality of paths. Thereby, without reducing the number of game balls, it is possible to form a game area dedicated to production, and furthermore, it is possible to execute a production based on the contents of the actual flow of the game balls. Can be provided.

  As described above, in the chase effect performed in the modification of the fifth control example, the effect content is determined based on the flow path of the game ball, and therefore, the flow path of the game ball to the player. And interest in the game can be improved. In this modification, the goal of the chase effect (the last designated area) is used as the starting port. However, other than that, for example, the goal of the chase effect (the last specified area) is set as the out port 66, and the starting port is used. One of a plurality of routes through which a game ball that has not won a prize can flow down may be used as the designated area. With such a configuration, it is possible to interest the game balls that did not win the starting opening.

  In the tracking effect executed in the modified example of the fifth control example, a plurality of game areas are set as designated areas, and an image of the designated area is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if various areas of the game area are designated as designated areas, it is possible to execute effects that are easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the designated area, the display image is switched from the image of the designated area to the image indicating the passage of the game ball, so that the progress of the tracking effect can be easily notified to the player. it can.

  In the present modification, a plurality of designated areas to be tracked are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time. May be displayed in the order in which specific game balls pass. In this case, as the timing for switching the display indicating the designated area, a period required for the game ball to pass through each designated area may be set in advance, and the switching may be performed based on the period. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through one specified area, the display may be switched to a display indicating the next specified area. Thereby, the effect of the effect of tracking one game ball can be enhanced.

  Next, a multi-screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. This screen is a screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22), and includes various devices (the first ball entrance 64, the The two shots of the entrance 640, the special winning opening (specific winning opening) 65a, and the through (through gate) 67 are collectively displayed on the screen.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the flow condition (entering condition) of the game ball with respect to various devices provided on the game board 13 only by looking at the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can do. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand. In the example shown in FIG. 243, five places (“starting opening” (first entrance 64), “denchu” (second entrance 640), “attacker” (large winning opening ( (Specific winning opening) 65a), “Launch” (the position where the game ball enters the game area), “Through” (the through gate 67), and an example in which the variable display of the third symbol is displayed are shown. The display content of the multi-screen is configured to be arbitrarily settable by the player, and a screen (not shown) for setting the display content of the multi-screen includes a “custom” in which the player arbitrarily sets the display content. "And" Automatic ", which automatically sets the display content, are displayed in a selectable manner. If" Custom "is selected, the number, type, and size of the displayed area are set as detailed setting items. Can be set for each state (normal, jackpot, probable) On the other hand, when "Random" is selected, only the game area required in the current game state is displayed on the screen, and the variation display of the third symbol is displayed based on the result of the special symbol lottery. An area variable effect in which the size of the region to be executed is variable is performed, and even if the variable display of the third symbol whose lottery result is a big hit is performed in the state where the multi-screen is selected, The variable display effect can be executed using a large display area (for example, five areas equally divided into six) instead of a small display area (one area equally divided into six). By changing the display area in which the three symbols of variable display are executed as part of the effect, it is possible to execute an effect that expects a big hit to the player.

  Although not shown in FIG. 243, the total number of passed (photographed) game balls is configured to be displayed in each area of the multi-screen. By comparing the total number of game balls that have entered the starting port with the total number of game balls, a game strategy can be easily set. The display of the total number of game balls displayed on the multi-screen is configured to be resettable by a player by an arbitrary operation. Therefore, it is possible to measure the number of passing game balls in a specific period, or to erase the accumulated data up to now when ending the game.

  As described above, in the multi-screen displayed in the modified example of the fifth control example, images obtained by photographing various devices provided at various places in the game area are collected on the third symbol display device 81. Since the display is performed, the player can easily grasp the status of the various devices (how the game balls pass).

  In addition, since the content displayed on the multi-screen can be arbitrarily set by the player, the screen can be set according to the player's preference. In this case, the number, type, and size of the displayed area can be set for each game state (normal, big hit, probable change) as a setting content, so that the player can easily grasp only necessary information. can do.

  Further, by automatically setting the multi-screen setting, the display content suitable for the game state is set. For example, during a right-handed game, only devices that can pass (win) a right-hitted game ball are provided. Is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand. Further, when the multi-screen is automatically set, the size of each display area of the multi-screen is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .

  In this modification, the multi-screen is used so that the player can easily grasp the status of various devices provided in the game area. However, the multi-screen may be used for other purposes. For example, the multi-screen described above may be used as a screen for selecting a plurality of effects, and an effect corresponding to the screen on which the game ball is photographed may be executed. As a result, the effect can be determined according to the flow condition of the game ball, and thus a new game property can be provided.

  As described above, in the fifth control example and the modification example of the fifth control example, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a camera capable of photographing a game ball or various devices, and the presence or absence of an abnormality or the content Although it was determined whether or not the camera was used for producing a still image or a moving image. Further, the method of storing (storing) information captured by various cameras is not limited to the above-described control example, and any method may be employed as long as it is a well-known general technique. Further, the location (area) where the imaging means (analysis camera 700z, display camera 1700) captures may be a location where a game ball can pass (fall), for example, a specific state (a lottery result of a special symbol is determined). A specific area (a so-called V area) in which a game state advantageous to the player is given by the passing of the game ball in a state where a specific result is obtained, and a holding device that can hold the game ball in the game area. A photographing means (analysis camera 700z, display camera 1700) for photographing the object may be provided.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the center cover 620 as an example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device emitting light and receiving light reflected by the light object A sensor device for detecting the presence of the object on the front side of the game machine, wherein the light transmission material is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, at least the front is formed as a convex curved surface. A gaming machine A1 comprising a front member made of:

  Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device that is disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and an object that emits light and emits the light (eg, a player's hand) 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine equipped with a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is exposed so as to be visible to the player, the interest of the player is impaired. For this reason, the sensor device is arranged on the back side of the decorative member, and is difficult to be visually recognized by a player. When the sensor device emits light and detects the presence of an object by receiving light reflected by the object through the opening portion on the side of the decoration member, the sensor device detects the presence of the object on the side of the decoration member. The further away from the part (retreating to the back side), the more difficult it is for the player to see, but the range in which the object can be detected becomes narrower, and the sensor device is opened to the side of the decorative member. The closer the object is, the wider the range in which the object can be detected, but the easier it is for the player to visually recognize the object. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for a player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the sensor device emits light from the sensor device because it is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and has at least the front surface formed as a convex curved surface and the front member made of a light transmitting material. The reflected light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the light reflected by the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, since the sensor device can be disposed apart from the opening portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side), the sensor device is hardly visually recognized by the player, and the object is removed. A detectable range can be secured. In addition, since the front member is made of a light-transmitting material, visibility of a symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured.

  Further, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when light emitted from the sensor device is reflected at the front of the front member, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is set to be more acute at a position close to the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each reflection) can be made more obtuse, and the range in which an object can be detected can be increased accordingly. The same applies to the case where the light reflected by the object is reflected at the front of the front member.

  The gaming machine A2, wherein in the gaming machine A1, the thickness of at least a portion of the front member formed as the curved surface is set to a substantially constant value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the thickness of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. And the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured. In addition, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacing another member (a displaceable member) can be secured accordingly.

  The gaming machine A2 includes a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, wherein the front member has a first portion of a peripheral edge of the front member closer to the front than a second portion. A gaming machine A3, wherein the gaming machine A3 is disposed at a position where:

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A2, the front member is disposed at a position where the first part of the peripheral edge of the front member is closer to the front than the second part, so that the game is played. The first portion can be used as a passage when the displacement member is displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the second portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is located on the back side of the first portion, the curvature of the front member can be increased in a limited space accordingly.

  The first portion of the front member is disposed substantially at the same position as the back of the game board or at a position closer to the front than the back of the game board, and the second portion of the front member is located at a position higher than the back of the game board. A gaming machine A4, which is provided at a position on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A3, the first portion of the front member is disposed substantially at the same position as the rear surface of the game board or at a position closer to the front side than the rear surface of the game board. Interference of the displacement member with the first portion can be more reliably suppressed, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly. In addition, since the second portion of the front member is disposed at a position on the back side of the back of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be further increased, and accordingly, the front of the front member is exposed to light. It can be easily used as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device hard to be visually recognized by a player.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, a center frame is provided at an inner edge of an opening of the gaming board, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between a back side of the gaming board and a back side of the front member. A gaming machine A5, comprising: a main body member, and a rotating member rotatably disposed on the main body member, wherein a second portion of the front member is connected to the center frame.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the second portion is connected to the center frame, so that the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the back side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the dust or dust can be blocked by the second portion (front member). -It is possible to suppress the occurrence of soaring on the optical path of the received light and a decrease in detection accuracy.

  In the gaming machine A5, the center frame includes a stage on which a ball is formed to be rollable, and a second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. Gaming machine A6.

  Here, there is conventionally known a stage of a center frame in which a back wall is erected so that a ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member wraps around the front end from the standing end of the back wall erected from the stage, or is folded back by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. Influence the ball rolling on the stage. On the other hand, in order to prevent the ball rolling on the stage from being affected by the wind, the rear wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the periphery of the stage ball (that is, a closed passage is formed). Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, the interest of the game is spoiled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, the second portion of the front member is connected to at least the area including the stage of the center frame, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, since there is no need to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage and to suppress the influence of the wind from affecting the flow of the ball.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined interval from an inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or a center frame.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in any one of the gaming machines A5 and A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined interval from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or the center frame. Further, the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other via the predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member) from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of a peripheral edge of the front member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member, so that the rotating member is rotated. Can be caused to flow toward an upper region (a region above the opening of the game board) of the game area, and it is possible to suppress the influence of the wind from affecting the flow of the ball. That is, the ball that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial ball that has been fired from the firing device and flowed into the game area, and has a relatively high speed. Less susceptible to wind than a moving ball. In other words, the wind can flow toward an area where the ball is less likely to be affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased accordingly, and the effect can be improved.

  Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member), the air heated by the heat is raised, and the first portion of the front member is located on the upper side in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member. The gap (predetermined interval) formed in the region, that is, the communication between the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be formed more upward. As a result, heat generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member) is easily flowed to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, and the heat is trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A9 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein a front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed at least below the horizontal direction.

  Here, since the front member is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, it is almost faced to the face of the player (facing directly in front). Therefore, when the front of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, light from fluorescent lights and other gaming machines installed on the ceiling in the store is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzling, The visibility of the liquid crystal display device may be degraded (the liquid crystal display device may be difficult to see due to the reflection of fluorescent lights and other game machines on the front member).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed at least below the horizontal direction. The light incident on the front of the front member can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or another gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the front member, such light can be suppressed from being reflected toward the player, and as a result, It is possible to suppress that the player feels dazzling and that the visibility of the liquid crystal display device is deteriorated.

  In the gaming machine A9, a first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of a peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member has a thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as the curved surface. The gaming machine A10, wherein the gaming machine A10 is set to a constant value, and the horizontal component increases as the front is positioned vertically upward.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member, and the front member is formed at least as a curved surface. The thickness dimension of the portion is set to a substantially constant value, and the horizontal component increases as the front is positioned vertically upward, so that the air heated by the heat generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member) Can be raised along the back surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) can be transferred to a first portion of the front member (a gap (predetermined space) that allows the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member to communicate with each other. Of the game board and the front side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the heat from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the distribution device 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass, and a bent portion formed in a part of the passage member, the passage member includes an opening formed in a side wall of the bent portion. A gaming machine B1 characterized by the following.

  Here, a game machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion may be formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, the direction in which the ball is thrown (the position at which the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the flow of the ball in the bent portion is likely to be delayed. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, and the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. However, there is a problem that ball clogging may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the passage member has the opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected in series, the passage member is placed behind the preceding ball. Even if the running ball catches up, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having the first portion and the sphere passing in different directions. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, a passage extending curvedly curved, or May be combined.

  In the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage extending substantially in a vertical direction, and an extension passage extending downward and inclined from the vertical passage. A gaming machine B2 formed in a region where a passage and the extension passage intersect.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member has a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction, and an extending passage extending downwardly and inclined from the vertical passage. The opening is formed in a region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, so that occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In other words, the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is a position where the ball that has flowed down (falled) down the vertical passage changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the extended passage, The ball following the ball is easy to catch up. Therefore, when the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, the two cannot roll and the ball tends to be clogged. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since the opening is formed in the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball remains on the side wall. Pressing can be made difficult, and rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and are formed on left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension passage. A gaming machine B3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extending passage. Are formed on the left and right side walls, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the left and right side walls, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, an area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and a back side when a ball rolls along a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and an extending direction of the extended passage. A gaming machine B4, characterized in that an inclined surface descending at an angle larger than the descending inclination of the extension passage is formed on a side wall of the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect with each other, along the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and the extending direction of the extended passage. When the ball rolls, a slope is formed on the rear side wall that is inclined downward at an angle greater than the downward inclination of the extension passage, so that the ball flowing down (falling) in the vertical passage changes direction. When the rolling is started in the extending direction of the extending passage, the ball can be quickly rolled by utilizing the downward inclination of the inclined surface. This makes it easy for the preceding ball to roll before the following ball catches up, and the preceding ball rolls behind the ball (the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension passage). It can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall on the rear side), so that the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, the inclination of the inclined surface may be any one of a linear inclination, a curved inclination, and a combination thereof. Also, the angle of the descending slope of the inclined surface does not need to be larger than the angle of the descending inclination of the extension passage over the entire area of the inclined surface, and the angle of the descending inclination of at least a part of the inclined surface is extended. It is sufficient if the angle is larger than the angle of the downward slope of the passage.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a game board having a game area formed on a front side is provided, and at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage intersects with the extended passage is the game. A gaming machine B5 provided on the front side of the board.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage of the bent portion of the passage member intersect (that is, the portion where the opening is formed). ) Is disposed on the front side of the game board, so that if the ball is clogged at the bent portion of the passage member, the glass plate is opened to open the ball on the front side of the game board. Can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and a height position corresponding to a radius of a sphere from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. A gaming machine B6 formed in a range including:

  According to the gaming machine B6, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and corresponds to a radius of a sphere from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. When the ball that flows down (falls) in the vertical passage reaches the bottom wall of the extension passage, the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the game. A gaming machine B7 disposed on the front side of the board, wherein the opening is formed to have a size that allows a ball to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage intersects with the extended passage (ie, a portion where an opening is formed) is a game. Since the opening is provided on the front side of the board and has a size that allows a ball to pass through, the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily suppressed.

  That is, when the size of the opening is such that the ball cannot pass, the opening can usually be used to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall. There is a case where a form in which the preceding ball is pressed against the center of the opening is formed, and the preceding ball is internally fitted (fitted) into the opening. In this case, the following rolling of the ball is hindered by the ball fitted into the opening, and ball clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, even when a form in which the following ball presses the preceding ball toward the center of the opening is formed, the preceding ball is placed outside the passage member through the opening (on the front side of the game board). (The game area), and the preceding ball can be prevented from being fitted (fitted) into the opening. As a result, the rolling of the following ball can be continued, and the occurrence of clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, and the opening is disposed on the front side of the game board (that is, the game area), so that the ball flowing down the game area can be formed. The fluid can flow into the passage member from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor that detects a winning ball is provided downstream of the bent portion, in addition to the ball that has flowed into the passage member from upstream of the bent portion, the ball that has flowed into the passage member from the opening also serves as a winning port. Can be detected. In particular, in this case, the opening (the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board, so that the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

  The gaming machine B8, wherein in the gaming machine 7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extension passage by a predetermined distance.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extension passage by a predetermined distance, so that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening and the extension passage Side wall can be left (formed) with the bottom wall. Therefore, even when the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, it is possible to suppress the ball from unnecessarily flowing out of the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of the passage members are arranged in such a position that the upstream side of the inclined passage is located at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is located outside the width direction of the game area. A gaming machine B9, wherein a winning device is located between the bent portions of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members are arranged in such a manner that the upstream side of the inclined passage is located at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent part is located outside the width direction of the game area, and the bent parts of the pair of passage members are provided. The winning device is located during the period.

  In this case, if the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is made small (the descending inclination is gradual), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is easily clogged at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is increased (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball can be increased to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion. The required space in the height direction is increased, and it is difficult to arrange the winning device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, since an opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion, and accordingly, the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is reduced accordingly ( The descending slope can be made gentler). As a result, the space in the height direction necessary for disposing the inclined passage can be suppressed, and the arrangement of the winning device can be made possible. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9 is an arrangement that is impossible with a conventional product, and is only possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above. .

  In the gaming machine B9, a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side is provided, and at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is provided on the front side of the game board. A gap through which at least a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member disposed on the front side of the game board and a lower edge portion of the game area. A gaming machine B10 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the player can visually recognize the liquid crystal display device through the opening. In recent years, with an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, the opening at the center of the game board is also enlarged, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area is reduced. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to dispose a member corresponding to the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine 9 in a space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. there were. That is, as described above, when the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is small (the descending inclination is gentle), the falling velocity of the ball decreases, and the clogging of the bend tends to occur. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is increased (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball can be increased to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion. The required space in the height direction increases, making it difficult to arrange the winning device. Further, since the arrangement position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it is difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area, and It is necessary to provide out ports on both sides.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion, and accordingly, the inclination is increased. The angle of the descending inclination of the passage can be reduced (the descending inclination is made gentler). As a result, the position of the bent portion in the vertical direction can be raised (increased), so that a gap through which the ball can pass can be secured between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the out ports on both sides of the bent portion. That is, in the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9, the arrangement described in the gaming machine B10 is further provided (an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area). Is an arrangement that is impossible with conventional products, and has only become possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means, and a rotating display device for performing afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, the rotating display device includes the plurality of light emitting units. A substrate, a main body member accommodating the substrate, and a base member rotatably supporting the main body member, wherein the main body member transmits light of the light emitting means, A gaming machine C1 comprising a plurality of through holes formed through a side wall facing in the rotation direction.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine having a plurality of light-emitting units (LEDs) and a rotary display device that performs after-image display by an after-image effect by blinking the light-emitting units according to the rotational position (for example, JP-A-2015-100385, JP-A-2005-053968, etc.).

  In this case, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385, the light-emitting means is exposed, so that the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in the technique of JP-A-2005-053968, the light of the light-emitting means is visually recognized through a light-transmitting member (push button). Therefore, the light emitting means is not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) on which the light emitting means is disposed is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, so that there is no point in displaying the afterimage by the afterimage effect. That is, the same display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting units vertically and horizontally in a matrix and controlling blinking of each of the light emitting units.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotary display device in which a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is accommodated in a main body member, and the main body member is rotatably supported by a base member. Publicly known). According to this, since the light emitting means is housed in the main body member, the light emitting means is hardly visually recognized, and the appearance is not impaired. In addition, since the afterimage display caused by the blinking of the light emitting means is visually recognized in a state where the rotation of the main body member can be visually recognized, the interest can be enhanced. However, in this case, since the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, it has been newly found that cooling of the light emitting means is difficult. The light emitting means (LED) and the ICs / capacitors that control the light emitting means are soldered to the board. If the heat generated when these light emitting means or the IC / capacitors cannot be sufficiently cooled, the solder melts. May cause poor contact.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the main body member is provided with the plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing in the rotation direction. Outside air can be taken into the interior of the vehicle. Therefore, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

  In the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container shape with the back side opened, so that the outside air taken in from the through hole in the side wall can be efficiently used from the back side. Can be exhausted. Therefore, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In addition, by exhausting air from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust air from affecting the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  In the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, which has a long shape along a diametrical direction in a rotation plane of the main body member, and a front wall forming a front side is closer to an end in a longitudinal direction. A gaming machine C3 formed in a curved shape receding to the side.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view (that is, in the rotation axis direction), which has a long shape along the diametric direction on the rotation plane of the main body member. Therefore, using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can be caused to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) and exhausted from the back side. Therefore, with the flow of the air, the outside air can be taken into the main body member from the back side at and near the rotation shaft. That is, since the rotation speed is low in the rotation axis and its vicinity, the efficiency of taking in the outside air from the through hole in the side wall is low (or cannot be taken in), and the air circulation using the centrifugal force (the back surface in the rotation axis and its vicinity) The outside air is taken in from the side, and the taken-in outside air flows to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force to form a flow of air exhausted from the rear side in the radially outward side. be able to. As a result, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, it is possible to achieve the cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and its vicinity.

  In this case, if the front wall forming the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the main body member (that is, if the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), the longitudinal end portion (during rotation) (In the radial direction outward), the angle of the portion where the air changes direction toward the rear side is substantially a right angle, and thus a vortex is easily formed in such a portion. Therefore, the flow of air is hindered, and it becomes difficult to smoothly exhaust air from the rear side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, since the front wall forming the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the rear side toward the longitudinal end side, the longitudinal end side (during rotation) due to centrifugal force. The air flowing to the outside (radially outward) can gradually flow to the back side, and the angle of the portion where the air flowing to the longitudinal end (radial outside) changes direction toward the back side Can be made larger than a substantially right angle, so that the formation of a vortex in such a portion can be suppressed and the flow of air can be made smooth. Therefore, the exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, it is possible to more reliably achieve cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and the vicinity thereof.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side near the rotating shaft is larger than an open area on the back side at the longitudinal end side. Machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotation axis and an open area on the back side near the rotation axis is larger than an open area on the back side at the longitudinal end. The air inside the main body member is caused to flow toward the longitudinal end (outward in the radial direction during rotation) by using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation, and from the rear side in the radially outward direction. By exhausting, when taking in outside air from the rotating shaft and the back side in the vicinity thereof, the taking in can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side near the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side near the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft. With the rotation of, the external air on the rotating shaft and the rear side near the rotating shaft can be suppressed from being disturbed (flow in the rotating direction is formed). As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rotating shaft and the rear side in the vicinity thereof.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the base member may include a shaft member rotatably supporting the main body member, and the shaft member may be reduced in diameter from a back side to a back side of the main body member. A gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the shaft member rotatably supporting the main body member on the base member is reduced in diameter from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when the outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft with the rotation of the main body member, the flow of the outside air along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member can be made smooth, and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, the outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation shaft and the vicinity thereof, so that the cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft and the vicinity can be more reliably achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the substrate may be housed in the main body member in a posture in which a surface on which the light emitting unit is mounted or a surface on the opposite side faces a side wall of the main body member. Gaming machine C7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the substrate is mounted on the main body in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface on the opposite side faces the side wall of the main body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through-hole formed through the side wall can be efficiently blown to the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor to enhance the heat radiation effect. As a result, heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor operates can be effectively cooled. Further, the posture in which the substrate is accommodated in the main body member is such that the front surface or the back surface of the substrate faces the side wall of the main body member, so that the width dimension of the main body member in a front view (the dimension in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) ) Can be reduced. As a result, in a state where the main body member (rotary display device) is stopped, visibility of the members and devices disposed on the back side thereof can be secured.

  A gaming machine C8 comprising any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, further comprising smoke generating means for generating smoke in a displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, since the smoke generating means for generating smoke is provided in the displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device, the flashing of the light emitting means is emphasized. Can be. Also, while the rotary display device is hidden by smoke, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized, and the effect by the light can be enhanced.

  In the conventional rotary display device, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke because the smoke was pushed out to the outer peripheral side with the rotation of the main body member. However, according to the present invention, the through hole was formed in the main body member. Is formed and the outside air can be circulated, so that the smoke can stay around the main body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be flickered in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be obtained.

  As a smoke generating device, for example, a type in which an aqueous or oily oil (liquid) is heated and vaporized to generate smoke (smoke), a liquid (aqueous or oily) is pressurized and diffused by a compressor, and is diffused into the air. Examples include a type in which fine particles are retained, a type in which carbon dioxide gas is ejected, and the like.

  In the gaming machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a display panel disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and protruding forward. And a front member formed of a light transmissive material, wherein at least a main body member of the rotary display member is located between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C8, a gaming board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the gaming board, and a front face of the liquid crystal display device And a front member formed of a light-transmissive material and formed to be convexly curved to the front side, and at least a main body member of the rotary display member is located between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Therefore, smoke generated from the smoke generator can be easily retained (contained) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the light-emitting means blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke to make the blinking stand out, or to make only the blinking of the light-emitting means visible while hiding the rotary display device with smoke. As a result, the effect produced by light can be enhanced. In particular, since the front member is convexly curved toward the front, smoke can be easily retained in the space on the rear side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the light effect using the smoke described above.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 500 as an example>
A base member, a main body member displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the main body member, wherein the main body member has at least the In a gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced in a state where the displacement member is disposed at a first position, a rotation member rotatably supported by one of the base member or the main body member, and the main body member is disposed at the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member so as to be able to come into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state in which the main body member is disposed at the first position. The gaming machine D1 wherein the direction of displacement at the time and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel.

  Here, a base member, a main body member displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the main body member, wherein the main body member is 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in a state where it is arranged at a first position is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-162990).

  In this case, when the main body member is disposed at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle with respect to the base member with the displacement of the displacement member. In view of this, there is an apparatus in which engagement means for engaging the main body member and the base member is provided to suppress rattling. The engaging means is provided on one of the main body member or the base member and urged by the urging means, and is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member, and is provided on the other of the main body member and the base member. An engaging member disposed, and using the displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member (displacement toward the first position), the engaging member is retracted while resisting the urging force of the urging means; When the member is located at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means to engage the engaged member. Accordingly, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is regulated by the engagement of the engagement means, and the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member is pressed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but also when releasing the engagement state of the engagement means (displacing the main body member from the first position to the second position) against the urging force of the urging means. It is necessary to retreat the engaging member, and there is a problem that a driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the main body member and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member, so that the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, so that the relative position of the main body member with respect to the base member is increased. The displacement of the main body member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed by restricting the mechanical displacement. In this case, the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set to be substantially parallel, so that when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the second direction from the first position. When displacing to the position, the rotating member can be rotated in accordance with the displacement, so that the driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on an outer peripheral surface side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on the outer peripheral surface side, so that the contact member abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. In this case, the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member is elastically deformed, so that the rotating member can be easily held by the contact member. This makes it difficult for the rotating member to rotate, thereby restricting the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, thereby suppressing the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber, urethane, and the like. In this case, the vibration damping effect can perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of attenuating and insulating the vibration input from the main body member to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices to be installed, loosening of a fastening portion, and the like. In particular, when the displacement member is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versa lighter), relatively small amplitude and high frequency vibrations are generated from the main body member to the base member. Therefore, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in a radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member is configured to move the rotating member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D3 comprising: an opposing member disposed so as to oppose the abutting member so as to be in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member has the main body member disposed at the first position. In this state, the rotating member is disposed so as to face the contact member, and the facing member is provided so as to be able to contact the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. When the contact member comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the contact member and the facing member. This makes it difficult for the rotating member to rotate, thereby restricting the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, thereby suppressing the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  Examples of the form in which the rotating member can be displaced in the radial direction include, for example, a form in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member. The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole of the rotating member that receives the shaft, the outer diameter of the shaft fixed to the rotating member is smaller than the insertion hole of one of the main body member or the base member that receives the shaft. And the like.

  In the gaming machine D3, a shaft fixed to one of the base member or the main body member is provided, and the rotating member is formed of an elastic body in a ring-shaped cross section including a shaft support hole on an inner peripheral side through which the shaft is inserted. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is formed. When the rotating member is sandwiched between the contact member and the opposing member due to the play of the member, the contact member and the opposing member are rotated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body). The member can be more firmly held. This makes it difficult for the rotating member to rotate, thereby restricting the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, thereby suppressing the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the radial displacement of the rotating member is performed by utilizing the elastic deformation of the elastic body, the shaft inserted through the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. It does not need to be formed as a shaft, and can be formed as a shaft fixed to one of the base member and the main body member. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, one of the base member or the main body member is provided with a pair of the rotation members, and the pair of rotation members is used when the main body member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D5 which is arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in a displacement direction.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, one of the base member and the main body member is provided with a pair of rotating members, and the pair of rotating members is the main body member. Since it is arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the displacement direction when it is arranged at one position, it is possible to suppress the driving force required when displacing the main body member with respect to the base member, and to reduce the driving force required by the displacement of the displacement member. The rattling of the member with respect to the base member can be effectively suppressed.

  That is, when the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is regulated. However, only one rotating member is brought into contact with the contact member. In this case, there is a possibility that the rotating member is rotated and the contact member is tilted, and the tilting of the contact member due to the rotation of the rotating member is a cause of rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, since the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval, the abutting members contact the pair of rotating members at two locations at a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to make contact without rotating the rotating member, and it is possible to suppress the contact member from tilting. As a result, rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member may be a contact surface on a side that receives the rotating member when the main body member of the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D6, wherein an inclined surface is formed at an end portion so as to be inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface increases.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is used when the main body member of the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted is disposed at the first position. Since the inclined surface is formed to be inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface is increased at the end on the side that receives the rotating member, when the main body member is disposed at the first position, the inclined surface is utilized. The rotating member can be guided to the contact surface of the contact member. Thereby, the driving force required when disposing the main body member at the first position can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is provided on the base member, and the contact member is provided on the main body member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, since the rotating member is provided on the base member and the contact member is provided on the main body member, the weight is relatively large. Since there is no need to provide a bulky rotating member, the weight of the main body member can be reduced, and the driving force required for displacement of the main body member can be suppressed. Further, when the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed, the main body member on the vibration source side can be reduced in weight, so that the rattling can be easily suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and a rotation plane of the displacement member has a contact surface that is in contact with the rotation member of the contact member. A gaming machine D8 substantially parallel to the rotating shaft of the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member corresponds to the rotation member of the contact member. The driving force required for disposing the main body member at the first position and displacing the main body member from the first position to the second position is substantially parallel to the contact surface to be contacted and the rotation axis of the rotating member. , And wobble of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  That is, since the displacement form of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the precession movement of the displacement member (movement in which the rotation axis of the displacement member swings like a circle). Vibration is performed in a mode (mode) for causing the vibration. Therefore, since the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, the contact surface of the contact member is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from the direction. As a result, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and when the main body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotating member is rotated, thereby suppressing the driving force required for the displacement of the main body member. By the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the game machine includes: a driving unit that generates a driving force; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force to the main body member and displaces the driving force between the first position and the second position. A transmission member, a crank member having a rotating body that is rotated about a first axis by a driving force of the driving means, and a pin portion that is eccentric from the first axis of the rotating body and protrudes from the rotating body; The crank member has a guide groove in which a pin portion slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to rotate about the second axis as a rotation center and to rotate the main body member with the rotation. An arm member to be displaced, and in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, a straight line connecting a first axis of the crank member and an axis of a pin portion is aligned with a second axis of the arm member. Pin of the crank member Gaming machine D9, characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the play of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

  Here, in the present invention, the direction of displacement when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel. Therefore, if the rattling direction of the main body member at the first position is a direction from the first position to the second position or the opposite direction, the rotating member easily rotates in such a direction. It is difficult for the rotating member to exert the effect of suppressing rattling.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D9, when the main body member is located at the first position, the straight line connecting the first shaft of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is formed by the second shaft of the arm member and the crank shaft. Since it is substantially perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member attempts to rotate the arm member by its displacement, no force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is formed ( That is, a dead point can be formed. That is, it is possible to suppress rattling of the main body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or in the opposite direction. Thereby, even if the direction of the backlash of the main body member is from the first position to the second position or the opposite direction (that is, the direction in which the rotating member is easy to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are at the dead center. Is formed, the backlash of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

<Regarding the concept of the invention, taking the regulation unit 490 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means, and a rotating display device for performing afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, the rotating display device includes the plurality of light emitting units. A substrate, a main body member accommodating the substrate, and a base member rotatably supporting the main body member, wherein the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted, of the main body member. A gaming machine E1 wherein the gaming machine E1 is accommodated in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to a rotation axis.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine having a plurality of light-emitting units (LEDs) and a rotary display device that performs after-image display by an after-image effect by blinking the light-emitting units according to the rotational position (for example, JP-A-2015-100385, JP-A-2005-053968, etc.). However, in the above-described conventional technology, the posture of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed toward the front side (player side)). (Parallel posture), the outer shape in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) becomes large. Therefore, when the rotation of the rotary display device is stopped, there is a problem that the visibility on the back side of the rotary display device is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting units are arranged, a main body member for accommodating the substrate, and a base member for rotatably supporting the main body member. The substrate is accommodated in the main body member in such a manner that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, so that the outer shape of the main body member in front view (in the rotation axis direction) is suppressed. be able to. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotary display device (main body member) is stopped, the visibility of the back side of the main body member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, the rotating display device includes an opposing member disposed to oppose a surface of the substrate on which the light emitting unit is mounted.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes the opposing member disposed on the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is opposed to the rotating member. The light can be reflected by the member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, even when the posture of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light-emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the light (flashing) of the light-emitting means can be visually recognized by the player, and the afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. Can be.

  In the gaming machine E2, the facing member includes a plurality of recesses that are recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extend in a groove shape substantially parallel to a rotation axis of the main body member. A gaming machine E3, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are respectively faced.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E2, the opposing member has a plurality of recesses which are recessed on the surface facing the substrate and extend in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the plurality of light emitting means face each other in the plurality of recesses, the light emitted from each of the plurality of light emitting means passes through the plurality of recesses of the opposing member, respectively, and the front side of the rotary display device (game To the user). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state partitioned by each concave portion, the division of the light of each light emitting means can be made clear. As a result, the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  The gaming machine E3, wherein the concave portion of the facing member includes an end partition wall for partitioning an end of the rotating display device opposite to the front side.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E3, the concave portion of the facing member has an end partition wall for partitioning the end on the opposite side to the front side of the rotary display device. The light applied to the concave portion of the opposing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect.

  In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting unit toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting unit is located at a position facing the end partition wall of the recess. A gaming machine E5, which is provided.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is provided with the end partition of the recess. Since it is arranged at the position facing the wall, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be applied to the end partition wall, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotating display device. it can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect.

  The gaming machine E6 according to any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, wherein a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member is formed as an uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the concave portion of the facing member has a part of the inner surface formed as an uneven surface. The light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device in a state of being irregularly reflected by the uneven surface and uniformly dispersed. That is, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the opening of the concave portion from being visually recognized in a state where the light is biased to a part of the opening.

  In addition, the unevenness of the uneven surface may be a surface consisting only of protrusions (projections) or a surface consisting only of recesses (dents). The projections or depressions may extend as stripes or grooves. Further, the cross-sectional shapes of the convex and concave portions may be any of a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, and a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front end of the rotary display device on the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is A gaming machine E7 formed as a surface that is smoother than the uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front end of the rotary display device on the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member, Since the inner surface in the predetermined range is formed as a surface that is smoother than the uneven surface, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (the player side) of the rotary display device, and the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be achieved. The light intensity can be increased. That is, when an uneven surface is formed within a predetermined range from the front end of the rotary display device on the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member, light is irregularly reflected on the uneven surface, and the front surface of the rotary display device ( Where the light emitted toward the player side is reduced, the inner surface in such a predetermined range is made smoother than the uneven surface, so that irregular reflection is suppressed and the front side of the rotary display device is reduced. The light traveling toward the (player side) can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E7, the predetermined area in which the uneven surface is not formed is such that the cross-sectional area of the inner surface increases toward the front end of the rotary display device. E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, in a predetermined range where the uneven surface is not formed, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface is increased toward the front end of the rotary display device. (Ie, the diameter is increased), the light emitted toward the front side (the player side) of the rotary display device can have a wider range. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be downsized.

  In any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the opposing member are arranged in a row, and the concave and convex surface arranged radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member, The gaming machine E9, wherein a length dimension of the main body member in a direction along a rotation axis is increased.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portion of the opposing member is formed such that the concave and convex surfaces arranged radially outwardly from the rotation axis of the main body member increase the degree of the main body. Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotary display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes higher outward in the radial direction from the rotation axis (rotation center). The light of the light emitting means closer to the axis looks higher (brighter) than the light of the light emitting means farther (radially outward) from the rotation axis.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E9, the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member becomes larger as the uneven surface is arranged radially outwardly from the rotation axis of the main body member. The more the concave portion (light emitting means) is separated radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member, the more the irregular reflection by the uneven surface becomes stronger (that is, the smaller the ratio of the light which can be visually recognized by the player directly from the light emitting means). , Can be visually recognized as light of high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress a difference in brightness as viewed at the radially arranged position and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover member is provided, which is covered with a front end of the rotary display device in a concave portion of the facing member and is formed of a light-transmitting material. A gaming machine E10, wherein an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing an end of the concave portion.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover formed of a light-transmitting material and covered by the front end of the rotary display device in the recess of the facing member. The cover member has an uneven surface at least in a region facing the end of the concave portion. Therefore, after irregularly reflecting light by the uneven surface, the front side (the player side) of the rotary display device is provided. ). That is, since the emitted light can be made wider, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be downsized.

  In any of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-shaped interposed member interposed between the substrate and the opposing member is provided, and the interposed member includes the plurality of light emitting units, the plurality of recesses, A gaming machine E11 comprising a through hole formed at a position through which the game machine passes.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E10, the gaming machine E11 includes a plate-shaped interposed member interposed between the substrate and the facing member, and the interposed member includes a plurality of interposed members. Since a through-hole is formed at a position where the light-emitting means and the plurality of recesses are made to pass through, the light of each light-emitting means is surely made incident on the corresponding recess, and is prevented from being incident (leaked) on the adjacent recess. it can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  Further, according to the gaming machine E11, since the structure for allowing the light of the light emitting means to enter the corresponding concave portion through the through hole is formed from the two members, the facing member and the interposed member, the structure is one. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where it is constituted by members. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product cost.

  In the gaming machine E11, the interposing member includes a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting unit, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E11, the interposed member includes a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting unit, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion. Can easily be made to enter the through hole, and leakage to the outside of the through hole can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect. Further, since the light of the adjacent light emitting means can be prevented from being incident on the through hole by contacting the seat with the light emitting means, the outer shape of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In the gaming machine E12, the illuminated surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and the through-hole is formed in a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the illuminated surface. Are arranged concentrically. A gaming machine E13.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E12, the illumination surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and the through-hole has a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the illuminating surface. Since the irradiation surface and the through hole are formed concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently made incident on the concave portion through the through hole.

  In the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side to the facing member.

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E13, the through hole has an inner diameter that is increased from the substrate side to the facing member, so that light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the through hole. The light can be efficiently made incident on the concave portion through the through hole. In addition, since the area in contact with the light emitting means can be secured, it is possible to suppress the light of each light emitting means from leaking out of the through hole. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  The gaming machine E15, wherein in any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat is formed to protrude from a surface of the interposition member facing the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat is formed so as to protrude from the surface of the interposed member facing the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the member, and heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be radiated.

  The gaming machine E16, wherein the interposed member is provided with a groove-shaped groove that is recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extends along a base of the seat.

  According to the gaming machine E16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E15, the facing member is provided with a groove-shaped groove that is recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extends along the base of the seat. The heat radiation effect can be enhanced while securing the rigidity of the interposed member. That is, by forming a groove-like groove extending along the base of the seat, the area recessed in the interposed member is minimized, and the rigidity of the interposed member is ensured while the light emitting means A space can be enlarged for a portion where heat generated by the operation is particularly concentrated, and a heat radiation effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine E17, wherein in the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat is connected to an adjacent seat and an outer peripheral surface of each other.

  According to the gaming machine E17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seats are connected to the adjacent seats and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, so that the rigidity of the interposed member can be increased.

  In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the seat portion may be formed in a circular shape so that the adjacent outer peripheral surfaces of the seat portions are connected to each other. As a result, the group in which the plurality of seats are connected to each other is formed with an irregular shape, so that the rigidity of the interposed member is improved by using the irregularities of the shape while securing a space and improving the heat radiation effect. Can grow.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the sorting device 4700 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass; and a first privilege granting unit disposed downstream of the passage member and granting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes. An opening formed on the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting unit so as to allow a ball to pass therethrough, and a ball flowing out of the opening to the game area is formed so as to pass therethrough; A second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege with the passing of the game machine F1.

  Here, a game machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). A sensor device for detecting passage of a ball by the passage member is provided downstream of such a passage member, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the passage member only has a function of guiding the ball toward the downstream side (sensor device), and the space required for disposition is increased, while adding interest to the game. There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first privilege providing means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the first privilege providing means. In this case, an opening is formed on the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege providing means so as to allow the ball to pass therethrough, and the ball flowing out of the opening to the game area is formed so as to pass therethrough. Since there is provided the second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege along with the passage of the ball, it is possible to form a form in which the ball flows out of the opening into the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the outflowing ball can be formed. When has passed through the second privilege providing means, the predetermined privilege can be provided by the second privilege providing means. Thereby, not only the form in which the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first privilege providing means, but also the form in which the ball flows out of the opening to the game area, and further, the released ball passes through the second privilege providing means. A form can be formed, and an interest can be given to the game.

  The second privilege granting means may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all of the balls flowing out of the opening into the game area, or may be arranged in accordance with the state of the ball flowing out of the opening into the game area. Some of the balls may be arranged so as to receive some of the balls and not to receive some of them.

  The privilege given by the first privilege granting unit and the privilege given by the second privilege granting unit may be the same privilege or different benefits.

  In the gaming machine F1, the passage member includes a bent portion formed in a part thereof, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

  Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the direction in which the ball is thrown can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion is likely to be stagnant. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, and the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. However, there is a problem that ball clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F2, since the passage member has the opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the passage member has Even if the running ball catches up, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having the first portion and the sphere passing in different directions. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, a passage extending curvedly curved, or May be combined.

  In the gaming machine F2, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. A gaming machine F3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. When the ball is clogged, the ball can be accessed from the opening on the front side of the game board by opening the glass plate. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging. Further, when the game ball flows out of the opening of the passage member into the game area, the outflow mode can be visually recognized by the player, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that at least the entrance of the second privilege granting means is disposed on the front side of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F3, since at least the entrance of the second privilege means is disposed on the front side of the gaming board, the gaming ball flows out of the opening of the passage member to the gaming area. In doing so, the mode in which the outflowed ball enters the entrance of the second privilege granting means can be visually recognized by the player, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege providing means is connected to the passage member, and a connection path for guiding a ball passing through the second privilege providing means to the passage member is provided. A gaming machine F5 connected to the passage member upstream of the first privilege providing means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F1 to F4, a connection passage is provided for connecting the second privilege granting means to the passage member and guiding the ball passing through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. Since the connection passage is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means, the ball flows out of the opening into the game area while being guided by the passage member, and the ball that flows out is the first ball. When the ball has passed through the two privilege granting means, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connection passage so as to pass through the first privilege granting means. Therefore, in addition to the grant of the privilege by the second privilege granting means, the privilege can be granted by the first privilege granting means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a distributing means for alternately distributing the entered ball to one and the other is provided, and the pair of passage members are provided in a pair, and one of the pair of passage members is provided with the vibration member. A gaming machine F6 connected to one of the distributing means and the other connected to the other of the distributing means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the game machine F6 further includes a distributing means for alternately distributing the entered ball to one and the other, and a pair of passage members are provided. Since one of the passage members is connected to one of the distribution means and the other is connected to the other of the distribution means, the balls can enter the passage member one by one. That is, it is possible to suppress a plurality of balls from continuously entering the passage member, so that clogging of the balls in the passage member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the distribution device 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a passage member through which a ball can pass, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and the passage member is provided with a ball entrance on the front side of the game board, A gaming machine G1 characterized in that at least a part downstream of the entrance is disposed on the back side of the gaming board.

  Here, a game machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). By using the passage (passage member), the ball that has entered the passage can be reliably sent to a predetermined position. However, when the passage is provided on the front side of the game board, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is reduced accordingly. That is, the falling area of the ball in the game area is restricted (reduced).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the passage member has the entrance port disposed on the front side of the game board, and at least a portion downstream of the entrance port is disposed on the back side of the game board. Since it is provided, a space on the front side of the game board can be secured accordingly. In other words, it is possible to secure a ball falling area in the game area.

  In the gaming machine G1, the passage member branches from the downstream side of the entrance and is inclined downward toward one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game board, and is disposed on the back side of the game board. A pair of inclined passages provided, and a pair of second passages respectively connected to the downstream side of the pair of inclined passages and arranged at least in part on the front side of the game board, from the entrance. A gaming machine G2, wherein a prize-winning device is disposed between the pair of second passages.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the passage member branches off from the downstream side of the entrance and is inclined downward toward one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game board, respectively. The game board includes a pair of inclined passages disposed on the back side thereof, and a pair of second passages respectively connected to the downstream side of the pair of inclined passages and disposed at least partially on the front side of the game board. Therefore, the space on the front side of the game board (the downflow area of the ball in the game area) can be secured for the inclined passage. Therefore, the winning device can be disposed below the entrance and between the pair of second passages. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine G2 is an arrangement that is impossible with a conventional product in which the passage member is disposed on the front side of the game board. This was made possible for the first time by arranging it on the back side of the vehicle.

  The gaming machine G3, wherein in the gaming machine G2, the second passage is formed as a bent passage partially formed with a bent portion, and an opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

  Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the direction in which the ball is thrown (the position at which the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion is likely to be stagnant. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, and the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. However, there is a problem that ball clogging may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, since the passage member has the opening formed in the side wall of the bending portion, the passage member passes through the bending portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected. In this case, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having the first portion and the sphere passing in different directions. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, a passage extending curvedly curved, or May be combined.

  The gaming machine G4, wherein the opening is provided on the front side of the gaming board in the gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, since the opening is disposed on the front side of the gaming board, the glass plate is opened when the ball is clogged at the bent portion of the second passage. By doing so, on the front side of the game board, the ball clogged in the bent portion can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, a gap through which at least a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the second passage disposed on the front side of the gaming board and a lower edge of the gaming area. A gaming machine G5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, at least a ball is provided between a portion of the second passage disposed on the front side of the gaming board and a lower edge of the gaming area. Since the gap that can pass through is formed, it is not necessary to provide the outlets on both sides of the second passage. Accordingly, a space on the front side of the game board (a ball flowing down area in the game area) can be ensured, and the number of parts can be reduced, thereby reducing the product cost.

  In any of the gaming machines G2 to G5, the game machine includes an attachment member formed to have an open cross-sectional shape and having the opened side facing the back of the game board. The gaming machine G6, wherein the inclined passage is formed between a back surface and an inner surface of the attachment member.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G2 to G5, the mounting is formed such that one side is formed in an open cross-sectional shape and the opened side faces the back of the gaming board. Since the inclined passage is formed between the back of the game board and the inner surface of the attaching member, the back of the game board can be used as a part of the inclined passage, and the inclined passage is formed. Members can be reduced. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Characteristic K group>
An acquisition unit that acquires information based on establishment of an acquisition condition; a storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit; and a determination on the information stored in the storage unit when the determination condition is satisfied. Determining means, display means for displaying identification information based on a determination result by the determining means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the identification information by the dynamic display means A dynamic display period determining unit for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying, based on the information being stored in the storage unit, displaying an identification symbol on the display unit, and displaying on the display unit Symbol display control means for changing the corresponding identification symbol to a different display mode when the determination condition corresponding to the identification symbol is satisfied, and the information stored in the storage means A pre-determination unit that performs a determination before the determination condition is satisfied, a specific condition determination unit that determines whether a specific condition is satisfied, and a specific condition determination unit that determines whether a specific condition is satisfied. A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect of changing a background display mode of a display area in which two or more of the identification symbols are displayed to a different specific background display mode when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery executed based on winning of a game ball to a winning winning port is configured to be able to be held a plurality of times, and a holding symbol corresponding to the number of holdings is displayed. There is something to do. As such a gaming machine, a determination is made in advance on the information stored on hold, and an effect suggesting the determination result is determined in advance by a lottery based on the hold storage determined in advance. There is one that performs an effect using a hold symbol corresponding to the hold memory (a so-called hold look-ahead notice effect) (for example, JP-A-2003-340038). In this reservation pre-reading announcement effect, for example, an effect that suggests the result of the preliminary determination to the player by changing the display mode of the reservation symbol is executed.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, the effect indicating the pre-determination result is executed using the holding symbol corresponding to the holding memory determined in advance, so that the player is interested in the holding symbol in which the effect has been executed. Although it could be held, there was a problem in that the player's interest in other reserved symbols was weakened and the player was tired of the game early. An object of the present invention is to solve the above-described problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine K1, information obtained by the obtaining means based on the satisfaction of the obtaining condition is stored by the storage means. When the determination condition is satisfied, the information stored in the storage unit is determined by the determination unit, the identification information based on the determination result by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, and the identification information is displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Dynamically displayed. Then, a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit is determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. Based on the information being stored in the storage means, the identification symbol is displayed on the display means, and when the determination condition corresponding to the identification symbol displayed on the display means is satisfied, the corresponding identification symbol is displayed on the symbol display control. The display mode is changed to a different display mode by the means, and the determination is performed by the preliminary determination means based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied. In addition, when the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the specific condition determination unit based on the determination result by the preliminary determination unit, the background display mode of the display area in which two or more identification symbols are displayed is different from the specific background display. The specific effect that is changed to the mode is executed by the specific effect execution unit.

  Accordingly, the background display mode of the display area in which two or more identification symbols are displayed is variably displayed in the specific background display mode based on the determination result by the preliminary determination unit, and the specific condition is satisfied by the preliminary determination unit. It is difficult for the player to specify the identification information for which the determination has been made, and interest can be given to the identification symbol for the area where the specific effect is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a disadvantage that the player gets tired early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine K1, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect including at least a display area of the identification symbol displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1. That is, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means including at least the display area of the identification symbol displayed on the display means.

  With this, the specific effect is executed at least including the display area where the identification symbol is displayed, so that the player can be more interested in the determination result corresponding to the identification symbol displayed. is there.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect for all display areas in which the identification symbols are displayed.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, a specific effect is performed on all display areas where the identification symbol is displayed. Therefore, when the identification symbol is not displayed, the specific effect. Is started, it is possible to give the player an expectation for the identification symbol displayed thereafter.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the game machine has end condition determining means for determining whether an end condition for ending the specific effect is satisfied, and the specific effect execution ending means is configured to determine whether the end condition is satisfied by the end condition determining means. The gaming machine K4, which terminates the execution of the specific effect when it is determined that the game has been established.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the specific effect is continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied, so that the player continues until the end condition is satisfied. There is an effect that interest can be given to the displayed identification symbol.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the specific effect execution means displays a display area in which the identification symbol is displayed in a first specific background display mode when the specific condition is satisfied, and the identification symbol is displayed. A gaming machine K5, wherein a display area in which the identification symbol not displayed is displayed is displayed in a second specific background display mode different from the first specific background display mode.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines K1 to K4, the discriminating symbol which may have been determined to satisfy the specific condition by the pre-determining means and the discriminating symbol which is not so are distinguished by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in a limited range of identification symbols among the identification symbols displayed to the player.

  In the gaming machine K5, when the identification symbol is displayed in the display area displayed in the second specific background display mode, the specific condition determination unit is configured to perform the determination based on the information corresponding to the identification symbol displayed. When performing the determination, the satisfaction of the specific condition is determined with a higher probability than when the determination is performed based on the information corresponding to the identification symbol displayed in the first specific background display mode first. A gaming machine K6, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, since the specific condition is easily established, there is an effect that the specific effect can be easily displayed continuously.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, a dynamic display mode determining unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining unit; Dynamic display mode storage means in which a plurality of the dynamic display modes determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are stored. A gaming machine K7 characterized by storing a plurality of specific dynamic display modes set as specific types.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the type of the dynamic display mode is classified for each type, so that the player can easily understand the dynamic display mode. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K7, the preliminary determination unit determines at least a type of a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the information stored in the storage unit. It is possible that the specific condition determination means determines the establishment of the specific condition at a predetermined lottery probability based on the determination by the preliminary determination means when the type of the specific dynamic display mode is determined. A gaming machine K8 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K7, when the specific effect is executed, the specific display is performed by dynamic display corresponding to any of the displayed identification symbols. Since the type of the dynamic display mode is executed, there is an effect that the player can quickly recognize that the specific type of the dynamic display mode is executed.

  In the gaming machine K8, the previous term specific condition determination unit determines that the type of the dynamic display mode corresponding to any of the identification symbols displayed on the display unit is the type of the specific dynamic display mode by the advance determination unit. A gaming machine K9 characterized in that the establishment of the specific condition is determined by establishing a predetermined lottery based on the determination of the type.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K8, the satisfaction of the specific condition is determined when the type of the specific dynamic display mode is determined for any of the displayed identification symbols. There is an effect that expectations can be given to the identification symbol displayed to the player.

<Character L group> (Round production)
A determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, a performance performing means for performing an effect based on the determination result by the determining means, and a performance based on a specific determination result is performed by the performance performing means. And a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player in such a case. In the gaming machine, a plurality of the effect modes including a first effect mode are stored as the effects executed by the effect executing unit. Effected state storage means, information processing means for storing information corresponding to the executed first effected state when the first effected state is executed by the effected executing means, Notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect for notifying a player of specific game information based on the establishment, and the notification effect execution based on the information stored in the information storage means Gaming machine L1, wherein those having a classification setting means for setting a type of the notification effect performed by the stage.

  Here, it is suggested whether or not a gaming state such as a pachinko machine is provided with a gaming state (for example, a probable changing gaming state) that is advantageous to a player as a gaming state after the end of the winning game during a winning game. (For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-119006). In such a gaming machine, it is possible to enjoy an effect that suggests a game state after the end of the winning game while performing the winning game, thereby suppressing the player from getting tired of the game during the winning game.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect mode of the effect performed during the hit game is determined by the type of the hit game, during the period until the hit game is executed, the player There was a problem that the problem of getting tired was caused. An object of the present invention is to solve the above-described problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine L1, information corresponding to the case where the first effect mode is executed as an effect based on the determination result by the determining device is stored in the storage device, and a notification is made based on the information stored in the storage device. Since the type of the notification effect executed by the effect executing means changes, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation not only for the specific determination result but also for the execution of the first effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that a trouble that the player gets tired of early can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine L2, wherein in the gaming machine L1, the first effect mode is set such that when the effect is executed based on the specific determination result, a rate of execution is set high.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the first effect mode is set so as to be easily executed when the effect based on the specific determination result is executed. The execution has an effect that an expectation can be given before the effect result is notified that the result is a specific determination result.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, a privilege granting means for granting at least one of a plurality of different benefits to the player based on establishment of a privilege granting condition, and a privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means. And a privilege type determining means for determining a type of the game, wherein the notification effect is a notification based on the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means. Machine L3.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the notification is performed based on the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means by the notification effect, so that the notification is provided to the player by the notification effect. There is an effect that the type of privilege can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine L3, the privilege type determining means may determine whether the game state given to the player after the execution of the privilege game is a normal game state or a special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The gaming machine L4, wherein at least one of them can be determined, and the notification effect is executed during execution of the privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3, the player can also know the gaming state imparted after the award game even during the award game, by the notification effect, and suppress the tiredness during the award game. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the type setting means sets the type of the notification effect corresponding to the number of times the first effect mode has been executed during a specific period. Machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, even when the first effect mode is executed and the bonus game is not executed, the game is executed in the bonus game executed thereafter. Since the specific effect is variable, there is an effect that the value for the first effect mode can be enhanced for the player.

  In the gaming machine L4 or L5, as the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, a first bonus game in which the execution period of the bonus game is set in a first period, and a first bonus game longer than the first bonus game At least the second privilege game set in the execution period is set, and the type determination unit sets the case where the first privilege game is executed and the case where the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine L6 characterized in that the type of the notification effect is variably set.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L5, the type of the notification effect is variably set according to the execution period of the bonus game, so that the notification effect in accordance with the length of the bonus game is performed by the player. And the effect can be performed in accordance with the period in which the notification effect can be executed.

<Characteristic M group> (reach continuous production)
Main control means for performing main control of the game, and sub-control means for performing control of the game based on a signal output from the main control means, wherein the main control means fulfills a determination condition. Determining means for performing a determination based on a determination result, a determination information output means for outputting a determination information signal based on the determination result by the determination means to the slave control means, and a determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the secondary control unit is configured to notify the player of the determination result based on the determination information signal. In a gaming machine having an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode, the main control means determines the type information of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means based on the determination result. An information determining unit, and a determination information signal generating unit configured to generate the determination information signal based at least on a determination result by the determining unit and the type information determined by the type information determining unit; When the first condition is satisfied, the determining means determines one of the effect modes from the type of the effect mode corresponding to the type information specified by the determination information signal, and determines the first condition. When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect mode is determined based on a specific type of the effect mode different from the type of the effect mode corresponding to the type information specified by the determination information signal. A gaming machine M1 characterized by being determined.

  Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transmit a winning command from the main control device to the effect control device based on the fact that a game ball has won a start winning opening. In such a gaming machine, reach information indicating an effect mode of the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the winning command is set in the transmitted winning command, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning command is executed. In some cases, a variable effect is executed based on the reach information included in the winning command (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233993). Thereby, the control load of the effect control device is reduced.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, when the effect control device receives the prize command, the effect of the special symbol variation effect is determined at the time of receiving the prize command. Therefore, after receiving the prize command, the special control corresponding to the prize command is performed. Even if the game conditions are changed during the period until the symbol fluctuation effect is executed, the effect mode of the special symbol fluctuation effect cannot be changed, and a monotonous effect is provided to the player. There was a problem. An object of the present invention is to solve the above-described problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine M1, when the first condition is satisfied, the effect mode is determined from the type of the effect mode instructed by the main control means, but the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. When the second condition is satisfied, the production mode is determined from the specific production mode type different from the production mode type instructed by the main control unit. An effect of a type different from the instruction is executed, and the pattern of the effect to be executed can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

  In the gaming machine M2, the main control unit obtains information determined by the determination unit based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and a storage unit configured to store information acquired by the acquisition unit. A pre-judgment means for executing a judgment before the judgment condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied, and a pre-judgment signal based on the judgment result by the pre-judgment means to the slave control means Output means for outputting a pre-determination signal, wherein the slave control means has condition determining means for determining whether the second condition is satisfied based on the received pre-determination signal. Gaming machine M2.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, the establishment of the second condition is determined based on the pre-determination signal before the determination by the determination unit, so that the specific effect is performed over a plurality of times. By executing the effect corresponding to the type of the mode, there is an effect that the determination result notified by the effect executed thereafter can be notified in advance.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the effect mode includes at least a display effect of dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result indicated by the determination information signal on a display unit. A plurality of symbol rows composed of different symbols, and the player is notified of the determination result by a symbol combination of the respective symbol rows stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means. Gaming machine M3.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1 or M2, in the effect based on the determination result, a display effect of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol columns is executed, and the symbol columns are stopped and displayed. Since the determination result is notified by the combination of, the player can enjoy the game more.

  In the gaming machine M3, the type of the presentation mode designated by the determination information signal is a type of at least two or more combinations of symbols stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means. Gaming machine M4.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M3, since the symbol is specified by the type of a part of the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the predetermined area of the display means by the main control means, the symbol is displayed by the slave control means. There is an effect that the type can be easily selected.

<Character N group> (continuous notice)
Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and the information stored in the storage means based on satisfaction of a determination condition. Determination means for determining, a display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, and a player state as a game state after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. Special game state determining means for determining based on the information whether to set a special game state that is advantageous to the game machine, wherein the identification information is configured by a plurality of different symbols. A plurality of symbol rows, and the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means notifies the determination result by the determination means, and the plurality of symbol rows are the dynamic display means. A first stop symbol column in which the dynamic display is first stopped and displayed when the dynamic display is performed, and the symbols stopped after the first stop symbol column and stopped and displayed in the first stop symbol column A reach forming symbol row that can be stopped and displayed in the reach display mode, which is a symbol combination that can be the specific determination result, and the reach forming symbol row stopped after the reach forming symbol row A specific combination capable of forming a symbol combination for notifying the specific determination result corresponding to the symbol combination displayed in the reach display mode formed by the symbol of FIG. The gaming machine executes the determination of the information before the determination condition is satisfied for the information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied. Predetermining means, a specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition that is satisfied based on at least the specific determination result being determined by the preliminary determining means, and the specific condition being determined by the specific condition determining means. When it is determined that the condition has been established, the first period from the stop display of the first stop symbol row to the stop display of the reach forming symbol row straddles a plurality of dynamic displays of the identification information. , A symbol display control means for controlling a specific period.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery executed based on winning of a game ball to a winning winning port is configured to be able to be held a plurality of times, and a holding symbol corresponding to the number of holdings is displayed. There is something to do. As such a gaming machine, a plurality of lotteries are performed before a lottery based on the pre-determined hold storage is performed as an effect suggesting a result of performing the determination in advance on the information stored on hold. (For example, JP-A-2010-35655).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it was possible to interest the player for the lottery in which the result is notified using the continuous effect, but other reserved symbols, that is, during the continuous effect, The interest of the player in the executed lottery is reduced, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to solve the above-described problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the first period from the stop of the first stop symbol row to the stop of the reach formation symbol row is a plurality of times when the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means. Since the specific period is set across the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can be interested in the timing of stopping the symbol row, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine N1, the gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the specific period is set in the same period as the first period in the identification information for a plurality of times.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the first period is set to the same period over a plurality of dynamic displays of the identification information, so that the player is notified that the specific period has been set. There is an effect that the notification can be easily understood.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, when the symbol display control unit sets the specific period by the symbol display control unit, in the dynamic display of the identification information based on a determination result other than the specific determination result, A gaming machine N3 wherein a second period from when the reach forming symbol row is stopped and displayed until the specific result forming symbol row is stopped and displayed is set to a special period.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, when a specific period is formed, a special period is set in dynamic display of identification information in which a specific determination result is not notified. There is an effect that the player can more easily recognize that the specific condition has been determined by the specific condition determining means.

  In the gaming machine N3, the special period is set in the same period as the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N3, the special period and the specific period are set in the same period, so that the player can understand that the specific condition has been determined by the specific condition determining means. There is an effect that it can be easily recognized.

<Character O group> (Raising the rank by design)
An acquisition unit that acquires information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of a determination condition based on the information stored in the storage unit. Determination means for performing the determination by the determination means, display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and display means When the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player, and a game state after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit. Game state setting means for setting a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result, wherein the identification information displayed on the display means includes a plurality of different figures. Composed of a plurality of symbol columns, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the display means to notify the determination result, the combination of the symbols to notify the specific determination result As a specific symbol combination that informs the player that the special game state is given, the dynamic display means, when dynamically displaying the symbol row, the plurality of symbol rows The first dynamic display mode in which one symbol row is stopped and displayed after the other symbol row is stopped and displayed after the other symbol row is stopped, and the first symbol row can be stopped and displayed. The gaming machine includes: a pre-determination unit that performs a determination based on the information before the determination condition for the information stored in the storage unit is satisfied; and a special determination unit that performs a determination based on the determination result by the preliminary determination unit. A specific condition determining unit that determines whether a condition is satisfied, and, when the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determining unit, notifying the specific determination result different from the specific symbol combination by the dynamic display unit. After displaying in the first dynamic display mode in which symbols other than the one symbol row among the symbol combinations are stopped and displayed in the symbol combination that becomes the specific determination result, the one symbol row is based on the specific determination result. A symbol display control means for performing a specific dynamic display mode to be stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the combination and to be displayed in the first dynamic display mode to be the specific symbol combination in a dynamic display performed thereafter and , A gaming machine O1.

  Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transmit a winning command from the main control device to the effect control device based on the fact that a game ball has won a start winning opening. In such a gaming machine, reach information indicating an effect mode of the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the winning command is set in the transmitted winning command, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning command is executed. In some cases, a variable effect is executed based on the reach information included in the winning command (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233993). Thereby, the control load of the effect control device is reduced.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, when the effect control device receives the prize command, the effect of the special symbol variation effect is determined at the time of receiving the prize command. Even if the game conditions are changed during the period until the symbol fluctuation effect is executed, the effect mode of the special symbol fluctuation effect cannot be changed, and a monotonous effect is provided to the player. There was a problem. An object of the present invention is to solve the above-described problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine O1, when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the preliminary determination unit, the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, so that the symbol combination based on the specific determination result does not become a combination. Also in this case, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the preliminary determination unit.

  In the gaming machine O1, the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied based on the result of the specific determination being determined by the preliminary determining means, and the symbol control means includes: The identification information is dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode before a dynamic display corresponding to the information determined as a specific determination result is displayed in the first dynamic display mode. A gaming machine O2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, the symbol displayed in the specific dynamic display mode expects that the specific determination result is the specific determination result to which the special gaming state is given. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the preliminary determination means can determine a gaming state set by the gaming state setting means after the bonus game, when the specific determination result is based on the information. Yes, the symbol display control means, when the prior determination means is determined to be the specific determination result and the special game state is not set, the satisfaction of the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination means, In the specific dynamic display mode, one of the specific symbol combinations is dynamically displayed, and one of the symbol combinations based on the specific determination result other than the specific symbol combination is a dynamic symbol. A gaming machine O3 for displaying a special dynamic display mode combined with the displayed state.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1 or O2, after the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, the display may be performed in a symbol combination based on a specific determination result other than the specific symbol combination. Since a combination other than the specific symbol combination is also notified, there is an effect that a problem of extremely discouraging the player can be suppressed.

<Feature P group> (Mode change during suspension notice)
An acquisition unit that acquires information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and determines the information stored in the storage unit based on the establishment of a determination condition. Determining means, display means for dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determining means, and a game when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, a symbol display means stored in the storage means, and a symbol corresponding to each of the pieces of information before the determination condition is satisfied, displayed on the display means, A pre-judgment unit that executes a judgment based on the information before the judgment condition for the information stored in the storage unit is satisfied, and based on a judgment result by the pre-judgment unit A specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied, and a variable display means for changing a display mode of the symbol displayed by the symbol display means when the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the specific condition determining means. A game state determining means for determining one game state from a plurality of game states, and game information corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determining means on the display means. In the state where the display mode of the symbol is variably displayed by the game information display means to be displayed and the variable display means, the game information is changed to the game information corresponding to the different game state by the game information display means. Specific symbol display means for variably setting the display mode of the symbol to a different specific symbol display mode. Gaming machines P1 to.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a plurality of effect modes, and a mode switching effect in which a variety of effects can be provided by switching the effect modes, and a prize of a game ball to a starting winning opening. The lottery executed on the basis of a plurality of times, is configured to be able to be stored on hold, a determination is made in advance on the information stored on hold, and an effect suggesting the determination result is based on the hold storage determined in advance. There is one that executes a look-ahead continuous effect that is executed using a period until a lottery is executed (for example, JP-A-2015-16167). According to this gaming machine, when the state in which the mode switching effect can be executed and the state in which the pre-reading continuous effect can be executed overlap, by controlling the effect such that only one of the effects is executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent an unnatural feeling from being performed.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the mode switching effect and the pre-reading continuous effect are performed in an overlapped manner, the effect that the player feels uncomfortable is performed. Only the control for prohibiting the continuous execution of the prefetching continuous performance is executed, but the above-described problem is not fundamentally solved. Further, since the control that does not execute the executable effect is used, the effect is monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game early. An object of the present invention is to solve the above-described problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine P1, when the game state is switched and the displayed game information is variably displayed as the corresponding game information, the symbol display mode is variably set to a different specific symbol display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode of the symbol can be adjusted to the display mode corresponding to the game information variably displayed.

  The gaming machine P2, wherein in the gaming machine P1, the specific symbol display mode is a display mode before being changed by the variable display unit.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the specific symbol display mode is the display mode before the symbol is changed. There is an effect that control processing can be easily performed without the need to carry over.

  The gaming machine P3, further comprising: a determination control unit configured to determine whether the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determination unit based on the change to the specific symbol display mode.

  According to the gaming machine P3, since the satisfaction of the specific condition is determined again by being changed to the specific symbol display mode, an opportunity to change the symbol changed to the specific symbol display mode again can be given. effective.

  If any of the gaming machines P1 to P3 is variably displayed in the specific symbol display mode, a suggestion display mode indicating that the symbol has been changed to the specific symbol display mode is displayed at a predetermined timing. A gaming machine P4 having suggestion display means.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, a suggestion display mode indicating that the display mode has been changed to the specific symbol display mode is displayed. However, there is an effect that the trouble of being confused can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the display before being changed to the specific symbol display mode based on the determination condition of the information corresponding to the symbol displayed in the specific symbol display mode being satisfied. A gaming machine P5 having a notifying means for notifying a notification mode based on the mode.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machines P1 to P4, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the symbol displayed in the specific symbol display mode is started, the display is changed to the specific symbol display mode. Since the notification mode based on the display mode before the notification is notified, the player can recognize the original display mode changed at the start of the dynamic display, and can easily play the game. There is.

<Characteristic Q group> (Emission control of versa lighter)
A decorative member having a support portion and having at least a first protruding region protruding from the support portion and a second protruding region protruding in a direction different from the first region; moving means for moving the decorative member; A plurality of light emitting means arranged in the first projecting area and the second projecting area of the decorative member; a movement control means for controlling movement of the decoration member; and the plurality of light emitting means in accordance with movement control by the movement control means. And a light emission control means for causing the light emission means to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern, wherein the light emission control means is provided in a predetermined area of a movement area in which the decorative member is moved, in the first protruding area. A specific light emission control that controls light emission of a predetermined period unit in the predetermined area by the light emission by the light emission unit and the light emission by the light emission unit in the second protruding region can be executed. Gaming machine Q1, characterized in that it.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Further, such a conventional gaming machine is provided with a display device (sub-display device) different from a display device (main display device) for displaying a variable display of symbols, and is related to various effects displayed on the main display device. There are also displays that display auxiliary effects on the sub-display device. In addition, as a sub display device, a versa lighter or the like has been proposed in addition to a display such as a liquid crystal display device (for example, JP-A-2015-51045).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a versa lighter is used as a sub-display device, the color and resolution of an image (afterimage) to be displayed may be limited due to restrictions on a light emitting unit. That is, there is a possibility that it is difficult to suitably execute the light emission effect by the versatile lighter.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, the light-emitting means in the first protruding area and the light-emitting means in the second protruding area control the light emitting mode in a predetermined period unit in a predetermined area. There is an effect that a predetermined area can be made to emit light in various modes.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the movement control means is disposed in the first protruding area and the second protruding area corresponding to causing the predetermined area to emit light during the predetermined period. The gaming machine Q2, wherein the gaming machine Q2 executes movement control such that the light emitting means is moved to the predetermined area.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine Q1, the light emitting means arranged in the first projecting area and the light emitting means arranged in the second projecting area are moved during the predetermined period, A predetermined area can be made to emit light in a light emitting mode by each light emitting means.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in the predetermined period, when the light emitting means of the first protruding area or the light emitting means of the second protruding area is moved while emitting light in the predetermined area, an afterimage is continuously displayed. Gaming machine Q3, characterized in that it is a period during which it is possible to do so.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the movement control means moves the decorative member in a predetermined movement range in a predetermined constant movement pattern as one cycle, and repeatedly executes the movement pattern for a predetermined period. A gaming machine Q4.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, there is an effect that light can be easily and continuously emitted when a predetermined area is made to emit light.

  In the gaming machine Q4, a cycle in which the decoration member moves in the movement pattern in the one cycle by the movement control means is a period shorter than a period corresponding to a time resolution of human eyes. Q5.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine Q4, since the light emission of the light emitting means is recognized as an afterimage by a person, it is possible to emit light in various light emission modes.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting units arranged in the first projecting region and the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting units arranged in the second projecting region may be different. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by being capable of emitting light.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, there is an effect that a light emission mode displayed in a predetermined area can be configured to be seen in various emission colors.

<Character R group>
Display means for displaying the effect mode of the game, effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode to be displayed on the display means, and an advantage for the player when the specific effect mode is displayed on the display means. In the gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game, a notification effect for executing a notification effect for notifying a player of game information during a period in which the effect mode is displayed on the display means. Means, and a movable effect execution means capable of executing a movable effect that prevents visual recognition of the effect mode on the front side of the display area of the display means, and the movable effect executed by the movable effect execution means includes: A gaming machine R1 which is executed so as not to overlap with the period in which the notification effect is executed.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a plurality of display devices, which are configured to be able to perform various display effects by partially moving the display devices. Specifically, another display device is moved in front of one display device, and a composite display effect is performed on a plurality of display devices (for example, Japanese Patent Application No. 2007-185256).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when some of the display devices move, the display content of the rear display device may be obstructed by the front display device. That is, there is a possibility that a problem may occur that the display content of the display device cannot be normally visually recognized.

  According to the gaming machine R1, since the movable effect is executed so that the movable effect and the notification effect do not overlap, it is possible to suppress a problem that the notification effect is hindered by the movable effect and the player cannot be notified properly. Therefore, there is an effect that a malfunction of the game can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine R1, based on the timing means capable of timing even when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the acquiring means capable of acquiring the timing data measured by the timing means, and the timing data acquired by the acquiring means. A restriction determining means for determining whether a restriction condition for restricting the execution of the movable effect is satisfied, and, if the restriction condition is determined to be satisfied by the restriction determination means, the movable effect execution means A gaming machine R2 comprising: a regulation unit that regulates execution of a movable effect.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, the execution of the movable effect is regulated based on the bulletin data acquired from the timing means, so that the regulation conditions such as the number of executions for each time zone are set. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable production from being performed excessively and to prevent a problem from occurring in the movable production.

  In the gaming machine R2, the regulation condition is that the upper limit number of the movable effects is set at regular intervals.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, the upper limit number of times for each fixed period is set in the regulation condition, so that the specific effect is excessively executed and the effect is prevented from being biased. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine R4 according to any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, wherein the notification effect displays at least a notification effect display mode on the display unit.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machines R1 to R3, the notification effect display mode is displayed on the display means as the notification effect, so that the player can visually recognize the same position as when visually recognizing the movable effect. And the player can easily play the game.

<Characteristic S group> (Mirror inside)
A decorative member having a support portion and having a protruding region protruding from the support portion; a plurality of light emitting means capable of irradiating the support portion toward the protruding region; and controlling the plurality of light emitting devices respectively. The decorative member corresponds to the plurality of light emitting units capable of guiding the irradiation light of each of the plurality of light emitting units disposed on the support portion to the protruding region. A gaming machine S1 in which a plurality of taxiways are formed, and the projecting region has a plurality of irradiating portions for irradiating irradiation light guided from the respective taxiways to a front side.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Further, such a conventional gaming machine is provided with a display device (sub-display device) different from a display device (main display device) for displaying a variable display of symbols, and is related to various effects displayed on the main display device. There are also displays that display auxiliary effects on the sub-display device. In addition, as a sub display device, a versa lighter or the like has been proposed in addition to a display such as a liquid crystal display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-51045). Here, a general versa lighter rotates a rod-shaped member including a plurality of LEDs, and switches a light emitting state of each LED according to a rotation position, thereby forming a predetermined image from a locus of light of each LED. An afterimage can be displayed.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, every time an effect using a versa writer is performed, it is necessary to continuously rotate an elongated rod-shaped member in which a large number of LEDs are arranged, so that heat generation of the LEDs and centrifugal There is a problem that a failure easily occurs due to the action of force or the like.

  According to the gaming machine S1, a plurality of irradiating portions on the projecting region can emit light by emitting the irradiating light from the supporting portion to the projecting region. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the size and to reduce the load on the support portion.

  In the gaming machine S1, the gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the plurality of irradiation units are arranged such that adjacent irradiation units are arranged close to each other.

  According to the gaming machine S2, since the plurality of irradiation units are arranged adjacent to each other, there is an effect that various display modes can be formed by combining the light emission modes of the plurality of irradiation units.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, at least one of the plurality of irradiating units is provided with a light-emitting display unit that emits light so that a predetermined symbol can be visually recognized. S3.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, a predetermined symbol can be visually recognized by emitting light, so that a novel display effect can be executed for the player.

  In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, a moving means for moving the decorative portion within a predetermined moving range, and a moving control means for executing a moving control for moving the decorative member in a predetermined moving pattern by the moving means. And the light emission control means controls light emission in a light emission pattern corresponding to the movement pattern.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, since the decorative member is moved and the light emitting means is controlled to emit light in accordance with the movement pattern, various effects can be provided to the player. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine S4, the movement control means repeatedly moves the decorative member in a period shorter than the time resolution of human eyes, with the predetermined movement pattern as one cycle. .

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine S4, when the light emitting means emits light while the decorative member is being moved, the light emission by the decorative member moved in the next one cycle with the residual image remaining. Is executed, there is an effect that various display modes can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic T group> (Tracks the game ball and uses it for production)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the game area, a ball-in means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a game ball being entered in the ball-in means. Determining means for performing a determination, a performance performing means for performing a performance based on the determination result by the determining means, and when a performance based on the specific determination result is performed by the performance performing means, the player In a gaming machine having an award game executing means for executing an advantageous award game, an image information obtaining means capable of obtaining image information of a game ball at a plurality of obtaining positions in a game area, and the image information obtaining means Display means for displaying a game ball display mode based on the acquired image information, and display control means for displaying the game ball display mode on the display means; When a condition is satisfied, the gaming machine wherein said at the demonstration execution unit that displays the game balls display mode in a period in which the presentation is being executed T1.

  Here, a pachinko machine or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In such a gaming machine, a game area in which the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side of the game board on which the game balls can flow, and an entrance or the like through which the game balls can enter is provided in the game area, By entering a game ball into the entrance, a bonus such as paying out a prize ball to a player or establishing a lottery condition and executing a lottery to determine whether or not a privilege game is started is provided. A known configuration is known. In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a normal electric accessory, a variable device, and the like for changing a ball entrance into a state where a game ball easily enters and a state where it is difficult to enter the ball are arranged. As such a gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a device such as a camera is provided in a game area to capture an image of a ball entrance and the like, and the image is displayed on a liquid crystal display device (for example, Patent Literature: JP-A-2012-284). Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, there is a demand for a further improvement in interest. The present technical configuration has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine T1, the display control unit displays the game ball display mode based on the image information acquired by the image information acquisition unit at a plurality of acquisition positions in the game area. When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means causes the display means to display the game ball display mode during the period in which the effect is being executed by the effect executing means. Thereby, the player can recognize that the specific condition has been satisfied by displaying the game ball display mode. Therefore, by displaying the image information of the game balls at the plurality of acquisition positions where the flow-down mode changes according to the actual game during the period in which the effect is performed as the game ball display mode, it is possible to give the player a fresh taste. . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Here, since the image of the game ball that actually flows is acquired at a plurality of acquisition positions, it is possible to display the image of the game ball that tracks the game ball, so that the player can use the actual game ball effectively. There is also an effect that a simple production can be provided.

  In the gaming machine T1, the display control means sets display data based on the image information at an acquisition position corresponding to a predetermined display position of the image information obtained by acquiring the game ball display mode according to one game ball. A gaming machine T2 characterized in that the game machine T2 is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1, the display data is displayed so that a game ball display mode for displaying image information obtained according to one game ball at a predetermined display position of the display means is displayed. Is set, it is possible to show a player a game ball display mode that tracks one game ball, and to provide an effect that gives the player an interest in how the one game ball flows down. There is an effect that can be.

  Updating means for repeatedly updating a determination value in a predetermined range in the gaming machine T1 or T2; determination value obtaining means for obtaining a determination value from the updating means based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means; Wherein the determination unit determines the specific determination result when the determination value obtained by the determination value obtaining unit is a specific determination value, and one of the plurality of acquisition positions Is set to a ball entry position that is a position where the image information of a game ball entering the ball entry means can be acquired, and the display control means displays the game ball display mode. The game ball display mode using the image information acquired at the entry ball acquisition position is used to display the entry to the entry means that has triggered the execution of the effect being executed when the entry is made. A gaming machine T characterized by the following: .

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the ball entered the ball entry means that triggers the determination to be performed for the effect executed when the specific condition is satisfied. Since the game ball display mode based on the game ball is displayed, it is possible to notify the player of the display mode at the time when the determination value at which the determination is performed is obtained, and to enhance the interest in the display result of the effect. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, when image information of a game ball is acquired by the image information acquisition means at the acquisition position on the upstream side among the plurality of acquisition positions, the game ball is placed on the downstream side. Follow-up control means for controlling the image information of the game ball at the acquisition position to be obtainable by the image information acquisition means; and storing the image information acquired by the image information acquisition means controlled by the follow-up control means so as to be identifiable. A gaming machine T4 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the image information flowing down by one gaming ball is acquired by the tracking control means at the acquisition positions on the upstream side and the downstream side. Since the image information is controlled and the image information is stored in the storage means in an identifiable manner, there is an effect that the image information obtained by tracking one game ball can be more easily obtained and stored in an easily understandable manner.

  In the gaming machine T4, when the image information acquisition unit acquires the image information of the game ball, the acquired time information is stored in the storage unit in an identifiable manner. A gaming machine T5 for determining whether it is the image information corresponding to one gaming ball based on information time information.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T4, based on the time information at which the image information of the gaming ball was acquired by the image information acquiring means, whether the image information of one gaming ball was obtained by the tracking control means. Is determined, the downflow of one game ball can be determined in consideration of the actual downflow speed, and there is an effect that the downflow of one game ball can be identified more reliably.

<Characteristic U group> (Gaming ball tracking)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the game area, a ball-in means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a game ball being entered in the ball-in means. Determining means for performing a determination, a performance performing means for performing a performance based on the determination result by the determining means, and when a performance based on the specific determination result is performed by the performance performing means, the player In a gaming machine having an award game executing means for executing an advantageous award game, an image information obtaining means capable of obtaining image information of a game ball at a plurality of obtaining positions in a game area, and the image information obtaining means A game system comprising: display means for displaying a game ball display mode based on the acquired image information; and display control means for displaying the game ball display mode on the display means. Machine U1.

  Here, a pachinko machine or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In such a gaming machine, a game area in which the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side of the game board on which the game balls can flow, and an entrance or the like through which the game balls can enter is provided in the game area, When a game ball enters the entrance, a bonus such as paying out a prize ball to a player, establishing a lottery condition, and executing a lottery to determine whether or not a privilege game is started is provided. A known configuration is known. In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a normal electric accessory, a variable device, and the like for changing a ball entrance into a state where a game ball easily enters and a state where it is difficult to enter the ball are arranged. As such a gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a device such as a camera is provided in a game area to capture an image of a ball entrance and the like, and the image is displayed on a liquid crystal display device (for example, Patent Literature: JP-A-2012-284). Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, there is a demand for a further improvement in interest. The present technical configuration has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine U1, the display control means displays the game ball display mode based on the image information obtained by the image information obtaining means at a plurality of obtaining positions in the game area. Thereby, in addition to the effect performed by the effect executing means, the game ball display mode is also displayed, so that the player can enjoy the game even during the period in which the effect is not executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Here, since the image of the game ball that actually flows is acquired at a plurality of acquisition positions, it is possible to display the image of the game ball that tracks the game ball, so that the player can use the actual game ball effectively. There is also an effect that a simple production can be provided.

  In the gaming machine U1, the display control means sets display data based on the image information at an acquisition position corresponding to a predetermined display position of the image information obtained by acquiring the game ball display mode according to one game ball. A gaming machine U2 characterized in that the game machine U2 is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U1, the display data is displayed in such a manner that a game ball display mode for displaying image information acquired according to one game ball at a predetermined display position of the display means is displayed. Is set, it is possible to show a player a game ball display mode that tracks one game ball, and to provide an effect that gives the player an interest in how the one game ball flows down. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic V group> (Goto detection with camera)
The game medium has a passage port through which the game medium can pass, and guide means for guiding the game medium passing through the passage port, detection means for detecting the game medium guided by the guide means, and the detection means When a game medium is detected, a game value providing means for giving a game value relating to a game to a player, an image information obtaining means capable of obtaining image information including the passage, and an image information obtaining means for obtaining the image information. Image information discriminating means for discriminating the performed image information, and abnormality notifying means for executing an abnormality notifying process for notifying an abnormality when the discrimination result by the image information discriminating means is a specific discrimination result. A gaming machine V1 characterized by the following.

  Here, pachinko machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In such a gaming machine, a game area in which the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side of the game board on which the game balls can flow, and an entrance or the like through which the game balls can enter is provided in the game area, By entering a game ball into the entrance, a bonus such as paying out a prize ball to a player or establishing a lottery condition and executing a lottery to determine whether or not a privilege game is started is provided. A known configuration is known. In such a gaming machine, it is easy to enter the ball by giving an external vibration so that the game ball can easily enter the entrance, or even if the game ball does not enter, It has been known that an illegal operation is performed in which a radio wave such as a sensor is output to cause a detecting means such as a sensor to perform an abnormal operation to detect a game ball and malfunction. As one of means for preventing such fraud, a configuration has been proposed in which a device capable of acquiring image information such as a camera without using a vibration detection sensor or a magnetic detection sensor is provided, and fraud is detected by the acquired image. ing. (For example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-5191). Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, it is required to further reduce various damages by using image information to prevent various damages. This technical configuration has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can reduce damage caused by fraud.

  According to the gaming machine V1, image information including a passport to which a game value relating to the game is given when the game medium passes is obtained by the image information obtaining means, and the obtained image information is obtained by the image information determining means. Is determined. When the determination result by the image information determining means is a specific determination result, an abnormality notification process of notifying an abnormality is performed, so that it is possible to early detect an illegality in which a game value is improperly given to a player. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  Further, by judging the abnormality based on the image information, it is possible to detect not a fraudulent radio wave or the like but a fraudulent or the like that makes it easy for the game medium to pass through the passage opening with a piano wire or the like.

  In the gaming machine V1, a variable member that is changed into a first state in which the game medium can pass through the passage opening and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to pass than the first state, and the variable member is the second member. Variable control means for changing from a state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the image information obtaining means is capable of obtaining image information including the variable member, and wherein the image information determining means Is a game machine V2 capable of determining at least the state of the variable member based on the image information.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V1, the image information including the variable member is obtained, and the image information determining unit can determine the state of the variable member from the obtained image information. There is an effect that it is possible to early detect a fraudulently changing a member to the first state.

  In the gaming machine V2, at least a part of the portion of the variable member that can be acquired by the image information acquiring means when the variable member is changed to the first state is the image when the variable member is in the second state. The image information discriminating unit is configured to execute at least a binarization process based on the image information acquired by the image information acquiring unit. The gaming machine V3 is configured to be able to determine that the variable member is in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V2, it is possible to easily determine that the variable member is in the first state by the binarization process, so that the image information can be easily determined. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine V2 or V3, the game machine V2 or V3 has a determination unit that performs a determination based on the determination condition being satisfied, and the variable control unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. The gaming machine V4, wherein the variable member is changed from the second state to the first state until the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V2 or V3, there is an effect that the timing of setting the variable member to the first state can be made random.

  In the gaming machine V4, the image information determining means determines the specific state when the variable member determines from the image information that the variable member is in the first state during a period in which the variable member is not changed to the first state. A gaming machine V5 characterized by at least discriminating a discrimination result.

  According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V4, there is an effect that the timing of discriminating a specific discrimination result is limited to a state in which a fraud is performed, and the fraud can be accurately detected.

  In the gaming machine V4 or V5, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection unit detecting a predetermined number of the game media, and the image information determination unit determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied even after the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine V6, wherein when the detecting means detects a game medium, the determination is performed based on the image information.

  According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V4 or V5, even after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the image information determining means performs the determination only when the detecting means detects the game medium, There is an effect that the load of executing the control for performing the determination during the period when the game medium is normal even when the game medium is detected can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines V1 to V6, the image information determining means is capable of determining the game medium from the image information, based on the detection of the game medium by the detecting means. A game machine V7 for determining the game medium that has passed through the passage from the image information obtained by the image information obtaining means up to a predetermined period before.

  According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V6, when the game medium is detected, it is determined from the image information whether or not the game medium is actually detected by passing through the passage opening. This has the effect that fraud can be detected early.

  In the gaming machine V7, the image information discriminating means is configured to execute the abnormality notification processing when the detecting means determines that the game medium has been detected even though the game medium has not passed through the passage opening from the image information. A gaming machine V8.

  According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine V7, there is an effect that even if the game medium has not passed through, it is possible to detect fraudulent detection of the game medium at an early stage.

<Characteristic W group> (Performed with images obtained during replay effects during the jackpot round)
Determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition; effect performing means for performing an effect based on the determination result of the determining means; and identification performed by the effect executing means based on the specific determination result A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the effect is executed, and an image capable of acquiring image information of the player or a part relating to the game in a period until the privilege game is executed Information acquisition means, storage means for storing the image information acquired by the image information acquisition means, display means for displaying a bonus game display mode during the period in which the bonus game is executed, When executed, display data for acquiring the image information stored in the storage means and generating display data corresponding to the privilege game display mode based on the acquired image information. Gaming machine W1, characterized in that those having a data generating means.

  Here, a pachinko machine or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In such a gaming machine, a game area in which the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side of the game board on which the game balls can flow, and an entrance or the like through which the game balls can enter is provided in the game area, When a game ball enters the entrance, a bonus such as paying out a prize ball to a player, establishing a lottery condition, and executing a lottery to determine whether or not a privilege game is started is provided. A known configuration is known. In such a gaming machine, the result of the lottery is configured to be notified by performing an effect of dynamically displaying symbols and the like on the display device. By capturing and displaying the image of the game ball with a camera or the like and displaying it, it is suggested that the player can easily see the state of the game ball entering the entrance and the movement of the game ball at important points related to the game to the player. (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2003-71110). Here, in the gaming machine exemplified above, it is required to further enhance the interest of the player by using the image information of the game balls flowing down the game area and the like. This technical configuration has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine W1, the bonus game display mode displayed during the period in which the bonus game is executed is based on the image information of the part relating to the player or the gaming machine acquired during the period until the bonus game is executed. Since the display data is formed, the player can look back on the progress until the bonus game is executed during the bonus game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired even during the execution of the bonus game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine W1, the effect performed by the effect executing means includes an effect display mode displayed on the display means, and the display data generating means includes a display corresponding to the executed specific effect. A gaming machine W2 for generating display data of the privilege game display mode using the image information stored in the storage means for display data of the effect display mode.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W1, the specific game display mode is displayed using the image information acquired in the specific effect informed that the privilege game is to be executed, so that the execution is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to newly entertain the specific performance.

  In the gaming machine W2, the display data generating means replaces display data for displaying a predetermined specific display mode with a display mode based on the image information among the effect display modes corresponding to the specific effect. A gaming machine W3 that is generated.

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W2, even if the specific effect is executed once, the display data is generated by replacing the display mode with the display mode based on the image information. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, when the display data generating unit determines that a predetermined generation condition is satisfied based on the acquired image information, the display data generating unit performs a process based on the acquired image information. A gaming machine W4 for generating the display data.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, when the generation condition is not satisfied based on the acquired image information, the display data based on the image information is not generated. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the display mode based on the image information for which the generation condition is not satisfied is displayed.

  In the gaming machine W4, when the display data generation unit determines that the generation condition is not satisfied, the display data generation unit generates the display data without using the acquired image information. Gaming machine W5.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W4, even when the generation condition is not satisfied, display data that does not use image information is generated. There is an effect that reduction can be suppressed.

<Character X group> (performed with images obtained from large replay effects)
Determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition; effect performing means for performing an effect based on the determination result of the determining means; and identification performed by the effect executing means based on the specific determination result A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the effect is executed, an image information acquisition unit that can acquire image information of a player or a part related to the game, and the image information acquisition unit. Storage means for storing the obtained image information; display means for displaying a specific display mode when the specific condition is satisfied; and obtaining the image information stored in the storage means for the specific display A display data generation unit that generates display data corresponding to the mode based on the acquired image information.

  Here, pachinko machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In such a gaming machine, a game area in which the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side of the game board on which the game balls can flow, and an entrance or the like through which the game balls can enter is provided in the game area, By entering a game ball into the entrance, a bonus such as paying out a prize ball to a player or establishing a lottery condition and executing a lottery to determine whether or not a privilege game is started is provided. A known configuration is known. In such a gaming machine, the result of the lottery is configured to be notified by performing an effect of dynamically displaying symbols and the like on the display device. By capturing and displaying the image of the game ball with a camera or the like and displaying it, it is suggested that the player can easily see the state of the game ball entering the entrance and the movement of the game ball at important points related to the game to the player. (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2003-71110). Here, in the gaming machine exemplified above, it is required to further enhance the interest of the player by using the image information of the game balls flowing down the game area and the like. This technical configuration has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine X1, a determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, a performance performing means for performing a performance based on the determination result of the determining means, and the determination result specified by the performance performing means A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when a specific effect performed based on is performed, and an image information acquisition means capable of acquiring image information of a player or a part relating to the game. Storage means for storing the image information obtained by the image information obtaining means, display means for displaying a specific display mode when the specific condition is satisfied, and the image information stored in the storage means And display data generating means for generating display data corresponding to the specific display mode based on the obtained image information. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine X1, when the bonus game is executed, a game ball can enter the ball entrance, a specific area in which the game ball entered the ball entrance can enter, and the specific area. And a privilege granting unit that grants a benefit advantageous to the player based on the game ball having entered, wherein the image information obtaining unit enters the specific area after entering the entrance. A gaming machine X2 capable of acquiring the image information of a game ball to be played.

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X1, the game ball display mode based on the image information in which the game ball that has entered the entrance and enters the specific area is displayed. However, there is an effect that it is possible to easily inform even those which are difficult to visually recognize directly.

  In the gaming machine X2, the award provided by the award providing means sets the probability of being determined to be the specific determination result by the determining means high until an end condition is satisfied. X3.

  According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X2, the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by entering a specific area is set to be high, so that the specific determination result is continuously obtained for a short period of time. There is an effect that the judgment can be made easily and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Y group> (Used for the production using launched game balls)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the game area, a ball-in means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a game ball being entered in the ball-in means. Determining means for performing a determination, a performance performing means for performing a performance based on the determination result by the determining means, and when a performance based on the specific determination result is performed by the performance performing means, the player A bonus game executing means for executing an advantageous privilege game, and a game machine having: an image information acquiring means for acquiring image information of a game ball fired from the firing means, wherein the effect executing means, A gaming machine for executing a game ball effect based on image information of the game ball acquired by the image information acquisition means as a part of the effect to be executed when a specific condition is satisfied. Y1

  Here, pachinko machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In such a gaming machine, a game area in which the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side of the game board on which the game balls can flow, and an entrance or the like through which the game balls can enter is provided in the game area, By entering a game ball into the entrance, a bonus such as paying out a prize ball to a player or establishing a lottery condition and executing a lottery to determine whether or not a privilege game is started is provided. A known configuration is known. In such a gaming machine, the result of the lottery is configured to be notified by performing an effect of dynamically displaying symbols and the like on the display device. By capturing and displaying the image of the game ball with a camera or the like and displaying it, it is suggested that the player can easily see the state of the game ball entering the entrance and the movement of the game ball at important points related to the game to the player. (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2003-71110). Here, in the gaming machine exemplified above, it is required to further enhance the interest of the player by using the image information of the game balls flowing down the game area and the like. This technical configuration has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, when the specific condition is satisfied during the period in which the effect for notifying whether or not the bonus game is executed, the game ball effect based on the image information of the game ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize by the game ball effect based on the image information of the game ball that actually flows that the specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Y1, the gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the specific condition is set to be easily established when an effect based on the specific determination result is executed.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y1, since the specific condition is set to be easily established when an effect based on the specific determination result is executed, the game ball effect is executed. Thus, there is an effect that the player can expect the specific determination result.

  In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the image information acquiring unit is configured to convert image information of a game ball fired by the firing unit at least at a first position of the game area and a second position downstream of the first position. The effect execution means is based on the image information acquired at the first position and the second position when a special specific condition is satisfied among the specific conditions. A gaming machine Y3 for performing a game ball effect.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the fact that the special specific condition is satisfied is achieved by executing the gaming ball effect based on the image information acquired at the second position. This has the effect that the person can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine Y3, when the special specific condition is satisfied, the effect execution means executes the game ball effect based on the image information acquired at the first position, and then executes the second position A gaming machine Y4 for executing the gaming ball effect based on the image information acquired in the step (a).

  According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y3, the fact that the special specific condition is satisfied indicates that the game ball effect is executed based on the image information acquired at the second position, and that the player Since it can be recognized, even after the game ball effect based on the image information acquired at the first position is executed, it is possible to play a game in expectation of the game ball effect acquired at the second position being executed. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine Y3 or Y4, a passing area through which a game ball fired from the firing means always passes is formed in the game area, and the first position is an image information of the game ball passing through the passing section. Wherein the second position is a position at which image information of the game ball can be acquired when the game ball that has passed through the passage portion flows down a specific flow path. Gaming machine Y5.

  According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y3 or Y4, the image information is acquired at the second position that is less likely to be able to acquire the image information of the gaming ball than the first position. It is possible to play a game by expecting a game ball to flow down the flow path, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side of a game board in which the game ball can flow down, and an entrance port or the like in which the game ball can enter is provided in the game area. When a game ball enters the entrance, a bonus such as paying out a prize ball to a player, establishing a lottery condition, and executing a lottery to determine whether or not a privilege game is started is granted. A known configuration is known. In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a normal electric accessory, a variable device, and the like for changing a ball entrance into a state where a game ball easily enters and a state where it is difficult to enter the ball are arranged. As such a gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which a device such as a camera is provided in a game area to capture an image of a ball entrance and the like, and the image is displayed on a liquid crystal display device (for example, Patent Reference 1: JP 2012-284 A).
However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the game area, and a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. Determining means for executing a determination based on a game ball having entered the entering means, an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the determination result by the determining means, and a specific A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when an effect based on the determination result is executed, wherein the image of the game ball at a plurality of acquisition positions in the game area Image information obtaining means capable of obtaining information; display means for displaying a game ball display mode based on the image information obtained by the image information obtaining means; and displaying the game ball display mode on the display means Display system A means, wherein the display control means, when a specific condition is satisfied, in which displays the game balls display mode in a period in which the presentation is being executed by the presentation execution section.
The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the display control unit corresponds to a predetermined display position of the image information obtained by acquiring the game ball display mode according to one game ball. The display data based on the image information of the acquisition position to be set is set and displayed.
The gaming machine according to the third technical concept is based on the gaming machine described in the first technical concept or the second technical concept, based on updating means for repeatedly updating a determination value in a predetermined range, and when a game ball enters the ball entry unit. A determination value obtaining unit that obtains a determination value from the updating unit, wherein the determination unit determines the specific determination result when the determination value obtained by the determination value obtaining unit is a specific determination value. One of the plurality of acquisition positions is set to an entry ball acquisition position which is a position where the image information of a game ball entering the entry means can be acquired. The display control means is configured to obtain an image of the ball entered into the ball entry means at the ball entry position, which is a trigger for the effect being executed when the game ball display mode is displayed; Displaying the game ball display mode using information. It is intended.
The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein, among the plurality of acquisition positions, the image information of the game ball at the upstream acquisition position is the image information acquisition means. A tracking control means for controlling the image information of the game ball to be obtainable by the image information obtaining means at the acquisition position on the downstream side, and Storage means for storing the image information acquired by the information acquisition means in an identifiable manner.
The gaming machine according to the technical concept 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical concept 4, wherein the image information acquiring unit acquires the time information when the image information of the game ball is acquired. The tracking control means determines whether or not the image information corresponds to one game ball based on time information of the image information.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a launching means capable of firing a game ball toward the game area, a ball-in means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and the ball-in A determining means for performing a determination based on a game ball having entered the means, an effect executing means for executing an effect based on a result of the determination by the determining means, and A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the effect is executed, and it is possible to acquire image information of the game ball at a plurality of acquisition positions in the game area Image information obtaining means, display means for displaying a game ball display mode based on the image information obtained by the image information obtaining means, and display control means for displaying the game ball display mode on the display means. , With , Wherein the display control unit, when a specific condition is satisfied, in which displays the game balls display mode in a period in which the presentation is being executed by the presentation execution section.
Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. That is, the display control means sets the display information based on the image information of the acquisition position corresponding to the predetermined display position and displays the image information acquired in accordance with one game ball in the game ball display mode. Things.
Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2. That is, an update unit that repeatedly updates a determination value in a predetermined range, and a determination value acquisition unit that acquires a determination value from the update unit based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit, The determination means determines the specific determination result when the determination value obtained by the determination value obtaining means is a specific determination value. One of the plurality of acquisition positions includes the input value. It is set to a ball entry position which is a position at which the image information of the game ball entering the ball means can be acquired, and the display control means executes when the game ball display mode is displayed. And displaying the game ball display mode using the image information acquired at the ball entry position at which the entry to the entry means, which triggered the execution of the effect, has been performed.
Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 4 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3. That is, when the image information of the game ball is acquired by the image information acquiring means at the acquisition position on the upstream side among the plurality of acquisition positions, the image of the game ball is acquired at the acquisition position on the downstream side. A tracking control unit that controls information to be obtainable by the image information obtaining unit; and a storage unit that is controlled by the tracking control unit and stores the image information obtained by the image information obtaining unit in an identifiable manner. Things.
As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 5 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4. That is, when the image information obtaining means obtains the image information of the game ball, the obtained time information is stored in the storage means so as to be identifiable. It is determined whether or not the image information corresponds to one game ball based on the information.
As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
112a Ball launching unit (firing means)
64 1st entrance (ball entry means )
81 3rd symbol display device (display means )
114 display control device (display control means)
233zq periodic first image storage area (storage means)
1700e First entrance camera (image information acquisition means)
S11004 jackpot control processing 5 ( bonus game execution means )
S10103 updating means
S10303 to S10305 determination means
S10406 determination value acquisition means
S11902 effect execution means

Claims (2)

Launching means capable of launching a game ball toward the game area,
Ball entry means into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
Updating means for repeatedly updating the determination value in a predetermined range;
On the basis that the game ball to the ball entrance unit has ball entrance, the determination value acquisition means for acquiring the judgment value,
And determine by means executes the discrimination based on the acquired determination value, it is determined that a particular judgment result when the judgment value is a specific determination value by the determination value obtaining means,
Based on that determine different results due to the determine by means becomes the specific determination result, the effect execution means for executing a specific effect,
When the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, a bonus game executing means for executing an award game advantageous to the player,
In the game area , an image information acquisition unit that is installed at a position where image information of a game ball entering the ball entry unit can be acquired, and that can acquire image information of the game ball every predetermined period ,
Display means for displaying a game ball display mode based on the image information obtained by the image information obtaining means,
Display control means for displaying the game ball display mode on the display means,
The image information acquired by the image information acquisition means, storage means is stored so that the acquired time information can be identified ,
Wherein the display control unit, the pre-Symbol demonstration execution unit during a period in which the specific effect is running state, and are not for displaying the game balls display mode,
The game ball display mode, from among the image information stored in the storage means, from a predetermined period before the timing of the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means that triggered the execution of the specific effect, An image corresponding to a plurality of the image information acquired in the first period up to the timing of entering the ball, which is displayed in a manner to be continuously displayed over a second period longer than the first period. And
The display control means,
A dynamic display mode in which, during the period in which the game ball display mode is displayed, after a plurality of numbers are dynamically displayed in one direction, one of the plurality of numbers is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position; And a suggestion display mode that indicates that the number 1 is a number corresponding to the specific determination value.
In the game ball display mode, when the image corresponding to the image information acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry means is displayed, and in the dynamic display mode, the number 1 is predetermined. gaming machine, wherein the timing is stopped and displayed, a der Rukoto which displays by matching the on position. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein said display means comprises a liquid crystal display.

Images